Storm Drainage Networks Design Vol

Drainage Criteria Manual
(Volume 3)
Updated September 1, 1999

(Latest Revision – April 2008)
Urban Drainage and Flood Control District

2480 W. 26th Avenue, Suite 156B
Denver, CO 80211, USA
www.udfcd.org
URBAN
STORM
DRAINAGE
CRITERIA MANUAL
volumes3 1- best
volume and management
2 practices

Denver, Colorado September,
June, 1999
2001
Latest Revision: April 2008
SUMMARY OF CHANGES TO VOLUME 3
of the
URBAN STORM DRAINAGE CRITERIA MANUAL
and
DISCLAIMER
1992 Edition
GENERAL
• First version of Volume 3 of this Manual.
• Published in advance of Phase 1 municipalities in the Denver Metropolitan Area submitting their
stormwater discharge permit applications.
• Some chapters were not yet fully developed.
1999 Edition
ENTIRE MANUAL
• Complete update and rewrite of the 1992 edition.
• All chapters edited; some totally rewritten.
• Completed the development of missing and partially completed chapters.
• Excel Workbook developed to assist users with implementing design recommendations.
2002-06 Update to 1999 Edition

STRUCTURAL BMPs CHAPTER
• Updated recommendations on the design of many structural BMPs.
• Many updates for BMPs using infiltration and filtration processes.
• Excel Workbook updated accordingly.

• Added a number of porous pavement designs.
TYPICAL STRUCTURAL BMPs & SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER
• Added sample specification for porous concrete and aggregate turf pavements.

• Modified many earlier recommendations for the design of porous pavements, porous pavement
detention, porous landscape detention, sand filter basins, and extended detention basins.
¾ Changes made to provide more economical cross-sections and sizing of these BMPs.
¾ Driven by field observations of facilities and user feedback.
STORMWATER QUALITY CHAPTER
• Provided BMP effluent quality from the analysis of data from approximately 200 BMP sites in USA
and Canada reported in the International BMP Database.
BMP PLANNING CHAPTER
• Improved guidance on the selection of structural BMPs.

PREFACE
2008-04 Summary of Changes to Volume 3 and DISCLAIMER

• Removed “History of Changes” from this chapter. Moved it to its own section titled “Summary of
Changes to Volume 3 and DISCLAIMER.
• Changed recommendations on the use of geotextile materials for porous pavement, porous pavement
detention, porous landscape detention and sand filter BMPs.
• Added recommendations for vegetating porous landscape detention BMP.
MAINTENANCE RECOMMENDATIONS CHAPTER
• Revised some of the maintenance recommendations.
June 2007 Corrections of the 1999 Edition’s 2007-01 Update

STRUCTURAL BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES CHAPTER
• Corrected equations on Figures CWB-3 and RP-3 for perforation sizing. (2007-06)
• Corrected Sect 3.5.2 to take out goetexitle for RGP. (2007-10)
October 2007 Corrections of the 1999 Edition’s 2007-01 Update

CONSTRUCTION BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES CHAPTER
• Entire chapter rewritten, new figures, photographs (2007-10)
APPENDIX
• Appendix B – Example removed as it is no longer consistent with rewritten chapter (2007-10)
November 2007 Corrections of the 1999 Edition’s 2007-01 Update

• Corrected Figure PP-1 and page 21, modifying the interim recommendations for effective
imperviousness of porous pavements.
April 2008 Corrections of the 1999 Edition’s 2007-01 Update

• Revised Section 3.5.3 to prohibit phosphorous-based admixtures in PCPs.
• Revised Section 6.5, Item 6 to require concrete lined or grouted boulder hardened bottom for
micro-pools of Extended Detention Basins and revised Figure EDB-1 to show concrete-lined
bottom for micro-pools.
TYPICAL STRUCTURAL BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES DETAILS AND SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER
• Revised page SD-24, Materials, of the Portland Cement Pervious Pavement Technical
Specifications to prohibit phosphorous-based admixtures in PCPs.
• Revised Section 6.5, Item 6 to require concrete lined or grouted boulder hardened bottom for
micro-pools of Extended Detention Basins and revised Figure EDB-1 to show concrete-lined
bottom for micro-pools.
Summary of Changes to Volume 3 and DISCLAIMER 2008-04

DISCLAIMER
ATTENTION TO PERSONS USING THE URBAN STORM DRAINAGE CRITERIA MANUAL, ITS
DESIGN FORM SPREADSHEETS, AutoCAD DETAILS AND RELATED SOFTWARE AND
PRODUCTS
The Urban Strom Drainage Criteria Manual, its Design Form Worksheets, related spreadsheets
containing Visual Basic macros, related software, all AutoCAD™ Details and all related products of the
Urban Drainage and Flood Control District, Colorado, have been developed using a high standard of
care, including professional review for identification of errors, bugs, and other problems related to the
software. However, as with any release of publications, details and software driven products, it is likely
that some nonconformities, defects, bugs, and errors with the software program, AutoCAD Details and
other products associated with the Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual will be discovered. The
developers of these products welcome user feedback in helping to identify them so that improvements
can be made to future releases of the Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual and all related Design Form
Worksheets, Spreadsheets, AutoCAD Details, Software and other products.
The Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual and all related Design Form Worksheets, Spreadsheets,
AutoCAD Details, Software and other products are intended to assist and streamline the preliminary
design and design process of drainage facilities. The AutoCAD Details are intended to show design
concepts. Preparation of final design plans, addressing details of structural adequacy, public safety,
hydraulic functionality, maintainability, and aesthetics, remain the sole responsibility of the designer.
BY THE USE OF THE URBAN STORM DRAINAGE CRITERIA MANUAL INSTALLATION AND/OR
RELATED DESIGN FORM WORKSHEETS, SPREADSHEETS, AutoCAD DETAILS, SOFTWARE AND
ALL OTHER RELATED PRODUCTS THE USER AGREES TO THE FOLLOWING:
NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, in no event shall the Urban Drainage and Flood
Control District, its contractors, advisors, reviewers, or its member governmental agencies, be liable for
any incidental, special, punitive, exemplary, or consequential damages whatsoever (including, without
limitation, damages for loss of business profits, business interruption, loss of business information or
other pecuniary loss) arising out of the use or inability to use these products, even if the Urban Drainage
and Flood Control District, its contractors, advisors, reviewers, or its member governmental agencies
have been advised of the possibility of such damages. In any event, the total liability of the Urban
Drainage and Flood Control District, its contractors, advisors, reviewers, or its member governmental
agencies, and your exclusive remedy, shall not exceed the amount of fees paid by you to the Urban
Drainage and Flood Control District for the product.
2008-04 Summary of Changes to Volume 3 and DISCLAIMER

NO WARRANTY
The Urban Drainage and Flood Control District, its contractors, advisors, reviewers, and its member
governmental agencies do not warrant that the Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual and all related
Design Form Worksheets, Spreadsheets, AutoCAD Details, Software and other products will meet your
requirements, or that the use of these products will be uninterrupted or error free.
THESE PRODUCTS ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” AND The Urban Drainage and Flood Control District, its
contractors, advisors, reviewers, and its member governmental agencies DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES
OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY
WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, PERFORMANCE
LEVELS, COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE IN TRADE.
Summary of Changes to Volume 3 and DISCLAIMER 2008-04

TABLE OF CONTENTS DRAINAGE CRITERIA MANUAL (V. 3)
Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual
POROUS PAVEMENT UPDATE AND DISCLAIMER
PREFACE
1.0 ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
2.0 PURPOSE OF MANUAL
3.0 OVERVIEW OF MANUAL
4.0 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
STORMWATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT

1.0 STORMWATER RUNOFF QUALITY MANAGEMENT
2.0 STORMWATER QUALITY CHARACTERISTICS AND SOURCES
3.0 OVERVIEW OF BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES
4.0 STORMWATER QUALITY HYDROLOGY
5.0 REFERENCES
BMP PLANNING FOR NEW DEVELOPMENT AND

SIGNIFICANT REDEVELOPMENT
1.0 BMP PLANNING FOR NEW DEVELOPMENT AND SIGNIFICANT REDEVELOPMENT
STRUCTURAL BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES

STRUCTURAL BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES COVERED IN THIS MANUAL
1.0 GRASS BUFFER (GB)
2.0 GRASS SWALE (GS)—SEDIMENTATION FACILITY
3.0 POROUS PAVEMENT (PP)
4.0 POROUS PAVEMENT DETENTION (PPD)
5.0 POROUS LANDSCAPE DETENTION (PLD)—SEDIMENTATION FACILITY
6.0 EXTENDED DETENTION BASIN (EDB)—SEDIMENTATION FACILITY
7.0 SAND FILTER EXTENDED DETENTION BASIN (SFB)
8.0 CONSTRUCTED WETLANDS BASIN (CWB)—SEDIMENTATION FACILITY
9.0 RETENTION POND (RP)—SEDIMENTATION FACILITY
10.0 CONSTRUCTED WETLANDS CHANNEL (CWC)—SEDIMENTATION FACILITY
11.0 COVERING OF STORAGE/HANDLING AREAS
C-1 Rev. 10-2005

12.0 SPILL CONTAINMENT AND CONTROL

13.0 REFERENCES
TYPICAL STRUCTURAL BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES

DETAILS AND SPECIFICATIONS
SUGGESTED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
AGGREGATE TURF PAVEMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PORTLAND CEMENT PERVIOUS PAVEMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MODULAR BLOCK PAVEMENT AND COBBLE BLOCK PAVEMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MAINTENANCE RECOMMENDATIONS
2.0 GRASS SWALES (GS)
5.0 POROUS LANDSCAPE DETENTION (PLD)
6.0 EXTENDED DETENTION BASINS (EDB)
8.0 CONSTRUCTED WETLANDS BASIN (CWB)
9.0 RETENTION POND (RP)
10.0 CONSTRUCTED WETLANDS CHANNEL (CWC)
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL BEST MANAGEMENT

PRACTICES
1.0 INTRODUCTION
2.0 PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS
3.0 POLLUTANT SOURCES
4.0 ASSESSMENT AND SELECTION OF BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES
5.0 STRUCTURAL CONTROLS
6.0 NONSTRUCTURAL CONTROLS
NONSTRUCTURAL BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES

1.0 INTRODUCTION TO NONSTRUCTURAL BMPS
2.0 USE OF NONSTRUCTURAL BMPS
3.0 DISPOSAL OF HOUSEHOLD WASTE AND TOXICS
4.0 USE OF PESTICIDES, HERBICIDES AND FERTILIZER
10-2005 C-2
5.0 ILLICIT DISCHARGE CONTROLS

6.0 GOOD HOUSEKEEPING
7.0 PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE
8.0 SPILL PREVENTION AND RESPONSE
CONSTRUCTION BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES

1.0 INTRODUCTION
2.0 FUNDAMENTALS FOR THE MANAGEMENT OF CONSTRUCTION SITES
3.0 CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES MANAGEMENT – PLANNING AND IMPLEMENTATION
4.0 EROSION CONTROL MEASURES - PLANNING AND IMPLEMENTING
5.0 SEDIMENT CONTROL MEASURES - PLANNING AND IMPLEMENTING
6.0 WATERWAY PROTECTION
7.0 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION
8.0 DISPOSITION OF TEMPORARY MEASURES
9.0 MAINTENANCE
BIBLIOGRAPHY
DESIGN FORMS
APPENDIX
APPENDIX A MODEL ORDINANCE FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
APPENDIX B TO BE INSERTED LATER
APPENDIX C GLOSSARY OF TERMS
C-3 Rev. 10-2005

DRAINAGE CRITERIA MANUAL (V. 3) PREFACE
PREFACE
CONTENTS
Section Page
P-
1.0 ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS........................................................................................................... 1
URBAN DRAINAGE AND FLOOD CONTROL DISTRICT ....................................................................... 1
2.0 PURPOSE OF MANUAL ............................................................................................................ 3
3.0 OVERVIEW OF MANUAL .......................................................................................................... 4
4.0 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS ........................................................................................................ 7
Table
Table P-1—Relevant Chapters................................................................................................................ 4
Figures
Figure P-1—User Flow Diagram of Municipal Stormwater Quality Management...................................... 4
Figure P-2— Volume 3 BMP Planning Flow Diagram............................................................................. 6
2007-01 P-i
1.0 ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The Urban Drainage and Flood Control District (District) wishes to acknowledge all individuals and
organizations that contributed to the development and publication of the second edition, dated
September 1, 1999, of the Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual, Volume – 3 Best Management
Practices (Manual). The list is too numerous to acknowledge everyone individually, for which we
apologize. In addition to the organizations listed here, technical guidance and review were proved by
members of the Stormwater Management Advisory Committee (SMAC) listed below. Many of the
photographs in this edition were supplied by members of the SMAC. We wish to acknowledge the
assistance rendered by the members of this group in the revision of the Manual.
The District specifically acknowledges the following organizations and individuals who contributed to the
revision of this publication of the Manual:

Ben R. Urbonas, P.E. Editor-In Chief and co-author of Manual
David Lloyd, P.E. and L. Scott Tucker, P.E. Overall review of Manual
John T. Doerfer Co-author, Nonstructural & Construction chapters
Ken MacKenzie, P.E. Co-author of BMP AutoCAD™ Details
and Design Spreadsheets
Galene Bushor Word processing final formatting of 2004 updated
CH2M HILL
James T. Wulliman Project Manager and co-author
Kyle Hamilton Co-author
Joe Juergensen Co-author
Patricia A. Nelson Co-author
Mike Petrick Graphics
Sandy Nordlander Document Production
Others that Provided Review and Technical Input

Jim A. Worley Cherry Creek Basin Authority
Richard E. Brandt Town of Parker
Wright Water Engineers, Inc.
Patti Pinson Final editing and formatting - 2004 & 2005 updates
2007-01 P-1
PREFACE DRAINAGE CRITERIA MANUAL (V. 3)
Stormwater Management Advisory Committee for Development of the Manual
Organization Name
Adams County Besharah Najjar
Daren Duncan
Arapahoe County Cindy Thrush
Steve Gardner
City of Aurora Kevin Wegener
Ron Degenhart
CH2M HILL James T. Wulliman
Patricia A. Nelson
Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment Nathan Moore
Kathy Dolan
Colorado Department of Transportation Garth Englund
Manijeh Saeidi
City of Colorado Springs Bruce Thorson
Chris Lytle
Coors Brewing Company Michael J. Galde
Neil Jaquet
Denver Wastewater Management Terry Baus
Brian Schat
Home Builders Association of Metropolitan Denver Robert Koran
Richard Weed
City of Lakewood Gerald Goldman
Alan Searcy
City of Littleton Bob Deeds

Jim Redmond
Contributors to the AutoCAD™ Construction BMP Details in this Manual
City of Broomfield
City of Lakewood
P-2 2007-01
2.0 PURPOSE OF MANUAL
Volume 3 of the Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual (USDCM) is designed to provide guidance for
local jurisdictions, developers, contractors, and industrial and commercial operations in selecting,
designing, maintaining, and carrying out best management practices (BMPs) to improve stormwater
runoff quality. This volume of the USDCM covers a variety of topics related to stormwater quality BMPs
and contains the following:
 An introduction to stormwater runoff quality management that includes an overview of water

quality impacts and explains the selection and use of nonstructural and structural BMPs
 A discussion on stormwater runoff quality and hydrology, urban runoff, and pollutant loadings
 Technical criteria for a number of structural BMPs that are recommended for use in developing
residential and commercial areas in the Denver metropolitan area and other areas with similar
climate and meteorology
 Technical guidance for a number of structural BMPs that may be used at light industrial and
certain commercial establishments
 A description of various nonstructural BMPs and how they may be used and implemented
 Guidance in the selection and use of erosion control practices and general management of
stormwater runoff during construction
 A collection of typical details for structural BMPs
The Bibliography section for this volume includes references for all chapters. Additional materials on the
topics presented in the Manual may be found in studying the published papers and documents listed
there.
This volume is primarily targeted at developing and redeveloping residential and commercial areas. The
1999 edition of the Manual goes beyond its earlier edition (UDFCD, 1992) first published in 1992 by
addressing BMPs for light industrial, or other types of land uses, some of which are being permitted
directly by the State of Colorado or the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. This list is not meant to
be comprehensive–as information about BMPs is evaluated and refined, or new standards are
promulgated by the State, additional BMPs may be added to the Manual. As a result, Volume 3 is
expected to grow and change as the technology of stormwater BMPs matures and is refined in the future.
2007-01 P-3
3.0 OVERVIEW OF MANUAL
Volume 3 is intended to meet the needs of a variety of users. Figure P-1 graphically illustrates the
components of a Comprehensive Municipal Stormwater Quality Management Program, namely:
stormwater quality programs, parties responsible for implementation of or participation in a particular
program, and BMPs that can be used to satisfy the corresponding program requirements. Figure P-2
expands on Figure P-1 by detailing the BMPs that can be considered during the implementation of the
various programs. These two figures give the user an overview of the contents of the Manual. Both the
Manual and Figure P-1 move from general toward specific, starting with an overview chapter on
Stormwater Quality Management (left portion of Figure P-1), moving through planning sections
addressing New Development BMPs, Industrial and Commercial BMPs, and Construction BMPs, and
then providing detailed design and implementation guidance in the Structural BMPs, Nonstructural
BMPs, and Construction BMPs chapters (outlined in Figure P-2).
The Manual will be used by individuals associated with the development of residential property and the
development or operation of industrial and commercial sites. Material included in the Manual will assist
these individuals in determining the most applicable BMPs for each situation. The Manual will also
benefit municipalities that address stormwater quality through land development and municipal
operations. Table P-1 lists the chapters in the Manual relevant for various parties.
Table P-1—Relevant Chapters

User Program Volume 3 Sections
Developers/Owners Construction, New Stormwater Quality Management, BMP Planning for

Development, Industrial New Development, Structural BMPs, Construction
(for industrial sites) Site Program, Industrial and Commercial BMPs (for
industrial sites)
Development Construction, New Stormwater Quality Management, BMP Planning for
Engineers Development New Development, Structural BMPs, Construction
BMPs
Contractors Construction Stormwater Quality Management, Construction BMPs
Municipal Staff Public Education and Stormwater Quality Management, BMP Planning for
Involvement, Illicit New Development, Structural BMPs, Industrial and
Discharges, Construction Commercial BMPs, Nonstructural BMPs, Construction
Sites, New Development, BMPs
Industrial Sites
Figure P-1—User Flow Diagram of Municipal Stormwater Quality Management
P-4 2007-01
2007-01 P-5
VOLUME 3 BMP
PLANNING
SECTION
Construction BMPs
Erosion Control
Roads and
Surface Mulching or
Revegetation Soil
Roughening Blankets
Stockpiles
BMP Planning for

Construction Construction BMPs
Sediment Control
Vehicle Slope Roads and Straw Bale

Terracing Slope Drain Silt Fence
Tracking Diversion Dike Roadside Swale Barrier
Temporary
Sediment Waterway Outlet Inlet
Filter Strip Channel
Basin Crossings Protection Protection
Diversion
Structural BMPs
Modular Block Porous Porous
Grass Buffer Grass Swale Porous Pavement Landscape
BMP Planning for Pavement Detention Detention
New
Development/
Redevelopment Extended Constructed
Constructed
Detention Wetland Basin Retention Pond Wetland
Basin Channel
Structural BMPs
Covering of
Spill
Storage/
Containment
Handling
& Control
Areas
BMP Planning for
Industrial/
Commercial
Non-Structural BMPs
Loading
Painting Above Ground
Good House- Preventative Spill Prevention and
Operations Storage Tank
keeping Maintenance and Response Unloading
Control Control
Control
Outside Vehicle and Pesticides,
Fuel Wastes and
Material Equipment Herbicides, and
Operations Toxics
Control Storage Washing Control Fertilizer
Control Control Control
Figure P-2— Volume 3 BMP Planning Flow Diagram
P-6 2007-01
4.0 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
> greater than

< less than
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
BOD Biochemical Oxygen Demand
BMPs Best Management Practices
cfs cubic feet per second
COD Chemical Oxygen Demand
CRS Colorado Revised Statutes
CSO Combined Sewer Overflow
DCIA Directly Connected Impervious Areas
DO dissolved oxygen
DRCOG Denver Regional Council of Governments
DRURP Denver Regional Urban Runoff Program
EMCs event mean concentrations
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
fsp feet per second
ft feet
FHWA Federal Highway Administration
H:V horizontal to vertical ratio of a slope
i impervious ratio of a catchment
Ia percent imperviousness of catchment
Iwq percent imperviousness of catchment
mg/L milligrams per liter
μg/L micrograms per liter
MS4 Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System
MSDS Material Safety Data Sheets
MWCOG Metropolitan Washington Council of Governments
N/A not available
NPDES National Pollution Discharge Elimination System
NTIS National Technical Information Service
NURP Nationwide Urban Runoff Program
NVDPC Northern Virginia District Planning Commission
pH measure of acidity
ppm parts per million
2007-01 P-7
SCS Soil Conservation Service

SEWRPC Southeastern Wisconsin Regional Planning Commission
TOC Total Organic Carbon
TSS Total Suspended Solids
UDFCD The Urban Drainage and Flood Control District
USDCM Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual
USGS United States Geological Survey
WQCV Water Quality Capture Volume
Abbreviations of Structural BMPs in the Manual

GB Grass Buffer
GS Grass Swale – Sedimentation Facility
MBP Modular Block Porous Pavement
PPD Porous Pavement Detention
PLD Porous Landscape Detention – Sedimentation Facility
EXB Extended Detention Basin – Sedimentation Facility
SFB Sand Filter Extended Detention Basin
CWB Constructed Wetlands Basin – Sedimentation Facility
RP Retention Pond – Sedimentation Facility
CWC Constructed Wetland Channel – Sedimentation Facility
P-8 2007-01
DRAINAGE CRITERIA MANUAL (V. 3) STORMWATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT
STORMWATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT

CONTENTS
Section Page
SQ-
1.0 STORMWATER RUNOFF QUALITY MANAGEMENT ................................................................... 1
1.1 Environmental Impacts of Runoff ....................................................................................... 1
1.2 NPDES Permit Regulations................................................................................................ 3
1.2.1 Phase I Stormwater Regulations............................................................................ 3
1.2.2 Phase II Stormwater Regulations........................................................................... 7
1.2.3 Non-Stormwater Discharges .................................................................................. 8
1.3 Summary........................................................................................................................... 11
2.0 STORMWATER QUALITY CHARACTERISTICS AND SOURCES ............................................. 12
2.1 General ............................................................................................................................. 12
2.2 Typical Constituent Concentrations in Urban Runoff ....................................................... 12
3.0 OVERVIEW OF BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES .................................................................. 14
3.1 Nonstructural and Structural BMPs .................................................................................. 14
3.2 Pollutant Removal Mechanisms ....................................................................................... 14
3.3 Structural BMP Effectiveness ........................................................................................... 16
3.4 Stormwater Quality Management Strategy ...................................................................... 16
3.4.1 Municipalities ........................................................................................................ 16
3.4.2 Industrial and Commercial ................................................................................... 17
3.5 Erosion Control During Construction................................................................................ 18
4.0 STORMWATER QUALITY HYDROLOGY .................................................................................... 21
4.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................... 21
4.2 Denver Area Precipitation Statistics ................................................................................. 21
4.3 Diminishing Returns with Increasing Size of Design Storms ........................................... 22
4.4 Determining the Water Quality Capture Volume .............................................................. 23
4.4.1 Use of Directly Connected Impervious Area ........................................................ 23
4.4.2 Water Quality Capture Volume (WQCV).............................................................. 23
5.0 REFERENCES .............................................................................................................................. 30
Tables
Table SQ-1—Urban Runoff Pollutants ......................................................................................................... 2
Table SQ-2—Activities and Associated Pollutants....................................................................................... 4
Table SQ-3—Non-Stormwater Discharges .................................................................................................. 9
Table SQ-4—Allowable Non-Stormwater Discharges................................................................................ 10
Table SQ-5—Land-Use Average Event Mean Concentrations of Stormwater Runoff in the
Denver Metropolitan Area................................................................................................. 13
Table SQ-6—BMP Stormwater Quality Influent and Effluent Event Mean Concentrations
Based on Analysis of 200 BMP Sites in United States and Canada................................ 17
Table SQ-7—Number of Rainfall Events in the Denver Area..................................................................... 22
10-2005 SQ-i
STORMWATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT DRAINAGE CRITERIA MANUAL (V. 3)
Figures
Figure SQ-1—Multi-Level Stormwater Quality Management Strategy .......................................................19
Figure SQ-2—Water Quality Capture Volume (WQCV), 80th Percentile Runoff Event ..............................25
Figure SQ-3—Map of the Average Runoff Producing Storm’s Precipitation
Depth in the United States ................................................................................................26
Figure SQ-4—Watershed Imperviousness, Single Family Residential Ranch Style Houses....................27
Figure SQ-5—Watershed Imperviousness, Single Family Residential Split-Level Houses ......................28
Figure SQ-6—Watershed Imperviousness, Single Family Residential Two-Story Houses.......................29
SQ-ii 10-2005
1.0 STORMWATER RUNOFF QUALITY MANAGEMENT
Most of the public concerns with stormwater are usually related to flooding, not water quality. People
complain when their basements flood or roads become impassable and the public suffers when severe
catastrophic floods cause widespread damage to property and loss of life. Very few people are aware of
the stormwater water quality and the hydrologic modifications that result from land-use changes and the
impacts they have on our rivers, streams, and lakes. Changes in stormwater runoff quality and quantity
can have significant impacts on these receiving waters, affecting not only the aquatic ecosystem, but also
the quality of life in a community by the changes in the nature of the streams that run through it or the
lakes within its boundaries.
1.1 Environmental Impacts of Runoff
Many people are familiar with the environmental impacts from municipal and industrial wastewater
discharges. Few are aware of the existence of a stormwater drainage sewer system much less the
impact that it may create to the environment. Studies have shown that runoff from urban and industrial
areas can contain significant quantities of constituents that are found in wastewater and industrial
discharges.
The impacts of stormwater on streams fit into four categories. These include stream hydrology, stream
morphology, water quality and aquatic ecology. The extent of impact is related to the climate, land use,
and the measures implemented to address the impacts.
Briefly, the impacts on streams are:
1. Stream Hydrology: Urban development affects the environment through changes in the size and
frequency of storm runoff events, changes in base flows of the stream and changes in stream flow
velocities during storms resulting in a decrease in travel time for runoff. Peak discharges in a stream
can increase from urbanization due to decrease in infiltration of rainfall into the ground, loss of
buffering vegetation and resultant reduced evapotranspiration. This results in more surface runoff
and larger loads of various constituents found in stormwater.
2. Stream Morphology: When the hydrology of the stream changes, it results in changes to the physical
characteristics of the stream. Such changes include streambed degradation, stream widening, and
streambank erosion. As the stream profile degrades and the stream tries to widen to accommodate
higher flows, channel bank erosion increases along with increases in sediment loads. These
changes in the stream bed also result in change to the habitat of aquatic life.
3. Stream Quality: Water quality is impacted through urbanization as a result of erosion during
construction, changes in stream morphology, and washing off of accumulated deposits on the urban
landscape. Water quality problems include turbid water, nutrient enrichment, bacterial contamination,
10-2005 SQ-1
and increases in organic matter loads, metals, salts, oil/grease, pesticides and herbicides. In
addition, there may be temperature increases and increased trash and debris transported by
stormwater runoff to streams and lakes.
Table SQ-1 lists the common constituents in stormwater runoff and their impacts.
Table SQ-1—Urban Runoff Pollutants

Constituents Sources Effects
Sediments—TSS, Turbidity, Construction sites Habitat changes, stream

dissolved solids Urban/agricultural runoff turbidity, recreation and
Landfills, septic fields aesthetic loss, contaminant
Atmospheric deposition transport, bank erosion
Nutrients—Nitrate, Nitrite, Lawn/Agricultural runoff, Algae blooms, Ammonia
Ammonia, Organic Nitrogen, Landfills, Septic fields, Toxicity, Nitrate Toxicity
Phosphate, Total Phosphorus Atmospheric deposition, erosion
Pathogens—Total and Fecal Urban/Agricultural Runoff Ear/Intestinal infections,
Coliforms, Fecal Streptococci Septic Systems, illicit sanitary Shellfish bed closure,
Viruses, E.Coli, Enterococcus connections, domestic/wild Recreation/aesthetic loss
animals
Organic Enrichment—BOD, Urban/Agricultural Runoff, Dissolved oxygen depletion,
COD, TOC and DO Landfills septic systems odors, fish kills
Toxic Pollutants—Metals, Urban/Agricultural Runoff, Toxicity to humans and aquatic
Organics Pesticides/Herbicides, life, bioaccumulation in the food
Underground storage tanks, chain
Hazardous Waste Sites,
landfills, illegal disposals,
industrial discharges
Salts—sodium chloride Urban runoff snowmelt Contamination of drinking
water, harmful to salt intolerant
plants
Source: Handbook: Urban Runoff Pollution Prevention and Control Planning, 1993.
Stormwater runoff into lakes can have some unique effects. These include:
1. Lakes respond more to the mass of a constituent and flow volume. The response time to storm
events is measured in days or weeks unlike streams which show effects within hours or days.
2. A notable visible impact of stormwater on lakes consists of floating refuse and shore damage.
3. A significant water quality impact on lakes that is related to stormwater runoff is nutrient
enrichment. This can result in the undesirable growth of algae and aquatic plants.
4. Lakes do not flush contaminants as quickly as streams, and act as sinks for nutrients, metals, and
sediments. This means that lakes can take longer to recover if contaminated.
SQ-2 10-2005
Table SQ-2 lists the potential sources of stormwater runoff and the types of pollutants expected from a
variety of human activities.
1.2 NPDES Permit Regulations
In 1972, Congress passed what is currently referred to as the Clean Water Act (CWA). The Act
established the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) program. Until recently,
efforts under the NPDES program have focused on non-stormwater discharges from industries and
municipal wastewater treatment plants. In the last several years, the EPA has expanded the NPDES
program to cover stormwater discharges.
1.2.1 Phase I Stormwater Regulations

As effective controls have been implemented on non-stormwater discharges, it has become more evident
that diffuse sources can create impacts on water quality. In 1987, the CWA was revised to address
stormwater discharges. The CWA defined municipal and industrial stormwater runoff discharges as
“point source” and called for a two-phase permitting strategy. Phase I affected:
• Any discharge of stormwater that was permitted under the NPDES program prior to February 4,
1987.
• Discharges associated with industrial activity.
• Any discharge from a large or medium municipal separate storm sewer system (MS4). A large
system serves a population greater than 250,000. A medium system serves a population
between 100,000 and 250,000.
• Those discharges that the permitting authority determines contributes to a violation of a water
quality standard or is a significant contributor of pollutants to waters of the U.S.
Regulations which addressed permit application requirements for these affected discharges were
published on November 16, 1990. These regulations have resulted in thousands of industries and a
number of municipalities to be issued stormwater permits. The municipalities in Colorado which have
been impacted by the Phase I requirements include:
• City and County of Denver
• City of Aurora
• City of Lakewood
10-2005 SQ-3
Table SQ-2—Activities and Associated Pollutants
Toxic Organics
Oil and Grease

Toxic Metals
Enrichment
Salts (TDS)
Hydrologic
Alterations
Alterations
Pathogens
Pesticides
Sediment
Nutrients
Thermal
Organic
pH
Category
Agriculture
Cropland X X X
Pastureland X X X X
Animal Holding Areas X X X X
Animal Waste Storage X X X X
Hayland X X X
Wash and Processing Water X X X X X X X
Waste Application Areas X X X X X
Construction
Highways, Bridges, Roads X X X X X X X
Land Development X X X X X
Urban Land
Stormwater sewers, combined sewers, X X X X X X X X X X X
surface runoff-pavement
Surface runoff-turf areas X X X
Infiltration walls and basins X X X X X
Land Disposal
Wastes, sludge, septage X X X X X X X X X
Landfills X X X X X X X X X X X X
In situ wastewater systems X
Hazardous Waste Areas X X X X X X X X
Hydrologic Modification
Earthfills, Channelization X X
Dam Construction/Reconstruction X X X X X X
Other Sources
Atmospheric Deposition X X X X
Underground Storage Tanks X X X X
Illegal disposal/dumping, release of X X X X X X X X X X
contaminants from in-place deposits
Highway/Bridge maintenance X X X X X X
Auto Salvage X X X
Washing and Processing Areas X X X X X X X X X X X
Snow dumping areas X X X X X X X X
Utility ROWs X X X X
Gasoline Station X X X
In-place sediments X X X X X X X X X X
Sewer leaks, domestic/wild birds and X X X
mammals
Natural vegetation (leaves, fallen trees) X X X X
Source: Handbook: Urban Runoff Pollution Prevention and Control Planning, 1993.
SQ-4 10-2005
• Colorado Department of Transportation
• City of Colorado Springs
General permits were issued to cover industries impacted by the regulation. They include heavy
industries, light industries, mining, power generation, transportation systems (including airports), and
recycling facilities. Construction sites greater than 5 acres in size were also included in Phase I and
defined as “industrial activity.” Existing permits were amended to include stormwater requirements.
Industrial general permits require development of a stormwater management plan (SWMP). The plan
must include:
1. A description of the activity.
2. Maps showing facility layout and drainage patterns.
3. Description of Potential Pollutant Sources/Material Inventory.
4. Stormwater Management Controls such as risk identification and assessment, prevention

maintenance, good housekeeping, spill response procedures, and other appropriate structural
and non-structural BMPs.
5. An inspection program.
6. Employee training program.
It is anticipated that the Manual will assist industries in fulfilling their regulatory requirements by providing
lists of BMPs that can be implemented on site, and general procedures for evaluation of sites.
Unlike industries that have been covered by general permits, MS4 permits have been developed on a
case-by-case basis. While each is somewhat unique, they all require that certain programs be in place.
These programs are:
1. A Commercial/ Residential Management Program. This program includes the following areas:
a. Maintenance of structural controls.
b. New Development Planning Program that requires permanent water quality elements.
c. Public street maintenance procedures to be in place to reduce water quality impacts from
street sanding and deicing practices, herbicide/pesticide uses, and debris collection.
d. Review of new flood control structures for inclusion of water quality elements and evaluation
of existing facilities for retrofitting opportunities.
e. Municipal waste disposal facility inspections and controls.
10-2005 SQ-5
f. Program to address water quality concerns associated with the application of pesticides,
herbicides and fertilizers by public and private applicators.
2. Illicit Discharge Management Program. This program generally includes the following areas:
a. A program for the prevention of illicit discharges and illegal disposal. The program must
include detection and removal of illicit discharges.
b. Implementation of an ongoing field screening program. This involves sampling of dry

weather flows from the MS4 outfalls.
c. Investigation of illicit discharges.
d. A program for responding to spills into the MS4.
e. Educational activities to promote public reporting of illicit discharges and improper disposal
as well as promote proper management and disposal of toxic materials.
f. A program that controls sanitary sewer seepage into the MS4.
3. Industrial Facilities Program. The purpose of this program is to have the municipality control the
industrial stormwater discharges into its system to assure that there is no impact on the MS4
from an industry.
4. Construction Sites Program. This program involves ensuring that adequate measures are taken
to control runoff from construction sites that pose water quality concerns.
5. Municipal Facility Runoff Control Program. This program requires that measures comparable to
those required for industrial activities be implemented at municipal facilities.
6. Wet Weather Monitoring Program. The purpose of this program is to monitor trends in water
quality.
The MS4 has some latitude in how these programs are implemented. The Manual can be used to assist
MS4s in development of these programs. Many of the elements of a commercial and residential program
can be found in the NEW DEVELOPMENT PLANNING STRUCTURAL BMPS, NONSTRUCTURAL
BMPS and MAINTENANCE chapters. An outline of an illicit discharge program is included in the
NONSTRUCTURAL BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES chapter. The elements of the construction
program can be found in the CONSTRUCTION BMPS chapter. The INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL
BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES chapter can provide assistance to municipalities in the development of
Municipal Facility Runoff Control Plans.
SQ-6 10-2005
1.2.2 Phase II Stormwater Regulations

When the amendment to CWA was passed in 1987, the intent under the stormwater program was to
require MS4s that were under 100,000 in population to apply for an NPDES permit no later than October
1992. This date was later changed to October 1, 1994. On January 9, 1998, EPA published draft rules
for the Phase II program. These regulations became final on November 1, 1999 and caused three major
changes:
1. Reduction in the size of construction sites required to obtain an NPDES stormwater permit from
5 acres to one acre.
2. A expansion of the exemption from permitting for industrial facilities which have all pollutant
sources covered (“No Exposure Exemption”).
3. Expansion of the MS4 permits to include communities with populations under 100,000.
The final Phase II regulations extended the municipal stormwater program to small municipalities that are
within urbanized areas (as defined by the Census Bureau) or others designated via criteria developed by
the State or EPA. For Colorado, this means that approximately 118 additional permits were issued (as of
March 31, 2005) under this program. The Phase II MS4s include one City and County, ten counties, 34
cities, eight towns, 28 special districts, 21 school districts, twelve college and university campuses, three
hospitals, and one state park. Some of the cities and counties also have co-permittees authorized under
their general permit.
The regulation covers these Phase II communities under a general permit rather than individual permits.
The programs required in the general permit include:
a. Public Education and Outreach on Stormwater Impacts–This requires the distribution of

educational materials to the public or other equivalent outreach efforts.
b. Public Involvement/Participation–This involves public notification and inclusion of the public in the
development and implementation of the municipalities’ stormwater management program.
c. Illicit Discharge Detection and Elimination–This involves identification of pollutant sources, and
the control and detection of illicit discharges.
d. Construction Sites–This requires the development, implementation, and enforcement of a

program for controlling runoff from construction sites that are equal to or greater than one acre.
e. Post-Construction Stormwater Management in New Development and Redevelopment–This

requires the development and implementation of a program to address stormwater runoff from
development and redevelopment sites equal to or greater than one acre.
10-2005 SQ-7
f. Pollution Prevention/Good Housekeeping for Municipal Operations–This involves the

development and implementation of an operations and maintenance program to reduce the
pollutant runoff from municipal sites such as parks and open spaces, fleet maintenance facilities,
building oversight, and stormwater system maintenance facilities.
Guidelines were published in October 2001 to assist Phase II MS4s to develop their management
programs submitted for state review and approval by March 10, 2003. As stated previously, the Manual
will also assist these municipalities with their program development.
1.2.3 Non-Stormwater Discharges

It is sometimes difficult to determine which discharges fall under the stormwater program and which
require a traditional NPDES permit. It is clear that discharges from municipal wastewater treatment
plants or industrial processes require an NPDES permit, but others are less obvious. A stormwater
discharge is one which is a direct result of stormwater (rainfall or snow melt) and stops shortly after the
event ends. Everything other than stormwater discharges require a permit if it enters state waters. The
Colorado Water Quality Control Act defines “state waters” as any and all surface and subsurface waters
which are contained in or flow through this state, but does not include waters in sewers systems, waters
in treatment works or disposal systems, waters in potable water distribution systems, and all water
withdrawn for use until use and treatment have been completed. However, State regulations do not allow
a discharge into a ditch or man-made conveyance for the purpose of evading the requirement to obtain a
permit, per CRS 25-8-501(1). Litigation has shown that the definition of state waters is interpreted very
broadly.
Table SQ-3 lists common discharges that are not covered by industrial or MS4 stormwater permits. The
table includes a description of the activity and suggestions of how to prevent the need for a permit. All
these discharges could be permitted.
SQ-8 10-2005
Table SQ-3—Non-Stormwater Discharges

Discharge Description Suggested Measures
Vehicle Washing (Non- • Spraying a vehicle to rinse off • Do washing at third party facilities
residential) grime/dirt and allowing to flow into which are permitted
the MS4 or state waters. This is
• Ensure that waters are captured and
whether or not soaps or solvents
not allowed offsite
are used.
• With appropriate approval send to a
• Does not affect residents washing
sanitary sewer
their vehicles.
• Obtain a NPDES Permit
Rinsing of trucks carrying • Involves the washing of concrete or • With appropriate approval, dispose
materials such as concrete other materials from the mixing or into the sanitary sewer (not
trucks tank portions of a vehicle concrete trucks)
• Ensure that all waters are captured
and not allowed offsite
Swimming Pool/Spa Draining • Involves the emptying of the contents • Use water for irrigation purposes
(Non-residential) of a swimming pool or hot tub
• With appropriate approval, dispose
• Private residential discharges are not into the sanitary sewer
affected
Hydrostatic Testing • Involves the addition of water to a • Ensure that waters are captured and
tank or pipeline to ensure water not allowed offsite
tightness and strength of joints
• With appropriate approval, dispose
into a sanitary sewer
The NPDES stormwater regulations allow for certain non-stormwater discharges to be released under a
municipal permit. Table SQ-4 lists these discharges.
10-2005 SQ-9
Table SQ-4—Allowable Non-Stormwater Discharges

The following non-stormwater discharges or flows are not considered illicit or illegal unless they are identified by the
municipality or the State as sources of pollutants.
• Landscape irrigation.
• Diverted stream flows.
• Rising ground waters.
• Uncontaminated ground water infiltration to separate storm sewers.
• Discharges from potable water sources.
• Foundation drains.
• Air conditioning condensation.
• Irrigation water.
• Natural springs.
• Water from crawl space pumps.
• Footing drains.
• Lawn watering.
• Individual residential car washing.
• Flows from riparian habitats and wetlands.
• Emergency fire fighting activities.
• Irrigation return flow.
Non-stormwater discharges allowed under the municipal stormwater permits, provided appropriate control measures
are implemented to minimize impacts of these sources, include:
• Individual residential swimming pool and hot tub discharges.
• Individual residential street washing.
• Water-line flushing.
• Water line flushing (excludes flushing of disinfection water for new pipes).
• Municipally owned and dechlorinated swimming pool discharges.
• Street wash water.
Other sources of allowable dry weather flow include:
• Discharges of process wastewater as long as authorized under separate CDPS permits.
In order to address many small discharges, the Colorado Water Quality Control Division developed the minimal
discharge general permit. This permit covers the following types of discharges:
• Facilities discharging wastewater from washing the exteriors of trucks, cars, airplanes, boats, driveways, parking
lots, and roads.
• Facilities discharging wastewater from the washing of bleachers, elevated seating and grandstands, such as
those found at outdoor sporting or entertainment events.
• Commercial facilities discharging wastewater from draining, cleaning, and filter backwash of swimming pools,
spas, hot tubs, and similar structures including water slides and water theme amusement parks.
• Commercial facilities discharging wastewater from the washing of temporary stables, traveling petting zoos, or
any other facility that discharges wash water associated with animal wastes.
• Facilities discharging wastewater from commercial mobile cleaning vehicles such as steam cleaning, carpet
cleaning and pressure washing (including building washing).
• Facilities discharging groundwater from foundation, basement, or underground structure dewatering.
• Facilities discharging non-contact cooling or heating water.
• Facilities discharging hydrostatic test water from the testing of new or used pipes, tanks or other similar vessels.
• Facilities discharging water such as facilities that employ super chlorination (50 to 500 mg/L) of water for the
disinfection of these facilities and wish to discharge effluent.
• Commercial facilities discharging wastewater from washing of root crops such as potatoes, sugar beets, onions,
and other fruit/vegetable agricultural produce.
The general permit allows for quick coverage of these types of discharges. Compliance is required with state water
quality standards and effluent guidelines. Monitoring and reporting of the quality of the discharge is also required.
SQ-10 10-2005
1.3 Summary
The Manual has been structured to provide industries, municipalities, contractors and developers with
information which can be used to control water quality impacts from stormwater and comply with
applicable regulatory requirements.
10-2005 SQ-11
2.0 STORMWATER QUALITY CHARACTERISTICS AND SOURCES
2.1 General
Urban runoff contains many types and forms of constituents-some occurring in higher concentrations
than found in runoff before development and some that are not naturally present in surface runoff from
undeveloped land. Runoff from undeveloped watersheds contains sediment particles, oxygen-
demanding compounds, nutrients, metals, and other constituents. Once developed, constituent loads
increase because surface runoff volumes increase and the sources of many of these pollutants also
increase. Also, additional sources of constituents may exist in a catchment and find their way into runoff.
They may include the following:
• Metals, lubricating compounds, solvents, and other constituents originating from vehicles,
machinery, and industrial and commercial activities
• Pesticides, herbicides, and fertilizers
• Household solvents, paints, roofing materials, and other such materials
• Pet litter, garbage, and other debris
• Suspended solids washed off impermeable surfaces
• Increased soil erosion during construction activities
A phenomenon termed first flush has been discussed for a number of years resulting in mixed
conclusions. The first flush represents the higher levels of initial concentrations of constituents that are
washed off from a surface at the very beginning of a rainfall event. Some reports include a first flush
because of atmospheric fallout that accumulates before a storm occurs. Other reports conclude that
there is no first flush, or an insignificant first flush of pollutants in separate, namely, not combined sewer
stormwater runoff. However, by designing facilities to capture in total and treat the majority of runoff
events, whether a first flush exists or not becomes irrelevant. At the same time, if it does exist for larger
runoff events, such designs will then also capture their “first flush” of runoff.
2.2 Typical Constituent Concentrations in Urban Runoff
Urban stormwater runoff data for the Denver metropolitan area was collected under an Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA)-funded effort as part of their Nationwide Urban Runoff Program in 1980 and
1981. A similar stormwater monitoring program, funded by the District and the cities of Denver, Aurora,
and Lakewood, was carried out in 1992 and 1993. The results from these two monitoring programs are
summarized in a report by Doerfer and Urbonas, “Stormwater Quality Characterization in the Denver
Metropolitan Area,” dated 1993 in terms of average event mean concentrations. Table SQ-5 summarizes
SQ-12 10-2005
these EMCs for 13 constituents from industrial, residential, commercial, and undeveloped land uses. It is
important to recognize however that the data were highly variable and that these EMCs should not be
expected from individual storm runoff events.
Table SQ-5—Land-Use Average Event Mean Concentrations of Stormwater Runoff

in the Denver Metropolitan Area
Constituent Units Industrial Commercial Residential Undevelope

d
Total Suspended Solids (mg/L) 399 225 240 400

Total Dissolved Solids (mg/L) 58 129 119 678
Biochemical Oxygen Demand (mg/L) 29 33 17 4
Chemical Oxygen Demand (mg/L) 232 173 95 72
Total Nitrogen (mg/L) 2.7 3.3 3.4 3.4
Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen (mg/L) 1.8 2.3 2.7 2.9
Nitrate plus Nitrite (mg/L) 0.91 0.96 0.65 0.50
Total Phosphorus (mg/L) 0.43 0.42 0.65 0.40
Dissolved Phosphorus (mg/L) 0.20 0.15 0.22 0.10
Cadmium, Total Recoverable (µg/L) 3 1 n/d n/d
Copper, Total Recoverable (µg/L) 84 43 29 40
Lead, Total Recoverable (µg/L) 130 59 53 100
Zinc, Total Recoverable (µg/L) 520 240 180 100
n/d = below detection limit
10-2005 SQ-13
3.0 OVERVIEW OF BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES
3.1 Nonstructural and Structural BMPs
Urban stormwater runoff occurs from various land use types, such as residential, commercial, industrial,
etc. It has been shown to contain a variety of constituents. When certain constituents are present in
sufficient quantities, the potential exists for adverse effects on receiving waters.
Studies such as the Nationwide Urban Runoff Program (EPA, 1983) and the Denver Regional Urban
Runoff Program (DRCOG, 1983) have documented concentrations of various constituents in urban
stormwater. To reduce the concentrations and the loads of these constituents that reach the receiving
waters, various BMPs have been suggested. These BMPs fall into the following two primary categories:
• Nonstructural–including the subcategories of pollution prevention BMPs and source control BMPs.
• Structural–including facilities constructed to passively treat urban stormwater runoff before it

enters the receiving waters. They are stormwater quality treatment facilities.
The most cost-effective nonstructural BMPs prevent the disposal of constituents that may be potential
pollutants on the urban landscape and to minimize the migration of constituents offsite from the point
where they are being used, stored, or otherwise being exposed to stormwater. Measures that can
prevent deposition of constituents are described in terms such as “Good Housekeeping,” “Preventive
Maintenance,” “Spill Prevention” and others. A theme that runs through all of these is the need to
educate the public on the impacts of its actions on the environment. Nonstructural source controls also
include administrative programs, preventing and controlling erosion during construction, street sweeping,
modified street maintenance practices, employee-training and material handling practices. Nonstructural
controls used to isolate pollutants from stormwater include covering potential pollutant areas such as
service center gasoline pump islands. Source control BMPs are sometimes termed as "good
housekeeping" measures because a clean site will produce less stormwater contamination than will a
dirty one. These and other nonstructural BMPs are further addressed in the nonstructural section of this
volume.
Structural BMPs are facilities used to reduce runoff and/or remove constituents from runoff. Examples of
structural BMPs include water quality detention (both dry basins and wet ponds), wetlands, porous
pavement, and the use of vegetated zones. These BMPs may treat small volumes of stormwater on
development sites or serve larger regional drainage areas.
3.2 Pollutant Removal Mechanisms
Although runoff may contain many individual pollutants, pollutants are grouped into two general
categories in the Manual: particulate and soluble. Even though the exact boundary between the two does
SQ-14 10-2005
not need to be defined at this level of design, the boundary lies somewhere around the equivalent particle
diameter of 0.4 micron (for example, clays). In many cases, constituents (such as metals and oxygen
demand compounds) become adsorbed or attached to particulate matter. Therefore, if the particulate
matter is removed, so are the adsorbed or attached constituents.
One, or a combination of up to four basic pollutant removal or immobilization mechanisms, are used by
the suggested BMPs to treat stormwater runoff for water quality enhancement. The following is a brief
overview of each mechanism:
1. Sedimentation: Particulate matter is, in part, settled out of urban runoff. Smaller particles under
60 microns in size (fine silts and clays) (Stahre and Urbonas, 1990) can account for
approximately 80 percent of the metals in stormwater attached or adsorbed along with other
contaminants and can require long periods of time to settle out of suspension. Fortunately,
extended detention allows smaller particles to agglomerate into larger ones (Randall et al, 1982),
and for some of the dissolved and liquid state pollutants to adsorb to suspended particles, thus
removing a larger proportion of them through sedimentation. Sedimentation is the primary
pollutant removal mechanism for most structural BMPs.
2. Filtering: Particulates are removed, in part, from water by filtration. Filtration removes particles by
attachment to small-diameter collectors such as sand.
3. Infiltration: Pollutant loads in surface runoff are removed or reduced as surface runoff infiltrates or
percolates into the ground. Particulates are removed at the ground surface by filtration, while
soluble constituents can be adsorbed into the soil, at least in part, as the runoff percolates into
the ground. Site-specific soil characteristics, such as permeability, cation exchange potential,
and depth to groundwater or bedrock limit the number of sites where this mechanism can be
used effectively.
4. Biological Uptake: Plants and microbes require soluble and dissolved constituents such as
nutrients and minerals for growth. These constituents are ingested or taken up from the water
column and concentrated through bacterial action, phytoplankton growth, and other bio-chemical
processes. In some instances, plants could be harvested to remove the constituents
permanently. In addition, certain biological activities can reduce toxicity of some pollutants and/or
possible adverse effects on higher aquatic species. Unfortunately, not much is understood yet
about how biological uptake or activity interacts with stormwater during the relatively brief periods
it is in contact with the biological media in most BMPs, with the possible exception of retention
ponds between storm events (Hartigan, 1989).
5. Straining: Grasses strain out particulates when sheet flow is directed to flow slowly over
vegetated areas.
10-2005 SQ-15
3.3 Structural BMP Effectiveness
The issue of BMP effectiveness is one that the stormwater management professionals continue to
debate. The one suggested in this Manual is to look at BMPs holistically and seek ones that help mitigate
the effects of urbanization on the receiving water, its geomorphology, aquatic habitat, aquatic toxicity
and public health.
For these reasons, this Manual recommends the four-step process that begins with practices to minimize
stormwater runoff and then addresses the need for capturing runoff from frequently occurring events and
releasing this volume slowly to further mitigate the hydrologic effects of urbanization. In the process,
water quality is improved and pollutant loads reaching the receiving water are reduced.
In the past, BMP effectiveness was judged by the percent removal of specific constituents. Investigations
and research in recent years have demonstrated that percent removal is not a good metric for judging
effectiveness because it depends mostly on the concentrations of pollutants in the runoff. Namely, higher
percent removals are often recorded for very poor quality runoff treated by the structural BMP while low
removal rates were reported when the stormwater runoff quality was excellent to begin with. As a result,
the International BMP Database (www.bmpdatabase.org) team has suggested that when water quality is
of concern, BMP performance and selection be judged on the basis of effluent quality (ASCE & EPA
1999, EPA & ASCE 2002). Table SQ-6 summarizes the finding on influent and effluent statistics for
some 200 structural BMPs in the International BMP Database as of Fall 2005. This table provides insight
into which types of BMPs offer better water quality effluent for various constituents that may be of
concern for specific projects. All of the BMPs recommended in this Manual provide reasonable water
quality enhancement for many of the constituents of concern.
3.4 Stormwater Quality Management Strategy
3.4.1 Municipalities
The selection of the most appropriate BMP categories within a municipality is determined by whether
development is in place or has yet to occur. In areas with existing development, relying on nonstructural
BMPs is most cost-effective because retrofitting structural controls into a developed area can be very
expensive; that is, $5,000 to $50,000 per acre of tributary watershed. Structural controls are more
appropriate for new development and significant redevelopment, particularly when they are integrated
into the initial planning and design of municipal infrastructure and private development.
Structural BMPs are most cost-effective when included in the planning stages of development. It is
recommended that the structural BMPs presented in the Manual be integrated into stormwater
management planning by public entities and into the site planning process by land developers. Structural
BMPs can also be used, in a cost-effective manner, whenever redevelopment or significant improvement
occurs within fully developed areas.
SQ-16 10-2005
Table SQ-6—BMP Stormwater Quality Influent and Effluent Event Mean Concentrations
Based on Analysis of 200 BMP Sites in United States and Canada
Constituents Point of Extended Wet Pond Wetland Basin Biofilter Media Filter
Discharge Detention
Suspended Solids (mg/l Influent 87.7 (48.4-159) 88.8 (48.9-156) 82.1 (65.7-103) 52.0 (22-123) 61.1 (45.4-82.4)
Effluent 41.4 (30.8-55.5) 19.0 (12.9-28.0) 19.7 (16.6-23.4) 24.6 (15.0-40.3) 25.5 (14.7-44.3)
Total Copper (ug/l) Influent 32.3 (22.7-46) 18.0 (7.4-43) xx 21.8 (11.6-40.9) 15.3 (12.4-18.8)
Effluent 18.9 (16.6-21.5) 6.92 (4.7-10.3) xx 10.0 (5.6-17.9) 9.81 (8.1-11.8)
Dissolved Copper (ug/l) Influent 12.1 (8-18.3) 8.87 (5.4-14.6) xx 12.3 (6.5-23.4) 8.83 (6.7-11.6)
Effluent 14.7 (10.4-20.9) 5.09 (3.1-8.3) xx 7.66 (4.7-12.5) 7.95 (6.6-9.7)
Total Lead (ug/l) Influent 69.2 (33.6-143) 33.3 (10.2-109) 12.6 (3.8-42) 19.6 (7.4-51.6) 15.6 (9.3-26.1)
Effluent 15.0 (9.5-23.8) 6.68 (2.9-15.6) 3.25 (1.9-5.6) 6.95 (4.2-11.7) 5.5 (3.5-8.6)
Dissolved Lead (ug/l) Influent 3.4 (2-5.8) 9.48 (0.9-101.4) xx 2.5 (0.9-6.9) 2.18 (1.6-3.1)
Effluent 2.33 (1.7-3.3) 4.16 (2.0-8.9) xx 1.35 (0.5-3.6) 1.42 (1.0-1.9)
Total Zinc (ug/l) Influent 274 (178-422) 75.3 (44-128.9) 164 (54.6-494) 129 (57.3-291) 122 (72.6-204)
Effluent 85.3 (50.6-143.7) 28.6 (21.4-38.3) 119 (32.8-429) 39.4 (28.2-55.2) 65.0 (45.3-93.2)
Dissolved Zinc (ug/l) Influent xx 57.4 (20.1-163) xx 67.4 (33.8-134) 71.7 (41.3-124)
Effluent xx 16.9 (2.6-109) xx 32.0 (26.7-38.3) 57.1 (37.7-86.6)
Total Phosphorus (mg/l) Influent 0.4 (0.3-0.5) 0.53 (0.3-0.9) 2.91 (1.9-4.6) 0.19 (0.1-0.4) 0.25 (0.2-0.4)
Effluent 0.3 (0.2-0.44) 0.16 (0.12-0.21) 0.15 (0.07-0.33) 0.32 (0.24-0.43) 0.14 (0.11-0.17)
Total Nitrogen (mg/l) Influent xx 1.49 (0.6-3.6) 2.56 (1.6-4) 0.58 (0.3-1) xx
Effluent xx 1.17 (0.77-1.78) 2.42 (1.46-4.0) 0.69 (0.37-1.29) xx
TKN (mg/l) Influent 1.99 (1.6-2.5) 1.06 (0.8-1.4) 1.23 (1-1.6) 2.27 (1.8-2.9) 2.2 (1.7-2.9)
Effluent 1.87 (1.46-2.39) 0.84 (0.68-1.04) 1.33 (0.84-2.11) 1.6 (1.42-1.8) 1.79 (1.45-2.2)
Does not meet 95% confidence test for change in the mean between inflow and outflow
Meets 95% confidence test for change in mean concentration between inflow and outflow
Cautionary Note: This table presents statistics of site mean EMCs without weighting the sites for
data density. Each site has equal weight in the analysis.
Some sites had very little data, but have same weight as sites with much data.
Legend: mm.m - Mean of all site mean EMCs
(ll.ll - uu.uu) = (Lower – Upper) values of the 95% confidence test of the mean.
An effective strategy for reducing stormwater pollution loads is to use multiple BMPs, including
nonstructural measures, source controls, and structural BMPs. A single practice and/or facility cannot
generally provide significant reductions in stormwater pollutant loads because these pollutants come from
many sources within a municipality. Also, multiple BMPs can provide complementary water quality
enhancement to achieve desired results. A multilevel BMP approach, schematically depicted in
Figure SQ-1, deals with the many pollutant and runoff sources throughout a watershed and shows that
whenever feasible, combining the most effective BMPs in a series can be an effective strategy to reduce
pollutant loads being transported to the receiving waters by stormwater.
10-2005 SQ-17
3.4.2 Industrial and Commercial

The selection of the most appropriate BMP controls for an industrial or commercial operation is
determined by the activities that take place outside where they are exposed to stormwater. Similar to
municipal BMPs, the determination as to whether to use structural or non-structural BMPs is a function of
whether the facility is under design or if it is existing. Structural controls, such as cover roofing,
secondary containment, and detention facilities, can be readily integrated into the design of these
facilities. It may be much more costly and less practical to put these controls into place after the facility is
in operation.
An effective strategy for reducing stormwater pollution loads for industrial and commercial facilities is to
focus on source controls using both structural and non-structural technologies. The multi-level
stormwater strategy for municipalities is also of use for industrial and commercial sites.
3.5 Erosion Control During Construction
Control of construction activities is critical in stormwater quality management. During the relatively short
period of time when land is converted from undeveloped to urban uses, a significant amount of sediment
can erode from a construction site and be transported to adjacent properties and to receiving waters. If
measures are not taken to reduce erosion and to capture sediment in runoff from construction sites,
damage can occur to offsite areas and to aquatic habitats in the receiving water system.
Many methods are available to limit erosion and sediment losses from a construction site. One of the
most effective is to prevent erosion from occurring. Oftentimes large areas are excavated or graded at
one time in preparation for construction of site facilities and buildings. By limiting the amount of time that
an area is disturbed through the use of phasing, soil erosion is reduced. Prevention, along with the
application of erosion control practices to all areas disturbed during construction, can significantly reduce
soil erosion. Finally, the proper installation and maintenance of sediment trapping devices at construction
sites can ensure that soil erosion and sediment transport offsite is controlled to the maximum extent
practicable.
SQ-18 10-2005
Figure SQ-1—Multi-Level Stormwater Quality Management Strategy
10-2005 SQ-19
There are many structural and nonstructural options available in the design of an erosion and sediment
control plan. It is recommended, however, that the erosion and sediment control plan be developed
consistent with the post-development stormwater management goals of the site. Opportunities often exist
for converting temporary sediment control structures into permanent structural stormwater BMPs at the
end of the construction phase. These options should be explored by the designer of an erosion control
plan, final site BMPs, and their eventual owners.
Regardless of the specific details used in an erosion control plan, the goal is to implement erosion and
sediment control as a standard practice at all construction sites, and to incorporate it as an integral part of
any stormwater quality management strategy. To facilitate sound erosion and sediment control practices
during construction, technical criteria were developed, along with a model ordinance for their
implementation by local municipalities. These criteria and the model ordinance are contained in the
CONSTRUCTION BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES chapter of Volume 3 of the Manual.
SQ-20 10-2005
4.0 STORMWATER QUALITY HYDROLOGY
4.1 Overview
Urbanization affects stormwater runoff by increasing the following:
• The volumes and rates of surface runoff
• The concentrations and the types of pollutants found in stormwater
• The loads of pollutants carried and their transfer rates to receiving waters
Urbanization leads to a decrease in pervious land areas, an increase in impervious areas, and enhanced
efficiency of surface runoff. The influx of commercial, residential, and industrial products into an urban
area often brings new pollutants that result in concentrations of these pollutants in stormwater greater
than before urbanization has occurred. Additional impervious areas can make pollutants more easy to
wash off the surface and quicken their conveyance through the watershed. The cumulative effect is that
urbanization results in much larger loads (with the possible exception of nutrients found in runoff coming
from irrigated agricultural land), and in the delivery of certain pollutants, such as petroleum-based
products not normally found in nonurban and nonindustrial runoff.
The rate of runoff and the extent of pollutant loads depend on the hydrologic conditions that lead to
stormwater runoff. Some investigators hypothesize that pollutant loads being delivered by the urban
stormwater system are affected by the period between storms (storm separation). They suggest that this
period provides time for pollutants in the atmosphere and from other sources to build up on impervious
areas. However, the Denver Regional Urban Runoff Program (DURP) studies (Mustard et al., 1985)
conducted by the USGS did not support this hypothesis beyond a 2- to 5-day dry buildup period. This is
not to say that the above-mentioned hypothesis is not true for other regions of United States.
4.2 Denver Area Precipitation Statistics
Studies of the precipitation for 36 years from the Denver Stapleton Rain Gage have revealed several
pertinent hydrologic patterns. Analyses show that the average storm based on 6-hour separation period
has an 11-hour duration and that the average time interval between storms (storm separation) is
11.5 days. However, the great majority of storms are less than 11 hours in duration. The limited number
of storms with long rainfall periods within the data base tend to increase this average. Table SQ-7
summarizes the relationship between total storm depth and the annual number of storms. As the table
shows, about 46 of a total of 75 storm events that occur on an annual average basis, or 61 percent, have
less than 0.1 inches of precipitation. These storms produce practically no runoff. The table also shows
that about 22 of the 30 remaining runoff-producing events, or 75 percent, total between 0.1 inches and
0.5 inches of depth. If runoff can be controlled from most of the storms that range 0.1 inches to 0.5
10-2005 SQ-21
inches in precipitation, the overall treatment of stormwater runoff in the Denver region should be very
effective.
Table SQ-7—Number of Rainfall Events in the Denver Area

Total Rainfall Depth Average Annual
(inches) Number of Storm Events
0.0 to 0.1 46.
0.1 to 0.5 22.
0.5 to 1.0 4.7
1.0 to 1.5 1.5
1.5 to 2.0 0.60
2.0 to 3.0 0.30
3.0 to 4.0 0.19
4.0 to 5.0 0.028
>5.0 0
Total 75.318
4.3 Diminishing Returns with Increasing Size of Design Storms
The above analysis and other studies indicate that small-sized, frequently occurring storm events account
for the predominate number of events that result in stormwater runoff from urban catchments.
Consequently, these frequent storms also account for a significant portion of the annual pollutant loads.
Capture and treatment of the stormwater from these small and frequently occurring storms is the
recommended design approach for water quality enhancement, as opposed to flood control facility
designs that focus on less frequent, larger events. Incorporating both sets of criteria into a single
stormwater management facility is not only possible, but is encouraged.
The analysis of precipitation data collected from 1948 through 1984 (36 years) at the Denver Stapleton
Rain Gage revealed a relationship between the percent imperviousness of a watershed and the capture
volume needed to significantly reduce stormwater pollutants (Urbonas, Guo, and Tucker, 1990).
Subsequent studies (Guo and Urbonas, 1996 and Urbonas, Roesner, and Guo, 1996) of precipitation
resulted in a recommendation by the Water Environment Federation (1998) that stormwater quality
treatment facilities (i.e., structural BMPs) be based on the capture and treatment of runoff from storms
ranging in size from “mean” to “maximized” storms. These two extremes represent 70 to 90 percentile
storms. As a result of these studies, water quality facilities for the front range of Colorado are
recommended to capture and treat the 80th percentile runoff event. Capturing and properly treating this
volume was estimated to remove between 80 and 90 percent of the annual TSS load, while doubling the
capture volume was estimated to increase the removal rate by only 1 to 2 percent.
While bigger may appear to be better in the case of stormwater quality, larger water quality detention
SQ-22 10-2005
basins can provide less holding time for the predominant number of smaller storms. Larger basins can
result in less net reduction of pollutants than is obtained when using the recommended 80th percentile
capture volume that can be obtained from Figure SQ-2. Storms larger than the 80th percentile events still
receive some treatment when their capacity is exceeded by larger storms, but at a somewhat lower
efficiency. Thus, the law of diminishing returns for cost-effective pollutant removal takes effect, not only
because of the large number of small storms found in the total population of storms, but because the first
flush of runoff for larger storm is also captured and that pollutant removal continues to occur for in-line
capture basins when the runoff exceeds their design capacity.
4.4 Determining the Water Quality Capture Volume
4.4.1 Use of Directly Connected Impervious Area

The procedures described in the RAINFALL and in the RUNOFF chapters of Volume 1 of the Manual are
intended for the design of drainages and flood facilities that prevent damage to property and help protect
human life. These procedures show that the depth of rainfall produced from a design storm varies
somewhat throughout the Denver region and that runoff is a function of total imperviousness. Water
quality enhancement focuses more on the smaller events that deliver frequent flow pulses and pollutant
loads to the receiving waters. The runoff volume for smaller events is especially sensitive to the
impervious area that is hydraulically connected to the stormwater runoff system.
The impervious portion of a watershed determines the runoff volume that needs to be used for the design
of water quality facilities, and the percentage of impervious surface therefore becomes important in the
design of structural BMPs. The RUNOFF chapter of the Manual, Volume 1, includes the methodology for
calculating basin imperviousness. This procedure needs to be modified, however, when using the
practice of minimizing directly connected impervious areas in combination with extended detention
basins, retention ponds, wetlands, and other practices depended on a design water quality capture
volume. Whenever applicable, the needed modifications are described in the appropriate chapters of this
volume of the Manual.
4.4.2 Water Quality Capture Volume (WQCV)

All structural BMPs recommended in this volume of Manual are based on the 80th percentile event.
Specific guidance for finding the needed WQCV is provided in each BMP types’ design section. This
WQCV varies with the type of BMP used and is based on the time it takes to fully drain the brim-full
WQCV. Figure SQ-2 summarizes the WQCV requirements as a function of the tributary catchments total
imperviousness as a ratio of the total area of the catchment for 6-, 12-, 24-, and 40-hour drain times of
the WQCV.
10-2005 SQ-23
Figure SQ-2 is appropriate for use in Colorado’s high plains near the foothills. For other portions of
Colorado or of United States, the WQCV obtained from this figure can be adjusted using the following
relationships:
WQCV
WQCVO = d 6
0.43
in which,
WQCV = Water quality capture volume taken from Figure SQ-2

WQCVO = Water quality capture volume outside the Denver region
d6 = Depth of average runoff producing storm from Figure SQ-3 (watershed inches)
Once the WQCV in watershed inches is found from Figure SQ-2, then determine the required storage
volume in acre-feet as follows:
⎡WQCV ⎤
Required storage = ⎢ ( Area)
⎣ 12 ⎥⎦
in which,
Required storage = Required storage volume in acre-feet

Area = The tributary catchment’s area upstream in acres
The independent variable in Figure SQ-2 is the total imperviousness ratio (i.e., i=Iwq/100) of the tributary
watershed (catchment). The chapter on RUNOFF in Volume 1 of the Manual contains guidance for how
to find the total imperviousness of a watershed and its use is recommended. Figures SQ-4,SQ-5 and
SQ-6 are duplicated in this chapter to help the reader estimate the imperviousness of single family
residential areas. Note that these figures require the knowledge of the average housing densities,
types of housing, and average human occupied total square footage of the houses in the area to find
the imperviousness of these areas.
SQ-24 10-2005
0.50
0.45 40-hour Drain Time
0.40
24-hour Drain Time
0.35
WQCV (watershed inches)
WQCV=a*(0.91i 3 -1.19i 2 +0.78i)

0.30
6-hr drain time a = 0.7
0.25 24-hr drain time a = 0.9
0.20
0.10
6-hour Drain Time
0.05
0.00
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Total Imperviousness Ratio (i = I wq /100 )
Figure SQ-2—Water Quality Capture Volume (WQCV), 80th Percentile Runoff Event
10-2005 SQ-25
Figure SQ-3—Map of the Average Runoff Producing Storm’s Precipitation Depth in the United
States, in inches (Ref.: Driscoll et.al., 1989)
SQ-26 10-2005
Figure SQ-4—Watershed Imperviousness, Single Family Residential Ranch Style Houses
10-2005 SQ-27
Figure SQ-5—Watershed Imperviousness, Single Family Residential Split-Level Houses
SQ-28 10-2005
Figure SQ-6—Watershed Imperviousness, Single Family Residential Two-Story Houses
10-2005 SQ-29
5.0 REFERENCES
American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) and Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1999.
Development of Performance Measures, Task 3.1–Technical Memorandum, Determining Urban
Stormwater Best Management Practice (BMP) Removal Efficiencies. Prepared by URS Greiner
Woodward Clyde, Urban Drainage and Flood Control District. Washington, DC: EPA.
International Stormwater Best Management Practices (BMP) Database. www.bmpdatabase.org.
Sponsors of the Database include ASCE, EPA, Water Environment Research Foundation
(WERF), ASCE Environmental and Water Resources Institute (EWRI), USEPA, Federal Highway
Administration (FHWA) and the American Public Works Association (APWA).
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE). 2002. Urban
Stormwater BMP Performance Monitoring, A Guidance Manual for Meeting the National
Stormwater BMP Database Requirements. Prepared by GeoSyntec Consultants and Urban
Drainage and Flood Control District. Washington, DC: EPA.
SQ-30 10-2005
DRAINAGE CRITERIA MANUAL (V. 3) BMP PLANNING FOR NEW DEVELOPMENT
AND SIGNIFICANT REDEVELOPMENT
BMP PLANNING FOR NEW DEVELOPMENT AND

SIGNIFICANT REDEVELOPMENT
CONTENTS
Section Page
ND-
1.0 BMP PLANNING FOR NEW DEVELOPMENT AND SIGNIFICANT REDEVELOPMENT ............. 1
1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................. 1
1.2 Four-Step Process.............................................................................................................. 1
1.3 Other BMPs ........................................................................................................................ 4
1.4 Implementing Step 1. Employ Runoff Reduction Techniques ........................................... 4
1.4.1 Benefits of Reducing Imperviousness ................................................................... 4
1.4.2 BMPs for Minimizing Effective Imperviousness..................................................... 5
1.4.3 Applying MDCIA to a Site ...................................................................................... 6
1.4.4 Calculating Effective Imperviousness.................................................................... 7
1.4.5 Application Examples ............................................................................................ 8
1.5 Implementing Step 2. Provide Water Quality Capture Volume (WQCV).......................... 12
1.5.1 Benefits of WQCV Facilities................................................................................. 13
1.5.2 Types of WQCV Facilities.................................................................................... 13
1.5.3 Application Examples for Porous Pavement and Porous Landscape Detention. 15
1.5.4 Guidance for Selecting and Locating WQCV Facilities ....................................... 20
1.5.5 Incorporating WQCV into Stormwater Quantity Detention Basins ...................... 23
1.5.6 Separate Presedimentation Facilities .................................................................. 24
Tables
Table ND-1—Illustration of Selection and Location Options for WQCV Facilities for the
Development Parcel on Figure ND-9 ................................................................................... 23
Figures
Figure ND-1—Imperviousness Adjustments for Level 1 and 2 of MDCIA.................................................... 9
Figure ND-2—Example of Minimized Directly Connected Impervious Areas–
Residential and Commercial ................................................................................................ 10
Figure ND-3—Examples of MDCIA for a Multi-Family Residential Development ...................................... 11
Figure ND-4—Typical Applications of Modular Block and Porous Pavement ............................................ 12
Figure ND-5—Example of Porous Landscape Detention for a Single
Family Residential Development ......................................................................................... 16
Figure ND-6—Examples of Porous Pavement Detention for a
Multi-Family Residential Development ................................................................................ 17
Figure ND-6A—Examples of Porous Landscape Detention for a Multi-Family
Residential Development ..................................................................................................... 18
Figure ND-7—Examples of Porous Pavement and Porous Landscape Detention
for a Commercial Development (Parking Lot)...................................................................... 19
Figure ND-8—Decision Tree for Identifying Potential Individual Site BMPs .............................................. 21
Figure ND-9—Illustration of Selection and Location Options For WQCV Facilities ................................... 22
10-2005 ND-I
Urban Drainage And Flood Control District
1.0 BMP PLANNING FOR NEW DEVELOPMENT AND SIGNIFICANT REDEVELOPMENT
1.1 Overview
This chapter contains guidance for the selection and siting of structural best management practices
(BMPs) for new development. The guidance is provided within the context of a four-step process that may
be followed for new site developments and significant redevelopments.
Detailed descriptions, sizing and design criteria, and design procedures for these BMPs are provided in
the chapter titled STRUCTURAL BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES.
The selection of BMPs for a development site is intended to be made collaboratively as a result of
coordination between the developer and the local jurisdiction. It is recommended that discussions
regarding proposed BMPs occur early in each project between the developer’s planner and engineer and
municipal staff.
1.2 Four-Step Process
The following four-step process is recommended for selecting structural BMPs in newly developing and
redeveloping urban areas:
• Step 1. Employ Runoff Reduction Practices. To reduce runoff peaks and volumes from
urbanizing areas, employ a practice generally termed “minimizing directly connected impervious
areas” (MDCIA). The principal behind MDCIA is twofold -- to reduce impervious areas and to
route runoff from impervious surfaces over grassy areas to slow down runoff and promote
infiltration. The benefits are less runoff, less stormwater pollution, and less cost for drainage
infrastructure. There are several approaches to reduce the effective imperviousness of a
development site:
- Reduced Pavement Area. The use of smaller roadway cross sections and smaller paved
parking lots is encouraged. Sometimes, creative site layout can reduce the extent of paved
areas, thereby saving on initial capital cost of pavement and then saving on pavement
maintenance, repair, and replacement over time.
- Porous Pavement. The use of porous pavement or reinforced turf as described in the Porous
Pavement section of the STRUCTURAL BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES chapter can
significantly reduce site imperviousness. This practice can reduce the extent and size of the
downstream storm sewers and detention. The Porous Pavement section provides a chart
suggesting reduced effective imperviousness for catchments using porous pavement.
- Grass Buffers. Draining impervious areas over grass buffers slows down runoff and
encourages infiltration, in effect reducing the impact of the impervious area.
10-2005 ND-1
BMP PLANNING FOR NEW DEVELOPMENT DRAINAGE CRITERIA MANUAL (V. 3)
- Grass Swales. The use of grass swales instead of storm sewers, like grass buffers, slows
down runoff and promotes infiltration, also reducing effective imperviousness. It also can
reduce the size and cost of downstream storm sewers and detention.
Implementing these approaches on a new development site is discussed further in Subsection

1.3. This subsection provides a procedure for estimating a reduced imperviousness based on the
use of grass buffers and swales. Techniques for reducing imperviousness and runoff volumes are
structural in nature and are described in detail in the following sections of the STRUCTURAL
BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES chapter:
Section Structural BMP

1.0 Grass Buffer
2.0 Grass Swale
3.0 Porous Pavement
4.0 Porous Pavement Detention
5.0 Porous Landscape Detention
7.0 Sand Filter Extended Detention
10.0 Constructed Wetland Channel
One additional practice that may be worth considering in commercial and industrial developments and
high-rise residential buildings is the use of green roofs. Under Colorado’s climate green roofs will
need supplemented irrigation. There are a number of green roof systems on the market and this
Manual makes no attempt to distinguish between them.
• Step 2. Provide Water Quality Capture Volume (WQCV). A fundamental requirement for any site
addressing stormwater quality is to provide WQCV. One or more of six types of water quality
basins, each draining slowly to provide for long-term settling of sediment particles, may be
selected. Subsection 1.4 provides information on selecting and configuring one or more of these
WQCV facilities at a site. These six BMPs are described in detail in the following sections of the
STRUCTURAL BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES chapter:

1.0 Porous Pavement Detention
2.0 Porous Landscape Detention
3.0 Extended Detention Basin
4.0 Sand Filter Extended Detention Basin
5.0 Constructed Wetland Basin
6.0 Retention Pond
ND-2 10-2005
• Step 3. Stabilize Drainageways. Drainageway, natural and manmade, erosion can be a major
source of sediment and associated constituents, such as phosphorus. Natural drainageways are
often subject to bed and bank erosion when urbanizing areas increase the frequency, rate, and
volume of runoff. It is important that drainageways adjacent to or traversing development sites be
stabilized. One of three basic methods of stabilization may be selected.
- Constructed Grass, Riprap, or Concrete-Lined Channel. This method of channel stabilization

has been in practice for some time; it is described in Volume 2 of the Manual. The water
quality benefit associated with these channels is the reduction of severe bed and bank
erosion that can occur in the absence of a stabilized channel. On the other hand, the hard-
lined low flow channels that are often used do not offer much in the way of water quality
enhancement or wetland habitat. The Urban Drainage and Flood Control District does not
recommend the use of riprap or concrete lined flood conveyance channels, but does
recommend the use of low-flow channels lined with soil-riprap.
- Stabilized Natural Channel. Channel stabilization is also addressed in Volume 2 of the

Manual. However, in practice, many natural drainageways in and adjacent to new
developments in the Denver area are frequently left in an undisturbed condition. While this
may be positive in terms of retaining desirable riparian vegetation and habitat, urban
development causes the channel to become destabilized. When degradation occurs in these
drainageways, significant erosion, loss of riparian and aquatic habitat, and elevated levels of
sediment and associated pollutants can result. Therefore, it is recommended that some level
of stream stabilization always be provided. Small grade control structures sized for a 5-year
or larger runoff event are often an effective means of establishing a mild slope for the
baseflow channel and arresting stream degradation. Severe bends or cut banks may also
need to be stabilized. Such efforts to stabilize a natural waterway also preserves and
promotes riparian vegetation which provide paybacks in terms of enhanced aesthetics,
habitat, and water quality.
One additional method of drainageway stabilization gives special attention to stormwater quality
and is described in the following section of the STRUCTURAL BEST MANAGEMENT
PRACTICES chapter:

10.0 Constructed Wetland Channel.
• Step 4. Consider Need for Industrial and Commercial BMPs. If a new development or significant
redevelopment activity is planned for an industrial or commercial site, the need for specialized
BMPs must be considered. Several approaches are described in the following sections of the
STRUCTURAL BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES chapter:
10-2005 ND-3

11.0 Covering of Storage/Handling Areas
12.0 Spill Containment and Control
Guidance for planning of industrial and commercial BMPs is provided in the chapter titled
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES. In addition,
nonstructural practices applicable to industrial and commercial activities are described in the
chapter on NONSTRUCTURAL BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES.
1.3 Other BMPs
The structural BMPs identified above were selected after a comprehensive screening of known structural
BMPs with representatives of a number of cities and counties in the Denver metropolitan area, Colorado
Department of Transportation, Colorado Water Quality Control Division, industry, homebuilders, and a
municipality located outside the Denver metropolitan area. Final selection by this group was based on the
review of documentation on potential effectiveness in a semiarid climate, local applicability, maintenance
considerations, and cost.
Several other BMPs were considered but were not included in Volume 3 at this time. These include
manufactured devices such as water quality vaults and inlets, infiltration trenches, oil/grease separators,
fabric inserts for inlets, and stream buffer setbacks. Some of these BMPs show promise but need further
independent research to determine their pollutant removal effectiveness in a semiarid climate and to
develop cost-effective design criteria to insure that they are properly designed, constructed, and
maintained. One other consideration is that many of these devices do not provide a WQCV with slow
releases for frequently occurring runoff events. As a result, they do not provide the reduction in erosion
forces that occurs in downstream receiving waters after urbanization that is provided by facilities that have
a WQCV and slow drain times for this volume. When additional BMPs are field tested, and as supporting
information becomes available, they may be added to the Manual.
1.4 Implementing Step 1. Employ Runoff Reduction Techniques
1.4.1 Benefits of Reducing Imperviousness

Reducing imperviousness offers the following benefits:
• Increased infiltration and decreased rate and volume of site runoff
• Decreased WQCV and, in turn decreased size of required WQCV facilities
• Decreased peak runoff rates and volumes for downstream conveyance and detention facilities
• Reduced need for irrigation
• Less curb and gutter
ND-4 10-2005
• Smaller storm sewer systems
• Decreased pavement areas
• Decreased runoff rates and volumes further downstream in watershed, especially if MDCIA is
used on a widespread basis
1.4.2 BMPs for Minimizing Effective Imperviousness

Described next are structural BMPs that minimize effective imperviousness.
Grass Buffer (GB)
Uniformly graded and densely vegetated area

of turf grass. This BMP requires sheet flow to
promote filtration, infiltration, and settling to
reduce runoff pollutants.
Grass Swale (GS)
Densely vegetated drainageway with low-

pitched side slopes that collects and slowly
conveys runoff. Design of shallow longitudinal
slope and cross-section size forces the flow to
be slow and shallow, thereby facilitating
sedimentation while limiting erosion.
10-2005 ND-5
Porous Pavement (PP)
Porous pavement consists of a porous

pavement layer that is underlain by gravel and
sand layers in most cases. This BMP is
intended to be used in parking lots and in low
traffic areas to accommodate vehicles while
facilitating stormwater infiltration near its
source. Section 4 of the STRUCTURAL BEST
MANAGEMENT PRACTICES chapter
provides technical guidance for a number of
different types of porous pavement.
1.4.3 Applying MDCIA to a Site

Minimizing directly connected impervious area requires a basic change in land development design
philosophy. This change seeks to reduce paved areas, use porous pavement and direct stormwater
runoff to landscaped areas, grass buffer strips, and grass-lined swales to slow down the rate of runoff,
reduce runoff volumes, attenuate peak flows, and encourage filtering and infiltration of stormwater.
Traditional land development practices have not focused on water quality enhancement. Instead, they
promoted runoff from rooftops, parking lots, driveways, and roads to quickly flow to a curb and gutter and
to a formalized stormwater conveyance system. This approach to drainage concentrates runoff quickly,
which results in a fast responding system, increased runoff volumes, and relatively large peak runoff rates
during small storms.
Minimizing DCIAs can be made an integral part of landscape and drainage planning for any development.
Roofs can be of the green roof type, drainage from rooftop collection systems can direct flow to
landscaped areas, infiltration areas such as porous landscape detention and porous pavement, grassed
buffer strips, and to grass swales. Instead of using solid curbing, eliminate curbing or use slotted curbing
along with stabilized grass shoulders and swales. Residential driveways can be porous pavement or the
runoff from them can be redirected from flowing directly into the street. Large parking lots can reduce
DCIAs by using porous pavement to encourage local infiltration or storage.
Site slopes should be capable of directing stormwater runoff by gravity in a sheet flow away from
buildings, roads, and parking lots toward grass-covered or porous pavement covered areas. The runoff
then needs to flow as a sheet over these porous surfaces before it reaches swales, storage, stormwater
collection, and stormwater conveyance systems. As a result, in areas of high permeability soils
(Hydrologic Soil Class A and B soils), the ground can provide for infiltration of large portions of surface
runoff. Where less permeable soils are present, significant runoff losses can also be achieved, while the
ND-6 10-2005
use of sand trenches with underdrains under grass swales can be used to reduce the nuisance of
standing water.
Steep sites with average terrain slopes exceeding 4 to 5 percent may not lend themselves well to
implementing some aspects of some of these BMPs. Some of the difficulties can be dealt with by using
terracing and retaining walls. Nevertheless, most sites with general terrain slopes flatter than 4 to 5
percent should be suitable for this family of BMPs; the flatter the better.
Minimizing DCIAs can be implemented in varying degrees. Two general levels associated with minimizing
DCIAs have been identified for the purpose of the Manual and are described below:
• Level 1. The primary intent is to direct the runoff from impervious surfaces to flow over grass-
covered areas and for porous pavement, and to provide sufficient travel time so as to
encourage the removal of suspended solids before runoff leaves the site, enters a curb and
gutter, or enters another stormwater collection system. Thus, at Level 1, all impervious
surfaces are made to drain over grass buffer strips before reaching a stormwater conveyance
system.
• Level 2. As an adjunct to Level 1, this level replaces solid street curb and gutter systems with
no curb or slotted curbing and low-velocity grass-lined swales and pervious street shoulders.
Conveyance systems and storm sewer inlets will still be needed to collect runoff at
downstream intersections and crossings where stormwater flow rates exceed the capacity of
the swales. Small culverts will be needed at street crossings and at individual driveways until
inlets are provided to convey the flow to a storm sewer.
1.4.4 Calculating Effective Imperviousness

The first step in estimating the magnitude of runoff from a site is to first estimate the site’s
imperviousness. The total imperviousness of a site is the weighted average of individual areas of like
imperviousness. For instance, according to Table RO-3 in the RUNOFF chapter of Volume 1 of the
Manual, paved streets (and parking lots) have an imperviousness of 100-percent; drives, walks and roofs
have an imperviousness of 90-percent; and lawn areas have an imperviousness of 0-percent. The total
imperviousness of a site can be determined taking an area-weighted average of the imperviousness of
the street, walk, roof, and lawn areas.
Structural BMPs for minimizing imperviousness impact this calculation in two ways. First, the use of
porous pavement reduces the imperviousness associated with parking areas and driveways built using
porous pavement from 100- and 96-percent, to a much lower value that can be estimated using Figure
PP-1 of the STRUCTURAL BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES chapter. Second, the use of grass
buffers and grass swales provides a reduction in imperviousness according to Figure ND-1. This figure
represents the reduction in imperviousness associated with Level 1 and Level 2 MDCIA as discussed
10-2005 ND-7
above. Grass buffers and/or grass swales are to be configured according to the design procedure
documented in the STRUCTURAL BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES chapter.
1.4.5 Application Examples

The following figures provide a number of illustrations of how the principle of MDCIA can be applied to
development sites. Figure ND-2 shows an example of MDCIA for a residential and commercial site.
Figure ND-3 shows an example for a multi-family residential site. Figure ND-4 shows typical application
examples of modular block porous pavement.
The Total Percent of Watershed Imperviousness for the traditional residential layout in Figure ND-2 is
approximately 47%. Using porous pavement and a grass swale, as shown at the bottom of the figure,
reduces the Total Percent of Watershed Imperviousness to 34%. This shows that the inclusion of BMPs
can significantly reduce total imperviousness. Additional BMP benefits are achieved when the user
determines the Impervious Percent to Use with WQCV in Figure ND-1 because the MDCIA layout allows
the use of the Level 2 MDCIA curve. The resulting Impervious Percent to Use with WQCV values for the
traditional residential layout and the residential MDCIA layout are 47% and 20%, respectively.
ND-8 10-2005
100
90
Level 1
MDCIA
80
Level 0
Percent to Use With WQCV I wq
70 Traditional
Development
Practice
60
50
40
30 Level 2
MDCIA
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Total Percent of Watershed Imperviousness I a
Figure ND-1—Imperviousness Adjustments for Level 1 and 2 of MDCIA
10-2005 ND-9
Figure ND-2—Example of Minimized Directly Connected Impervious Areas–Residential and

Commercial
ND-10 10-2005
Figure ND-3—Examples of MDCIA for a Multi-Family Residential Development
10-2005 ND-11
Figure ND-4—Typical Applications of Modular Block and Porous Pavement
ND-12 10-2005
1.5 Implementing Step 2. Provide Water Quality Capture Volume (WQCV)
1.5.1 Benefits of WQCV Facilities

These BMPs are designed to capture and provide treatment for a specific volume of stormwater runoff
(about half of the runoff from a 2-year storm). This volume is equivalent to the runoff from an 80th
percentile storm, meaning that 80 percent of the most frequently occurring storms are fully captured and
treated and larger events are partially treated. Detention volume drain times range from 6- to 40-hours,
depending on the type of facility. The primary pollutant removal mechanism consists of physical settling of
suspended sediments and associated adsorbed pollutants. Secondary pollutant removal mechanisms
include filtering, biological uptake, and adsorption. In addition to water treatment, facilities with a WQCV
mitigate to some extent the effects of hydrologic changes that take place when lands urbanize. These
changes have been clearly linked to erosion and habitual degradation in the receiving streams.
The WQCV treatment facilities recommended in this Manual because they have demonstrated proven
results in the Denver area, are relatively cost-effective and are necessary at any development or
redevelopment site. Runoff from 100-percent of the impervious surfaces of a site must flow through a
properly designed installation of one or more of the WQCV BMPs that are listed herein. Alternate designs
may be considered, but they must have equivalent functional requirements of these six BMPs, including
WQCV and its drain times.
1.5.2 Types of WQCV Facilities

A brief description of the six types of WQCV facilities follows.
Porous Pavement Detention (PPD)
Porous pavement detention consists of

modular block porous pavement that is
installed flat and is provided with a 2-inch
deep detention zone above its surface to
temporarily store the WQCV from the
tributary drainage area including its own
surface. Runoff infiltrates into the void
spaces of the gravel base course through the
sand filter and slowly exits through an
underdrain.
10-2005 ND-13
Porous Landscape Detention (PLD)
Porous landscape detention consists of a low

lying vegetated area underlain by a sand bed
with an underdrain. A shallow surcharge zone
exists above the porous landscape detention
for temporary storage of the WQCV. This
BMP allows small amounts of WQCV to be
provided on parking lots or adjacent to
buildings without requiring the set aside of
significant developable land areas.
Extended Detention Basin (EDB)
An extended detention basin is appropriate for

larger sites and is designed to totally empty
out sometime after stormwater runoff ends.
The extended detention basin uses a much
smaller outlet than a flood control detention
basin, which extends the emptying time for
the more frequently occurring runoff events to
facilitate pollutant removal.
Sand Filter Extended Detention Basin

(SFB)
A sand filter extended detention basin

consists of a sand bed and underdrain
system. Above the vegetated sand bed is an
extended detention basin sized to capture the
WQCV. A sand filter extended detention basin
provides pollutant removal through settling
and filtering and is generally suited to offline,
onsite configurations where there is no base
flow and the sediment load is relatively low. It
should not be put into use until the upstream
catchment has been fully stabilized.
ND-14 10-2005
Constructed Wetland Basin (CWB)
A constructed wetland basin is appropriate for

large catchments and is a shallow retention
pond which requires a perennial supply of
water to permit the growth of rushes, willows,
cattails, and reeds. It treats runoff by slowing
it down to allow time for settling and biological
uptake.
Retention Pond (RP)
A retention pond is appropriate for larger

catchments. It has a permanent pool of water
that is replaced with stormwater, in part or in
total, during storm runoff events. In addition, a
temporary extended detention volume is
provided above this permanent pool to
capture storm runoff and enhance
sedimentation. It requires a perennial supply
of water to maintain the pool.
1.5.3 Application Examples for Porous Pavement and Porous Landscape Detention
Porous pavement and porous landscape detention provide an opportunity to incorporate WQCV into a
new land development site or a redevelopment site while minimizing the impact on developable area. Just
as the principle of MDCIA requires a change in drainage philosophy, so does the application of porous
pavement and porous landscape detention. These BMPs need to be applied on a relatively small scale
and are ideally suited to small sites or individual small sub-catchment areas of large sites.
The following figures provide a number of illustrations of how porous pavement and porous landscape
detention can be applied in a development site. Figure ND-5 shows an example for a residential site.
Figures ND-6 and ND-6A show an example for a multi-family residential site, and Figure ND-7 shows an
example for a commercial site parking lot.
10-2005 ND-15
Figure ND-5—Example of Porous Landscape Detention for a Single Family Residential Development
ND-16 10-2005
Or Porous
Pavement
Or Porous
Pavement
Figure ND-6—Examples of Porous Pavement Detention for a

Multi-Family Residential Development
10-2005 ND-17
Figure ND-6A—Examples of Porous Landscape Detention for a Multi-Family Residential

Development
ND-18 10-2005
Figure ND-7—Examples of Porous Pavement and Porous Landscape Detention

for a Commercial Development (Parking Lot)
10-2005 ND-19
1.5.4 Guidance for Selecting and Locating WQCV Facilities

Figure ND-8 depicts a decision tree for screening potential BMPs for a site based on drainage catchment
area and whether water is available to satisfy evapotranspiration requirements. Porous pavements and
porous landscape detention facilities are generally suited for small drainage areas (i.e. typically less than
1.0 acres); however, larger subwatersheds can be subdivided into individual drainage sub-catchment
areas meeting this limitation. There are three general types of BMPs on this figure. One group provides
for surface runoff volume reduction, the second for WQCC and the third provides the benefits of both.
Laying out WQCV facilities within a development site and watershed requires thought and planning.
Often, this decision-making occurs during a master planning process undertaken by local jurisdictions and
the District. Outfall system plans and other reports may depict a recommended approach for
implementing WQCV on a watershed basis. Such reports may call for a few large regional WQCV
facilities, smaller sub-regional facilities, or alternatively an on-site approach. It is always a good idea to
find out if a master planning study has been completed that addresses water quality and to attempt to
follow the plan’s recommendations.
The following guidance is for areas where a master plan addressing water quality has not been
completed. One of the questions involved in laying out WQCV facilities on a site is whether to locate a
BMP onstream or offstream. Onstream refers to locating a BMP on a waterway that traverses a site such
that all of the runoff from the upstream watershed flows through the facility. A single onstream BMP can
treat both site runoff and runoff generated in any upstream offsite catchment areas that are part of that
watershed. Locating BMPs offstream requires that all onsite catchment areas flow though a BMP prior to
entering the waterway. Offstream BMPs do not provide treatment of runoff from any upstream drainage
catchment areas.
Onstream WQCV facilities are only recommended if the offsite drainage catchment area tributary to the
drainageway has less impervious area than the onsite drainage catchment’s impervious area tributary to
the same drainageway. Nevertheless, onstream WQCV facilities must be designed to serve the
entire upstream watershed, including any catchment areas upstream of the development, based
on future development conditions. This recommendation is true even if upstream developments have
installed their own WQCV facilities.
Figure ND-9 provides an illustration of selection and location options for WQCV facilities based on the
principles discussed above. Table ND-1 indicates the BMP options for the four watershed areas shown in
Figure ND-9.
ND-20 10-2005
DEPTH TO BEDROCK BEGIN

(OR CLAY LAYER),
OR SEASONAL HIGH NO
NO WATER TABLE > 5 FEET, TRIBUTARY IMPERVIOUS AREA > 1
AND NRCS TYPE A, B, OR
YES
C SOILS BELOW BMP’S
BOTTOM? NO
TRIBUTARY IMPERVIOUS AREA > 5
YES
YES
NO
WATER AVAILABLE FOR ET?
YES
GREEN ROOF WITH IRRIGATION
GRASS BUFFER (GB)
GRASS SWALE (GS)
POROUS PAVEMENT (PP) WITH INFILTRATION
POROUS PAVEMENT (PP) WITH UNDERDRAINS
¡ POROUS PAVEMENT DETENTION (PPD) WITH INFILTRATION
¡ POROUS PAVEMENT DETENTION (PPD) WITH UNDERDRAINS
¡ POROUS LANDSCAPE DETENTION (PLD) WITH INFILTRATION
¡ POROUS LANDSCAPE DETENTION (PLD) WITH UNDERDRAINS
§ § § EXTENDED DETENTION BASIN (EDB) ***
¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ SAND FILTER DETENTION BASIN (EDB)
§ CONSTRUCTED WETLAND BASIN (CWB)
§ RETENTION POND (RP)
CONSTRUCTED WETLAND CHANNEL (CWC)
Legend: Provides for reductions in runoff volume, along with some reduction in pollutant EMCs
¡ Provides for reductions in runoff volume and the recommended WQCV
§ Provides recommended WQCV
*** EDBs are not very suitable for catchments with less than 5 acres of impervious tributary area.
The International BMP Database reports EDBs provide as much as 30% reductions
in annual runoff volume.
Figure ND-8—Decision Tree for Identifying Potential Individual Site BMPs
10-2005 ND-21
Figure ND-9—Illustration of Selection and Location Options For WQCV Facilities
ND-22 10-2005
Table ND-1—Illustration of Selection and Location Options for WQCV Facilities for the
Development Parcel on Figure ND-9
Minimum Average Drainage
Watershed Onstream Number of Area for Sizing
Number or BMP Options BMP Each BMP, acre
Offstream Installations
1 Offstream Porous Pavement Detention 1 0.8
Porous Landscape Detention 1 0.8
2 Offstream Porous Pavement Detention 24 1
Porous Landscape Detention 24 1
Extended Detention Basin 2 12
Sand Filter Extended Detention Basin 2 12
Onstream Extended Detention Basin 1 70
Constructed Wetland Basin 1 70
Retention Pond 1 70
1.5.5 Incorporating WQCV into Stormwater Quantity Detention Basins

Wherever possible, it is recommended that WQCV facilities be incorporated into stormwater quantity
detention facilities. This is relatively straightforward for an extended detention basin, constructed wetland
basin, and a retention pond. When combined, the 2-, 5-, 10-, and/or 100-year detention levels are
provided above the WQCV and the outlet structure is designed to control two or three different releases.
Several figures in the section on TYPICAL STRUCTURAL BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES DETAILS
AND SPECIFICATIONS show examples of combined quality/quantity outlet structures. Stormwater
quantity detention could be provided above the WQCV for porous pavement and porous landscape
detention provided the drain times for the larger events.
Local jurisdictions in the Denver area use different approaches for sizing a combined water quality and
quantity detention facility. This varies from requiring no more than the 100-year detention volume even
though the WQCV is incorporated within it, to requiring the 100-year detention volume plus the full
WQCV. The Manual does not stipulate or recommend which policy should be used. When a local policy is
lacking and is being set, the Manual suggests the following approach as a minimum:
• Water Quality. The full WQCV is to be provided according to the design procedures documented
in the STRUCTURAL BMP chapter.
• Minor Storm. The full WQCV plus the full minor storm quantity detention volume is to be provided.
10-2005 ND-23
• 100-Year Storm or Other Major Storm Event. One-half the WQCV plus the full 100-year or other
major storm event, detention volume is to be provided.
However, local governments may have criteria different than that described above, and such criteria takes
precedence over the approach suggested herein. For instance, some jurisdictions require that the full
WQCV be added to the full 100-year detention volume and some require no more than the 100-year
detention volume even when WQCV is incorporated within the facility
At this time the Manual recommends that water quality detention not be incorporated into
underground detention facilities, such as installations of buried large-diameter pipe sections,
tanks, stone trenches, underground “infiltrating” devices, etc.
A new detention concept was evaluated that shows more promise in controlling the peak flow rates along
downstream waterways than the multi-stage designs described above. Full spectrum detention not only
addresses the WQCV for control water quality and runoff from frequently occurring runoff events, but
extends that control well for all return periods of runoff from 2-year to 100-year and closely matches the
peaks just downstream of the drain and when used in combination with multiples of full-spectrum
detention basins. See Volume 2, STORAGE chapter for details.
1.5.6 Separate Presedimentation Facilities

The design criteria shown in the Structural BMP section shows presedimentation forebays at the
upstream end of the extended detention basin, constructed wetland basin, and retention pond. The
purpose of the forebay is to settling out coarse sediment and skim off floatables prior to the main body of
the facility. An option to this approach is to install a separate facility upstream from the main WQCV
facility. If this option is selected, the recommended size is at least 20 percent of the WQCV and the
recommended drain time is 1 hour for the presedimentation forebay volume only. Using this approach,
the size of the main WQCV facility may be reduced by 10 percent, any requirement for sediment storage
in the main facility may be reduced by one-half, and the forebay within the main facility may be
eliminated.
It is extremely important that high sediment loading be controlled for porous pavement detention, porous
landscape detention, and sand filter extended detention basins. These facilities are best suited to being
brought on line at the end of the construction phase where disturbed ground has been established with
pavement or vegetation.
ND-24 10-2005
DRAINAGE CRITERIA MANUAL (V. 3) STRUCTURAL BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES
STRUCTURAL BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES

CONTENTS
Section Page
S-
STRUCTURAL BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES COVERED IN THIS MANUAL................... 1

Disclaimer ......................................................................................................................... 2
1.0 GRASS BUFFER (GB)...................................................................................................... 3
1.1 Description ............................................................................................................ 3
1.2 General Application ............................................................................................... 3
1.3 Advantages/Disadvantages................................................................................... 4
1.3.1 General...................................................................................................... 4
1.3.2 Physical Site Suitability.............................................................................. 4
1.3.3 Pollutant Removal ..................................................................................... 4
1.4 Design Considerations .......................................................................................... 4
1.5 Design Procedure and Criteria .............................................................................. 5
1.6 Design Example .................................................................................................... 6
2.0 GRASS SWALE (GS)—SEDIMENTATION FACILITY...................................................... 9
2.1 Description ............................................................................................................ 9
2.2 General Application ............................................................................................... 9
2.3 Advantages/Disadvantages................................................................................... 9
2.3.1 General...................................................................................................... 9
2.3.2 Physical Site Suitability............................................................................ 10
2.3.3 Pollutant Removal ................................................................................... 10
2.4 Design Considerations and Criteria .................................................................... 10
2.5 Design Procedure and Criteria ............................................................................ 10
2.6 Design Example .................................................................................................. 11
3.0 POROUS PAVEMENT (PP)............................................................................................ 15
3.1 Porous Pavement–General Description .............................................................. 15
3.1.1 Modular Block Pavement (MBP) ............................................................. 15
3.1.2 Cobblestone Block Pavement (CBP)....................................................... 16
3.1.3 Reinforced Grass Pavement (RGP) ........................................................ 16
3.1.4 Poured Porous Concrete Pavement (PCP) ............................................. 17
3.1.5 Porous Gravel Pavement (PGP) ............................................................. 17
3.2 Potential Applications .......................................................................................... 17
3.2.1 Modular Block Pavement and Cobble Block Pavement (MBP & CBP) ... 17
3.2.2 Reinforced Grass Pavement (RGP) ........................................................ 18
3.2.3 Porous Concrete Pavement (PCP).......................................................... 19
3.2.4 Porous Gravel Pavement (PGP) ............................................................. 19
3.3 Advantages/Disadvantages................................................................................. 20
3.3.1 General.................................................................................................... 20
3.3.2 Physical Site Suitability and Need for Underdrains ................................. 20
3.3.4 Reduction in Effective Site Imperviousness and Stormwater Runoff
Volume .................................................................................................... 21
2008-04 S-i
STRUCTURAL BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES DRAINAGE CRITERIA MANUAL (V. 3)
3.4 Design Considerations ........................................................................................22

3.4.1 MBP and CBP Installations......................................................................22
3.4.2 RGP Installations .....................................................................................22
3.4.3 PCP Installations .....................................................................................23
3.4.4 PGP Installations .....................................................................................23
3.5 Design Procedures and Criteria .........................................................................23
3.5.1.a Modular Block Pavement (MBP) Installations..........................................23
3.5.1.b Cobble Block Pavement (CBP) Installations............................................25
3.5.2 Reinforced Grass Pavement (RGP) Installations.....................................26
3.5.3 Porous Concrete Pavement (PCP) Installations. .....................................27
3.5.4 Porous Gravel Pavement (PGP) Installations..........................................28
3.6 Construction Phase .............................................................................................29
3.6.1 Preparation and Compaction of the Sub-base.........................................30
3.6.2 Preventing Clogging of Porous Pavement by Excess Sediment Loads...30
3.6.3 Geotextile Installation ..............................................................................31
3.6.4 Base Course and Sand Layer Installation ...............................................31
3.6.5 MBP and CBP Paver Installation .............................................................31
3.6.6 PCP Installation .......................................................................................32
3.6.7 RGP Installation .......................................................................................32
3.6.8 PGP Installation .......................................................................................32
3.7 Design Examples.................................................................................................33
3.7.1 Example for Calculating Effective Imperviousness for a
PGP Installation .......................................................................................33
3.7.2 Examples for the Design of Porous Pavements ......................................33
4.0 POROUS PAVEMENT DETENTION (PPD)....................................................................52
4.1 Description...........................................................................................................52
4.2 General Application .............................................................................................52
4.3 Advantages/Disadvantages .................................................................................52
4.5 Design Procedure and Criteria ............................................................................52
4.6 Design Example ..................................................................................................54
5.0 POROUS LANDSCAPE DETENTION (PLD)—SEDIMENTATION FACILITY ................58
5.1 Description...........................................................................................................58
5.2.1 Locating ...................................................................................................58
5.2.2 Example Application ................................................................................59
5.3.1 General ....................................................................................................59
5.3.2 Physical Site Suitability ............................................................................60
5.3.3 Pollutant Removal....................................................................................60
5.5 Design Procedure................................................................................................61
5.6 Vegetating the PLD Surface ................................................................................62
5.7 Design Example ..................................................................................................63
6.0 EXTENDED DETENTION BASIN (EDB)—SEDIMENTATION FACILITY.......................66
6.1 Description...........................................................................................................66
S-ii 2008-04
6.3.1 General.................................................................................................... 67
6.3.4 Aesthetics and Multiple Uses .................................................................. 67
6.4 Design Considerations ........................................................................................ 68
6.6 Design Example .................................................................................................. 71
7.0 SAND FILTER EXTENDED DETENTION BASIN (SFB) ................................................ 78
7.1 Description .......................................................................................................... 78
7.2 General Application ............................................................................................. 78
7.3.1 General.................................................................................................... 78
7.3.4 Maintenance Needs................................................................................. 79
7.5 Design Examples ................................................................................................ 80
8.0 CONSTRUCTED WETLANDS BASIN (CWB)—SEDIMENTATION FACILITY .............. 84
8.1 Description .......................................................................................................... 84
8.3.1 General.................................................................................................... 85
8.6 Design Example .................................................................................................. 88
9.0 RETENTION POND (RP)—SEDIMENTATION FACILITY.............................................. 95
9.1 Description .......................................................................................................... 95
9.3.1 General.................................................................................................... 95
9.3.4 Aesthetics and Multiple Uses .................................................................. 96
9.6 Design Example ................................................................................................ 100
10.0 CONSTRUCTED WETLANDS CHANNEL (CWC)—SEDIMENTATION FACILITY...... 107
10.1 Description ........................................................................................................ 107
10.2 General Application ........................................................................................... 107
10.3 Advantages/Disadvantages............................................................................... 108
10.3.1 General.................................................................................................. 108
10.3.2 Physical Site Suitability.......................................................................... 108
10.3.3 Pollutant Removal ................................................................................. 108
10.4 Design Considerations ...................................................................................... 109
10.5 Design Procedure and Criteria .......................................................................... 109
2008-04 S-iii
10.6 Design Example ................................................................................................110

11.0 COVERING OF STORAGE/HANDLING AREAS ..........................................................113
11.1 Description.........................................................................................................113
11.2 General Application ...........................................................................................113
11.3 Advantages/Disadvantages ...............................................................................113
11.3.1 General ..................................................................................................113
11.3.2 Physical Site Suitability ..........................................................................113
11.3.3 Pollutant Removal..................................................................................113
12.0 SPILL CONTAINMENT AND CONTROL ......................................................................114
12.1 Description.........................................................................................................114
12.2 General Application ...........................................................................................114
12.3 Advantages/Disadvantages ...............................................................................115
12.3.1 General ..................................................................................................115
12.3.2 Physical Site Suitability ..........................................................................115
12.3.3 Pollutant Removal..................................................................................115
13.0 REFERENCES ..............................................................................................................116
FIGURES
Figure GS-1 –Grass Swale – Profile and Sections.......................................................................................12
Figure PP-1—Interim Recommended Effective Percent Imperviousness for Porous Pavements...............34
Figure PP-2a – Modular Block Pavement (MBP) – Typical Cross-Section ..................................................35
Figure PP-2b – Cobblestone Block Pavement (CBP) – Typical Cross-Section ...........................................36
Figure PP-3a – Isometric View of Modular Block Pavement (MBP) Installation ..........................................37
Figure PP-3b – Isometric View of Cobblestone Block Pavement (CBP) Installation ...................................38
Figure PP-4—Typical Applications of MBP and CBP Types of Pavement...................................................39
Figure PP-5—Typical Reinforced Grass Pavement Detail ...........................................................................40
Figure PP-6—Typical Aggregate Turf Cross-Section...................................................................................41
Figure PD-7 – Porous Concrete Pavement (PCP) – Typical Sections.........................................................42
Figure PD-8 – Porous Gravel Pavement (PGP) – Typical Section ..............................................................43
Figure PP-9—Underdrain System Layout for Porous Pavement .................................................................44
Figure PP-10—Impermeable Membrane Installation Sequence ..................................................................45
Figure PP-11—Example of Finding Effective Imperviousness When Porous Pavement is Present. ..........46
Figure PPD-1 – Porous Pavement Detention (PPD) – Typical Section .......................................................55
Figure PPD-2—Water Quality Capture Volume (WQCV), 80th Percentile Runoff Event..............................56
Figure PLD-1 – Porous Landscape Detention – Typical Sections ...............................................................63
Figure PLD-2—Water Quality Capture Volume (WQCV), 80th Percentile Runoff Event ..............................64
Figure EDB-1 –Extended Detention Basin (EDB) – Plan and Sections .......................................................72
Figure EDB-2—Water Quality Capture Volume (WQCV), 80th Percentile Runoff Event..............................73
Figure EDB-3—Water Quality Outlet Sizing: Extended Detention Basin (Dry)
With 40-hour Drain Time for Capture Volume ....................................................................74
Figure SFB-1 –Sand Filter Basin (SFB) – Plan and Sections ......................................................................81
Figure SFB-2—Water Quality Capture Volume (WQCV), 80th Percentile Runoff Event ..............................82
S-iv 2008-04
Figure CWB-1 – Constructed Wetland Basin – Plan and Cross-Section .................................................... 89

Figure CWB-2—Water Quality Capture Volume (WQCV), 80th Percentile Runoff Event ............................ 90
Figure CWB-3—Water Quality Outlet Sizing: Constructed Wetland Basin
With 24-hour Drain Time for Capture Volume.................................................................... 91
Figure RP-1 –Retention Pond (RP) – Plan and Sections .......................................................................... 101
Figure RP-2—Water Quality Capture Volume (WQCV), 80th Percentile Runoff Event ............................. 102
Figure RP-3—Water Quality Outlet Sizing: Retention Pond (Wet)
With 12-hour Drain Time for the Capture Volume............................................................ 103
Figure CWC-1—Plan and Section of a Constructed Wetland Channel ..................................................... 111
2008-04 S-v
THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
S-vi 2008-04
STRUCTURAL BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES COVERED IN THIS MANUAL
This chapter provides a description and design information for the following structural BMPs:
1. Grass Buffer (GB)
2. Grass Swale (GS)
3. Porous Pavement (PP)
a. Modular Block Pavement (MBP)
b. Cobblestone Block Pavement (CBP)
c. Reinforced Grass Pavement (RGP)
d. Poured Porous Concrete Pavement (PCP)
e. Porous Gravel Pavement (PGP)
4. Porous Pavement Detention (PPD)
5. Porous Landscape Detention (PLD)
6. Extended Detention Basin (EDB)
7. Sand Filter Extended Detention Basin (SFB)
8. Constructed Wetlands Basin (CWB)
9. Retention Pond (RP)
10. Constructed Wetlands Channel (CWC)
11. Covering of Storage/Handling Areas
12. Spill Containment and Control
Detailed design procedures criteria are described. Forms that designers can use to document the design
procedure for most of these practices are included at the end of Volume 3. Typical design details and
suggested technical specifications are shown in the chapter titled TYPICAL STRUCTURAL BMP
DETAILS AND SPECIFICATIONS.
2008-04 S-1
Disclaimer
Neither this Manual or the Urban Drainage and Flood Control District endorse any of the commercial
brands and products mentioned in this Manual and merely list them to illustrate the availability of potential
sources of materials that meet the characteristics for porous pavement designs recommended herein.
The designer is encouraged to always consider the use of other products or brands that will provide
equivalent or better level of performance or service.
S-2 2008-04
1.1 Description
Grass buffer (GB) strips are an integral part of the MDCIA land development concept. They are uniformly
graded and densely vegetated areas of turf grass. They require sheet flow to promote filtration, infiltration
and settling to reduce runoff pollutants. GBs differ from grass swales as they are designed to
accommodate overland sheet flow rather than concentrated or channelized flow. They can be used to
remove larger sediment from runoff off impervious areas.
Whenever concentrated runoff occurs, it should be evenly distributed across the width of the buffer via a
flow spreader. This may be a porous pavement strip or another type of structure to achieve uniform
sheet-flow conditions. GBs can also be combined with riparian zones in treating sheet flows and in
stabilizing channel banks adjacent to major drainageways and receiving waters. GBs can be
interspersed with shrubs and trees to improve their aesthetics and to provide shading. Irrigation in the
semi-arid climate of Colorado is required to maintain a healthy and dense grass on the GB to withstand
the erosive forces of runoff from impervious areas.
1.2 General Application
A GB is located adjacent to impervious areas and can be used in residential and commercial areas and
along highways and roads. Because their effectiveness depends on having an evenly distributed sheet
flow over their surface, the size of the contributing area, and the associated volume of runoff have to be
limited. Flow can be directly accepted from a parking lot, roadway or building roof, provided the flow is
distributed uniformly over the strip. GBs provide only marginal pollutant removal and require that follow-
up structural BMPs be provided. They do, however, help to reduce somewhat the runoff volume from
smaller storms.
2008-04 S-3
1.3 Advantages/Disadvantages
1.3.1 General
The grass and other vegetation can provide aesthetically pleasing green space. In addition, their use
adds little cost to a development that has to provide open space, and their maintenance should be no
different than routine maintenance of the site's landscaping. Eventually, the grass strip next to the
spreader or the pavement will have accumulated sufficient sediment to block runoff. At that point in time,
a portion of the GB strip will need to be removed and replaced.
Grass and trees within these buffer strips can provide wildlife habitat. Because infiltration occurs, the size
of downstream drainage facilities can often be reduced. Gravel underdrains can be used where soils are
not suited for infiltration.
1.3.2 Physical Site Suitability

The site, after final grading, should have a uniform slope and be capable of maintaining an even sheet
flow throughout without concentrating runoff into shallow swales or rivulets. The allowable tributary area
depends on the width, length, and the soils that lay under the GB. Hydrologic Soil Groups A and B
provide the best infiltration capacity, while Soil Groups C and D provide best site stability. The swelling
potential of underlying soils should also be taken into account when used adjacent to structures and
pavement. Because of the semi-arid nature of Colorado’s high plains, an irrigated grass cover will be
needed to have an effective GB.
1.3.3 Pollutant Removal

Pollutant removal depends on many factors such as soil permeability, site slope, the flow path length
along the buffer, the characteristics of drainage area, runoff volumes and velocities, and the type of
vegetation. The general pollutant removal of both particulate and soluble pollutants is projected to be low
to moderate. GBs rely primarily upon the straining through grass and settling of solids, and to only a
minor degree, on biological uptake and runoff infiltration. See Table SQ-6 in STORMWATER QUALITY
MANAGEMENT for estimates of pollutant removals.
1.4 Design Considerations
Design of GBs is based primarily on maintaining sheet-flow conditions across a uniformly graded,
irrigated, dense grass cover strip. When a GB is used over unstable slopes, soils, or vegetation, the
formation of rills and gullies that disrupt sheet flow will occur. The resultant short-circuiting will invalidate
the intended water quality benefits. GBs should be protected from excessive pedestrian or vehicular
traffic that can damage the grass cover and affect even sheet-flow distribution. A mixture of grass and
trees may offer benefits for slope stability and improved aesthetics.
S-4 2008-04
1.5 Design Procedure and Criteria
The following steps outline the GB design procedure and criteria. Figure GB-1 is a schematic of the
facility and its components.
1. Design Discharge Determine the 2-year peak flow rate of the area draining to the GB. Also,
determine the flow control type; sheet or concentrated.
2. Minimum Length Calculate the minimum length (normal to flow) of the GB. The upstream flow
needs to be uniformly distributed over this length. General guidance suggests
that the hydraulic load should not exceed 0.05 cfs/linear foot of buffer in the
Colorado high plains region during a 2-year storm to maintain a sheet flow of less
than 1 inch throughout dense grass that is at least 2 inches high. The minimum
design length (normal to flow) is therefore calculated as:
Q 2− year
LG =
0.05
In which:
Lg = Minimum design length (feet)
Q2-year = Peak discharge supplied to the GBs by a 2-year event
(cfs)
Longer lengths may be used.
3. Minimum Width The minimum width (WG) (the distance along the sheet flow direction) of the GB
shall be determined by the following criteria for onsite and concentrated flow
control conditions:
A. Sheet Flow Control (use the larger value)
WG = 0.2LI or 10 feet
In which:
LI = The length of flow path of the sheet flow over the
upstream impervious surface (feet)
B. Concentrated Flow Control (use the larger value)
WG = 0.15(At/Lt) or 10 feet
In which:
At = The tributary area (square feet)
Lt = The length of the tributary inflow path normal to flow
spreader (i.e., width of flow spreader (feet)
Note that the larger the buffer area is relative to the impervious area draining to it,
the smaller the effective imperviousness, per Figure ND-1.
A rectangular strip is the preferred shape for the GB and should be free of gullies
or rills that concentrate the flow over it.
4. Maximum Slope Design slope of a GB in the direction of flow shall not exceed 4 percent.
2008-04 S-5
5. Flow Distribution Incorporate a device on the upstream end of the buffer to evenly distribute flows
along the design length. Slotted curbing, modular block porous pavement (MBP),
or other spreader devices can be used to apply flows. Concentrated flow
supplied to the GB must use a level spreader (or a similar device) to evenly
distribute flow onto the buffer.
6. Vegetation Vegetate the GB with irrigated dense turf in semi-arid areas of Colorado to
promote sedimentation and entrapment and to protect against erosion.
7. Outflow Collection Provide a means for outflow collection. Much of the runoff during significant
events will not be infiltrated and will require a collection and conveyance system.
A grass swale (GS) can be used for this purpose and can provide another MDCIA
type of a BMP. The buffer can also drain to a storm sewer or to a street gutter.
In some cases the use of underdrains can maintain better infiltration rates as the
soils saturate and help dry out the buffer after storms or irrigation periods.
1.6 Design Example
Design forms that provide a means of documenting the design procedure are included in the DESIGN
FORMS chapter. A completed form follows as a design example.
S-6 2008-04
Sheet Flow Length Buffer Strip Width

L W G > 10' or = 0.2 L
(whichever is longer)
Dense Grass
(preferably irrigated)
So < 4% Swale
So < 2
5%
Lg
=
gth
Impervious Grass
Len
A = Tributary Buffer/Filter
Area Strip
Strip
r
Footer to Prevent
Filte
1 ft Slumping
Maximum Unit Hydraulic Optional Perforated Drains

Loading = 0.05 cfs/ft in Gravel Trenches
during 2-year runoff peak
SHEET FLOW CONTROL
N.T.S
Buffer Strip Width

W G > 0.15 (At/Lt), or = 10'
(whichever is longer)
Dense Grass
(preferably irrigated)
So < 4% Swale
So < 2
5%
%
.00
A
=0
Grass
Buffer/Filter
So
Lt
Strip
Lg
Concrete Edge
Level Spreader Optional Perforated Drains

in Gravel Trenches
CONCENTRATED FLOW CONTROL
N.T.S
Figure GB-1—Application of Grass Buffers (Filter Strips)
2008-04 S-7
Design Procedure Form: Grass Buffer (GB)
Designer: Joseph Stormwater

Company: BLWH, Inc.
Date: October 1, 2005
Project: Sleepy Acres Residential and Commenrcial Getaway
Location: 40th Latitude, Colorado.
1. 2-Year Design Discharge (Total) Q2 = 2.0 cfs
2. Tributary Catchment Flow
A) Minimum Width (Normal to runoff flow path): LG = Q2 / 0.05 LG = 40 feet
B) Tributary Area in Square Feet (At) At= 8,000 square feet
3. Design Width Along Direction of Flow (Use A or B)
A) Sheet Flow Control Upstream

i) Length of Flow Path Over Upstream Impervious Surface LI = feet
ii) Design Width of Buffer: W G = 0.2 * LI (10' minimum) WG = feet
B) Concentrated (Non-Sheet) Flow Control Upstream

(requires a level spreader in step 5 below)
i) Length of Flow Level Spreader Lt = feet
ii) Design Width of Buffer: W G = 0.15 * At / Lt (10' minimum) WG = feet
4. Design Slope (not to exceed 4%) S= 4.00 %
5. Flow Distribution (Check the type used or describe "Other") X Slotted Curbing
Modular Block Porous Pavement
Note: If Method B was Used In Step 3, Level Spreader
Level Spreader Must Be Checked Here Other:
6. Vegetation (Check the type used or describe "Other") X Irrigated Turf Grass
Non-Irrigated Turf Grass
Note: Irrigated Turf Grass Is Required in Semi-Arid Climates Other:
7. Outflow Collection (Check the type used or describe "Other") X Grass Lined Swale
Street Gutter
Storm Sewer Inlet
Underdrain Used
Other:
Notes:
S-8 2008-04
2.0 GRASS SWALE (GS)—SEDIMENTATION FACILITY
2.1 Description
A grass swale (GS) sedimentation facility is an integral part of the MDCIA development concept. They
are densely vegetated drainageways with low-pitched sideslopes that collect and slowly convey runoff.
Design of their longitudinal slope and cross-section size forces the flow to be slow and shallow, thereby
facilitating sedimentation while limiting erosion. Berms or check dams should be installed perpendicular
to the flow as needed to slow it down and to encourage settling and infiltration.
A GS can be located to collect overland flows from areas such as parking lots, buildings, residential
yards, roadways and grass buffer strips (GBs). They can be made a part of the plans to minimize a
directly connected impervious area by using them as an alternative to a curb-and-gutter system. A GS is
set below adjacent ground level, and runoff enters the swales over grassy banks or rundowns. The
potential exists for wetland vegetation to become established if the swale experiences standing water or if
there is a base flow. If that condition is possible, consider the use of underdrains. A site with a base flow
should be managed as either a swale with an unlined trickle channel, or as a wetland bottom channel, the
latter providing an additional BMP for stormwater runoff treatment.
2.3.1 General
A GS, which can be more aesthetically pleasing than concrete or rock-lined drainage systems, is
generally less expensive to construct. Although limited by the infiltration capacity of local soils, this BMP
can provide some reduction in runoff volumes from small storms. Dense grasses can reduce flow
velocities and protect against erosion during larger storm events. Swales in residential and commercial
settings can also be used to limit the extent of directly connected impervious areas.
2008-04 S-9
The disadvantages of using GSs without underdrains include the possibility of soggy and wet areas in
front yards, the potential for mosquito breeding areas, and the potential need for more right-of-way than is
needed for a storm sewer.

A GS is practical only at sites with general ground slopes of less than 4 to 5 percent and are definitely not
practical for sites steeper than 6 percent. The longitudinal slopes of a GS should be kept to less than 1.0
percent, which often necessitates the use of grade control checks or drop structures. Where the general
terrain slope exceeds 4 percent, a GS is often practical only on the upslope side of the adjacent street.
When soils with high permeability (for example, Class A or B) are available, the swale will infiltrate a
portion of the runoff into the ground; however, such soils are not required for effective application of this
BMP. When Class C and D soils are present, the use of a sand/gravel underdrain is recommended.

Removal rates reported in literature vary and fall into the low to medium range. Under good soil
conditions and low flow velocities, moderate removal of suspended solids and associated other
constituents can be expected. If soil conditions permit, infiltration can remove low to moderate loads of
some of the soluble pollutants when flow velocities are very low. As a result, small frequently occurring
storms can benefit the most. See Table SQ-6 in the STORMWATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT chapter
for estimated ranges in pollutant removals by this BMP.
2.4 Design Considerations and Criteria
Figure GS-1 shows trapezoidal and triangular swale configurations. A GS is sized to maintain a low
velocity during small storms and to collect and convey larger runoff events, all for the projected fully
developed land use conditions. If the design flows are not based on fully developed land conditions, the
swales will be undersized and will not provide the intended pollutant removal, flow attenuation, or flow
conveyance capacity.
A healthy turf grass cover must be developed to foster dense vegetation. Permanent irrigation in some
cases may be necessary. Judicious use of GSs can replace both the curb-and-gutter systems and
greatly reduce the storm sewer systems in the upper portions of each watershed when designed to
convey the "initial storm" (for example, a 2- or a 5-year storm) at slow velocities. However, if one or both
sides of the GS are also to be used as a GB, the design of the GB has to follow the recommendations of
Section 1. Grass Buffers.
The following steps outline the GS design procedure and criteria.
S-10 2008-04
1. Design Discharge Determine the 2-year flow rate to be conveyed in the GS. Use the
hydrologic procedures described in Volume 1 of the Manual.
2. Swale Geometry Select geometry for the GS. The cross section should be either
trapezoidal or triangular with side slopes flatter than 4:1 (Horizontal/
Vertical), preferably 5:1 or flatter. The wider the wetted area of the
swale, the slower the flow and the more effective it is in removing
pollutants.
3. Longitudinal Slope Maintain a longitudinal slope of the GS between 0.2 and 1.0 percent. If
the longitudinal slope requirements can not be satisfied with available
terrain, grade-control checks or small drop structures must be
incorporated to maintain the required longitudinal slope. If the slope of
the swale exceeds 0.5 percent in semi-arid areas of Colorado, the swale
must be vegetated with irrigated turf grass.
4. Flow Velocity and Depth Calculate the velocity and depth of flow through the swale. Using the
Manning’s equation and a Manning’s roughness coefficient of n=0.05 to
0.06, find the channel velocity and depth using the peak 2-year flow rate
determined in Step 1.
Maximum flow velocity in the swale shall not exceed 1-foot per second
and the maximum flow depth shall not exceed 1-foot at the 2-year peak
flow rate. If these conditions are exceeded, repeat steps 2 through 4
each time altering the depth and bottom width or longitudinal slopes until
these criteria are satisfied.
5. Vegetation Vegetate the GS with dense turf grass to promote sedimentation,

filtration, and nutrient uptake, and to limit erosion through maintenance
of low flow velocities.
6. Street and Driveway If applicable, small culverts at each street crossing and/or driveway
Crossings crossing may be used to provide onsite stormwater capture volume in a
similar fashion to an EDB.
7. Drainage and Flood Check the water surface during larger storms such as the 5-year through
Control the 100-year floods to ensure that drainage from these larger events is
being handled without flooding critical areas or residential, commercial,
and industrial structures and/or the adjacent streets.
2.6 Design Example
2008-04 S-11
Residual Capacity
for Larger Floods
2-year flow
1
Depth (D) < 1.0 feet
V 2-yr < 1.0 fps Z Sideslope: Z > 4
6" Sandy Loam Turf
Nonwoven Geotextile Fabric.
6" ASTM C-33 Sand Underdrain
ASTM 047, -1-AOD US Std
12" min Sieve #50 to #70
3" or 4" Perforated HDPE
Bottom Width(W) Pipe in 9" wide(min.)
CDOT Sect. 703,
AASHTO #67 Coarse
Note: Underdrain arrangement is Aggregate
necessary for Type C & D Soils.
Not needed for Type A & B Soils.
TRAPEZOIDALGRASS-LINEDSWALE SECTION
NOT TO SCALE
Slope = 0.2% to 1.0%

(drop toe to drop crest) Extend along bank to 2-yr flow
depth plus a minimum of 0.5 feet
Grade Control Checks
Underdrain
GRASS-LINEDSWALE PROFILE
NOT TO SCALE
Residual Capacity
2-year flow
1
Depth (D) < 1.0 feet 1' min.
V 2-yr < 1.0 fps Z Sideslope: Z > 4
6" Sandy Loam Turf Nonwoven Geotextile Fabric.

6" ASTM C-33 Sand Underdrain ASTM 047, -1-AOD US Std
Sieve #50 to #70
4" Perforated pipe in CDOT

Note: Underdrain arrangement is
Sect. 703, AASHTO #8
necessary for Type C & D Soils.
Coarse Aggregate
Not needed for Type A & B Soils.
TRIANGULAR GRASS-LINEDSWALE SECTION

NOT TO SCALE
Figure GS-1 –Grass Swale – Profile and Sections
S-12 2008-04
2008-04 S-13
Design Procedure Form: Grass Swale (GS) Sedimentation Facility

Company: BLWH, Inc.
1. 2-Year Design Discharge (Total) Q2 = 5.5 cfs
2-Year Design Flow Velocity (V2, 1.0 fps Maximum) V2 = 1.00 fps
2. Swale Geometry
A) Channel Side Slopes (Z, horizontal distance per unit vertical) Z= 6.00 (horizontal/vertical)
B) 2-Year Design Flow Depth (D2, 1 foot maximum) D2 = 0.96 feet
C) Bottom Width of Channel (B) B= 0.0 feet
3. Longitudinal Slope
A) Froude Number (F, 0.50 maximum, reduce V2 until F < 0.50) F= 0.26
B) Design Slope (S, Based on Manning's n = 0.08, 0.01 Max, 0.002 Min.) S= 0.0078 feet/feet
C) Number of grade control structures required 2 (number)
4. Vegetation (Check the type used or describe "Other") Dryland Grass

(Must use irrigated turf grass if S >0.005 in semi-arid areas of Colorado) X Irrigated Turf Grass
Other:
5. Underdrain (Check the type used or describe "Other") Infiltration Trench w/ HDPE Perf. Underdrain
(3" - 4" dia. perforated HDPE underdrain in infiltration trench with X Infiltration Trench with No Underdrain
non-woven geotextile fabric covering per USDCM Figure GS-1 is required Other:
for NRCS hydrologic soil groups C & D)
6. Outlet (Check the type used or describe "Other") Grated Inlet

X Other:
Notes:
1) Aggregate for infiltration trench shall be CDOT Sect. 703, AASHTO #67.
2) Infiltration trench shall be minimum 9" wide by 9" deep.
3) Infiltration trench shall be covered with non-woven geotextile fabric meeting ASTM D4751 - AOS U.S. Std. Seive #40 to #60.
4) Geotextile shall extend 12" beyond trench top width on each side. See USDCM Figure GS-1.
S-14 2008-04
3.1 Porous Pavement–General Description
Porous Pavement (PP) covers a variety of stabilized surfaces that can by used for the movement and
parking of vehicles (automobiles, trucks, construction equipment, light aircraft, etc.) and storage of
materials and equipment, It differs from conventional pavement. It is designed to infiltrate stormwater
runoff instead of shedding it off the surface. PP offers the advantage of decreasing the effective
imperviousness (IA) of an urbanizing or redevelopment site, thereby reducing runoff and pollutant loads
leaving the site.
PPs can be designed with and without underdrains. Whenever underdrains are used, infiltrated water will
behave similarly to interflow and will surface at a much reduced rates over extended periods of time. All
types of PP help to return stormwater runoff hydrology to more closely resemble pre-developed
conditions. However, the actual consumptive use of water falling onto the ground is be considerably less
than under pre-developed conditions and for grass lawns in urban areas. The designer needs to consult
with a geotechnical engineer as to the suitability of each type of PP for the loads and traffic it will support
and carry, and the geologic conditions the pavement will rest upon.
What follows is a description of five types of porous pavement and defines their acronyms. These will be
used throughout the remainder of this section of the Manual:
3.1.1 Modular Block Pavement (MBP)

This pavement consists of concrete block units with open surface voids laid on a gravel subgrade with
open surface voids. These voids occupy at least 20% of the total surface area that are filled with sand
(ASTM C-33 sand fine concrete aggregate or mortar sand) or sandy loam turf that has at least 50% sand
by weight in its volume. However, unless the pavement will be watered regularly (i.e., using a sprinkler
system) to keep the vegetation viable, concrete sand infill is the recommended material. One of the
2008-04 S-15
commercially available modular block products that meet this description is Eco Uni-green™ by
Pavestone Co® has over 40% of its surface area as open voids that can be filled with sand or sandy
loam—sand mix.
MBP may be sloped or flat. MBPs have been in use in United States since the mid-1970s. Although field
data that quantify their long-term performance are somewhat limited, the data collected locally, and at
other part of United States, and the episodic reports from Canada, Australia, Asia, and Europe, indicate
that properly installed MBPs are reliable and have experienced few problems under a wide range of
climates.
An alternate application of MBP provides for a surcharge zone above its surface to detain runoff and
provide storage space for the water quality capture volume (WQCV). This type of application is described
in Section 4.0. Porous Pavement Detention (PPD).
3.1.2 Cobblestone Block Pavement (CBP)

This pavement consists of concrete block units replicating the appearance of cobblestone that create
open voids by beveling the corners of each block and/or wider spacing between the blocks. One of the
commercial “cobblestone” products that meets this description is Eco-stone™ made by Pavestone Co®.
These “cobblestones” are laid on a gravel subgrade. The surface area has voids that occupy at least 8%
of the total surface area and are filled with sand (ASTM C-33 sand; sometimes referred to as fine
concrete aggregate). The recommended use of sand for the in-fill material differs from the material
recommended by the manufacturer. This change is essential for improving in water quality, especially
when the installation has an underdrain.
CBP may also be laid on a sloped or on a flat grade. This type of pavement has been in use since the
1980s. Field data that quantify the long-term performance of CBP are limited; however, the data and the
episodic reports from other parts of the United States, Canada, Australia, Asia and Europe indicate that
when properly installed, CBP is reliable and has experienced few problems under a wide range of
climates. Because of the very limited net open area this pavement surface provides, it is not
recommended for use in Porous Pavement Detention installations.
3.1.3 Reinforced Grass Pavement (RGP)

This is a stabilized grass surface intended for use in parking lots that experience intermittent use. It has
been shown to function well under wet-weather conditions and, when properly designed and installed, it
will infiltrate rainwater at rates that equal or exceed the infiltration rates of NRCS Hydrologic Soil Group
Type B soils. The grasses need to be mowed on a cycle that depends on the grass types and whether or
not irrigation is used. Use of irrigated grasses should be considered for more actively-used parking lots.
One of the commercial products that meets this description is Reinforced Grass. It is grass turf reinforced
with plastic rings and filter fabric underlain by gravel and is known as Grasspave2™ by Invisible
S-16 2008-04
Structures, Inc®. Other commercial systems are also available and should be investigated for
applicability to the site being developed or redeveloped.
Another type of RGP design is based on the Federal Aviation Administration’s (FAA) recommendations
for Aggregate Turf originally developed for use with light aircraft that do not exceed a gross load of
12,500 pounds. This design offers a very stable surface and has a relatively simple cross-section. When
it is installed using good site preparation, compaction and the specified gravel-topsoil mix, it has
functioned well on small general aviation airports for many years.
3.1.4 Poured Porous Concrete Pavement (PCP)

This is a monolithically poured porous concrete pavement that has 15% to 21% of its volume as void
ratio. These voids within the concrete are achieved by the eliminating of the fine sand aggregate from the
concrete mix. They provide the flow paths for rainwater from the surface of the pavement to the base
course underlying it. Because the integrity of the concrete structure may be harmed by standing water
during freezing weather, the use of PCP is not recommended for use in Porous Pavement Detention
installations. It is critical that sufficient aggregate base course layer is provided under the porous
concrete slab to store the runoff and allow it to infiltrate slowly into the ground to be drained using an
underdrain pipe system. Having a sufficiently thick layer of aggregate base course is particularly critical
during the months of the year when freezing of water can occur. When the water under the porous
pavement slab is permitted to rise into the slab, freeze and thaw cycles can break the cementatious
bonds between the stones in the pavement; causing it to fail. On the other hand, when each of the layers
of the PCP is properly designed and constructed, and well maintained, it should provide good structural
integrity and longevity.
3.1.5 Porous Gravel Pavement (PGP)

This is a loose gravel-surface paving that is most appropriate for industrial sites and uses. Because the
integrity of the gravel surface is not likely to be harmed by standing water during freezing weather, this
pavement surface can also be used in Porous Pavement Detention installations. It is imperative that
there is sufficient aggregate base course to store the runoff and allow it to infiltrate slowly into the ground
or be slowly drained using an underdrain pipe system. When each of the layers of the PGP is properly
designed and constructed, it should provide good structural integrity and longevity. PGP has a relatively
simple cross-section to construct and should not be difficult or expensive to rebuild when its performance
begins to degrade over time.
3.2 Potential Applications
3.2.1 Modular Block Pavement and Cobble Block Pavement (MBP & CBP)
MBP and CBP types of pavements are best suited for use in low vehicle movement zones, such as
roadway shoulders, driveways, parking strips and parking lots. Vehicle movement (i.e., not parking)
2008-04 S-17
lanes that lead up to one of these types of porous pavement parking pads may be better served, but not
always, by solid asphalt or concrete pavement. The following are potential applications for these two
types of porous pavement:
• Low vehicle movement zones in airports such as parking lots, aprons and maintenance roads
• Crossover/emergency stopping/parking lanes on divided highways
• Residential street parking lanes
• Private and public building driveways
• Maintenance roads and trails
• Roadway shoulders and parking lanes
• Emergency vehicle and fire access lanes
• Low vehicle movement commercial and industrial parking lots, including driveways
• Commercial/retail/industrial parking lots
• Equipment storage areas
3.2.2 Reinforced Grass Pavement (RGP)

RGP type of pavement is best used in overflow parking zones or in parking lots that experience
occasional uses (e.g., once-a-week-used portions of church and football stadium parking lots), roadway
shoulders, residential street parking lanes, and emergency vehicle access lanes. Vehicle movement
lanes (i.e., not parking pads themselves) that lead up to one of these RGP surfaces need to be served
by solid asphalt or concrete pavement, or by PCP type of pavement. The following are potential
applications for this type of porous pavement:
• General aviation airport landing strips, parking lots, aprons and maintenance roads
• Roadway shoulders and parking lanes
• Commercial/retail/industrial parking lot overflow areas
• Church parking areas more remote from buildings
S-18 2008-04
3.2.3 Porous Concrete Pavement (PCP)

The use of PCP type of pavement appears to have the fewest restrictions on the types of traffic it may
carry and may be used for vehicle movement lanes that have very light traffic and for parking areas in
residential and commercial developments. Its use is not recommended for vehicle travel lanes or
collector and arterial streets, while it may be considered for use in parking lanes and shoulders of these
roadways. The following are potential applications for PCP:
• General aviation airport taxiways, parking lots, aprons and maintenance roads
• Residential street parking lanes and driveways
• Commercial/retail/industrial parking lots
• Church parking area lots
3.2.4 Porous Gravel Pavement (PGP)

PGP type of pavement may be used for industrial or commercial storage yards or for parking of vehicles
in such yards. Traffic movement lanes that carry heavy or much traffic may need to have conventional
paving, but that is something that the site planner and a paving engineer need to evaluate. They may
decide that conventional paving may not be required for the specific application at the site. This type of
pavement is not recommended for use on light commercial parking lots such as shopping centers,
churches or parks, but could be considered for less frequently used overflow parking areas.
The following are potential applications for PGP:
• Low vehicle movement zones in airports such as parking lots and maintenance roads
• Residential street parking lanes in low density areas or “country” type subdivisions
• Industrial parking lots
• Equipment/materials storage areas
2008-04 S-19
3.3.1 General
Aside from the potential for high particulate pollutant removal and the removal of other constituents
similar to what a sand filter would provide, PPs of all types can dramatically reduce the surface runoff
from most rainstorms and snowmelt events and virtually eliminate surface runoff from smaller storms.
These reductions in runoff volumes translate directly to proportional reductions in pollutant loads leaving
the site. Its use can result in stormwater surface runoff conditions that approximate the predevelopment
site conditions, something that can be used in selecting surface retention and infiltration parameters that
are close to pre-developed conditions when using stormwater runoff hydrologic models. Even when
underdrains are used, the response time of runoff is significantly delayed and approaches the
characteristics of what hydrologists call interflow. As a result, drainage and downstream flooding
problems can be significantly reduced. These can translate in savings since the downstream facilities
needed to address site runoff, such as WQCV, detention volumes and conveyance facilities can be
smaller.
Another advantage that the use of PP offers is that creative selection by land planners and landscape
architects of PP materials, patterns and colors can also provide aesthetic enhancements to, what often
are, very mundane surfaces.
The primary disadvantage of PP is that they cost more to install and maintain than conventional concrete
or asphalt pavement. These added costs can be somewhat offset by the cost savings in the downsizing
of on-site and downstream drainage systems and facilities such as detention basins, numbers of inlets,
storm sewers and channels. Other disadvantages of PPs, except for PCP, can include uneven driving
surfaces and potential inconvenience of walking on these types of surfaces in high heel shoes.
3.3.2 Physical Site Suitability and Need for Underdrains

All types of PP can be installed even when free draining subsoils are not present at the site by providing
them with underdrains. An underdrain insures that the gravel subgrade is drained when the subsoils or
site conditions do not allow infiltration.
In the case where the installation is located on top of expansive soils, the installation of an impermeable
liner along with underdrains is strongly recommended. The liner is needed to prevent wetting the
underlying expansive clays. In addition, PPs installed over expansive soils should not be located
adjacent to structure foundations in order to reduce the potential for damages to structures.
An continuous impermeable liner with underdrains shall also be used whenever commercial or an
industrial sites may have activities, or processes, that could result in the storage and/or handling of toxic
or caustic chemicals, fertilizers, petroleum products, fats, or greases. An impermeable liner has to be
designed to prevent groundwater and soil contamination should such products or materials come into
S-20 2008-04
contact with stormwater and could infiltrate into the ground. If the site is expected to have contaminants
mentioned above, the underdrains shall be directed or connected to runoff capture and treatment
facilities.

Specific field data on the reductions of pollutant concentrations by various PPs are very limited in 2004.
However, reductions in the concentrations of total suspended solids and associated constituents, such as
metals, oils and greases appear to be relatively high. At the same time, the fact that all PPs significantly
reduce the average annual runoff volume makes them very effective in reducing pollutant loads reaching
the receiving waters. Filtration of stormwater runoff through the sand and gravel of the modular block
voids and entrapment in the gravel media are the primary removal mechanisms of pollutants. Adsorption
and ion exchange that occur as stormwater travels through the underlying soils before the stormwater
reaches groundwater can significantly help to further remove some of the dissolved pollutants from
stormwater.
3.3.4 Reduction in Effective Site Imperviousness and Stormwater Runoff Volume

When using PP the site designer can take advantage of the fact that it reduces the effective surface
runoff rates and volumes. The Based on field testing and observations of MBP by the District at a test
site in Lakewood and other information gleaned from literature, interim recommendations for reducing
total site imperviousness to effective imperviousness were developed. The use of these interim
guidelines is recommended when planning stormwater quality and drainage facilities for new land
development and redevelopment sites. These guidelines are summarized in Figure PP-1 and are called
“interim” because they are based, in part, on limited amounts of short-term data and best professional
judgment that considered the type of pavement, its long term maintenance needs, its sealing potential
and its loss of void space volume over time. In 2007 these interim guidelines may appear to be
conservative; however, it is the best the District can offer until much more long-term data are available to
support less conservative ones. When more data are collected and evaluated these interim
recommendations will be modified.
2008-04 S-21
3.4.1 MBP and CBP Installations

The top photo on the right shows one type of locally
available Modular Block Porous Pavement (MBP).
There are other block patterns that may be used,
provided they have at least 20 percent (≥ 40%
preferred) of their surface area as open annular spaces.
This is the minimum open surface area in this Manual to
be considered as an MBP.
The bottom photo on the right is of a typical Cobble

Block Porous Pavement (CBP) available locally. It has
to have at least eight percent (8%) of its surface area as
open annular spaces to qualify as a CBP under the
recommendations of this Manual.
Figures PP-2a and 2b show typical cross-sections for

MBP and CBP installations and Figures PP-3a and 3b
show an isometric view of MBP and CBP installations, respectively, while Figure PP-4 depicts typical
applications of MBP and CBP types of pavement in various parking lot and roadway configurations. It is
critical that the runoff from the tributary impervious surfaces be evenly distributed over the MBP and CBP
porous surfaces.
3.4.2 RGP Installations

Figure PP-5 shows typical cross-sections and details for one type of Reinforced Grass Pavement (RGP);
the one based on a product called Grasspave2™ by Invisible Structures, Inc. Other products that
achieve the same end goal and structural stability are also available. Regardless of which brand of RPG
product is used, the manufacturer’s instructions should be closely followed except as called for differently
in this Manual. The modifications in this Manual include the installation of an AASHTO #67 compacted
gravel layer and non-woven geotextile fabric under this gravel layer as illustrated in Figure PP-5.
The typical section of an RGP design is based on the Federal Aviation Administration’s (FAA)
recommendations for Aggregate Turf and is illustrated on Figure PP-6. FAA does not have design
guidance for turf runways that is any different than paved runways. The thickness is designed same as
for asphalt pavement; however the design includes extra base course thickness for compensate in the
carrying capacity of asphalt pavement sections (private communication with Jack Scott, FAA Northwest
Regional Office.
When designing and installing Aggregate Turf, it is critical that the sub-grade be adequately compacted,
S-22 2008-04
especially when the gravel and pavement is being placed on fill. It is also critical that the builders and
construction inspectors strictly enforce the gravel-topsoil mix gradation, the compaction of the pavement
section and of the seeding surface preparation be constructed in accordance with the specifications
provided in the TYPICAL STRUCTURAL BMP DETAILS AND SPECIFICATIONS chapter of this Manual
for this pavement type.
3.4.3 PCP Installations

Figure PP-7 illustrates recommended cross-sections for Porous Concrete Pavement (PCP) installations.
The top part of the figure is for areas underlain by NRCS Type D soils or for use in areas serving
catchments with land uses that have potential for groundwater contamination. It is critical that the
builders strictly enforce the concrete mix and placement specifications for this type of pavement provided
in the TYPICAL STRUCTURAL BMP DETAILS AND SPECIFICATIONS chapter of this Manual, which are
in large part based on the samples specifications provided by the Georgia Concrete & Products
Association (GCPA, 1997) and modified for the climate and geologic conditions found in the high plains of
Colorado.
3.4.4 PGP Installations

Figure PP-8 illustrates recommended cross-sections for Porous Gravel Pavement (PGP) installations.
The top part of the figure is for areas underlain by NRCS Type D soils or for use in areas serving
catchments with land uses that have potential for groundwater contamination. It is critical that the
builders strictly follow the recommendations for this pavement presented in the sections that follow.
3.5 Design Procedures and Criteria
3.5.1.a Modular Block Pavement (MBP) Installations
1. Select Blocks Select MBP that have 20% or more (40% preferred) of the surface area open.
Follow Manufacturer’s installation instructions, except that Porous Pavement
Infill and Base Course materials and dimensions specified in this section shall
be strictly adhered to.
2. Infill materials and The MBP openings shall be filled with ASTM C-33 graded sand or very sandy
Leveling Course loam and shall be placed on a one-inch thick leveling course of C-33 sand.
3. Base Course The Base Course shall be AASHTO No. 3 coarse aggregate; all fractured
surfaces. For volume calculations assume 30 percent of total volume to be
open pore space. Unless an underdrain is provided, at least 6-inches of the
subgrade underlying the Base Course shall be sandy and gravely material with
no more than 10% clay fraction.
4. Geotextile Fabric on Place a woven geotextile fabric over the Base Course shown in Figure PP-2a.
Top of the Use a geotextile material that meets the following requirements:
Base Course ASTM D-4751 - AOS U.S. Std. Sieve #50 to #70 and D-4633 – Trapezoidal
tear strength > 100 x 60 lbs; COE specified minimum open area > 4%
2008-04 S-23
5. Geotextile Fabric or When expansive or NRCS Type D soils are present, or potential for
Impermeable Liner groundwater contamination exists, install an impermeable 16 mil thick, or
Under the heavier, liner on the bottom and sides of the basin under the pavement.
Base Course
If soils are not expansive (i.e., NRCS Type A, B or C), use a woven geotextile
material that meets these requirements specified under item 4 above.
Products that meet these requirements are: US Fabric US 2070 and US 670,
Mirafi Filterweave 500 and 700, Carthage Mills Carthage 6%.
6. Geotextile Fabric & Place by rolling fabric parallel to the contours starting at the most downstream
Membrane part of the pavement. Provide a minimum of 18-inches of overlap between
Installation adjacent sheets.
Bring up geotextile and impermeable membrane to the top of perimeter walls.
Attach membrane and fabric to perimeter walls with roofing tar or other
adhesive or concrete anchors. Provide sufficient slack in the geotextile and
membranes to prevent stretching them when sand and/or rock is placed. Seal
all joints of impermeable membrane to be totally leak free.
7. Perimeter Wall Recommend that a concrete perimeter wall be installed to confine the edges of
the MBP block areas as shown on Figures PP-2a, PP-2b, PP-3a and PP-3b.
8. Contained Cells – Install lateral-flow cut-off barriers using 16 mil, or thicker, PE or PVC
Lateral Flow membrane liner (see Figure PP-10) or concrete walls installed parallel to the
Barriers contours (i.e., normal to the flow) to prevent flow of water downstream and
then surfacing at the toe of the PP installation. Distance (LMAX) between these
cut-off barriers shall not exceed:
D
L MAX =
1.5 • S O
in which, LMAX = Maximum distance between cut off membrane normal to the
flow (ft.),
SO = Slope of the base course (ft/ft),
D = Depth of gravel Base Course (ft).
9. Subdrain System When the MBP is located on NRCS Type D soils, when the Type B or C soil
sub-base is to be compacted for structural reasons, or when an impermeable
membrane liner is needed, install a subdrain system using Schedule 40 HDPE
pipe. Locate each perforated pipe just upstream of the lateral-flow cut-off
barrier. Do not exceed 20-foot spacing. Use a control orifice sized to drain the
pore volume of empty each cell in 6-hours or more (see Section A-A on
Figure PP-9).
10. Design Area Ratio The design area ratio shall not exceed 2.0 (ratio = contributing impervious area
and Effective divided by porous pavement area). The interim recommendations for the
Imperviousness “Effective Imperviousness” are given in Figure PP-1 and may be used when
sizing detention basins, WQCV and stormwater conveyance systems.
S-24 2008-04
3.5.1.b Cobble Block Pavement (CBP) Installations
1. Select Blocks Select CBP blocks that have 8% or more of the surface area open. Follow
Manufacturer’s installation instructions, except that Porous Pavement Infill
and Base Course materials and dimensions specified in this section shall be
strictly adhered to.
2. Infill materials and The CBP openings shall be filled with AASHTO No. 8 fractured aggregate
Leveling Course and shall be placed on a one-inch thick leveling course of same No. 8
aggregate.
3. Base Course The Base Course shall be AASHTO No. 67 coarse aggregate; all fractured
surfaces. For volume calculations assume 30 percent of total volume to be
open pore space (see Figure PP-2b). Unless an underdrain is provided, at
least 6-inches of the subgrade underlying the Base Course shall be sandy
and gravely material with no more than 10% clay fraction.
4. Bottom Sand Layer Bottom Sand Layer shall be ASTM C-33 sand and will be installed under the
Base Course and above the underdrain trench when one is used.
5. Geotextile Fabric Place a woven geotextile fabric on top and bottom of the Base Course as
on Top and Bottom shown in Figure PP-2b. Use a geotextile material that meets the following
of the requirements:
Base Course ASTM D-4751 - AOS U.S. Std. Sieve #50 to #70 and D-4633 – Trapezoidal
Under Bottom Sand heavier, liner on the bottom and sides of the basin under the pavement.
Layer
membranes to prevent stretching them when sand and/or rock is placed.
Seal all joints of impermeable membrane to be totally leak free.
8. Perimeter Wall Recommend that a concrete perimeter wall be installed to confine the edges
of the MBP or CBP block areas as shown on Figures PP-2a, PP-2b, PP-3a
and PP-3b.
9. Contained Cells – Install lateral-flow cut-off barriers using 16 mil, or thicker, PE or PVC
2008-04 S-25
D
L MAX =
1.5 • S O
in which, LMAX = Maximum distance between cut off membrane normal to the
flow (ft.),
10. Subdrain System When the CBP is located on NRCS Type D soils, when the Type B or C soil
membrane liner is needed, install a subdrain system using Schedule 40
HDPE pipe. Locate each perforated pipe just upstream of the lateral-flow cut-
off barrier. Do not exceed 20-foot spacing. Use a control orifice sized to
drain the pore volume of empty each cell in 6-hours or more (see Section A-A
on Figure PP-9).
11. Design Area Ratio The design area ratio shall not exceed 2.0 (ratio = contributing impervious
and Effective area divide by porous pavement area). The interim recommendations for the
3.5.2 Reinforced Grass Pavement (RGP) Installations.
1. Select Type of Select which type of RGP will be used. The two types that are described in this
RGP to be Used Manual are Reinforced Grass, as illustrated in Figure PP-5 and Aggregate Turf,
as illustrated in Figure PP-6.
2. Base Course for Provide the required Base Course of AASHTO No. 67 (CDOT Section 703)
Reinforced Grass coarse aggregate for the Reinforced Grass type of RGP as called for in
Figure PP-5. The aggregate shall have all fractured surfaces.
No Base Course is required for Aggregate Turf (see Figure PP-6). Follow the
recommendations for the gradation design for Aggregate Turf in the
specifications provided in the TYPICAL STRUCTURAL BEST MANAGEMENT
PRACTICES DETAILS AND SPECIFICATIONS chapter of this Manual.
3. Geotextile Fabric No fabric or liner required for RGP instalations.
4. Geotextile Fabric For Reinforced Grass type of RGP, and when expansive or NRCS Type D soils
Under the Base are present, or potential for groundwater contamination exists, install an
Course impermeable 16 mil thick, or heavier, liner on the bottom and sides of the basin
under the pavement. If soils are not expansive (i.e., NRCS Type A, B or C), use
a woven geotextile material that meets these requirements specified under item
3 above. Products that meet these requirements are: US Fabric US 2070 and
US 670, Mirafi Filterweave 500 and 700, Carthage Mills Carthage 6%.
No fabric is required under Aggregate Turf, but its use is not recommended for
land uses that have a potential for contaminating groundwater.
5. Geotextile Fabric Place by rolling fabric parallel to the contours starting at the most downstream
& Membrane part of the pavement. Provide a minimum of 18-inches of overlap between
Attach membrane and fabric to perimeter walls with roofing tar or other adhesive
S-26 2008-04
or concrete anchors. Provide sufficient slack in the geotextile and membranes to

prevent stretching them when sand and/or rock is placed. Seal all joints of
impermeable membrane to be totally leak free.
6. Design Area The design area ratio shall not exceed 2.0 (ratio = contributing impervious area
Ratio and divide by porous pavement area). The interim recommendations for the
Effective “Effective Imperviousness” are given in Figure PP-1 and may be used when
Imperviousness sizing detention basins, WQCV and stormwater conveyance systems.
3.5.3 Porous Concrete Pavement (PCP) Installations.
1. Design PCP Design the thickness of the porous concrete slab to support the traffic and
Thickness vehicle types the pavement will have to carry.
2. PCP Mix and Mix of ASSHTO #67 or #8 Aggregate and Portland Cement. Use low
Installation cement/water ratio and no less than 6.5 sacks of Portland Cement per yard.
No fly ash or Phosphorous containing admixtures shall be used. Strictly
adhere to the porous concrete mix specifications provided in the TYPICAL
STRUCTURAL BMP DETAILS AND SPECIFICATIONS chapter of this
Manual.
3. Base Course The base course shall be AASHTO No. #3 or #4 (CDOT Section 703) coarse
aggregate as called for in Figure PP-7. Assume 30 percent of total volume is
open pore space.
Unless an impermeable membrane liner is required in Item 8, at least 6-inches
of the subgrade underlying the Base Course shall be sandy and gravely
material with no more than 10% clay fraction.
4. Sand Filter Layer Whenever the PCP is being installed over expansive soils and underdrains are
for installations with required, a Sand Filter (ASTM C33 gradation) layer as shown in Figure PP-7
underdrains shall be installed to remove most of the fine particulate pollutants from the
water column before the water reaches the underdrains.
5. Geotextile Fabric on Place a woven geotextile fabric on top and bottom of the Base Course as
Top of Bottom Sand shown in Figure PP-7. Use a geotextile material that meets the following
Layer requirements:
ASTM D-4751 - AOS U.S. Std. Sieve #50 to #70 and D-4633 – Trapezoidal
Under the Bottom heavier, liner on the bottom and sides of the basin under the pavement.
Sand Layer
2008-04 S-27
membranes to prevent stretching them when sand and/or rock is placed. Seal
all joints of impermeable membrane to be totally leak free.
8. Contained Cells - Install lateral-flow cut-off barriers using 16 mil, or thicker, PE or PVC
D
L MAX =
1.5 • S O
in which, LMAX = Maximum distance between cut off membrane normal
to the flow (ft),
D = Depth of gravel Base Course (feet).
9. Subdrain System When the PCP is located on NRCS Type D soils, when the Type B or C soil
barrier. Do not exceed 20-foot spacing. Use a control orifice sized to drain
the pore volume of empty each cell in 6-hours or more (see Section A-A on
Figure PP-9).
10. Design Area Ratio The design area ratio shall not exceed 2.0 (ratio = contributing impervious
and Effective area divide by porous pavement area). The interim recommendations for the
3.5.4 Porous Gravel Pavement (PGP) Installations.
1. Design PGP Design the thickness of the porous gravel layer to support the traffic and vehicle
Thickness types the pavement will have to carry.
2. Gravel Course It is very important that the PGP base course shall be built using AASHTO
No.#3 (CDOT Section 703) coarse aggregate as called for in Figure PP-8.
Assume 30 percent of total volume is open pore space.
Unless an impermeable membrane liner is required in Item 7, at least 6-inches
of the subgrade underlying the Sand Layer shall be sandy and gravely material
with no more than 10% clay fraction.
3. Sand Layer for Whenever the PGP is being installed over expansive soils and underdrains are
installations with required, a Sand layer as shown in Figure PP-8 shall be installed to remove
underdrains most of the fine particulate pollutants from the water column before the water
reaches the underdrains.
4. Geotextile Fabric on Place a woven geotextile fabric on top of the Base Course as shown in Figure
Top of Bottom Sand PP-8. Use a geotextile material that meets the following requirements:
Layer ASTM D-4751 - AOS U.S. Std. Sieve #50 to #70 and D-4633 – Trapezoidal tear
S-28 2008-04
strength > 100 x 60 lbs; COE specified minimum open area > 4%
5. Geotextile Fabric or When expansive or NRCS Type D soils are present, or potential for groundwater
Impermeable Liner contamination exists, install an impermeable 16 mil thick, or heavier, liner on the
Under the Bottom bottom and sides of the basin under the pavement.
Sand Layer
material that meets these requirements specified under item 5 above. Products
that meet these requirements are: US Fabric US 2070 and US 670, Mirafi
Filterweave 500 and 700, Carthage Mills Carthage 6%.
Attach membrane and fabric to perimeter walls with roofing tar or other adhesive
or concrete anchors. Provide sufficient slack in the geotextile and membranes
to prevent stretching them when sand and/or rock is placed. Seal all joints of
impermeable membrane to be totally leak free.
7. Contained Cells - Install lateral-flow cut-off barriers using 16 mil, or thicker, PE or PVC membrane
Lateral Flow liner (see Figure PP-10) or concrete walls installed parallel to the contours (i.e.,
Barriers normal to the flow) to prevent flow of water downstream and then surfacing at
the toe of the PP installation. Distance (LMAX) between these cut-off barriers
shall not exceed:
D
L MAX =
1.5 • S O
in which, LMAX = Maximum distance between cut off membrane normal to
the flow (ft),
8. Subdrain System When the PGP is located on NRCS Type D soils, when the Type B or C soil
barrier. Do not exceed 20-foot spacing. Use a control orifice sized to drain the
pore volume of empty each cell in 6-hours or more (see Section A-A on
Figure PP-9).
9. Design Area Ratio The design area ratio shall not exceed 2.0 (ratio = contributing impervious area
and Effective divide by porous pavement area). The interim recommendations for the
3.6 Construction Phase
The construction phase is very critical in having a successful porous pavement (PP) installations; ones
that are structurally sound; and have good rates of stormwater infiltration into surface of the pavement
and into the underlying sub-base or underdrains. It is not sufficient to use the same construction
practices for PP as for conventional, non-porous pavement. Issues of concern are excessive compaction
2008-04 S-29
of the subgrade and heavy equipment traffic over these surfaces, proper gradation and installation of the
gravel and sand materials at various levels of the PP section, proper use and installation of geotextile and
impermeable liner membranes, edge restraints for modular block types of PP, transport and pouring of
porous concrete mixes, achieving uniform gradation of gravels and soils for reinforced turf type of
pavements and other issues that can affect the eventual performance of the PP.
3.6.1 Preparation and Compaction of the Sub-base

When the native soils in the subgrade are suitable for infiltration (i.e., NRCS Hydrologic Group A, B and
C), it is important maintain their infiltration capacities as much as possible. When the sub-base is
deliberately compacted to provide greater pavement stability or is inadvertently compacted by
construction equipment traffic over them, infiltration capacity will be significantly reduced. To prevent the
latter, it is crucial that heavy construction equipment, especially rubber-tired machinery, be kept off the
sub-base. This will require the use of light track equipment, delivery of gravels via conveyors, delivery of
concrete via extended chutes (not conveyors) or lift pour buckets, and stopping all work when the sub-
base is wet or thawing.
When compaction of the sub-base is needed for structural support of the pavement that will carry or park
vehicular traffic, an underdrain system may be needed to compensate for the loss of infiltration capacity.
This will be the case if the sub-base soils have significant fractions of silt or clay and are not granular in
nature (e.g., not Type A or B). Use the recommended PP sections with underdrains where they are
recommended in the figures shown in this section of the Manual.
Compaction of the sub-grade is recommended for sites where the pavement will be placed on top of fill.
Unless the fill is composed of predominantly granular materials, the engineer needs to plan for
underdrains for all PP types except Aggregate Turf, which essentially duplicates natural grass surfaces.
3.6.2 Preventing Clogging of Porous Pavement by Excess Sediment Loads

It is common to install pavement before all site work such as landscaping and finishing of buildings is
completed. As a result, sediment loads from construction and landscaping activities after the PP is
installed can be very high. It crucial to protect all surfaces of the PP from runoff and sediment deposits
until all construction activities are completed and the areas tributary to the PP are fully stabilized.
Regardless of the type of PP being used, the highest priority during construction has to be to prevent
sediment from entering the base course and the surface of PP. The following practices will help to keep
the PP form being clogged during these construction periods:
• Keep muddy equipment and materials away from the PP area
• Install silt fences and temporary swales to divert water away from the PP area
• Cover the surfaces with heavy flexible impermeable membrane whenever construction activities
S-30 2008-04
threaten to deposit sediment onto the PP area
3.6.3 Geotextile Installation

The types of geotextile fabric that are considered minimum for PPs are recommended in this section of
the Manual. High quality fabrics need to be used that resist picturing by angular rock and during
installation. After any layer of the fabric is laid down, it shall be inspected for proper overlaps, tears,
punctures and contamination by oils, greases, or mud. If any tears or punctures are found, or the
overlaps do not meet the minimums specified, or the material is contaminated, the defective materials
shall be replaced.
3.6.4 Base Course and Sand Layer Installation

Regards of the PP type being used, if a granular Base Course is called for, install the crushed aggregate
on top of the geotextile fabric that was laid down over the sub-base or Bottom Sand Layer. Each lift shall
not exceeding 6-inches and shall be compacted by using a 10-ton, or heavier, vibrating steel drum roller.
Make at least four passes with the roller, with the initial passes made while vibrating the roller and the
final one to two passes without vibration.
After all the lifts are compacted, the specified geotextile fabric shall be laid down on top of the compacted
aggregate and the sand, or soil, materials spread on top. The sand, or soil, material shall be compacted
using at least four passes of the 10 ton steel drum static roller. Then lay down the specified geotextile
fabric top of the sand as called for in the plans.
If the design calls for an upper layer of the Base Course, install it using the same layer thicknesses and
compaction requirements described above. Follow-up the installation of the uppermost layer of the Base
Course by installing the specified geotextile fabric on top of it. The leveling course or porous pavement,
as required by the plans, is then applied over the uppermost geotextile fabric.
When a sand leveling course is called for in the plans, compact it using the drum roller before laying the
paver units on top of it. If the top of the Base Course, sand filter layer or the leveling course layers are
disturbed and not uniform, they shall be releveled and recompacted. The top of each layer below the
leveling course shall uniform and will not deviate more than +1/2-inch when a 10 foot straight edge is laid
on it surface. The top of the leveling course shall not deviate more than +3/8-inch in 10 feet.
3.6.5 MBP and CBP Paver Installation

Place the paver blocks tightly against each other on top of the compacted sand leveling course. Before
compacting the pavers into place, cut and place paver units to tightly fill spaces between adjacent pavers
and the restraining wall at the edges.
Compact the installed paver blocks initially using a plate compactor that exerts a minimum of 5,000 lbs/ft2
when using 4-inch thick pavers and a minimum of 6,800 lbs/ft2when using pavers thicker than 4-inches.
2008-04 S-31
After initial compaction, fill the paver openings and joints to the top with ASTM C-33 sand and compact
again. If the sand or gravel infill drops more than 1/8 inch below the top of the paver block, add more
sand and recompact. Remove excess sand or gravel by broom sweeping the surfaces. Paver
installation can be done by hand or using mechanical equipment specially designed for this type of work.
If the latter is used, follow the requirements and procedures provided in the ICPT(1998) Technical
Specification 11 – Mechanized Installation of Interlocking Concrete Pavements.
3.6.6 PCP Installation

Pour the porous concrete mix directly on the compacted Base Course. It is critical to keep the residence
time of the mix in the delivery truck to less than one-hour after the water was added to the mix. It is also
critical that no additional water be added after it is first introduced into the mix to make the concrete “more
workable”. Asphalt laying equipment or hand working of the mix has been used successfully to lay down
the pavement, flowed with a light reverse turning roller compaction to settle the aggregate into place. Do
not use vibrators to work the concrete as these will cause the cement separate from the aggregate and
flow to the bottom of the pavement. Extended delivery times, especially in warm weather, and adding
more water after water has been introduced into the concrete mix weakens the cementatious bond
between the individual aggregate stones and result in premature pavement unraveling, potholing and
other failures. The use of water reducing agents and viscosity modifiers have helped to keep the
cement/water ratio low while having good workability of the mix.
It is also critical that concrete trucks do not drive over the sub-base and the compacted Base Course in
areas where PCP is to be installed. Use extended chutes or bucket dumpers with a crane or small
tracked front-end loaders to deposit concrete. Closely follow the placement, compaction and finishing
instruction in the sample specifications provided in the TYPICAL STRUCTURAL BMP DETAILS AND
SPECIFICATIONS chapter of this Manual.
3.6.7 RGP Installation

For the Reinforced Grass type of installations adhere strictly to the recommendations of the manufacturer
for the installation of this pavement.
For the Aggregate Turf installations, adhere strictly to the placement, compaction and finishing instruction
in the sample specifications for this type of PP provided in the TYPICAL STRUCTURAL BMP DETAILS
AND SPECIFICATIONS chapter of this Manual.
3.6.8 PGP Installation

Follow the recommendations in section 3.6.4 above for the Base Course and sand layer installation.
S-32 2008-04
3.7 Design Examples
Spreadsheets to assist with the design of the various types of porous pavement were developed and are
posted on the District’s web site when they are available. What follows is a series of deign examples,
starting with an example in how to calculate the effective impervious area for a site when porous
pavement is used. What follows this is a completed design form for each type of porous pavement.
The example here illustrates how the “effective imperviousness” can be calculated, but realize that the
true “effective imperviousness” in the field will depend on how well the runoff from the impervious
surfaces is spread uniformly on the pervious surfaces. When properly calculated the “effective
imperviousness” may be used for in the design of downstream WQCV and drainage system needs for all
levels of design storms (e.g., 2- through 100-year) and pollutant loads entering the WQCV facility.
3.7.1 Example for Calculating Effective Imperviousness for a PGP Installation

See the worksheet “Finding Effective Imperviousness of a Tributary Catchment With Porous Pavement
using UDFCD Criteria” for an example on how to calculate the effective imperviousness to use for
hydrologic calculations when porous pavements are used. The worksheet can also be used to calculate
the composite imperviousness of any catchment with various types of surfaces. The spreadsheet for
these calculations is posted on te District’s web site.
3.7.2 Examples for the Design of Porous Pavements
Design forms that provide the means for calculating and documenting the design for each type of porous
pavement described in this Manual are included in the DESIGN FORMS chapter. These forms are
reproductions of Excel spreadsheets with coded formulas and macros that assist with these calculations.
All these spreadsheets have been incorporated into the Workbook titled Design Forms and may be
downloaded from the District’s web site. A set of five completed worksheets, one for each type of porous
pavement, follow the figures in this section as design examples for porous pavements.
2008-04 S-33
80
70
All PP's Except RGP
Effective Percent Imperviousness …..
With Underdrains
60
50
RGP w/ Underdrains
PCP w/ Infiltration
40
All Other PPs When Infiltration is

30
Possible and Allowed
20
10
0
0 0.5 1 1.5 2
(Impervious Trib. Area)/(Porous Pavement Area)

Notes:
1. Chart applies only to porous pavements described in Volume 3 of the USDCM, Structural MBPs
chapter. Not to be used for other types of porous pavements.
2. Apply the “Effective Percent Imperviousness” to the total area that included the area of porous
pavement and the tributary impervious area that can be made to flows uniformly onto PP.
3. Use no more than two units of impervious area for each unit of PP. All impervious areas exceeding
this ratio shall be treated as 100% impervious in hydrologic calculations, including runoff volumes.
4. Whenever impervious areas cannot be made to run onto the pervious areas in a uniform sheet-flow
fashion, identify individual areas and what ratios apply to each and then composite them reating each
as a separate area.
Figure PP-1—Interim Recommended Effective Percent Imperviousness for Porous Pavements

(Based on the Ratio of the Impervious Area Tributary to Porous Pavement)
S-34 2008-04
Wrap all geofabric and impermeable liners up the sides

to top of pavement. Secure firmly in place.
Modular blocks with at least 20% open surface area.
Leveling course In-fill and leveling course: ASTM C-33 Sand
Adjacent pavement So = 0.0 to 2.0%

2" MIN
8" MIN ***

Base Course **
Install 6" wide concrete
edge wall. May use S0
impermeable liner for
interior barriers. 6" MIN. Woven geotextile fabric meeting:
ASTM D4751- AOS US Std. Sieve #50 to #70,
ASTM D4633 min. trapezoidal tear strength 100 x 60 lbs
Schedule 40 HDPE minimum COE specified open area of 4% .
3" or 4" dia underdrain 12" MIN.
Space at 20' max. O.C. When Type C soils are present and when infiltration is allowed,
Slope 1% min. unless percolation tests show otherwise, use underdrains and
geotextile liner specified above.
When Type A or B soils are present and when infiltration is allowed,
eliminate underdrains and use geotextile liner specified above.
For installations without underdrains on
When the underlying soils are NRCS Type D or expansive,
Type C soils, provide 6" layer of sandy
when existing of proposed building is within 10 feet, and/or
or gravely material.
when land uses pose a risk for groundwater contamination,
use 16 mil minimum thickness impermeable liner under
and on sides of the pavement sand & gravel media basin.
Space vertical walls or impermeable membranes normal to subgrade
slope at distances Lmax as follows:
Lmax = D/(1.5 * S0)
In which: D = depth of base course in feet
S0 = slope of subgrade in ft/ft ** Base course: AASHTO #3, #4, or #67, all fractured faces;
(CDOT SECT. 703, #3, #4, or #67 course
aggregate with all fractured faces)
*** Larger depth of base course layers

may be required by pavement
designer
Figure PP-2a – Modular Block Pavement (MBP) – Typical Cross-Section
2008-04 S-35
Wrap all geotextile fabric to top of the cobble block.

Attach to wall or side of trench securely.
Cobblestone blocks with at least 8% surface area open
1" thick sand cushion layer In-fill and leveling course: AASHTO crushed #8
(CDOT sect. 703, #8 course aggregate)
Adjacent pavement So = 0.0% to 2.0%
2" MIN
Base Course ** 7" MIN

1" MIN
6" MIN
ASTM C-33 Sand
Install 6" wide concrete
edge wall. May use 6" MIN.
impermeable liner for Woven geotextile fabric meeting:
interior barriers. ASTM D4751-AOS US Std. Sieve #50 to #70,
18" MIN. ASTM D4633 min. trapezoidal tear strength 100 x 60 lbs,
Minimum COE specified open area of 4%.
12" MIN.
Schedule 40 HDPE When certified tests show percolation rates of less than
3" or 4" dia underdrain 60 minutes per inch of drawdawn under the PP bottom
Space at 20' max. O.C. and infiltration is allowed, eliminate the bottom sand
Slope 1% min. layer and underdrains.
When Type C soils are present and when infiltration is
allowed, unless percolations show otherwise, eliminate
the bottom sand layer, use underdrains and geotextile
liner instead of an impermeable one under the gravel.
when existing or proposed building is within 10 feet, and/or
when land uses pose a risk of groundwater contamination,
Fill undedrain trench
and on sides of the pavement sand and gravel media.
around pipie with #4 stone.
Space vertical walls or impermeable membranes normal to subgrade

slope at distances Lmax as follows: ** Base course: AASHTO #67, #8 or #4 aggregate
L max = D/(1.5 * S0)
with all fractured faces.
In which: D = depth of base course in feet
S0 = slope of subgrade in ft/ft
*** Larger depth of base course layers
may be required by pavement
designer
Figure PP-2b – Cobblestone Block Pavement (CBP) – Typical Cross-Section
S-36 2008-04
Individual MBP Blocks w/ 20% open face.

Use ASTM C-33 sand to fill voids for
the leveling course under the blocks.
6" Thick perimeter concrete cell wall

Slope - So
1" Min.
Woven monofilament fabric.

See details for each PP type
W.S.
D
12"
Woven filter fabric when designed

Lmax = D to infiltrate into the ground.
/(1.5*So)* Impermeable membrane Use impermeable membrane when
*
latteral flow barriers infiltration is not possible or desired.
See details for specific PP used.
3" or 4" perforated collector underdrains at downstream toe of each cell (Schedule 40 HDPE).
Connect to outfall pipe. Install a constrictor orifice at the downstream end (see Figure PP-9)
that extends the emptying time of the total pore volume of the gravel to 6-hours or more.
Use underdrain only with Type D soils or when infiltration is not desired due to potential
for groundwater contamination or within 10 feet of a building.
PERSPECTIVE VIEW OF SIDE-BY-SIDE MBP CELLS
Figure PP-3a – Isometric View of Modular Block Pavement (MBP) Installation
2008-04 S-37
Individual CBP Blocks.

Use AASHTO Crushed #8 Gravel to fill voids and
the leveling course under the blocks.
6" Thick perimeter concrete cell wall

Slope - So
1" to 2"
Woven monofilament fabric.
D W.S.
See details for each PP type
Sand cushion layer

12"
Sand filter layer
Woven monofilament filter fabric when Type A, B or C
Lmax = D
/(1.5*So)* Impermeable membrane soils are present and infiltration into ground is
*
lateral flow barriers allowed. If Type A or B soils are present under the
base course, the sand filter layer and underdrains
may be eliminated.
Use impermeable liner when infiltration is not
possible, allowed or desired.
** D>= 0.58ft(7in) or deeper, per pavement designers requirements.
3" or 4" perforated collector underdrains at downstream toe of each cell (Schedule 40 HDPE).
Connect to outfall pipe. Install a constrictor orifice at the downstream end (see Figure PP-9)
that extends the emptying time of the total pore volume of the gravel to 6-hours or more.
Use underdrain only with Type D soils or when infiltration is not desired due to potential
for groundwater contamination.
PERSPECTIVE VIEW OF SIDE-BY-SIDE CBP CELLS
Figure PP-3b – Isometric View of Cobblestone Block Pavement (CBP) Installation
S-38 2008-04
Figure PP-4—Typical Applications of MBP and CBP Types of Pavement

(The term “Modular Block” above applies to both MBP and CBP)
2008-04 S-39
SPECIFICATIONS
SEE ENLARGEMENT BELOW
HYDROGROW MIX BELOW RING

SUPPLIED BY MANUFACTURER
ASTM C-33 CONCRETE SAND LEVELING COU
10" MINIMUM OF COMPACTED SANDY GRAVE
VARIES
MIX OF 60% AASHTO #67 (CDOT SECT. 703 #6
AGGREGATE AND 40% ASTM C-33 SAND
COMPACTED SUBGRADE,
95% STANDARD PROCTOR DENSITY
SECTION
TOP OF GRASS ROOT MASS

1/4" ABOVE TOP OF RING
ROOT MASS TO FILL

GRASSPAVE HYDROGROW MIX BELOW RING
SUPPLIED BY MANUFACTURER
1" ASTM C-33 CONCRETE SAND
ENLARGEMENT 10" MINIMUM OF WELL COMPACTED SANDY GRAVEL
NOTES:
1. INSTALL GRASS TURF REINFORCING LAYER

PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
INCLUDE MODIFICATIONS SHOWN ON THIS DRAWING.
2. DETAIL BASED ON INVISIBLE STRUCTURES, INC., ET AL DETAILS,

BUT MODIFIED TO SUIT USDCM REQUIREMENTS.
** GREATER DEPTH OF PAVEMENT MAY BE

REQUIRED BY PAVEMENT DESIGNER
Figure PP-5—Typical Reinforced Grass Pavement Detail
S-40 2008-04
GRASSES:
1. Recommend using indigenous dry-land grass mix.
2. Do not park vehicles until grass is established.
3. Will require watering for at least one growing season
to establish turf.
4. Suggest watering of turf during growing season if
parking use is more frequent than once a week.
5. Follow Aggregate Turf Specifications for seeding
bed preparation.
So = 2% (min.) to 4% (max.)
D = 12" MIN.
Aggregate turf layer:

Use crushed aggregate mixed with topsoil
to meet the materials, gradation and
Sub-Base:
placement requirements of technical
1. When on earh fill: Compact granular or sandy fill material to no less specifications for aggregate turf found in
than 90% of ASSHTO T180 Modified Proctor Maximum Density. chapter 5 of the Manual.
Fill in layers of no more than 9 inch thickness.
2. In cut, scarify sub-base to a depth of no less than
6 inches and compact to no less than 90% of ASSTO T180.
AGGREGATE TURF PAVEMENT CROSS-SECTION
Figure PP-6—Typical Aggregate Turf Cross-Section
2008-04 S-41
Woven geotextile as specified on this drawing.

Wrap on d/s side to within 1 inch of top base course.
Monolithically poured porous concrete
(mix of AASHTO #8 or #67 gravel
A and
Lmax = D/(1.5*So) portland cement per specifications in
the BMP Details and Specifications
So = 0% to 2% (max.) Chapter of this Manual)
5"**
*** Base Course D = 0.67'(8") min.**
1" (min.)
ASTM C-33 Sand
6" (min.)
So = 1% (min.)
Woven geotextile fabric meeting:

1" sand cushion layer ASTM D4751-AOS US Std. Sieve #50 to #70,
A ASTM D4633 min. trapezoidal tear strength 100 x 60 lbs,
When certified tests show percolation rates of less than
Install 16 MIL (min.) Schedule 40 HDPE 3" to 60 minutes per inch of drawdawn under the PP bottom
impermeable membrane 4" underdrain and infiltration is allowed, eliminate the bottom sand
under pipe & wrap it on d/s Space at 20' O.C. (max.)
1 layer and underdrains.
side to within 1in(+ 2"/-0") of Slope = 1.0% (min.) When Type C soils are present and when infiltration is
top of gravel to serve as Fill trench with same allowed, unless percolations show otherwise, eliminate
horizontal flow barrier. gravel used in the bottom sand layer, use underdrains and geotextile
Base Course. liner instead of an impermeable one under the gravel.
May eliminate if site is When the underlying soils are NRCS Type D or expansive,
suitable for infiltration. when existing or proposed building is within 10 feet, and/or
when land uses pose risk to groundwater contamination,
Poured Concrete Porous Pavement (PCP) Section

with an Underdrain System
Use utility vault w/

lid to collect Monolithically poured porous
underdrains. concrete.
** Base Course 5"**
1 in D = 0.67'(8") min.**
*** Base Course
1" (min.)
ASTM C-33 Sand 6" (min.)
Underdrain
trench 6" (min.) trench depth
16 MIL (mon.) plastic impermeable membrane

on top of subgrade when required and at
bottom
of underdrain trench.
Overflow pipe with control orifice Woven geotextile fabric meeting:

plate on bottom, sized to drain pore ASTM D4751-AOS US Std. Sieve #50 to #70,
volume of each cell in 6-hours or ASTM D4633 min. trapezoidal tear strength 100 x 60 lbs,
more. See PP-9 for details. Minimum COE specified open area of 4%.
Section A-A
** For personal vehicles & pickup trucks.
Thicker section may be required for
Note: Wrap all geotextile
heavier vehicles.
and impervious liners up Consult with pavement engineer for
at edges and all flow barriers needed thickness of concrete slab.
to within 1-in of top of
gravel layer. *** Base course: AASHTO #67, #8 or #4 aggregate
with all fractured faces.
Secure firmly in place.
Figure PD-7 – Porous Concrete Pavement (PCP) – Typical Sections
S-42 2008-04
Lmax = D/(1.5*So) A
So = 0% to 1% (max.)
*** Base Course D = 1'(12") min.**
1" (min.)
ASTM C-33 Sand
6" (min.)
So = 1% (min.)
Schedule 40 HDPE 3" to Gravel layer: Use AASHTO #3(CDOT sect. 793 #3
1" sand cushion layer 4" underdrain course aggregate)
Space at 20' O.C. (max.) A
Slope = 1.0% (min.) Woven geotextile fabric meeting:
Fill trench with same ASTM D4751-AOS US Std. Sieve #50 to #70,
ASTM D4633 min. trapezoidal tear strength 100 x 60 lbs,
gravel used in
Note : Wrap all geotextile Base Course.
and impervious liners up May eliminateif site is When certified tests show percolation rates of less than
suitable for infiltration. 60 minutes per inch of drawdawn under the PP bottom
at edges and flow barrier
and infiltration is allowed, eliminate the bottom sand
to within 1-in of top of Install 16 MIL (min.) layer and underdrains.
gravel layer. impermeable membrane When Type C soils are present and when infiltration is
Secure firmly in place. under pipe & wrap it on d/s allowed, unless percolations show otherwise, eliminate
1
side to within 1in(+2"/-0") of the bottom sand layer, use underdrains and geotextile
top of gravel to serve as liner instead of an impermeable one under the gravel.
horizontal flow barrier. When the underlying soils are NRCS Type D or expansive,
when existing or proposed building is within 10 feet, and/or
when land uses pose risk to groundwater contamination,
Porous Gravel Pavement (PGP) Section with an

Underdrain System
Use utility vault w/ 1" sand cushion layer

lid to collect
underdrains.
4"
*** Base Course
D = 1'(12") min.**
1" (min.)
ASTM C-33 Sand 6" (min.)
Underdrain
trench 6" (min.) trench depth
16 MIL (min.) plastic

3" to 4" underdrain impermeable membrane on top
Schedule 40 HDPE of all subgrade and at bottom of
Space at 20' O.C. (max.) the underdrain trench.
Slope = 1.0% (min.)
ASTM D4751-AOS US Std. Sieve #50 to #70,
Overflow pipe with control orifice ASTM D4633 min. trapezoidal tear strength 100 x 60 lbs,
plate on bottom, sized to drain pore Minimum COE specified open area of 4%.
volume of each cell in 6-hours or
more. See PP-9 for details.
Section A-A
** Thicker section may be required for
Entire underdrain system may be heavier vehicles.
eliminated when site is suitable for
Consult with pavement engineer for
infiltration and infiltration is allowed.
needed thickness.
Figure PD-8 – Porous Gravel Pavement (PGP) – Typical Section
2008-04 S-43
Figure PP-9—Underdrain System Layout for Porous Pavement
B
Concrete Utility Vault
Use Inlet for PPD
A A
To Sewer
or Daylight
4" Dia. Schedule 40 PVC or HDPE
Install impermeable
vertical membrane or B
concrete wall to cut 3" to 4" dia. Perforated
Cell #1 Cell #2 off latter flow through Sch 40 PVC or HDPE.
the aggregate Slope underdrains at
* So = Pavement & Ground less than1% towards outlet **
Lmax = D/(1.5*So)
Slope (ft/ft) Cell #3 Concrete edge
around entire
MDP, CBP or PPD
Installation
Perimeters
** Use underdrains and

impermeable membranes
under PCP, CBP, MBP & PPD
installations when NRDS
Type D Soils are present
and when used in areas
that have potential for
contaminating groundwater.
* For Porous Pavement Detention (PPD) So = 0% Definitions: Modular Block Pavemen (MBP), Cobble Block Pavement (CBP)
** For PCP, MCP and CBP So < 2%, however, flatter is better Porous Concrete Pavement (PCP), Porous Pavement Detetion (PPD)
PLAN VIEW
12" round Pullbox with recessed lid

B (Carter Concrete #RPB-1218 or equal)
Pavement Surface
Riser suported
Top of riser elevation
with metal straps
set to top of Aggregate
anchored to wall
Underdrain
flow from
each cell
4" dia. pipe

from upper cell 4" min.
To lower cell Outlet orifice is sized
2% to drain entire gravel
pore volume of each
6" min. Poured concrete cell in 6-hours or more
bottom
6" min.
Compact sub-grade
before pouring
B concrete
Section B - B
Section A - A
CONCRETE UTILITY VAULT DETAILS
S-44 2008-04
1) SHAPE SUB-GRADE TO FINAL GRADE
2) LAY DOWN IMPERMEABLE MEMBRANE ON SUB-GRADE
3) INSTALL PIPE AND PLACE GRAVEL IN TRENCH
4) FOLD MEMBRANE LAYERS OVER GRAVEL
5) PLACE GRAVEL BERM ALONG DOWNSTREAM EDGE OF BERM
6) FOLD MEMBRANE LAYERS BACK OVER BERM
7) PLACE FILL AS REQUIRED
Figure PP-10—Impermeable Membrane Installation Sequence
2008-04 S-45
Effective Imperviousness of Tributary Catchments With Porous Pavement (PP ) Using UDFCD Criteria
Catchment Name: Best Shopping Center in the Word

Area Units Used (Acres, sq.ft., other ): Acres Designer: Joe Closenuff Date: 30-Nov-2007
Porous Pavement (PP) Area

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Max. Run-on Allowable PP Total
Sub-Area I.D. Total Pervious Impervious Type of PP PP Area Run-on Run-On Ratio PP+Run-On Effective Effective
Area Area Area Area Area Area % Imp. %Imperv.
A-1 2.00 0.50 1.50 A-Undedrain
2 0.75 0.75 0.75 1.0 1.50 55.0 41.3
A-2 1.50 0.00 1.50 B-Limited3Undrn 0.50 1.00 1.00 2.0 1.50 55.0 55.0
A-3 2.00 0.00 2.00 C-Infiltration
4 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.0 2.00 25.0 25.0
A-4 2.00 0.10 1.90 NONE 1 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 95.0
0.00 NONE 1 0.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0
0.00 NONE 1 0.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0
0.00 NONE 1 0.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0
0.00 NONE 1 0.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0
0.00 NONE 1 0.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0
0.00 NONE 1 0.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0
0.00 NONE 1 0.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0
0.00 NONE 1 0.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0
0.00 NONE 1 0.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0
0.00 NONE 1 0.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0
0.00 NONE 1 0.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0
0.00 NONE 1 0.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0
0.00 NONE 1 0.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0
0.00 NONE 1 0.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0
Totals: 7.50 0.60 6.90 2.25 2.75 2.75 5.00 27.0 43.3
(4) A - All PPs underdrainded except RGP;

B - RGP w/ underdrain & PCP w/ infiltration;
C - All Other PPs w/ infiltration (no underdrains).
Effective imperviousness of PPs recommended here are valid only for PPs
recommended in Vol. 3 of the USDCM. Not valid for other types of PPs.
(5) Cannot exceed the "Impervious Area" entered in column (3)
(6) Maximum value here should be equal to or less than two times column (5),
and must not be greater than the total available area of column (3) - column (5).
USE Same units for all area, either square feet, acres, square meters, etc.
Figure PP-11—Example of Finding Effective Imperviousness When Porous Pavement is Present.
S-46 2008-04
Design Procedure Form: Modular Block Porous Pavement (MBP)

Company: BLWH, Inc.
1. Modular Block Properties: Block Name: Golden Series Rain Catcher
Manufacturer: Golden Pavers
Note: Min. Open Surface Area = 42 %

Blocks shall have no less than 20% open area - 40% preferred;
and shall be no less than 4" thick Minimum Thickness = 4.50 inches
2. Porous Pavement Infill (Check the type or describe "Other"). X ASTM C-33 Sand
Sandy Loam Sod
Other:
3. Base Course: The following three items are all required.
A) Sand (ASTM C-33) Leveling Course. X 1" Layer ASTM C-33 Sand Leveling Course
Other:
B) Non-Woven Geotextile Fabric Between Sand & Gravel - X Non-Woven Geotextile Fabric Per USDCM
meeting ASTM D4751 - AOS U.S. Std. Seive #50 to #70. Other:
Minimum grab strength of 100 lbs.
C) Gravel (AASHTO #3 Coarse Aggregate - CDOT Section 703).

8" minimum thickness required. 8 Inches (0.67 foot)
4. Design Impervious Area to Porous Pavement Area Ratio (Max. = 2): Ratio = 1.65 (AIMP / APOROUS)
5. Perimeter Wall (12" deeper than base course): Concrete inches thick
X Other: Plastic sheet piling, 3' deep
6. Contained Cells:
A) Type: X 16-mil. (min.) Impermeable Liner

Concrete Wall
B) Slope of the base course : SO = 0.005 ft/ft
C) Distance between cutoffs (normal to flow, L): L= 88 feet, (LMAX = 89 feet.)

Max. Length L = 3.C / 1.5 / S = 89 feet.
7. Draining of modular block pavement (Check A, or B, or C, answer D) Infiltration to Subgrade with AOS U.S. Std. Seive #50 to #70
Based on answers to 7A through 7D, check the appropriate method: Non-Woven Geotextile Fabric: 7(C) checked and 7(D) = no
A) Check box if subgrade is heavy or expansive clay X X Underdrain with 16-mil. Impermeable
B) Check box if subgrade is silty or clayey sand Liner: 7(A) checked or 7(D) = yes
C) Check box if subgrade is well-draining soil
Underdrain with AOS U.S. Std. Seive #50 to #70
D) Does tributary catchment contain land uses that may have Non-Woven Geotextile Fabric: 7(B) checked and 7(D) = no
petroleum products, greases, or other chemicals
present, such as gas station, yes no Other:
hardware store, restaurant, etc.? X
Notes:
2008-04 S-47
Design Procedure Form: Cobble Block Porous Pavement (CBP)

Company: BLWH, Inc.
1. Cobble Block Properties: Block Name: Golden Series Open Cobble Blocks
Manufacturer: Golden Pavers
Note: Min. Open Surface Area = 8.5 %

Blocks shall have no less than 8% open area;
2. Porous Pavement Infill: AASHTO #8 Fractured Aggregate. X AASHTO #8 Fractured Aggregate

Other:
3. Base Course: The following items are all required.
A) AASHTO #8 Fractured Aggregate Leveling Course. X 1" to 2" Layer AASHTO #8 Fractured Aggregate Leveling Course
Other:
B) Non-Woven Geotextile Fabric Between Gravel & Bottom Sand Layer;

meeting ASTM D4751 - AOS U.S. Std. Seive #50 to #70. X Non-Woven Geotextile Fabric Per USDCM
Minimum grab strength of 100 lbs. Other:
C) Depth of Gravel Base Course (7" Minimum). 7 Inches (0.58 foot)

(AASHTO #67 Coarse Aggregate - CDOT Section 703)
D) Depth of Bottom Sand (ASTM C-33) Layer (7" Minimum). 0 Inches (0 foot)
4. Design Impervious Area to Porous Pavement Area Ratio (Max. = 2): Ratio = 1.4 (AIMP / APOROUS)
5. Perimeter Wall (6" deeper than base course): X Concrete inches thick
Other
6. Contained Cells:
A) Type: 16-mil. (min.) Impermeable Liner

X Concrete Wall

7. Draining of cobble block pavement (Check A, or B, or C, answer D) X Infiltration to Subgrade with AOS U.S. Std. Seive #50 to #70
No Bottom Sand Layer Required
A) Check box if subgrade is heavy or expansive clay Underdrain with 16-mil. Impermeable
C) Check box if subgrade is well-draining soil X
Notes:
S-48 2008-04
Design Procedure Form: Reinforced Grass Porous Pavement (RGP)

Company: BLWH, Inc.
1. Land Use Potential for Contamination Petroleum Products, Greases, or Chemicals May Be Present
X Petroleum Products, Greases, or Chemicals Will Not Be Present
2. Reinforced Grass Pavement: Reinforced Grass Pavement.
A) Base Course: AASHTO #67 Coarse Aggregate - CDOT Section 703. Inches (10" Min.)
10 Inches Minimum Thicknes
B) Non-Woven Geotextile Fabric Between Leveling Course & Gravel Non-Woven Geotextile Fabric Per USDCM
and Between Gravel & Bottom Sand Layer;
3. Aggregate Turf Pavement: X Aggregate Turf Pavement.
A) AASHTO #67 Coarse Aggregate Mixed with Topsoil 12 Inches (12" Min.) (1 foot)
Other:
4. Design Impervious Area to Porous Pavement Area Ratio (Max. = 2): Ratio = 3 (AIMP / APOROUS)
NOTE: Design ratio exceeds recommended limit.
Notes: Credit for reduced imperviosness is applied only to the maximum ration of 2 to 1 in Itme 3.
2008-04 S-49
Design Procedure Form: Porous Concrete Pavement (PCP)

Company: BLWH, Inc.
1. Porous Concrete Slab (5" Minimum Thickness): 5 Inch Thickness Porous Concrete Slab (5" minimum.)
Mix of AASHTO #67 or #8 coarse aggregate and Portland cement X #67 Coarse Aggregate
with no less than 6.5 sacks Portland cement per cubic yard. #8 Coarse Aggregate
2. Base Course:
A) Gravel (AASHTO #3 Coarse Aggregate - CDOT Section 703). 8 Inches (0.67 foot)
8" minimum thickness required.
B) Bottom sand (ASTM C-33) layer. 7 Inches Minimum Thickness 0 Inches

(Only required for installations with underdrains.) Other:
C) Non-woven geotextile fabric between #3 fractured aggregate N/A Non-Woven Geotextile Fabric Per USDCM
course & bottom sand layer (if sand layer required); Other:
meeting ASTM D4751 - AOS U.S. Std. Seive #50 to #70.
4. Contained Cells: X 16-mil. (min.) Impermeable Liner

Concrete Wall
A) Type: Other

5. Draining of porous concrete pavement (Check A, or B, or C, answer D) X Infiltration to Subgrade with AOS U.S. Std. Seive #50 to #70
Non-Woven Geotextile Fabric: 5(C) checked and 5(D) = no
Based on answers to 56A through 5D, check the appropriate method:
C) Check box if subgrade is well-draining soil X
Notes:
S-50 2008-04
Design Procedure Form: Porous Gravel Pavement (PGP)

Company: BLWH, Inc.
1. Porous Gravel Course: 12 Inch (1 foot)

AASHTO #3 (CDOT Sect. 703) coarse aggregate (12" Minimum)
2. Bottom sand (ASTM C-33) layer (not required for sandy subgrade): 7 Inch (0.58 foot)
3. Non-woven geotextile fabric between Gravel Course and Bottom Sand X Non-Woven Geotextile Fabric Per USDCM
Layer (if sand layer required), meeting ASTM D4751 - AOS U.S. Std. Other:
Seive #50 to #70. Minimum grab strength of 100 lbs.
4. Design Impervious Area to Porous Pavement Area Ratio (Max. = 2): Ratio = (AIMP / APOROUS)
Other
6. Contained Cells:
16-mil. (min.) Impermeable Liner
A) Type: Concrete Wall
B) Slope of the base course : SO = 0 ft/ft
C) Distance between cutoffs (normal to flow, L): L= N/A feet, (LMAX = N/A)
There is no maximum L for a flat base course
7. Draining of porous gravel pavement (Check A, or B, or C, answer D) Infiltration to Subgrade with AOS U.S. Std. Seive #50 to #70
B) Check box if subgrade is silty or clayey sand X Liner: 7(A) checked or 7(D) = yes
X Underdrain with AOS U.S. Std. Seive #50 to #70
Notes:
2008-04 S-51
4.1 Description
Porous pavement detention (PPD) consists of an installation of MBP that is flat (i.e., So=0.00% in all
directions) and is provided with a 2-inch deep surcharge zone to temporarily store the WQCV draining
from an adjacent drainage area. Runoff will infiltrate into the void spaces of the gravel base course
through the sand filter media and sandy loam turf. The latter is not used for the PPD facility to insure
more rapid drainage of the parking surface and easy maintenance when the media needs to be replaced
to maintain rapid drainage of the ponding areas. The ponded and filtered water slowly exits through an
underdrain. The application of MBP without the flat slope (i.e., So=0.00%) and surcharge zone, described
in Section 3, functions to reduce imperviousness of pavement areas (from 100 percent to 35 percent).
However, with the detention features, this BMP has the potential to satisfy the WQCV requirement for a
site.
PPD may be used in the same types of low vehicle movement zones identified in Subsection 3.0 for MBP
with the driveways leading up to them being solid pavement.
PPD has generally the same advantages and disadvantages as MBP. Its additional advantage is to
provide a means to provide WQCV for a site that has little available open area for detention.
Figure PPD-1 shows a cross-section of modular block installation and its subgrade for PPD.
The following steps outline the PPD design procedure and criteria.
1. Basin Storage Volume Provide a storage volume equal to the WQCV based on a 6-hour drain
time.
A. Find the required storage volume (watershed inches of runoff):
S-52 2008-04
Determine the Required WQCV (watershed inches of runoff) using

Figure PPD-2, based on 12-hour drain time. Assume imperviousness
of 100 percent for the PPD area.
B. Calculate the Design Volume in cubic-feet as follows:
⎛ WQCV ⎞
Design Volume = ⎜ ⎟ ∗ Area
⎝ 12 ⎠
In which: Area = the watershed area tributary to the extended
detention pond (square feet)
2. Surface Area Calculate minimum required surface area as follows:
Minimum surface area (ft2) = Design Volume (ft3)
0.17 feet
3. Select Block Select appropriate modular blocks that have no less than 40 percent
of the surface area open. The manufacturer’s installation
requirements shall be followed with the exception that Rock Media
Pore Volume Inlay Material and Base Course dimension and
requirements of this section shall be adhered with.
4. Select Porous The MBP openings should be filled with ASTM C-33 graded sand (fine
Pavement Infill concrete aggregate) and not sandy loam turf. Place a 1-inch layer of
sand leveling-course below the blocks.
The Base Course shall be AASHTO No. 3 or No. 4 coarse aggregate;
all fractured surfaces. For pore volume estimates assume 30 percent
of the total volume to be open pore space.
5. Base Course
When an underdrain is not provided, at least 6-inches of the subgrade
underlying the Base Course shall be sandy and gravely material with
no more than 10% clay fraction.
6. Perimeter Wall Provide a concrete perimeter wall to confine the edges of the PPD
area. The wall should be minimum 6-inch wide and at least 12 inches
deeper than all the porous media and modular block depth combined.
7. Geotextile Fabric on Top of Place a woven geotextile fabric over the Base Course as shown in
the Base Course Figure PPD-1. Use a geotextile material that meets the following
requirements:
ASTM D-4751 - AOS U.S. Std. Sieve #50 to #70 and D-4633 –
Trapezoidal tear strength > 100 x 60 lbs; COE specified minimum open
area > 4%
Impermeable Liner Under groundwater contamination exists, install an impermeable 16 mil thick,
the Base Course or heavier, liner on the bottom and sides of the basin under the
pavement.
If soils are not expansive (i.e., NRCS Type A, B or C), use a woven
geotextile material that meets these requirements specified under item
4 above. Products that meet these requirements are: US Fabric US
2070 and US 670, Mirafi Filterweave 500 and 700, Carthage Mills
Carthage 6%.
2008-04 S-53
9. Geotextile Fabric & Place by rolling fabric parallel to the contours starting at the most
Membrane Installation downstream part of the pavement. Provide a minimum of 18-inches of
overlap between adjacent sheets.
Bring up geotextile and impermeable membrane to the top of perimeter
walls. Attach membrane and fabric to perimeter walls with roofing tar or
other adhesive or concrete anchors. Provide sufficient slack in the
geotextile and membranes to prevent stretching them when sand and/or
rock is placed. Seal all joints of impermeable membrane to be totally
leak free.
10. Subdrain System When the PPD is located on NRCS Type D soils, when the Type B or C
soil sub-base is to be compacted for structural reasons, or when an
impermeable membrane liner is needed, install a subdrain system using
Schedule 40 HDPE pipe, not exceeding 20-foot spacing between pipes.
Use a control orifice sized to drain the pore volume to empty each cell
in 6-hours or more (see Section A-A on Figure PP-9).
11. Design Area Ratio and The design area ratio shall not exceed 2.0 (ratio = contributing
Effective Imperviousness impervious area divided by porous pavement detention area).
12. Overflow Provide an overflow with an inlet to a storm sewer, set at 2 inches (-0,
+ ½-inch) above the level of the porous pavement surface. Make sure
the 2-inch ponding depth is contained and does not flow out of the
area at ends or sides until the 2-inch ponding depth is reached.
4.6 Design Example
FORMS section. A completed form follows as a design example.
For an example of where PPD would be applied see Sections A-A and B-B of Figure PP-4.
S-54 2008-04
Wrap Geotextile to within 1" of top Stormwater Curb Inlet or Area Inlet
of Gravel Layer
Modular Blocks with at least 40% of

surface area as voids for PPDs
CROWN IN
PAVEMENT ASTM C33 Sand
Filter Layer
2" So=0%
1"
8" min.**
ADJACENT PAVEMENT
Base Course **
6"X18" CONCRETE
EDGE WALL
4" MIN.

ASTM D4751- AOS US Std. Sieve #50 to #70,
ASTM D4633 min. trapezoidal tear strength 100 x 60 lbs
minimum COE specified open area of 4% .
3" or 4" Underdrain
Space at 20' O.C. (max) Wrap all geofabric and impermeable liners up the sides
Slope = 0.2% (min) to top of pavement. Secure firmly in place.
Delete for Infiltration
Option on Porous (ie,
Granular) Soils When Type C soils are present and when infiltration is allowed,
unless percolation tests show otherwise, use underdrains and
For installations without underdrains on geotextile liner specified above.
Type C soils, provide 6" layer of sandy
When Type A or B soils are present and when infiltration is allowed,
or gravely material. eliminate underdrains and use geotextile liner specified above.
and on sides of the pavement sand & gravel media basin.
** Base course: AASHTO #3, #4, or #67, all fractured faces;

(CDOT Sect. 703, #3, #4, or #67 w/ all fractured faces)
Lager depth of Base Course may be required by
pavement designer.
Figure PPD-1 – Porous Pavement Detention (PPD) – Typical Section
2008-04 S-55
0.50
0.45
0.35
WQCV=a*(0.91i 3 -1.19i 2 +0.78i)

0.30
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10
Retention Pond,
0.05 Porous Pavement
Detention and
0.00
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Total Im perviousness Ratio (i = I wq /100 )
Figure PPD-2—Water Quality Capture Volume (WQCV), 80th Percentile Runoff Event
S-56 2008-04
Design Procedure Form: Porous Pavement Detention (PPD)

Company: BLWH, Inc.
1. Basin Storage Volume

Ia = 100.00 %
A) Tributary Area's Imperviousness Ratio (i = Ia / 100 ) i= 1.00
(Ia = 100% if all paved and roofed areas)
B) Contributing Watershed Area, Including PPD Area Area = 2,000 square feet
C) Water Quality Capture Volume (WQCV) WQCV = 0.40 watershed inches

3 2
(WQCV = 0.8 * (0.91 * I - 1.19 * I + 0.78 * I))
D) Design Volume: Vol = (WQCV / 12) * Area Vol = 67 cubic feet
E) Porous Pavement Suface Elevation Elev. = 5,280.00 feet
2. Required Minimum MBP Surface Area: A = Vol / 0.17 A= 392 square feet
Overflow Inlet Elevation: Porous Pavement Elev. + 0.17 feet Elev. = 5,280.17 feet
3. Modular Block Properties Block Name: Golden Series Rain Catcher
Note: Manufacturer: Golden Pavers

Blocks shall have no less than 40% open area
and shall be no less than 4" thick Min. Open Surface Area = 42 %
Minimum Thickness = 4.50 inches
4. Porous Pavement Infill (Check the type used or describe "Other") X ASTM C-33 Sand
Other:

X 1" Layer ASTM C-33 Sand
A) Sand (ASTM C-33) Other:
B) Non-Woven Geotextile Fabric Between Sand & Gravel - X Non-Woven Geotextile Fabric Per USDCM
C) Gravel (AASHTO #4 Coarse Aggregate - CDOT Section 703), 8 Inch Layer AASHTO #4 Coarse Aggregate (8" Min.)
8" Min. Base Course To Have All Fractured Faces. Other:
6. Perimeter Wall (required) X Concrete inches thick
Other:
7. Draining of porous pavement (Check A, or B, or C, answer D) X Infiltration to Subgrade with Non-Woven Geotextile
Based on answers to 7A through 7D, check the appropriate method Fabric: 7(C) checked and 7(D) = no
B) Check box if subgrade is silty or clayey sands Liner: 7(A) checked or 7(D) = yes
C) Check box if subgrade is well-draining soils X
Underdrain with Non-Woven Geotextile Fabric:
D) Does tributary catchment contain land uses that may have 7(B) checked and 7(D) = no
9. Overflow For Larger Storms Yes / No
Notes:
2008-04 S-57
5.0 POROUS LANDSCAPE DETENTION (PLD)—SEDIMENTATION FACILITY
Photo: Courtesy Prince Georges County
5.1 Description
Porous landscape detention (PLD) consists of a low-lying vegetated area underlain by a sand bed with an
underdrain pipe. A shallow surcharge zone exists above the PLD for temporary storage of the WQCV.
During a storm, accumulated runoff ponds in the vegetated zone and gradually infiltrates into the
underlying sand bed, filling the void spaces of the sand. The underdrain gradually dewaters the sand bed
and discharges the runoff to a nearby channel, swale, or storm sewer. Like PPD, this BMP allows WQCV
to be provided on a site that has little open area available for stormwater detention.
5.2.1 Locating
A PLD can be located in just about any of the open areas of a site. It is ideally suited for small
installations such as:
• Parking lot islands
• Street medians
• Roadside swale features
• Site entrance or buffer features
This BMP may also be implemented at a larger scale, serving as an infiltration basin for an entire site if
desired provided the water quality capture volume and average depth requirements contained in this
section are met.
Vegetation may consist of irrigated bluegrass or natural grasses with shrub and tree plantings if desired.
S-58 2008-04
5.2.2 Example Application

The following photos illustrate an installation of PLD in Prince Georges County, Maryland.
Parking lot island before installation of PLD
Excavation and installation of underdrain
Completed PLD facility during storm event
Photos: Courtesy Prince Georges County
5.3.1 General
A primary advantage of PLD is making it possible to provide WQCV on a site while reducing the impact
2008-04 S-59
on developable land. It works well with irrigated bluegrass, whereas experience has shown that
conditions in the bottom of extended detention basins (EDBs) become too wet for bluegrass. A PLD
provides a natural moisture source for vegetation, enabling “green areas” to exist with reduced irrigation.
The adjacent photograph shows an example of a relatively large PLD facility featuring a bluegrass bottom
with a putting green.
The primary disadvantage of PLD is a potential for clogging if a moderate to high level of silts and clays is
allowed to flow into the facility. Also, this BMP should not be placed close to building foundations or other
areas when expansive soils are present, although an underdrain and impermeable liner can ameliorate
some of this concern.

If an underdrain system is incorporated into this BMP, PLD is suited for about any site regardless of in-
situ soil type. If sandy soils are present, the facility can be installed without an underdrain (infiltration
option); granular subsoils are not a requirement. This BMP has a flat surface area, and may be more
difficult to incorporate it into steeply sloping terrain.

Although not tested to date in the Denver area, the amount of pollutant removed by this BMP should be
significant and should equal or exceed the removal rates provided by sand filters, extended detention
basins, or wetland basins. In addition to settling, PLD provides for filtering, adsorption, and biological
uptake of constituents in stormwater. See Table SQ-6 for estimated ranges in pollutant removals. In
addition, because it provides for some infiltration and evaporation, volume of runoff is also reduced, which
translates into a reduced pollutant load leaving the site.
Figure PLD-1 shows a cross-section for a PLD. When implemented using multiple small installations on
a site, it is increasingly important to accurately account for each upstream drainage area tributary to each
PLD site to make sure that each facility is properly sized, individual PLD sites intercept runoff from their
respective tributary areas, and that all portions of the development site are directed to a PLD.
The designer needs to decide early on if infiltration is possible or allowed at the PLD site as that will affect
the design cross-section and whether underdrains will be needed. Considerable savings can be
achieved if the site is suitable for infiltration, sites that typically have NRCS Soil Types A, B or C. The
best way to determine if the site is suitable for PLDs without underdrains is to perform a standard
individual septic disposal system percolation tests at a depth equal to the bottom of the PLD. The test
shall be performed or supervised by a licensed professional engineer. If the engineer certifies that the
site has a percolation rate of less than 60 minutes per inch, underdrains and the supporting gravel and
geotextile fabric layers may be eliminated.
S-60 2008-04
5.5 Design Procedure
The following steps outline the PLD design procedure and criteria.
1. Basin Storage Provide a storage volume based on a 12-hour drain time.

Volume A. Find the required storage volume (watershed inches of runoff):
Using the tributary area’s imperviousness, determine the Required WQCV
(watershed inches of runoff), based on 12-hour drain time in Figure PLD-2.
B. Calculate the Design Volume in cubic feet as follows:
⎛ WQCV ⎞
Design Volume = ⎜ ⎟ ∗ Area
⎝ 12 ⎠
In which:
= The watershed area tributary to the extended detention
Area
pond (square feet).
2. Surface Area Calculate the minimum required flat surface area of the PLD as follows:
and Maximum
WQCV Depth Flat Surface Area = Design Volume in ft3
d
in which,
d = WQCV depth (12-inch maximum) of the PLD basin, ft.
3. Sand/Peat Provide, as a minimum, an 18-inch layer of well mixed sand and peat (85% sand
Media and 15% peat by volume) as shown in Figure PLD-1. Maintain top surface flat. If
sideslopes need to be steeper than 3h:1v (4h:1v or flatter preferred), use vertical
walls. Peat and sand shall be delivered fully mixed in a drum mixer. On-site
mixing of piles shall not be allowed.
4. Granular Granular material shall have all fractured faces and meet the technical
Subbase and requirements of AASHTO #3 or #4 aggregate (CDOT 703, #3 or #4).
Underdrains
For NRCS Type D soils, or when standard percolation tests show percolation
drawdown rates exceeding 60 minutes per inch, or when potential for
groundwater contamination exist, install an 8-inch layer of granular base with
underdrains and an impermeable liner under it. For Type C soils, retain the
underdrain system, but use geotextile under the gravel instead of impermeable
liner unless percolation rates indicate otherwise. When underdrains are not
needed, the 8-inch layer of gravel and all geotextile liners may be eliminated.
Use a control orifice sized to drain the pore volume to empty each cell in
12-hours or more (see Section A-A on Figure PP-9
5. Impermeable When expansive or NRCS Type D soils are present, or potential for groundwater
Membrane and contamination exists, install an impermeable 16 mil thick, or heavier, liner on the
Geotextile bottom and sides of the basin. If vertical walls are permeable or of stacked
Liners blocks, extend the impermeable liner behind the walls.
material that meets the following ASTM requirements: D-4751 - AOS U.S. Std.
Sieve #50 to #70; D-4633 – Trapezoidal tear strength > 100x60 lbs; COE
specified open area > 4%. Products meeting requirements: US Fabric US 2070
and US 670, Mirafi Filterweave 500 and 700, Carthage Mills Carthage 6%.
Wrap all liners to top of the PLD basin and attach firmly with staples to the soil
vertical wall using staples or concrete anchors. Provide sufficient slack so that
the liners are not stretched when rock and sand/pear mix are placed. If tears
are seen or discovered, repair them as recommended by manufacturer with no
less than 18 inches of overlap on all sides of the tear.
2008-04 S-61
5.6 Vegetating the PLD Surface
It is recommended the PLD’s infiltrating surface be vegetated with drought tolerant native grass species
that do well in sandy soils. Table PLD-1 lists recommended seed mix for sites that will not be irrigated
after the grass has been established and include wildflower seed, preceded by (*) to provide a more
diverse and natural look. All seed need to be well mixed, broadcast seeded, followed by hand raking to
cover seed, and then an application of 800 pounds/acre of Biosol to improve germination. Hydromulch
the seeded area with 2500 lbs/acre of virgin wood fiber hydromulch and 150 lbs/acre of organic tackifier.
Do not hydroseed and do not seed if standing water or snow/frozen ground are present.
Table PLD-1. Non-irrigated Native Seed Mix for Vegetating PLDs.
COMMON NAME SCIENTIFIC NAME VARIETY PLS Lbs Ounces

per Acre per Acre
Sand bluestem Andropogon hallii Garden 3.5
Sideoats grama Bouteloua curtipendula Butte 3
Prairie sandreed Calamovilfa longifolia Goshen 3
Indian ricegrass Oryzopsis hymenoides Paloma 3
Switchgrass Panicum virgatum Blackwell 4
Western Wheatgrass Pascopyrum smithii Ariba 3
Little bluestem Schizachyrium scoparium Patura 3
Alkali sacaton Sporobolus airoides 3
Sand dropseed Sporobolus cryptandrus 3
* Pasture Sage Artemisia frigida 2
* Blue aster Aster laevis 4
* Blanket flower Gaillardia aristata 8
* Prairie coneflower Ratibida columnifera 4
* Purple prairieclover Dalea (Petalostemum) purpurea 4
Sub-Totals: 27.5 22
Total lbs per acre: 28.9
Do not use shrub or trees in the flat surface of the PLD. Their roots can damage geotextile liners and will
interfere with regular and restorative maintenance. If used on sideslopes, locate them at leat 6 inces
above the flat surface and have the geotextile and/or impermeable liners placed between them and the
flat PLD surface. DO NOT USE SOD. It will seal the PLD’s surface and destroy it’s infiltration capacity. If
the PLD surfaces will be irrigated, do not place sprinkler heads on the flat surface. The grass mix
specified above will work with irrigation if the irrigation cycles and watering amounts are reduced.
First year maintenance needed to establish good growth should include temporary irrigation and mowing
to control annual weeds. Mowers should be rotary and the tractor small enough not to rut the soil and
damage the vegetation. If needed, spot treat with approved herbicides to control noxious weeds.
Reseed bare areas after the first growing season.
S-62 2008-04
5.7 Design Example
FORMS chapter. A completed form follows the figures and serves as a design example.
PLD's Flat Area equals

Design Vol./Depth (ft) All side slopes 3:1 or flatter
Dryland grasses and (4:1 or flatter preferred)
Optional 10-
100-year WQCV wild flowers seeded unless vertical wall is used.
detention Water in accordance with
volume. Surface Sect. 5.6 of Vol. 3.
DO NOT USE SOD. Wrap all geotextile fabric
Curb opening and impermeable liners
(See Note 4) to top of soil. Attache all liners
firmly to walls or trench sides.
PAVEMENT
depth (12" max.)
IN FLOW
A Inlet
1.5-ft
(min.) 18" Sand/Peat layer
Transition into a V-Shaped A

85% ASTM C-33 Sand
concrete rundown into a 15% Peat mix
section at bottom that has
3-inch river rock inbedded
1.5-inches into the concrete.
Min. 8" gravel layer meeting

16 mil min. thickness CDOT 703, AASHTO #67, #3 or #4
impermeable HDPE coarse aggregate specification.
liner is on expansive (Also see Note 1)
or clayey soils (Type D).
Optional 10- to 100-year
Otherwise use woven 3- to 4-inch dia.
detention control orifice.
geotextile liner perforated pipe
specified on this page. underdrains
(Also see Note 1) spaced at 20-foot
centers connected
ASTM D4633 min. trapezoidal tear strength 100 x 60 lbs,
to inlet (may be
eliminated if
Note (1) conditions
are met).
(1) When certified tests show percolation rates of less than
60 minutes per inch of drawdawn under the PLD's
bottom and infiltration is allowed, eliminate the gravel
2-foot curb opening
(See Note 4) layer, underdrains and geotextile fabric.
6" MIN
(2) When Type C soils are present and when infiltration is allowed,
2" minimum drop
from curb opening
unless percolations show otherwise, use underdrains and
geotextile liner instead of an impermeable liner under the gravel.
(3) When the underlying soils are NRCS Type D or expansive,

3-feet wide 2-inch deep V-pan use impermeable liner under and on sides of the PLD basin.
Imbed a 6-inch layer of 3-inch river rock
into the soil for one foot on each side of (4) Provide a minimum of a 1- to 2-foot wide curb opening every
the pan if a 2 foot curb opening is used. 10 feet (20 feet for 2-wide opening) of curb.
SECTION A-A
Figure PLD-1 – Porous Landscape Detention – Typical Sections
2008-04 S-63
0.50
24-hr drain time a = 0.9 Extended Detention Basin
40-hr drain time a = 1.0 40-hour Drain Time
0.40
Constructed Wetland Basin
0.30 WQCV=a*(0.91i 3 -1.19i 2 +0.78i)
0.25
0.20
0.15
Retention Pond, Porous Pavement
0.10 Detention and Porous
Landscape Detention
12-hour Drain Time
0.05
0.00
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Figure PLD-2—Water Quality Capture Volume (WQCV), 80th Percentile Runoff Event
S-64 2008-04
Design Procedure Form: Porous Landscape Detention (PLD)

Company: BLWH, Inc.

( Ia = 100% if all paved and roofed areas u/s of PLD) Ia = 100.00 %
B) Contributing Watershed Area Including the PLD (Area) Area = 10,000 square feet

3 2
(WQCV = 0.8 * (0.91 * I - 1.19 * I + 0.78 * I))
D) Design Volume: VolPLD = (WQCV / 12) * Area Vol = 333 cubic feet
2. PLD Surface Area (APLD) and Average Depth (dav) APLD = 400 square feet
(from 333.33 square feet to 666.67 square feet)
(dav: = (Vol / APLD), Min=0.5', Max=1.0') dav = 0.83 feet
3. Draining of PLD (Check A, or B, or C, answer D) Infiltration to Subgrade with Permeable

Based on answers to 3A through 3D, check the appropriate method Membrane: 3(C) checked and 3(E) = no
A) Check box if subgrade is heavy or expansive clay X X Underdrain with Impermeable

B) Check box if subgrade is silty or clayey sand Liner: 3(A) checked or 3(E) = yes
D) Check box if underdrains are not desirable or 3(B) checked and 3(E) = no
if underdrains are not feasible at this site.
16-Mil. Impermeable Membrane with No Underdrain:
E) Does tributary catchment contain land uses that may have 3(D) checked - Evapotranspiration only
4. Sand/Peat Mix and Gravel Subbase (See Figure PLD-1)
A) Heavy or Expansive Clay (NRCS Group D Soils) Present; X 18" Minimum Depth Sand-Peat Mix with 8" Gravel Layer. 16-Mil.
Perforated HDPE Underdrain Used. Impermeable Liner and a 3" to 4" Perforated HDPE Underdrain.
B) Silty or Clayey Sand (NRCS Group C Soils) Present;

Perforated HDPE Underdrain Used. 18" Minimum Depth Sand-Peat Mix with 8" Gravel Layer and a
3" to 4" Perforated HDPE Underdrain w/ Non-Woven Pemeable Membrane.
C) No Potential For Contamination And W ell-Draining 18" Minimum Depth Sand-Peat Mix with Non-Woven
(NRCS Group A or B Soils) Are Present; Underdrains Elliminated. Pemeable Membrane and No Underdrain (Direct Infiltration).
D) Underdrains Are Not Desirable Or Are Not Feasible At This Site. 18" Minimum Depth Sand-Peat Mix with An Additional 18"
Minimum Layer Sand-Peat Mix or Sand-Class 'A' Compost Bottom
Layer (Total Sand-Peat Depth of 36"). 16-Mil. Impermeable Liner Used.
E) Other: Other:
Notes:
2008-04 S-65
6.0 EXTENDED DETENTION BASIN (EDB)—SEDIMENTATION FACILITY
6.1 Description
An extended detention basin (EDB) is a sedimentation basin designed to totally drain dry sometime after
stormwater runoff ends. It is an adaptation of a detention basin used for flood control. The primary
difference is in the outlet design. The EDB uses a much smaller outlet that extends the emptying time of
the more frequently occurring runoff events to facilitate pollutant removal. The EDB’s drain time for the
brim-full water quality capture volume (i.e., time to fully evacuate the design capture volume) of 40 hours
is recommended to remove a significant portion of fine particulate pollutants found in urban stormwater
runoff. Soluble pollutant removal can be somewhat enhanced by providing a small wetland marsh or
ponding area in the basin's bottom to promote biological uptake. The basins are considered to be "dry"
because they are designed not to have a significant permanent pool of water remaining between storm
runoff events. However, EDB may develop wetland vegetation and sometimes shallow pools in the
bottom portions of the facilities.
An EDB can be used to enhance stormwater runoff quality and reduce peak stormwater runoff rates. If
these basins are constructed early in the development cycle, they can also be used to trap sediment from
construction activities within the tributary drainage area. The accumulated sediment, however, will need
to be removed after upstream land disturbances cease and before the basin is placed into final long-term
use. Also, an EDB can sometimes be retrofitted into existing flood control detention basins.
EDBs can be used to improve the quality of urban runoff coming from roads, parking lots, residential
neighborhoods, commercial areas, and industrial sites and are generally used for regional or follow-up
treatment. Refering to Figure ND-8 in the earlier chapter, EDBs are most applicable for catchments with
a tributary impervious area of 10 acres of more. They can be used as an onsite BMP that works well with
S-66 2008-04
other BMPs, such as upstream onsite source controls and downstream infiltration/filtration basins or
wetland channels. If desired, a flood routing detention volume can be provided above the water quality
capture volume (WQCV) of the basin.
6.3.1 General
An EDB can be designed to provide other benefits such as recreation and open space opportunities in
addition to reducing peak runoff rates and improving water quality. They are effective in removing
particulate matter and the associate heavy metals and other pollutants. As with other BMPs, safety
issues need to be addressed through proper design.

Normally, the land required for an EDB is approximately 0.5 to 2.0 percent of the total tributary
development area. In high groundwater areas, consider the use of retention ponds (RP) instead in order
to avoid many of the problems that can occur when the EDB’s bottom is located below the seasonal high
water table. Soil maps should be consulted, and soil borings may be needed to establish design
geotechnical parameters.

The pollutant removal range of an EDB was presented in Table SQ-6 in the STORMWATER QUALITY
MANAGEMENT chapter of this volume. Removal of suspended solids and metals can be moderate to
high, and removal of nutrients is low to moderate. The removal of nutrients can be improved when a
small shallow pool or wetland is included as part of the basin's bottom or the basin is followed by BMPs
more efficient at removing soluble pollutants, such as a filtration system, constructed wetlands or wetland
channels.
The major factor controlling the degree of pollutant removal is the emptying time provided by the outlet.
The rate and degree of removal will also depend on influent particle sizes. Metals, oil and grease, and
some nutrients have a close affinity for suspended sediment and will be removed partially through
sedimentation.
6.3.4 Aesthetics and Multiple Uses

Since an EDB is designed to drain very slowly, its bottom and lower portions will be inundated frequently
for extended periods of time. Grasses in this frequently inundated zone will tend to be stressed, with only
the species that can survive the specific environment at each site eventually prevailing. In addition, the
bottom will be the depository of all the sediment that settles out in the basin. As a result, the bottom can
be muddy and may have an undesirable appearance to some. To reduce this problem and to improve
the basin's availability for other uses (such as open space habitat and passive recreation), it is suggested
that the designer provide a lower-stage basin as suggested in the Two Stage Design procedure. As an
2008-04 S-67
alternative, a retention pond (RP) could be used, in which the settling occurs primarily within the
permanent pool.
Whenever desirable and feasible, incorporate the EDB within a larger flood control basin or as a part of a
full-spectrum detention facility. Also, whenever possible try to accommodate within the basin other urban
uses such as passive recreation and wildlife habitat. If multiple uses are being contemplated, consider
using a multiple-stage detention basin to limit inundation of passive recreational areas to one or two
occurrences a year. Generally, the area within the WQCV is not well suited for active recreation facilities
such as ballparks, playing fields, and picnic areas. These are best located above the WQCV pool level.
Figure EDB-1 shows a representative layout of an EDB. Although flood control storage can be
accomplished by providing a storage volume above the water quality storage, how best to accomplish this
is not included in this discussion. Whether or not flood storage is provided, all embankments should be
protected from catastrophic failure when runoff exceeds the design event. The State Engineer's
regulatory requirements for larger dam embankments and storage volumes must be followed whenever
regulatory height and/or volume thresholds are exceeded. Below those thresholds, the engineer should
design the embankment-spillway-outlet system so that catastrophic failure will not occur.
Perforated outlet and trash rack configurations are illustrated in the TYPICAL STRUCTURAL BMP
DETAINS AND SPECIFICATIONS chapter. Figure EDB-3 equates the WQCV that needs to be emptied
over 40 hours, to the total required area of perforations per row for the standard configurations shown in
that section. The chart is based on the rows being equally spaced vertically at 4-inch centers. This total
area of perforations per row is then used to determine the number of uniformly sized holes per row (see
detail in the TYPICAL STRUCTURAL BMP DETAINS AND SPECIFICATIONS chapter). One or more
perforated columns on a perforated orifice plate integrated into the front of the outlet can be used;
however, the fewer the number of columns, the better, maximizing the size of the orifice. Using least
number of columns and the largest possible orifice, reduces clogging possibilities. Other types of outlets
may also be used, provided they control the release of the WQCV in a manner consistent with the drain
time requirements and are approved in advance by the District.
Although the soil types beneath the pond seldom prevent the use of this BMP, they should be considered
during design. Any potential exfiltration capacity should be considered a short-term characteristic and
ignored in the design of the WQCV because exfiltration will decrease over time as the soils clog with fine
sediment and as the groundwater beneath the basin develops a mound that surfaces into the basin. At
the same time, the findings by the International BMP Database team suggest that an EDP can reduce
annual runoff volume by about 30% and this finding can help justify the annual pollutant load reductions
when assessing the performance of this facility.
S-68 2008-04
High groundwater should not preclude the use of an EDB. Groundwater, however, should to be
considered during design and construction, and the outlet design must account for any upstream base
flows that enter the basin or that may result from groundwater surfacing within the basin itself.
Stable, all weather access to critical elements of the pond, such as the inlet, outlet, spillway, and
sediment collection areas must be provided for maintenance purposes.
The following steps outline the design procedure and criteria for an EDB.
1. Basin Storage Volume Provide a storage volume equal to 120 percent of the WQCV based on a
40-hour drain time, above the lowest outlet (i.e., perforation) in the basin.
The additional 20 percent of storage volume provides for sediment
accumulation and the resultant loss in storage volume.
A. Determine the WQCV tributary catchment’s percent
imperviousness. Account for the effects of DCIA, if any, on
Effective Imperviousness. Using runoff volume reduction
practices in the tributary catchment and Figure ND-1, determine
the reduction in impervious area to use with WQCV calculations.
B. Find the required storage volume (watershed inches of runoff):
Determine the Required WQCV (watershed inches of runoff)
using Figure EDB-2, based on the EDB’s 40-hour drain time.
Calculate the Design Volume in acre-feet as follows:
⎛ WQCV ⎞
Design Volume = ⎜ ⎟ ∗ Area ∗ 1.2
⎝ 12 ⎠
In which:
Area = The watershed area tributary to the
extended detention pond
1.2 factor = Multiplier of 1.2 to account for the additional
20% of required storage for sediment
accumulation
2. Outlet Works The Outlet Works are to be designed to release the WQCV (i.e., not the
“Design Volume”) over a 40-hour period. Refer to the TYPICAL
STRUCTURAL BMP DETAINS AND SPECIFICATIONS chapter for
schematics pertaining to structure geometry; grates, trash racks, and
screens; outlet type: orifice plate or perforated riser pipe; cutoff collar size
and location; and all other necessary components.
For a perforated outlet, use Figure EDB-3 to calculate the required area
per row based on WQCV and the depth of perforations at the outlet. See
the TYPICAL STRUCTURAL BMP DETAINS AND SPECIFICATIONS
chapter to determine the appropriate perforation geometry and number of
rows. The lowest perforations should be set at the water surface
elevation of the outlet micro-pool. The total outlet area is calculated by
multiplying the area per row by the number of rows.
Minimized the number of columns and maximize the perforation hole
diameter when designing outlets to reduce chances of clogging by
2008-04 S-69
accepting the orifice site that will empty the WQCV in 36 to 44 hours.
3. Trash Rack Provide a trash rack of sufficient size to prevent clogging of the primary
water quality outlet. Size the rack so as not to interfere with the hydraulic
capacity of the outlet. Using the total outlet area and the selected
perforation diameter (or height), Figures 6, 6a or 7 in the TYPICAL
STRUCTURAL BMP DETAINS AND SPECIFICATIONS chapter will help
to determine the minimum open area required for the trash rack.
Use one-half of the perforated plate’s total outlet area to calculate the
trash rack’s size. This accounts for the variable inundation of the outlet
orifices. Figures 6 and 6a were developed as suggested standardized
outlet designs for smaller sites.
4. Basin Shape Shape the pond whenever possible with a gradual expansion from the
inlet and a gradual contraction toward the outlet, thereby minimizing short
circuiting. It is best to have a basin length to width ratio between 2:1 to
3:1. To achieve this, it may be necessary to modify the inlet and outlet
points through the use of pipes, swales or channels to accomplish this.
Always maximize the distance between the inlet and the outlet.
5. Two-Stage Design A two-stage design with a pool that fills often with frequently occurring
runoff minimizes standing water and sediment deposition in the remainder
of the basin. The two stages are as follows:
A. Top Stage: The top stage should be one or more feet deep with
its bottom sloped at 1 to 2 percent toward the trickle flow channel.
B. Bottom Stage: The dry weather water surface of the active
surcharge volume of the bottom stage should be 0.5 feet or more
below the bottom of the top stage, but no less than 4-inches
below the invert of the upstream trickle channel, and store no less
than 0.5 percent of the WQCV.
Provide a permanent micro-pool below the active storage volume
of the lower stage in front of the outlet. The pool should be ½ the
depth of the top stage depth described above, or 2.5 feet,
whichever results in the larger depth. Line bottom of the micro-
pool with concrete paving at least 6-inches thick or with grouted
boulders (B18) grouted to the top of the boulders.
6. Low-Flow Channel Conveys low flows from the forebay to the bottom stage. To provide a
maintainable trickle-flow channel, lining its bottom with concrete is
recommended. Otherwise line its sides with buried Type VL soil riprap
and bottom with concrete. Make it at least 4-inches deep if concrete lined
sides and 8-inches if buried riprap sides are used. At a minimum provide
capacity equal to twice the release capacity at the upstream forebay
outlet.
7. Basin Side Slopes Basin side slopes should be stable and gentle to facilitate maintenance
and access. Side slopes should be no steeper than 4:1 and the use of
flatter slopes is recommended; the flatter, the better and safer.
8. Dam Embankment Design the embankment not to fail during a 100-year and larger storms.
Embankment slopes should be no steeper than 3:1, preferably 4:1 or
flatter, and planted with turf forming grasses. Poorly compacted native
S-70 2008-04
soils should be excavated and replaced. Embankment soils should be

compacted to at least 95 percent of their maximum density according to
ASTM D 698-70 (Modified Proctor). Spillway structures and overflows
should be designed in accordance with local drainage criteria and should
consider UDFCD drop-structure design guidelines or the use of buried soil
riprap or reinforced turf mats installed per manufacturers
recommendations.
9. Vegetation Bottom vegetation provides erosion control and sediment entrapment.

Pond bottom, berms, and side sloping areas may be planted with native
grasses or with irrigated turf, depending on the local setting and needs.
10. Access All weather stable access to the bottom, forebay, and outlet works area
shall be provided for maintenance vehicles. Grades should not exceed
10 percent, and a solid driving surface of gravel, rock, concrete,
gravel-stabilized turf, or Type VL soil riprap should be provided.
11. Inlet Dissipate flow energy at pond's inflow point(s) to limit erosion and
promote particle sedimentation. Inlets should be designed in accordance
with UDFCD drop structure criteria, impact basin outlet details, or other
types of energy dissipating structures.
12. Forebay Design Provides an opportunity for larger particles to settle out in the inlet in an
area that has a solid surface bottom to facilitate mechanical sediment
removal. A rock berm or concrete-wall should be constructed between
the forebay and the main EDB. The forebay volume of the permanent
pool should be about 3 to 5 percent of the design WQCV. A pipe
throughout the berm to convey water the main body of the EDB should be
offset from the inflow streamline to prevent short circuiting and should be
sized to drain the forebay volume in 3 to 5 minutes, respectively. The
floor of the forebay should be concrete or grouted boulder lined to define
sediment removal limits.
13. Flood Storage Combining the water quality facility with a flood control facility is
recommended. The 5-year, 10-year, 100-year, or other floods may be
detained above the WQCV. See Section 1.5.5 of the BMP PLANNING
FOR NEW DEVELOPMENT AND SIGNIFICANT REDEVELOPMENT
chapter of this volume for further guidance.
14. Multiple Uses When desirable and feasible, incorporate the EDB within a larger flood
control basin. Also, whenever possible, try to provide for other urban
uses such as active or passive recreation, and wildlife habitat. If multiple
uses are being contemplated, use the multiple-stage detention basin
design approach to limit inundation of passive recreational areas to one or
two occurrences a year. The area within the WQCV is not suited for
active recreation activities such as ballparks, playing fields, and
picnic areas. These are best located above the WQCV level.
6.6 Design Example
2008-04 S-71
Dam Embankment
Side Slopes
Side Slopes no Steeper than 4H:1V No steeper than 3h:1v
Top Stage Floor with 1% to 2% Access to Outlet

Slope to Trickle Channel Outlet w/ a Trash Rack
Inflow
Low
Flow Bottom
Cha
nnel Stage
Spillway
Forebay
Stable Maintenance Access
PLAN
Note: Provide energy dissipating inlet such as Not to scale
impact basin for pipes and GSB drop or
baffle chute for channel/swales.
4" min. 6" min.
Emergency Spillway
Flood Level (e.g.,
Surface Inflow Forebay Volume = 3% - 5% of 100-yr, SPF, PMF, etc.)
WQCV Spillway Crest
Berm/Wall Embankment
Embankment/Spillway
Inflow Protection
Using Buried Riprap or
D WQ D BS Turf Reinforced Mat
Outflow
Invert of Trickle D MP > 1
2 DWQ
Flow Channel (2.5' min) Outlet Protection
Size Outlet &
Drain Forebay Seepage Cutoff Collar
Volume in 3 to
Outlet Works
5 Minutes
Frequent Runoff Surcharge (see details)
Paved Bottom Pools D BS equal to 0.5% of
the WQCV Concrete (6-in min.) or
Grouted Boulder (B18) Lining
PROFILE
Not to scale
Figure EDB-1 –Extended Detention Basin (EDB) Plan and Sections
S-72 2008-04
0.50
0.45 12-hr drain time a = 0.8 Extended Detention Basin
0.30 WQCV=a*(0.91i 3 -1.19i 2 +0.78i)
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10 Retention Pond, Porous Pavement

Detention and Porous
Landscape Detention
0.00
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Figure EDB-2—Water Quality Capture Volume (WQCV), 80th Percentile Runoff Event
2008-04 S-73
10
Equation for 40 hour drain time

1
5 ⎡ WQCV ⎤ c
A = 1 .8 ⎢
⎣ b ⎥⎦
Water Quality Capture Volume (acre-ft)
b = 0 . 0166 H 2
+ 0 . 2055 H + 0 . 1543
c = − 0 . 0018 H − 0 . 0068 H + 1 . 0015
2
et
fe et t et
6- fe -fee -fe
o t
= -
fo
1 h 4 3 2
1-
pt
De
CV
Q
W
.5
.1
.1 .5 1 5 10 30
Required Area per Row, A (square inches)
Figure EDB-3—Water Quality Outlet Sizing: Extended Detention Basin (Dry)

With 40-hour Drain Time for Capture Volume
(Equation on this figure valid only for WQCV Depth H < 6 feet)
S-74 2008-04
Design Procedure Form: Extended Detention Basin (EDB) - Sedimentation Facility

Sheet 1 of 3
Company: BLWH, Inc.

Ia = 60.00 %
B) Contributing Watershed Area (Area) Area = 45.000 acres

3 2
(WQCV =1.0 * (0.91 * I - 1.19 * I + 0.78 * I))
D) Design Volume: Vol = (WQCV / 12) * Area * 1.2 Vol = 1.0627 acre-feet
2. Outlet Works
A) Outlet Type (Check One) X Orifice Plate

Perforated Riser Pipe
Other:
B) Depth at Outlet Above Lowest Perforation (H) H= 2.50 feet
C) Recommended Maximum Outlet Area per Row, (Ao) Ao = 1.7 square inches
D) Perforation Dimensions:
i) Circular Perforation Diameter or D= 1.500 inches
ii) Width of 2" High Rectangular Perforations W= inches
E) Number of Columns (nc, See Table 6a-1 For Maximum) nc = 1 number
F) Actual Design Outlet Area per Row (Ao) Ao = 1.8 square inches
G) Number of Rows (nr) nr = 8 number
H) Total Outlet Area (Aot) Aot = 13.3 square inches
3. Trash Rack
A) Needed Open Area: At = 0.5 * (Figure 7 Value) * Aot At = 424 square inches
B) Type of Outlet Opening (Check One) X < 2" Diameter Round

2" High Rectangular
Other:
C) For 2", or Smaller, Round Opening (Ref.: Figure 6a):
i) Width of Trash Rack and Concrete Opening (W conc)

from Table 6a-1 W conc = 15 inches
ii) Height of Trash Rack Screen (HTR) HTR = 60 inches
2008-04 S-75

Sheet 2 of 3
Company: BLWH, Inc.
iii) Type of Screen (Based on Depth H), Describe if "Other" X S.S. #93 VEE Wire (US Filter)
Other:
iv) Screen Opening Slot Dimension, Describe if "Other" X 0.139" (US Filter)
Other:
v) Spacing of Support Rod (O.C.) 1.00 inches

Type and Size of Support Rod (Ref.: Table 6a-2) TE 0.074 in. x 0.50 in.
vi) Type and Size of Holding Frame (Ref.: Table 6a-2) 0.75 in. x 1.00 in. angle
D) For 2" High Rectangular Opening (Refer to Figure 6b):
I) Width of Rectangular Opening (W) W= inches
ii) Width of Perforated Plate Opening (W conc = W + 12") W conc = inches
iii) Width of Trashrack Opening (W opening) from Table 6b-1 W opening = inches
iv) Height of Trash Rack Screen (HTR) HTR = inches
TM
v) Type of Screen (based on depth H) (Describe if "Other") Klemp KPP Series Aluminum
Other:
TM
vi) Cross-bar Spacing (Based on Table 6b-1, Klemp KPP inches
Grating). Describe if "Other" Other:
TM
vii) Minimum Bearing Bar Size (Klemp Series, Table 6b-2)
(Based on depth of WQCV surcharge)
4. Detention Basin length to width ratio 1.20 (L/W)
5 Pre-sedimentation Forebay Basin - Enter design values
A) Volume (3% to 5% of Design Volume from 1D) 0.0400 acre-feet

(3% - 5% of Design Volume (0.0319 - 0.0531 acre-feet.)
B) Surface Area 0.025 acres
C) Connector Pipe Diameter 4 inches

(Size to drain this volume in 5-minutes under inlet control)
D) Paved/Hard Bottom and Sides X yes/no
S-76 2008-04

Sheet 3 of 3
Company: BLWH, Inc.
6. Two-Stage Design - See Figure EDB-1
A) Top Stage (Depth DWQ = 2' Minimum) DW Q = 2.00 feet

Top Stage Storage: no less than 95.74% of Design Volume (1.0174 acre-feet.) Storage= 1.1000 acre-feet
B) Bottom Stage Depth (DBS = 0.33' Minimum Below Trickle Channel Invert) DBS = 0.33 feet
Bottom Stage Storage: no less than 0.5% of Design Volume (0.0053 acre-feet.) Storage= 0.0055 acre-feet
Storage = A * Depth Above WS To Bottom Of Top Stage Surf. Area= 0.017 acres
C) Micro Pool (Minimum Depth = the Larger of Depth= 2.60 feet

0.50 * Top Stage Depth (1 ') or 2.5 '
D) Total Volume: Voltot = Storage from 5A + 6A + 6B Voltot = 1.1455 acre-feet

(Must be > Design Volume in 1D, or 1.0627 acre-feet.)
7. Basin Side Slopes (Z, horizontal distance per unit vertical) Z= 5.00 (horizontal/vertical)
Minimum Z = 4, Flatter Preferred
8. Dam Embankment Side Slopes (Z, horizontal distance) Z= 4.00 (horizontal/vertical)

per unit vertical) Minimum Z = 3, Flatter Preferred
9. Vegetation (Check the method or describe "Other") Native Grass

X Irrigated Turf Grass
Other:
Notes:
2008-04 S-77
7.1 Description
A sand filter extended detention basin (SFB) is a stormwater filter that consists of a runoff storage zone
underlain by a sand bed with an underdrain system. During a storm, accumulated runoff ponds in the
surcharge zone and gradually infiltrates into the underlying sand bed, filling the void spaces of the sand.
The underdrain gradually dewaters the sand bed and discharges the runoff to a nearby channel, swale,
or storm sewer.
A SFB is generally suited to onsite configurations where there is no base flow and is put in operation
when the upstream catchment no longer has construction or grading/landscaping activities.
7.3.1 General
Primary advantages of SFBs include effective water quality enhancement through settling and filtering.
The primary disadvantage is a potential for clogging if a moderate to high level of silts and clays are
allowed to flow into the facility. For this reason, the SFB should not be put into operation while
construction or major landscaping activities are taking place in the tributary catchment. Also, this
BMP should not be located close to building foundations or other areas where expansive soils are a
concern, although an underdrain and impermeable liner can ameliorate some of this concern.

Since an underdrain system is incorporated into this BMP, SFB is suited for about any site; presence of
sandy subsoils is not a requirement. This BMP has a flat surface area, so it may be more challenging to
incorporate it into steeply sloping terrain.
S-78 2008-04

Tests of sand filters in the Denver area and other parts of United States show that the amount of pollutant
removed by this BMP are significant and provide removal of total phosphorous that exceed most of the
BMPs with the possible exception of Constructed Wetland Basins (CWBs). See Table SQ-6 for reported
ranges in pollutant concentrations from SFBs.
7.3.4 Maintenance Needs

Before selecting this BMP, be sure that the maintenance specified in the MAINTENANCE
RECOMMENDATIONS chapter of the Manual will be provided by either a local government or by the
owner. This BMP's performance is critical on having regular maintenance provided.
The following steps outline the design procedure and criteria for an SFB.
1. Basin Storage Volume Provide a storage volume equal to 100 percent of the WQCV based on a
40-hour drain time, above the sand bed of the basin.
A. Determine the WQCV tributary catchment’s percent
imperviousness. Account for the effects of DCIA or other runoff
volume reducing facilities, if any, in the tributary catchments.
B. Find the required storage volume (watershed inches of runoff):
Determine the Required WQCV (watershed inches of runoff)
using Figure SFB-2, based on the SFB’s 40-hour drain time.
C. Calculate the Design Volume in acre-feet as follows:
⎛ WQCV ⎞
Design Volume = ⎜ ⎟ * Area
⎝ 12 ⎠
In which:
Area = Area tributary to the Extended Detention Basin

(acres)
2. Basin Depth/Design Maximum depth for the Design Volume shall be 3 feet. See Figure
SFB-1 for design details for sand bed, inflow needs and outlet needs.
3. Filter’s Surface Area Calculate the minimum sand filter area (As) of the basin’s bottom using:
As = (Design Volume / 3) *43,560 (square feet)
6. Sand Media Provide, as a minimum, an 18-inch layer of clean C-33 sand as shown
in Figure SFB-1. Maintain top surface flat. If sideslopes need to be
steeper than 3h:1v (4h:1v or flatter preferred), use vertical walls.
7. Granular Base and Granular material shall have all fractured faces and meet the technical
Underdrains requirements of AASHTO #3, #4 or #67 aggregate (CDOT 703, #3, 4 or
#67).
8. Impermeable When expansive or NRCS Type D soils are present, or when standard
Membrane and percolation tests show percolation drawdown rates exceeding 60
minutes per inch, or potential for groundwater contamination exists,
2008-04 S-79
Geotextile Liners install an impermeable 16 mil thick, or heavier, liner on the bottom and
sides of the basin. If vertical walls are permeable or of stacked blocks,
extend the impermeable liner behind the walls.
If soils are not expansive (i.e., NRCS Type A, B or C), use a woven
geotextile material that meets the following ASTM requirements: D-4751
- AOS U.S. Std. Sieve #50 to #70; D-4633 – Trapezoidal tear strength >
100x60 lbs; COE specified open area > 4%. Products meeting
requirements: US Fabric US 2070 and US 670, Mirafi Filterweave 500
and 700, Carthage Mills Carthage 6%.
Wrap all liners to top of the PLD basin and attach firmly with staples to
the soil vertical wall using staples or concrete anchors. Provide
sufficient slack so that the liners are not stretched when rock and
sand/pear mix are placed. If tears are seen or discovered, repair them
as recommended by manufacturer with no less than 18 inches of
overlap on all sides of the tear.
4. Outlet Works When underdrains are needed, the outlet works consists of 4” perforated
HDPE pipe to convey water to the overflow outlet structure. Space
perforated pipe on 20 foot centers or less. At the outlet of the HDPE pipe
into the box, install an orifice sized to empty the WQCW above the sand
in no less than 24 hours.
Provided an overflow outlet pipe out of the overflow structure to convey
flows away from the filter basin when the runoff volume exceeds the
WQCV at rates required by local jurisdiction to control the flood
detention, typically the 10- and the 100-year storm.
The WQCV basin may me oversized to contain the EURV described in
the STORAGE chapter of Volume 2 of this Manual, in which case design
the orifice outlet to drain the EURV in 72 hours and control the 100-year
volume as described in Volume 2.
5. Inlet Works Provide an energy dissipating outlet for all inlet points into the SFB. Use
an impact basin for pipes and a baffle chute or grouted sloping boulder
drop if a channel or swale is used. Install a Type VL or L riprap basin at
the inlet over a geotextile fabric that is wrapped up on the sides to the top
of the sand layer (see Figure SFB-1). Fill all rock voids with filter sand.
7.5 Design Examples
S-80 2008-04
4" Ø perforated Collection manifold

HDPE pipe on ** Side slopes may be
4" or 6" Ø solid HDPE
20-foot centers replaced with vertical concrete,
pipe
Overflow block or GB24 grouted boulder
Type VL or L riprap = 3D x 3D Outlet
D = pipe diameter. walls. Extend wall 24" (min.)
Fill all gaps with filter sand. below bottom of gravel layer
(sand layer when gravel is
not needed)
4:1 or
**
flatter 3:1 or
Surface area of the sand filter flatter
Inlet
A
y
lw a
A Spil
Maintenance access
A s
Plan 4" Ø perf.

18" min. ASTM C 33 sand
HDPE pipe
4"
3" 8" min. Gravel Layer
Nonwoven Geotextile
(See specification in Profile View) 1"
Section A-A
Pipe inlet with energy dissipating impact basin at
outlet. Elevation
Or, energy dissipating grouted boulder rundown.
(See details in Hydraulic Structure chapter of Vol. 2 of
USDCM) Wrap all geotextile fabric and impermeable
Riprap outlet protection liners to the top of sand layer.
Securely attach to walls or sides of basin.
Spillway crest
Overflow Outlet
Brim-full WQCV Install control
orifice to drain
D Surface area of the sand filter 3.0' max. depth WQCV in
3 D min.
24 hours.
18" min. ASTM C 33 sand
3.0 ft. min.

liner overlap 4"Ø perforated HDPE pipe 8" min. gravel layer that
meets CDOT Specification
703 for aggregate No 3,4, of 67.
Woven geotextile fabric meeting: (AASHTO MR43 No. 3, 4, or 67)
ASTM D4633 min. trapezoidal tear strength 100 x 60 lbs, (1) When certified tests show percolation rates of less than
Minimum COE specified open area of 4%. 60 minutes per inch of drawdown under the PLD's
bottom and infiltration is allowed, eliminate the gravel
layer, underdrains and geotextile fabric.
(2) When Type C soils are present and when infiltration is allowed,
unless percolation tests show otherwise, use underdrains and
geotextile liner instead of an impermeable liner under the gravel.
(3) When the underlying soils are NRCS Type D or expansive,
Profile when existing of proposed building is within 10 feet, and/or
and on sides of the pavement and gravel media basin.
Figure SFB-1 –Sand Filter Basin (SFB) – Plan and Sections
2008-04 S-81
0.50
0.45 12-hr drain time a = 0.8 Extended Detention Basin &
24-hr drain time a = 0.9 Sand Filter Basin
0.40 40-hr drain time a = 1.0 40-hour Drain Time

0.30 WQCV=a*(0.91i 3 -1.19i 2 +0.78i)
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10 Retention Pond, Porous Pavement

Landscape Detention
0.00
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Figure SFB-2—Water Quality Capture Volume (WQCV), 80th Percentile Runoff Event
S-82 2008-04
Design Procedure Form: Sand Filter Basin (SFB)

Company: BLWH, Inc.

Ia = 98.00 %

3 2
(WQCV =1.0 * (0.91 * I - 1.19 * I + 0.78 * I))
D) Design Volume: Vol = (WQCV / 12) * Area Vol = 0.0438 acre-feet
2. Minimum Filter Surface Area: As = (Vol / 3) * 43,560 As = 636 square feet, Minimum
Actual Filter Surface Area Used (Should not be less than minimum): As = 660 square feet,
Filter Surface Elevation 5300.00 feet
Average Side Slope of the Filter Basin (4:1 or flatter, zero for vertical walls) Z= 0.0 Using Vertical Walls
3. Estimate of Basin Depth (D), based on filter area As D= 2.9 feet
4. Outlet Works
A) Sand (ASTM C-33) Layer Thickness (18" min.) X inches
B) Non-Woven Geotextile Fabric Between Sand & Gravel - meeting ASTM X Non-Woven Geotextile Per USDCM Figure SFB-1
D4751 - AOS U.S. Std. Seive #50 to #70. Min. Grab Strength = 100 lbs. Other:
C) Gravel (AASHTO or CDOT Section 703; #4, #57, or #67)

Thickness (8" min.) 8 inches, No.
D) Overflow Elevation At Top of Design Volume 5302.90 feet

(Filter Surface Elev. + Estimate of Basin Depth (D))
4. Basin Inlet
A) Inlet Pipe with Impact Basin; OR X Inlet Pipe with Impact Basin; OR
Inlet Channel with Grouted Sloping Boulder Drop; OR Inlet Channel with GSB Drop; OR
Inlet Channel with Concrete Baffle Chute Drop Inlet Channel with Baffle Chute Drop
B) Riprap Outlet Protection For Pipe or Channel Over Non-Woven X Riprap Outlet Protection
Geotextile Fabric Wrapped to the Top of the Sand Layer Other:
5. Draining of Sand Filter Basin (Check A, or B, or C, answer D) X Infiltration to Subgrade with Permeable
Based on answers to 5A through 5D, check the appropriate method Membrane: 5(C) checked and 5(D) = no
A) Check box if subgrade is heavy or expansive clay Underdrain with Impermeable

B) Check box if subgrade is silty or clayey sands Membrane: 5(A) checked or 5(D) = yes
C) Check box if subgrade is well-draining soils X
6. Describe Provisions for Maintenance
Notes: Used verical walls on sides of filter.
2008-04 S-83
8.0 CONSTRUCTED WETLANDS BASIN (CWB)—SEDIMENTATION FACILITY
8.1 Description
A constructed wetlands basin (CWB) is a shallow retention pond (RP), which requires a perennial base
flow to permit the growth of rushes, willows, cattails, and reeds to slow down runoff and allow time for
sedimentation, filtering, and biological uptake. It is a sedimentation basin and a form of a treatment plant.
A CWB differ from "natural" wetlands as they are totally human artifacts that are built to enhance
stormwater quality. Sometimes small wetlands that exist along ephemeral drainageways on Colorado's
high plains could be enlarged and incorporated into the constructed wetland system. Such action,
however, requires the approval of federal and state regulators.
Current (1999) regulations intended to protect natural wetlands recognize a separate classification of
wetlands constructed for a water quality treatment. Constructed wetland basins generally are not allowed
on receiving waters and cannot be used to mitigate the loss of natural wetlands but are allowed to be
disturbed by maintenance activities. Therefore, the legal and regulatory status of maintaining a wetland
constructed for the primary purpose of water quality treatment, such as the CWB, is separate from the
disturbance of a natural wetland. Nevertheless, the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers has established
maximum areas that can be maintained under a nationwide permit. Thus, any activity that disturbs a
constructed wetland should be first cleared through the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers to ensure it is
covered by some form of an individual, general, or nationwide 404 permit.
A CWB can be used as a follow-up structural BMP in a watershed, or as a stand-alone onsite facility if the
owner provides sufficient water to sustain the wetland. Flood control storage can be provided above the
CWB’s water quality capture volume (WQCV) pool to act as a multiuse facility.
CWB requires a net influx of water to maintain its vegetation and microorganisms. A complete seasonal
water budget analysis is necessary to ensure the adequacy of the base flow.
S-84 2008-04
8.3.1 General
A CWB offers several potential advantages, such as natural aesthetic qualities, wildlife habitat, erosion
control, and pollutant removal. It can also provide an effective follow-up treatment to onsite and source
control BMPs that rely upon settling of larger sediment particles. In other words, it offers yet another
effective structural BMP for larger tributary catchments.
The primary drawback of the CWB is the need for a continuous base flow to ensure viable wetland
growth. In addition, silt and scum can accumulate and unless properly designed and built, can be flushed
out during larger storms. In addition, in order to maintain a healthy wetland growth, the surcharge depth
for WQCV above the permanent water surface cannot exceed 2 feet.
Along with routine good housekeeping maintenance, occasional “mucking out” will be required when
sediment accumulations become too large and affect performance. Periodic sediment removal is also
needed for proper distribution of growth zones and of water movement within the wetland.

A perennial base flow is needed to sustain a wetland, and should be determined using a water budget
analysis. Loamy soils are needed in a wetland bottom to permit plants to take root. Exfiltration through a
wetland bottom cannot be relied upon because the bottom is either covered by soils of low permeability or
because the groundwater is higher than the wetland's bottom. Also, wetland basins require a near-zero
longitudinal slope, which can be provided using embankments.

See Table SQ-6 for estimated ranges in expected pollutant effluent concentrations. Reported removal
efficiencies of constructed wetlands vary significantly. Primary variables influencing removal efficiencies
include design, influent concentrations, hydrology, soils, climate, and maintenance. With periodic
sediment removal and routine maintenance, removal efficiencies for sediments, organic matter, total
phosphorous, and metals can be moderate to high; and for nitrogen, zero to moderate. Pollutants are
removed through sedimentation and entrapment with some removal through biological uptake by
vegetation and microorganisms. Without a continuous dry-weather base flow, salts and algae can
concentrate in the water column and can be released into the receiving water in higher levels at the
beginning of a storm event as they are washed out.
Researchers still do not agree whether routine aquatic plant harvesting affects pollutant removals
significantly. Until research demonstrates and quantifies these effects, routine harvesting (i.e., every one
to five years) of aquatic plants, and periodic removal of accumulated sediment (i.e., 10 to 20 years) along
with replanting of wetland species, is recommended.
2008-04 S-85
Figure CWB-1 illustrates an idealized CWB. An analysis of the water budget is needed to show the net
inflow of water is sufficient to meet all the projected losses (such as evaporation, evapotranspiration, and
seepage for each season of operation). Insufficient inflow can cause the wetland to become saline or to
die off.
The following steps outline the design procedure for a CWB.
1. Basin Surcharge Provide a surcharge storage volume equal to the WQCV based on a 24-hour
Storage Volume drain time, above the lowest outlet (i.e., perforation) in the basin.
A. Determine the WQCV using the tributary catchments percent
imperviousness. Account for the effects of volume reduction in the
tributary catchment and DCIA practice, if any, on Effective
Imperviousness. Using Figure ND-1, determine the reduction in
impervious area to use with WQCV calculations.
B. Find the Required Storage Surcharge Volume (watershed inches of
runoff) above the permanent pool level.
Determine the Required Storage (watershed inches of runoff) using
Figure CWB-2, based on the constructed wetland basin 24-hour drain
time.
Calculate the Surcharge Volume in acre-feet as follows:
⎛ WQCV ⎞
Design Surcharge Volume = ⎜ ⎟ ∗ Area
⎝ 12 ⎠
In which:
Area = The tributary drainage area tributary to the CWB
(Acres).
2. Wetland Pond The volume of the permanent wetland pool shall be no less than 75% of the
Depth and Volume WQCV found in Step 1.
Proper distribution of wetland habitat is needed to establish a diverse ecology.
Distribute pond area in accordance with the following:
Table 1
Percent of Permanent Water Design Depth
Components Pool Surface Area
Forebay, outlet and free 30% to 50% 2 to 4 feet deep
water surface areas
Wetland zones with 50% to 70% 6 to 12 inches deep*
emergent vegetation
*One-third to one-half of this zone should be 6 inches deep.
3. Depth of Surcharge The surcharge depth of the WQCV above he permanent pool’s water surface
WQCV shall not exceed 2.0 feet.
4. Outlet Works Provide outlet works that limit WQCV depth to 2 feet or less. Use a water
quality outlet that is capable of releasing the WQCV in a 24-hour period. Refer
S-86 2008-04
to the TYPICAL STRUCTURAL BMP DETAINS AND SPECIFICATIONS

chapter for schematics pertaining to structure geometry; grates, trash racks,
and screens; outlet type: orifice plate or perforated riser pipe; cutoff collar size
and location; and all other necessary components.
Use Figure CWB-3 to calculate the required area per row based on WQCV
and the depth of perforations at the outlet. See the TYPICAL STRUCTURAL
BMP DETAINS AND SPECIFICATIONS chapter to determine the appropriate
perforation geometry and number of rows (The lowest perforations should be
set at the water surface elevation of the outlet pool). The total outlet area can
then be calculated by multiplying the area per row by the number of rows.
Minimize the number of columns and maximize the perforation hole
diameter when designing the outlet to reduce chances of clogging by
accepting the orifice size that will empty the WQCV in 22 and 28 hours.
5. Trash Rack Provide a trash rack of sufficient size to prevent clogging of the primary water
quality outlet. Size the rack so as not to interfere with the hydraulic capacity of
the outlet. Using the total outlet area and the selected perforation diameter (or
height), Figures 6, 6a or 7 in the TYPICAL STRUCTURAL BMP DETAINS
AND SPECIFICATIONS chapter will help to determine the minimum open area
required for the trash rack.
Use one-half of the total outlet area to calculate the trash rack’s size. This
accounts for the variable inundation of the outlet orifices. Figures 6 and 6a
were developed as suggested standardized outlet designs for smaller sites.
6. Basin Use Determine if flood storage or other uses will be provided for above the wetland
surcharge storage or in an upstream facility. Design for combined uses when
they are to be provided for.
7. Basin Shape Shape the pond with a gradual expansion from the inlet and a gradual
contraction to the outlet, thereby limiting short circuiting. Try to achieve a
basin length to width ratio between 2:1 to 4:1. It may be necessary to modify
the inlet and outlet point through the use of pipes, swales, or channels, to
accomplish this. Always maximize the distance between the inlet and outlet.
8. Basin Side Slopes Basin side slopes are to be gentle and stable to facilitate maintenance and
access. Side slopes should be no steeper than 4:1, preferably 5:1 or flatter.
9. Base Flow A net influx of water must be available throughout the year that exceeds all of
the losses. The following equation and parameters can be used to estimate
the net quantity of base flow available at a site:
Qnet = QInflow − QEvap − QSeepage − QE .T .
Where:
QNet = Net quantity of base flow (acre-ft/year)
QInflow = Estimated base flow (acre-ft/year) (Estimate by seasonal
measurements and/or comparison to similar watersheds)
QEvap = Loss attributed to evaporation less the precipitation (acre-
ft/year) (Computed for average water surface)
QSeepage = Loss (or gain) attributed to seepage to groundwater (acre-

ft/year)
QE.T. = Loss attributed to plant evapotranspiration (computed for
average plant area above water surface, not including the
2008-04 S-87
water surface)
10. Inlet/Outlet Provide a means to dissipate flow energy entering the basin to limit sediment
Protection resuspension. Inlet designs should correspond to UDFCD drop-structure
criteria, impact basin pipe outlet structure standards, or other energy
dissipating and flow diffusing structure designs.
Outlets should be placed in an outlet bay that is at least 3 feet deep. The
outlet should be protected from clogging by a skimmer shield that starts at the
bottom of the permanent pool and extends above the maximum capture
volume depth. Provide for a trash rack also.
11. Forebay Design Provide the opportunity for larger particles to settle out in an area that has a
solid driving surface bottom for vehicles to facilitate sediment removal. The
forebay volume of the permanent pool should be 5 to 10 percent of the design
water quality capture volume.
12. Vegetation Cattails, sedges, reeds, and wetland grasses should be planted in the wetland
bottom. Berms and side-sloping areas should be planted with native or
irrigated turf-forming grasses. Initial establishment of the wetlands requires
control of the water depth. After planting wetland species, the permanent pool
should be kept at 3 to 4 inches deep at the plant zones to allow growth and to
help establish the plants, after which the pool should be raised to its final
operating level.
13. Maintenance Provide vehicle access to the forebay and outlet area for maintenance and
Access removal of bottom sediments. Maximum grades should not exceed 10
percent, and a stabilized, all-weather driving surface needs to be provided.
Provide a concrete or grouted boulder lined bottom and side-slopes under
water in the forebay area to define sediment removal limits and permit heavy
equipment to operate within them.
8.6 Design Example
S-88 2008-04
Side Slopes no Steeper than 5:1 Side Slopes no Steeper than 3:1
Forebay
Embankment
Outlet Works
Spillway
Maintenance Access
Plan
Not To Scale
Note: Provide energy disipating inlet

such as impact basin for
pipes or GSB drop or baffle chute Depth Variation Legend
for channel/swales.
Innundated to 6" below permanent pool w.s.
Innundated to 12" below permanent pool w.s.

Innundated 2' to 4' below permanent pool w.s.
Spillway Crest
Permanent W.S.
Protect spillway and/or
Flow embankment with
2' to 4' 12" vegetated buried soil riprap
or reinforced turf mat.
Cutoff Collar
1' Provide Bottom Drain

W.S. Profile
Not To Scale
Energy Dissipation at Inlet
Figure CWB-1 Plan & Profile of an Idealized Constructed Wetland Basin
Figure CWB-1 – Constructed Wetland Basin – Plan and Cross-Section
2008-04 S-89
0.50
0.45 12-hr drain time a = 0.8 Extended Detention Basin

0.30 WQCV=a*(0.91i 3 -1.19i 2 +0.78i)
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10 Landscape Detention
12-hour Drain Time
0.05
0.00
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Total Im per viousness Ratio ( i = I wq /100 )
Figure CWB-2—Water Quality Capture Volume (WQCV), 80th Percentile Runoff Event
S-90 2008-04
10

1
5 ⎡ WQCV ⎤ c
A = 3 .0 ⎢ ⎥⎦
⎣ b
b = 0.0166 H 2 + 0.2055 H + 0.1543

c = −0.0018H 2 − 0.0068H + 1.0015
et
-fe
6
1 = et
t h - fe et
p 4 -f e e t
De 3 -fe
CV 2 ot
Q f- o
.5 W 1
.1
.1 1 5 10 30
Figure CWB-3—Water Quality Outlet Sizing: Constructed Wetland Basin With

24-hour Drain Time for Capture Volume
2008-04 S-91
Design Procedure Form: Constructed Wetland Basin (CWB) - Sedimentation Facility

Sheet 1 of 3
Company: BLWH, Inc.

Ia = 55.00 %

3 2
(WQCV =0.9 * (0.91 * I - 1.19 * I + 0.78 * I))
2. Wetland Pond Volume, Depth, and Water Surface Area

Calculated Required Minim ums:
A) Minimum Calculated Permanent Pool: VolPool > 0.75 * Vol VolPool > 1.9838 acre-feet
WS Area = 1.3225 acres, estimated
Enter the Actual Design Values:

VolPool > 2.0000 acre-feet, final design
WS Area = 1.5000 acres, final design
B) Forebay (Volume > 5% of Vol in 1D, or 0.1323 acre-feet) Volume= 0.1400 acre-feet
Depth minimum = 2.5', maximum = 4.0' Depth= 4.00 feet
Area= 0.0350 acres, % = 2.33%
C) Outlet Pool (minimum depth = 2.5', maximum = 4.0') Depth= 3.50 feet
Outlet Pool Area, 6% of Design WS Area, or 0.09 acres, minimum Area= 0.1000 acres, % = 6.67%
D) Wetland Zones with Emergent Vegetation ( 0.50' to 1.0' deep) Depth= 1.00 feet
(Area = 50% to 70% of Design WS Area, or 0.75 to 1.05 acres.) Area= 0.8000 acres, % = 53.33%
E) Free Water Surface Areas ( 2' to 4' deep) Depth= 3.30 feet
(Area = 30% to 50% of Design WS Area, or 0.45 to 0.75 acres.) Area= 0.5650 acres, % = 37.67%
100.00%
3 Average Side Slope Above Water Surface (4:1 or flatter) Z= 4.00
Depth of WQCV Surcharge (above permanent pool, 2' max.) 1.7 feet
4. Outlet Works

Other:
B) Depth at Outlet Above Lowest Perforation (H, 2' max.) H= 1.70 feet
C) Required Maximum Outlet Area per Row, (Ao) Ao = 12.4 square inches
D) Perforation Dimensions (Refer to Figure 5 in W.Q. Str. Det.):
i) Circular Perforation Diameter or D= inches

ii) Width of 2" High Rectangular Perforations W= 6.2 inches
S-92 2008-04

Sheet 2 of 3
Company: BLWH, Inc.
E) Number of Columns (nc) nc = 1 Number
G) Number of Rows (nr) nr = 5 Number
5. Trash Rack
A) Needed Open Area: At = 0.5 * (Figure 7 Value) * Aot At = 1,906.1 square inches
B) Type of Outlet Opening (Check One) < 2" Diameter Round

X 2" High Rectangular
Other:
i) Width of Trash Rack and Concrete Opening W conc = inches

(W conc) from Table 6a-1
ii) Height of Trash Rack Screen (HTR) HTR = inches
iii) Type of Screen (Based on Depth H), Describe if "Other" S.S. #93 VEE W ire (US Filter)
Other:
iv) Screen Opening Slot Dimension, Describe if "Other" 0.139" (US Filter)
Other:
v) Spacing of Support Rod (O.C.) inches

Type and Size of Support Rod (Ref.: Table 6a-2)
vi) Type and Size of Holding Frame (Ref.: Table 6a-2)
I) Width of Rectangular Opening (W) W= 6.22 inches
ii) Width of Perforated Plate Opening (W conc = W + 12") W conc = 18.22 inches
iii) Width of Trashrack Opening (W opening) from Table 6b-1 W opening = 66.0 inches
iv) Height of Trash Rack Screen (HTR) HTR = 44 inches
TM
v) Type of Screen (based on depth H) (Describe if "Other") X Klemp KPP Series Aluminum
Other:
TM
vi) Cross-bar Spacing (Based on Table 6b-1, Klemp KPP 4 inches
2008-04 S-93

Sheet 3 of 3
Designer:
Company:
Project:
Location:
TM
vii) Minimum Bearing Bar Size (Klemp Series, Table 6a-2) 1.00 in. x 3/16 in.
6. Basin Use for Quantity Controls (Check one or describe if "Other") X Detention within the facility
Detention upstream of the facility
Other:
7. Basin length to width ratio 1.50 (L/W)
8. Basin Side Slopes (Z, horizontal distance per unit vertical) 5.00 (horizontal/vertical)
9 Annual/Seasonal Water Balance (Qnet has to be positive) Qinflow 100.00 acre-feet/year

Qevap 7.00 acre-feet/year
Qseepage 20.00 acre-feet/year
QE.T. 6.00 acre-feet/year
Qnet 67.00 acre-feet/year
10 Vegetation (Check the method being applied or describe) X Native Grass

Irrigated Turf Grass Side Slopes
X Wetland Species in Pool*
Other:
*Describe Species Density and Mixl.
Notes:
S-94 2008-04
9.0 RETENTION POND (RP)—SEDIMENTATION FACILITY
9.1 Description
A Retention Pond (RP) is a sedimentation facility and a form of a treatment plant that has a permanent
pool of water that is replaced with stormwater, in part or in total, during storm runoff events. In addition, a
temporary detention volume is provided above this permanent pool to capture storm runoff and enhance
sedimentation. RPs are similar to EDBs because they are designed to capture in total, as a surcharge to
the pond, runoff from frequently occurring storms. However, RPs differ from extended detention basins
(EDBs) because the influent water mixes with the permanent pool water as it rises above the permanent
pool level. The surcharge captured volume above the permanent pool is then released over 12 hours.
RPs require a dry-weather base flow to maintain the permanent pool. They can be very effective in
removing pollutants, and, under the proper conditions, can satisfy multiple objectives.
A RP can be used to improve the quality of urban runoff from roads, parking lots, residential
neighborhoods, commercial areas, and industrial sites and is generally used as regional or follow-up
treatment because of the base-flow requirements. It can be used as an onsite BMP if the owner provides
sufficient water to keep the pond full between storms. A RP works well in conjunction with other BMPs,
such as upstream onsite source controls and downstream filter basins or wetland channels.
9.3.1 General
A RP can be cost-effective for larger tributary watersheds. It provides the following:
• Achieves moderate to high removal rates of many urban pollutants
2008-04 S-95
• Creates wildlife and aquatic habitat opportunities
• Provides recreation, aesthetics, and open space opportunities
• Be a part of a larger flood control basin
Their primary disadvantages include safety concerns, more difficult maintenance sediment removal than
for EDBs, floating litter, scum and algal blooms, possible nuisance odors and possible mosquito
problems. Aquatic plant growth can be a factor in clogging outlet works. The permanent pool can attract
water fowl, which can add to the nutrient load entering and leaving the pond.

Although site suitability concerns are similar to those stated for an EDB, a RP has one primary
difference—it requires sufficient continuous base flow to maintain the pool. A complete water budget
under the projected urbanized watershed conditions should be performed to assure that the base flow will
exceed evaporation, evapotranspiration, and seepage losses.

See Table SQ-6 for pollutant removal ranges. A RP achieves moderate to high removal rates for
particulate matter through sedimentation during and shortly after the runoff event. During a storm event,
a portion or all of the permanent pool water is displaced and the pool becomes a mixture of the former
pool water and new runoff. The period between storms allows biological uptake of soluble nutrients and
metals from the water column in the permanent pool while also providing time for quiescent settling of fine
sediment particles that remain in the pool after a storm. Some of the sediment can resuspend and
soluble compounds can remobilize if a large storm event causes intense mixing or when unfavorable
chemical conditions exist in the pool (such as low dissolved oxygen [DO] or pH). Also, algal growth and
other biological activity can produce suspended solids and increased concentrations of certain forms of
phosphates and nitrogen compounds in dry-weather base flow discharges from the pond.
Without a sufficient continuous base flow, a wet pond can concentrate levels of salts, pollutants and algae
between storm events through evaporation. Besides contributing to nuisance problems, the water quality
of the pool is very important. A storm event will displace any concentrated pond water, and in some
instances, can result in discharges of water with pollutant concentrations exceeding the inflow, exactly the
opposite of the intent for providing this BMP.
9.3.4 Aesthetics and Multiple Uses

A RP offers improved aesthetics and multiple-uses beyond those typically found at an EDB. The bulk of
the capture volume occurs as a surcharge above the permanent pool, with some of it occurring above the
dry-weather bank areas. As a result, most of the sediment deposits are left behind within the permanent
pool zone, where the public does not see them. Also, the permanent pool offers some aquatic habitat
S-96 2008-04
and is a habitat for water fowl. However, water fowl can be a nuisance because of the fecal matter they
deposit on the banks and in the pool.
The required total basin design volume of a RP facility includes the volume needed for a permanent pool
(≥water quality capture volume) plus a water quality capture volume as a surcharge above the permanent
pool. If desired, a flood routing detention volume can be provided above the water quality capture
volume.
Whenever desirable and feasible, incorporate the RP within a larger flood control basin. Also, whenever
possible try to provide for other urban uses such as active or passive recreation, and wildlife habitat. Try
to locate recreational areas to limit the frequency of inundation to one or two occurrences a year.
Generally, the area within the water quality capture volume is not well suited for active recreation facilities
such as ballparks, playing fields, and picnic areas. These should be located above this pool level.
Land requirements are typically 0.5 to 2 percent of the tributary watershed's area. High exfiltration rates
can initially make it difficult to maintain a permanent pool in a new RP, but the bottom can eventually seal
with fine sediment and become relatively impermeable over time. It is best, however, to seal the bottom
and the sides of a permanent pool if the pool is located on permeable soils and to leave the areas above
the permanent pool unsealed to promote exfiltration of the stormwater detained in the surcharge water
quality capture volume.
There are two primary differences in design between a RP and an EDB:
• The RP requires a base flow to maintain and to flush a permanent pool.
• A RP is designed to empty the surcharge water quality capture volume over a 12-hour period,
instead of the longer 40 hours needed for an EDB. The reason for this is that the sediment
removal process is more efficient when the outflow occurs above the bottom of the basin.
Sediments become trapped below the outlet and sedimentation continues in the pool after the
captured surcharge volume is emptied.
Figure RP-1 shows a representative layout for a RP. Although flood storage has not been addressed in
these recommendations for the same reasons mentioned under EDBs, it can be easily provided for above
the surcharge water quality capture volume. Embankment design and safety design considerations for a
RP are identical to those discussed for an EDB, except more attention should be given to cutoff collars on
the outlet pipe to safeguard against piping along the outlet.
The amount of construction activity within a basin, the erosion control measures implemented, and the
size of the basin will influence the frequency of sediment removal from the pond. It is estimated that
2008-04 S-97
accumulated sediment will need to be removed at 5- to 20-year intervals if there are no construction
activities within the tributary catchment.
The following steps outline the design procedure and criteria for a RP.
1. Basin Surcharge Provide a storage volume equal to the WQCV based using a 12-hour drain time
Storage Volume above the lowest outlet (i.e., perforation) in the basin.
A. Determine the WQCV using the tributary catchment’s percent
imperviousness. Account for the effects of runoff volume reduction in the
tributary catchment and DCIA practices, if any, on Effective
Imperviousness. Using Figure ND-1, determine the reduction in
impervious area to use with WQCV calculations.
B. Find the required storage surcharge volume (watershed inches of runoff).
Determine the required water quality capture volume in watershed inches
of runoff using Figure RP-2, based on the RP, 12-hour drain time. The
water quality capture volume is the surcharge volume above the
permanent pool.
Calculate the design surcharge volume in acre-feet as follows:
⎛ WQCVi ⎞
Design Surcharge Volume = ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ ∗ Area
⎝ 12 ⎠
In which:
WQCQi = Water quality capture volume in watershed inches taken
from Figure RP-2.
Area = The tributary catchment drainage area (acres).
2. The permanent pool provides stormwater quality enhancement between storm
runoff events through biochemical processes and continuing sedimentation.
A. Volume of the permanent pool:
Permanent Pool = 1.2 to 2.0 (WQCV)
B. Depth Zones: The permanent pool shall have two depth zones:
1. A littoral zone 6 to 12 inches deep that is between 25 to 40 percent of
the permanent pool surface area for aquatic plant growth along the
perimeter of the permanent pool, and
2. A deeper zone of 4 to 8 feet average depth in the remaining pond
area to promote sedimentation and nutrient uptake by phytoplankton.
Maximum depth in the pond shall not exceed 12 feet.
3. Base Flow A net influx of water must be available through a perennial base flow and must
exceed the losses. The following equation and parameters can be used to
estimate the net quantity of base flow available at a site:
QNet = QInflow – QEvap – QSeepage – QE.T.
In which:
Qnet = Net quantity of base flow (acre-ft/year)
Qinflow = Estimated base flow (acre-ft/year) (Estimate by seasonal
S-98 2008-04
measurements and/or comparison to similar watersheds)

Qevap = Loss because of evaporation less the precipitation
(acre-ft/year) (Computed for average water surface)
QSeepage = Loss (or gain) because of seepage to groundwater
(ac-ft/year)
QE.T. = Loss because of plant evapotranspiration (additional loss
through plant area above water surface not including the
water surface)
4. Outlet Works The Outlet Works are to be designed to release the WQCV (above the permanent
pool elevation) over a 12-hour period. Refer to the TYPICAL STRUCTURAL
BMP DETAINS AND SPECIFICATIONS chapter for schematics pertaining to
structure geometry; grates, trash racks, and screens; outlet orifice plate; cutoff
collar size and location; and all other necessary components.
Use Figure RP-3 to calculate the required area per row based on WQCV and the
depth of perforations at the outlet. See the TYPICAL STRUCTURAL BMP
DETAINS AND SPECIFICATIONS chapter to determine the appropriate
perforation geometry and number of rows. The lowest perforations should be set
at the water surface elevation of the permanent pool. The total outlet area is then
calculated by multiplying the area per row by the number of rows. Minimize the
number of columns of perforations and maximize the diameter of
perforation holes to reduce clogging by accepting total orifice area that
empties the WQCV in 12 and 15 hours.
5. Trash Rack Provide a trash rack of sufficient size to prevent clogging of the primary water
quality outlet. Size the rack so as not to interfere with the hydraulic capacity of
the outlet. Using the total outlet area and the selected perforation diameter (or
height), Figures 6, 6a or 7 in the TYPICAL STRUCTURAL BMP DETAINS AND
SPECIFICATIONS chapter will help to determine the minimum open area
required for the trash rack.
Use one-half of the total perforated plate outlet area to calculate the trash rack’s
size. This accounts for the variable inundation of the outlet orifices. Figures 6
and 6a were developed as suggested standardized outlet designs for smaller
sites.
6. Basin Shape Shape the pond with a gradual expansion from the inlet and a gradual contraction
toward the outlet, thereby limiting short circuiting. Try to achieve a basin length to
width ratio between should be between 2:1 and 3:1. It may be necessary to
modify the inlet and outlet pointed through the use of pipes, swales, or channels
to accomplish this. Always maximize the distance between the inlet and the
outlet.
7. Basin Side Slopes Side slopes should be stable and sufficiently gentle to limit rill erosion and to
facilitate maintenance. Side slopes above the permanent pool should be no
steeper than 4:1, preferably 5:1 or flatter. The littoral zone should be very flat
(that is, 40:1 or flatter) with the depth ranging from 6 inches near the shore and
extending to no more than 12 inches at the furthest point from the shore. The
side slope below the littoral zone shall be 3:1 or flatter.
2008-04 S-99
8. Dam Embankment The embankment should be designed not to fail during a 100-year or larger
storm. Embankment slopes should be no steeper than 3:1, preferably 4:1 or
flatter, covered with turf-forming grasses to limit erosion. Poorly compacted
native soils should be removed and replaced. Embankment soils should be
compacted to 95 percent of their maximum density according to ASTM D 698-70
(modified proctor).
9. Vegetation Vegetation provides erosion control and enhances site stability. Berms and side-
sloping areas should be planted with native turf-forming grasses or irrigated turf,
depending on the local setting and proposed uses for the pond area. The shallow
littoral bench should have a 4- to 6-ing organic topsoil layer and be vegetated with
aquatic species.
10. Maintenance Access to the basin bottom, forebay, and outlet area must be provided to
Access maintenance vehicles. Maximum grades should be 10 percent, and a solid
driving surface of gravel, rock, concrete, or gravel stabilized turf should be
provided.
11. Inlet Dissipate flow energy at the inlet to limit erosion and to diffuse the inflow plume
where it enters the pond. Inlets should be designed in accordance with Manual
drop-structure and energy-dissipating structure criteria in Volume 2, including the
use of impact basin outlet structures whenever the inflow is via a pipe.
12. Forebay Design Forebays provide an opportunity for larger particles to settle out. Install a solid
driving surface on the bottom and sides below the permanent water line to
facilitate sediment removal. A berm consisting of rock and topsoil mixture should
be part of the littoral bench to create the forebay and have a minimum top width of
8 feet and side slopes no steeper than 4:1. The forebay volume within the
permanent pool should be 5 to 10 percent of the design water quality capture
volume.
13. Underdrains Provide underdrain trenches near the edge of the pond. The trenches should be
no less than 12 inches wide filled with ASTM C-33 sand to within 2 feet of the
ponds permanent pool water surface, and with an underdrain pipe connected
through a valve to the outlet. These underdrains will permit the drying out of the
pond when it has to be “mucked out” to restore volume lost due to sediment
deposition.
9.6 Design Example
S-100 2008-04
Littoral surface area 6 to 12 inches deep

equal to 25 to 40% of permanent pool
water surface area Underdrain
A
Embankment sidelopes
No steeper than 4h:1v
A Outlet w/ trash rack
Permanent Pool Volume = 1.2 to 1.5 of WQCV
Spillway
Forebay
Stable Maintenance Access
PLAN
Not to scale
Emergency Spillway Crest
Surface Inflow w/ energy (e.g., 100-yr, SPF, PMF, etc.)
Note: Provide energy disipating inlet such
dissipator on rundown as impact basin for pipes and GSB Embankment
drop or baffle chute for channel/swales.
Protect spillway and/or
Overflow for larger storms embankment with
vegetated buried soil riprap
WQCV or reinforced turf mat.
Permanent Pool 2 to 5 feet Outflow
Pipe w/ energy
dissipator at outlet Outlet protection
Concrete Seepage Cutoff Collar
Paved Littoral Berm & Zone Underdrain Outlet Works
Surface PROFILE
Not to scale
6" Trench
Permanent W.S. Backfill
12" Permanent W.S.
4:1 or flatter Av. depth: 4 to 8 ft.
12 ft max.
Littoral Zone
CDOT Sect. 703 4" Perforated Pipe
4:1 or flatter AASHTO #67
wrapped in
Section A - A geotextile Underdrain Detail
Figure RP-1 –Retention Pond (RP) – Plan and Sections
2008-04 S-101
0.50
0.45 Extended Detention Basin

40-hour Drain Time
0.40
0.35
24-hour Drain Time
0.30 WQCV=a*(0.91i 3 -1.19i 2 +0.78i)
0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10 Detention and Porous
Landscape Detention
12-hour Drain Time
0.05
0.00
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Total Imperviousness Ratio (i = I wq /100 )
Figure RP-2—Water Quality Capture Volume (WQCV), 80th Percentile Runoff Event
S-102 2008-04
10

5 1
⎡ WQCV ⎤ c
A = 6 .0 ⎢ ⎥⎦
⎣ b
b = 0.0166 H 2 + 0.2055 H + 0.1543
c = −0.0018H 2 − 0.0068H + 1.0015 et
6-
fe et
-fe eet et
= 4 -f fe
th 3 -
ot
p 2
fo
1 De
1-
CV
Q
W
.5
.1
.1 1 5 10 50 100
Figure RP-3—Water Quality Outlet Sizing: Retention Pond (Wet) With

12-hour Drain Time for the Capture Volume.
2008-04 S-103
Design Procedure Form: Retention Pond (RP) - Sedimentation Facility

(Sheet 1 of 3)
Company: BLWH, Inc.

Ia = 60.00 %

(WQCV =0.8 * (0.91 * I3 - 1.19 * I2 + 0.78 * I))
2. Permanent Pool
A) Volume: Vol-Pool = (1.2 to 2.0) * Vol in 1D, or 3.0228 to 5.038 acre-feet Vol-Pool = 4.0000 acre-feet
B) Average Depth Zone 1 = Littoral Zone - 0.5' to 1.0' deep Zone 1 = 0.60 feet
Zone 2 = Deeper Zone - 4 feet to 8 feet deep Zone 2 = 6.00 feet
C) Maximum Zone 2 Pool Depth (should not exceed 12 feet) Depth = 9.00 feet
D) Permanent Pool Water Surface Area (Estimated Minimum)

(Zone 1 - Littoral Zone = 25% to 40% of the total surface area) %= 25.0 acres = 0.2151
(Zone 2 - Deeper Zone = 60% to 75% of the total surface area) %= 75.0 acres = 0.6452
Total Estimated Minimum Surface Area (ATotal) %= 100.000 acres = 0.8602
3. Annual/Seasonal Water Balance (Qnet has to be positive) Qinflow = 73.0000 acre-feet/year

Qevap = 3.5000 acre-feet/year
Qseepage = 7.0000 acre-feet/year
QE.T. = 3.0000 acre-feet/year
Qnet = 59.5000 acre-feet/year
4. Outlet Works

Other:
B) Depth of WQCV at Outlet Above Lowest Perforation (H) H= 5.00 feet
C) Required Maximum Outlet Area per Row, (Ao) Ao = 5.4 square inches
i) Circular Perforation Diameter or D= 1.875 inches
E) Number of Columns (nc) nc = 2 Num ber
S-104 2008-04

(Sheet 2 of 3)
Company: BLWH, Inc.
G) Number of Rows (nr) nr = 15 Number
5. Trash Rack
A) Needed Open Area: At = 0.5 * (Figure 7 Value) * Aot At = 2,526 square inches
B) Type of Outlet Opening (Check One) X < 2" Diameter Round

2" High Rectangular
Other:
I) Width of Trash Rack and Concrete Opening W conc = 54 inches

ii) Height of Trash Rack Screen (HTR) HTR = 84 inches
iii) Type of Screen (Based on Depth H), Describe if "Other" X S.S. #93 VEE Wire (US Filter)
Other:
iv) Screen Opening Slot Dimension, Describe if "Other" X 0.139" (US Filter)
Other:
v) Spacing of Support Rod (O.C.) 1 inches

I) Width of Rectangular Opening form 4.D.ii. (W) W= inches
iii) Width of Trash Rack Opening (W opening) from Table 6b-1 W opening = inches
TM
v) Type of Screen (based on depth H) (Describe if "Other") Klem p KPP Series Aluminum
Other:
TM
2008-04 S-105

(Sheet 3 of 3)
Company: BLWH, Inc.
TM
vii) Minimum Bearing Bar Size (Klemp Series, Table 6a-2)
(Base on depth of WQCV surcharge)
6. Basin length to width ratio (L/W)
7. Basin Side Slopes (Z:1)
A) Above the Permanent Pool: Z= 5.0 (horizontal/vertical)
B) Below the Permanent Pool Z= Zone 1= 25.0 (horizontal/vertical)

Z= Zone 2= 3.0 (horizontal/vertical)
8. Dam Embankment Side Slopes Z= 4.0 (horizontal/vertical)
9. Vegetation (Check the type used or describe if "Other")

X Native Grass
Irrigated Turf Grass
X Emergent Aquatic Species*
Other:
*Specify types and densities:
10. Forebay Storage (5% to 10% of Design Volume in 1D, or 0.126 to 0.2519 acre-feet.) Storage = 0.20 acre-feet
11. Underdrains No yes/no

Perforated underdrain pipe in 12" wide trench near edge of pond. Trench filled
around pipe with ASTM C-33 sand to within 2' of the permanent pool water surface.
Notes:
S-106 2008-04
10.0 CONSTRUCTED WETLANDS CHANNEL (CWC)—SEDIMENTATION FACILITY
10.1 Description
Constructed wetland-bottomed channels takes advantage of dense natural vegetation (rushes, willows,
cattails, and reeds) to slow down runoff and allow time for settling out sediment and biological uptake. It
is another form of a sedimentation facility and a treatment plant.
Constructed wetlands differ from "natural" wetlands as they are artificial and are built to enhance
stormwater quality. Sometimes small wetlands that exist along ephemeral drainageways on Colorado's
high plains may be enlarged and incorporated into the constructed wetland system. Such action,
however, requires the approval of federal and state regulators.
Regulations intended to protect natural wetlands recognize a separate classification of wetlands

constructed for a water quality treatment. Such wetlands generally are not allowed to be used to mitigate
the loss of natural wetlands but are allowed to be disturbed by maintenance activities. Therefore, the
legal and regulatory status of maintaining a wetland constructed for the primary purpose of water quality
enhancement is separate from the disturbance of a natural wetland. Nevertheless, any activity that
disturbs a constructed wetland should be first cleared through the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers to
ensure it is covered by some form of an individual, general, or nationwide 404 permit.
Wetland bottom channels can be used in the following two ways:
• A wetland can be established in a totally man-made channel and can act as a conveyance
system and water quality enhancement facility. This design can be used along wide and gently
sloping channels.
• A wetland bottom channel can be located downstream of a stormwater detention facility (water
quality and/or flood control) where a large portion of the sediment load can be removed. The
2008-04 S-107
wetland channel then receives stormwater and base flows as they drain from the detention
facility, provides water quality enhancement, and at the same time conveys it downstream. This
application of a wetland channel is recommended upstream of receiving waters and within lesser
(i.e., ephemeral) receiving waters, thereby delivering better quality water to the more significant
receiving water system.
A CWC requires a net influx of water to maintain their vegetation and microorganisms. A complete water
budget analysis is necessary to ensure the adequacy of the base flow.
10.3.1 General
Constructed wetlands offer several potential advantages, such as natural aesthetic qualities, wildlife
habitat, erosion control, and pollutant removal. Constructed wetlands provide an effective follow-up
treatment to onsite and source control BMPs that rely upon settling of larger sediment particles. In other
words, they offer yet another effective BMP for larger tributary basins.
The primary drawback to wetlands is the need for a continuous base flow to ensure their presence. In
addition, salts and scum can accumulate and unless properly designed and built, can be flushed out
during larger storms.
Other disadvantages include the need for regular maintenance to provide nutrient removal. Regular
harvesting and removal of aquatic plants, cattails, and willows is required if the removal of nutrients in
significant amounts has to be assured. Even with that, recent data puts into question the net
effectiveness of wetlands in removing nitrogen compounds and some form of phosphates. Periodic
sediment removal is also necessary to maintain the proper distribution of growth zones and of water
movement within the wetland.

A perennial base flow is needed to sustain a wetland, and should be determined using a water budget
analysis. Loamy soils are needed in wetland bottom to permit plants to take root. Infiltration through a
wetland bottom cannot be relied upon because the bottom is either covered by soils of low permeability or
because the groundwater is higher than the wetland's bottom. Wetland bottom channels also require a
near-zero longitudinal slope; drop structures are used to create and maintain a flat grade.

Removal efficiencies of constructed wetlands vary significantly. Primary variables influencing removal
efficiencies include design, influent concentrations, hydrology, soils, climate, and maintenance. With
periodic sediment removal and plant harvesting, expected removal efficiencies for sediments, organic
matter, and metals can be moderate to high; for phosphorous, low to moderate; and for nitrogen, zero to
S-108 2008-04
low. Pollutants are removed primarily through sedimentation and entrapment, with some of the removal
occurring through biological uptake by vegetation and microorganisms. Without a continuous dry-
weather base flow, salts and algae can concentrate in the water column and can be released into the
receiving water in higher levels at the beginning of a storm event as they are washed out.
Harvesting aquatic plants and periodic removal of sediment also removes nutrients and pollutants
associated with the sediment. Researchers still do not agree that routine aquatic plant harvesting affects
pollutant removals. Until research documents these effects, periodic harvesting for the general upkeep of
wetland, and not routine harvesting of aquatic plants, is recommended.
Wetlands can be set into a drainageway to form a wetland bottom channel (see Figure CWC-1). The
criteria for a wetland bottom channel presented in the following section differs somewhat from the criteria
presented in Volume 1 of the Manual under the MAJOR DRAINAGE chapter. This is because of the
water quality focus of this BMP. An analysis of the water budget is needed so that the inflow of water
throughout the year is sufficient to meet all the projected losses (such as evaporation, evapotranspiration,
and seepage). An insufficient base flow could cause the wetland bottom channel to dry out and die.
The following steps outline the Constructed Wetlands Channel design procedure. Refer to Figure CWC-1
for its design components.
1. Design Discharge Determine the 2-year peak flow rate in the wetland channel without reducing it for
any upstream ponding or flood routing effects.
2. Channel Geometry Define the newly-built channel’s geometry to pass the design 2-year flow rate at 2.0
feet per second with a channel depth between 2.0 to 4.0 feet. The channel cross-
section should be trapezoidal with side slopes of 4:1 (Horizontal/Vertical) or flatter.
Bottom width shall be no less than 8.0 feet.
3. Longitudinal Slope Set the longitudinal slope using Manning’s equation and a Manning’s roughness
coefficient of n=0.035, for the 2-year flow rate but no flatter that 0.001 ft/ft. If the
desired longitudinal slope can not be satisfied with existing terrain, grade control
checks or small drop structures must be incorporated to provide desired slope.
4. Final Channel Capacity Calculate the final (or mature) channel capacity during a 2-year flood using a
Manning’s roughness coefficient of n=0.08 and the same geometry and slope used
when initially designing the channel with n=0.03. The channel shall also provide
enough capacity to contain the flow during a 100-year flood while maintaining one
foot of free-board. Adjustment of the channel capacity may be done by increasing
the bottom width of the channel. Minimum bottom width shall be 8 feet.
5. Drop Structures Drop structures should be designed to satisfy the drop structure criteria of the
MAJOR DRAINAGE chapter in Volume 1 of the Manual.
2008-04 S-109
6. Vegetation Vegetate the channel bottom and side slopes to provide solid entrapment and
biological nutrient uptake. Cover the channel bottom with loamy soils upon which
cattails, sedges, and reeds should be established. Side slopes should be planted
with native or irrigated turf grasses.
7. Maintenance Access Provide access for maintenance along the channel length. Maximum grades for
maintenance vehicles should be 10 percent and provide a solid driving surface.
10.6 Design Example
S-110 2008-04
Figure CWC-1—Plan and Section of a Constructed Wetland Channel
2008-04 S-111
Design Procedure Form: Constructed Wetlands Channel (CWC) - Sedimentation Facility

Company: BLWH, Inc.
1. Design Discharge (total) Q2 = 125 cfs
Q100 = 600 cfs
2. Channel Geometry (New Channel - No Wetland Veg. in Bottom)
A) Channel Side Slopes (Z:1, i.e., H/V) (Z > 2.5) Z= 4.0 (horizontal/vertical)
B) 2-Year Design Flow Depth (D2) D2 = 2.0 feet

Maximum D2 = 4', Minimum D2 = 2'
C) Idealized Depth of the channel (D2i) - 2-foot to 4-foot D2i = 4.0 feet
C) Idealized Bottom width of the channel (B2i) - 8-foot minimum B2i = 15.8 feet
D) Idealized Top width of the 2-Year Design Water Surface (W 2i) W 2i = 31.8 feet
3. Longitudinal Slope (Based on a Manning's n = 0.035 S= 0.0013 feet/feet

for the idealized channel, velocity set to 2 fps, minimum slope = 0.001)
4. Final Channel Goemetry - Wetland Vegetation in Bottom)

(Based on a Manning's n = 0.08)
New 2-Yr. Mature 2-Yr.
A) Calculated channel geometry required to maintain Channel Channel
design discharge during a 2-year event with newly established and D2 = 2.0 feet 2.0 feet
mature vegetation. Calculated resulting flow velocities. B2 = 55.1 feet 55.1 feet
Maximum velocities should be kept to 2 fps or less for the 2-year flow. W2 = 71.2 feet 71.1 feet
Q2 = 332 cfs 124 cfs
B) Geometry and velocity to use for the 100-year discharge: V2 = 2.6 fps 1.0 fps
Suggest the design for a 100-year capacity channel follow the
guidance contained in the Major Drainage chapter of Volume 1
of the USDCM, or through the use of the UD-CHANNELS workbook.
5. Number of grade control structures required 6 number
6. Vegetation (Check the type or describe "Other") X Native Grass

X Wetland Species
Other:
Notes:
S-112 2008-04
11.0 COVERING OF STORAGE/HANDLING AREAS
11.1 Description
Covering of areas for storage and for handling facilities associated with potential industrial or commercial
pollutants, such as salt piles, oil products, pesticides, fertilizers, etc. will reduce the likelihood of storm
water contamination and will prevent loss of material from wind or rainfall erosion. Coverings can be
permanent or temporary and consist of tarpaulins, plastic sheeting, roofing, enclosed structures, or any
other device that prevent rain and wind from spreading possible contamination.
Covering is appropriate for areas where solids (gravel, salt, compost, building materials, etc.) or liquids
(oil, gas, tar, etc.) are stored, prepared, or transferred.
11.3.1 General
Coverings can be inexpensive and easy to install. When an enclosed structure is built, ventilation,
lighting, and other issues must be accounted for. Less expensive coverings (tarpaulins, plastic sheeting,
etc.) may require frequent inspection and maintenance.

The size of the area to be covered will determine the most efficient and cost effective type of covering. If
the area is too large to be entirely covered, at a minimum the critical areas should be covered.

Spill containment berming can be installed around the covered area to contain spills until proper removal
and disposal can occur.
2008-04 S-113
12.0 SPILL CONTAINMENT AND CONTROL
12.1 Description
Spill containment within industrial and some commercial sites consists of berming and gates that allow for
the control of spilled material. Berming consists of temporary or permanent curbs or dikes that surround
a potential spill site preventing spilled material from entering surface waters or storm sewer systems. The
berm may be made concrete, earthen material, metal, synthetic liners, or any material that will safely
contain the spill. A potential spill site is one that allows the storage or transfer of potential spill material.
Spill material is that which is not allowed into surface waters or storm sewer systems according to local,
state, or federal regulations. Spill control devices include valves, slide gates, or any other device which
can contain material when required and then release the spilled material in a controlled fashion.
Two methods of berming can be used: 1) containment berming that contains an entire spill and 2) curbing
that routes spill material to a collection basin. Containment berming should be of sufficient size to safely
contain a spill from the largest storage tank, rail car, tank truck, or other containment device located
inside the possible spill area. A small collection basin should be provided for removal of storm water and
leaked material.
Curbing is used to route spill material to a large collection basin. The curb should be of sufficient size to
safely route a spill from the largest storage tank, rail car, tank truck, or other containment device located
inside the possible spill area. A containment device must be provided to safely store the spilled material
until removal is possible.
If the capacity of the containment berming or the collection basin are exceeded, a spill control device
must be used. The spill control device ideally would convey flow into a portable containment device for
removal of the material. However, if material is escaping the berming area through the spill control
S-114 2008-04
device, two available means of controlling a spill are to use sorbent (adsorption and absorption through
chemical processes) or gelling agents (physically or chemically gel the spill material; solidification
eventually occurs).
12.3.1 General
The spill containment berm is an effective means to prevent spill material from entering surface waters or
storm sewer systems. In some cases, the spill material may be collected and recycled. The cost of
installation and maintenance will be a function of the type of berm used.

The spill area must have an impermeable floor (asphalt or concrete) so that contamination of
groundwater does not occur. If the existing conditions are insufficient to prevent seepage, an
impermeable floor or liner must be installed.

In the event of a spill, a method of removal must be provided, such as application of sorbent materials
and the use of a pump or vacuum truck. Any material removed from the spill site must be disposed of
according to local, state, and federal standards. Recycling of the spill material may be possible if contact
or uptake of foreign material is minimal. Water that collects within the berming due to rainfall or snowmelt
must be treated to meet standards before release from the spill area.
2008-04 S-115
13.0 REFERENCES
13B
International Stormwater Best Management Practices (BMP) Database. www.bmpdatabase.org.
H H
Sponsors of the Database include ASCE, EPA, Water Environment Research Foundation
(WERF), ASCE Environmental and Water Resources Institute (EWRI), USEPA, Federal Highway
Administration (FHWA) and the American Public Works Association (APWA).
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE). 2002. Urban
Stormwater BMP Performance Monitoring, A Guidance Manual for Meeting the National
Stormwater BMP Database Requirements. Prepared by GeoSyntec Consultants and Urban
Drainage and Flood Control District. Washington, DC: EPA.
Federal Aviation Agency (FAA). N.D. ITEM P-217 Aggregate-Turf Pavement Specifications.
Washington, DC: Federal Aviation Agency, DOT, Washington, DC.
Georgia Concrete & Products Association (GCPA). 1997. Recommended Specifications for Portland
Cement Pervious Pavement. Tucker, GA: Georgia Concrete & Products Association.
(ww.gcpa.org).
H H
Haliburton, T.A. 1982. Evaluation of the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Gradient Test for Geotextile
Performance. Second International Conference on Geotextiles. Las Vegas, NV
Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute (ICPT). 1998. Technical Specification 11 – Mechanized

Installation of Interlocking Concrete Pavements. Washington, DC: Interlocking Concrete
Pavement Institute (www.ICPI.org).
H H
Smith, D.R. 2001. Permeable Interlocking Concrete Pavement. Second Edition. Washington, DC:
Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute (www.ICPI.org).
H H
S-116 2008-04
DRAINAGE CRITERIA MANUAL (V. 3) STRUCTURAL BMP DETAILS
TYPICAL STRUCTURAL BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES

DETAILS AND SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
Section Page
SD-
SUGGESTED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................................... 17

Special Note and Disclaimer:......................................................................................................... 17
AGGREGATE TURF PAVEMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS......................................................... 18
PORTLAND CEMENT PERVIOUS PAVEMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS................................... 21
MODULAR BLOCK PAVEMENT (MBP) AND COBBLE BLOCK PAVEMENT (CBP) TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................................................................... 30
TABLES
Table 1—Typical Notes For EDB, RP and CWB Outlet Structures.............................................................. 2
Table 6a-1—Trash Rack Mounting Opening Widths per Column of Circular Perforations ........................ 11
Table 6a-2—Standardized WQCV Outlet Design Using Circular Openings .............................................. 11
Table 6b-1—Standardized WQCV Outlet Design Using 2” High Rectangular Openings........................... 14
Table 6b-2—Standardized WQCV Outlet Design Using 2” High Rectangular Openings........................... 15
FIGURES
Figure 1—Typical WQCV Outlet Structure Profile, Including 100-year Detention. ...................................... 3
Figure 2—Typical WQCV Outlet Structure Profile, Including 2- to 10-year and 100-year Detention........... 4
Figure 2-a—Typical WQCV Outlet Structure Profile, Including 2- to 10-year and 100-year Detention........ 5
Figure 4—Orifice Details for Draining WQCV............................................................................................... 6
Figure 5—WQCV Outlets Orifice Perforation Sizing. ................................................................................... 7
Figure 6-a—Suggested Standardized Trash Rack and Outlet Design for WQCV Outlets With Circular
Openings. ............................................................................................................................... 10
Figure 6-b—Suggested Standardized Trash Rack and Outlet Design for WQCV Outlets With Rectangular
Openings. ............................................................................................................................... 13
Figure 7—Minimum Trash Rack Open Area – Extended Range. .............................................................. 16
Rev. 10-2005 SD-i

SUGGESTED DETAILS FOR SELECT STRUCTURAL BMPs
Special Note and Disclaimer:
These suggested and design information is intended for use by the design professional competent to
evaluate its significance and limitation and who will accept the responsibility for its proper application. The
Urban Drainage and Flood Control District and its employees disclaim any and all responsibility for any
use of the information supplied herein for any specific site or application and it is the responsibility of the
design professional to apply and modify these guidelines as needed to meet specific site, application and
design needs.
Rev. 10-2005 SD-1

STRUCTURAL BMP DETAILS DRAINAGE CRITERIA MANUAL (V. 3)
Table 1—Typical Notes For EDB, RP and CWB Outlet Structures
1. The details shown herein are conceptual design in nature. Preparation of final design plans that
address details of structural adequacy, excavation, foundation preparation, concrete work,
reinforcing steel, backfill, metalwork, and appurtenances, including preparation of technical
specifications, are the responsibility of the design engineer in charge of the project.
2. Alternate designs to the typical outlet structures shown herein may be considered; however,
alternate designs must address the hydraulic and trash handling functional features and intent for
the structures shown in this Manual.
3. Wingwalls shown herein are designed to have the structure to be backfilled to be flush with the
side slopes of the basin. The use of this geometry is recommended and permits the structure to
blend into the landscape most aesthetically. Other geometries may be considered, however they
need to be developed with full consideration of public safety, aesthetics, maintainability, and
function. The superiority of these design should be demonstrated to be equal to or better than the
design concepts shown in this Manual.
4. Permanent Water Surface refers to the water surface of the micro-pool for Extended Detention
Basins and the permanent pool for Constructed Wetland Basins and Retention Ponds.
5. Perforated orifice plate shown herein is used to provide the specified the drain time of the WQCV.
To reduce clogging potential, it is recommended that the largest possible circular opening be
selected to minimize the number of columns. The intent is to have an outlet that empties the
WQCV in the time specified (e.g., 12-, 24- or 40-hours), and being within –3% to 5% of this time is
considered acceptable. See Figure 4 for orifice design information.
6. Vertical Trash Rack option is preferred; however, an Adverse-Slope Trash Rack is also
acceptable. Both help to shed the accumulated trash as the water level after the storm recedes.
The use of a Continuous-Slope Trash Rack for WQCV outlets is not recommended. See Figure 6
for trash rack design information.
7. Drainage or flood control detention above the WQCV may be sized for any storm event specified
by local stormwater criteria and not only to the 2- or 10-year events shown herein.
8. Underdrains along the perimeter of the permanent pool, including a shutoff valve, are
recommended for Constructed Wetland Basins and a Retention Ponds to help dewater the pool for
rehabilitative maintenance.
9. When the outlet designs differ from those shown herein:
a) Provide needed orifices that are distributed over the vertical height of the WQCV, with the invert
of the lowest orifice located at 2'-6", or more above the bottom of the micro-pool and above the
bottom of Retention Ponds and Constructed Wetland Basins.
b) Provide full hydraulic calculations demonstrating that the outlet will provide the minimum
required drain time of the Water Quality Capture Volume for the BMP type being used.
c) Outlet openings (orifices) shall be protected by trash racks having a minimum net open area
specified in Fig 7. All opening dimensions shall be less than any dimension of outlet openings.
d) Trash racks shall be manufactured from stainless steel or aluminum alloy structurally designed
to not fail under a full hydrostatic load on the upstream side and assuming zero backwater
depth on the downstream side.
Urban Drainage and Typical Outlet Structure General Notes
Flood Control District for Extended Detention Basin,
Drainage Criteria Manual (V.3) Retention Pond and Constructed Wetland Basin Outlets
SD-2 10-2005
Figure 1—Typical WQCV Outlet Structure Profile, Including 100-year Detention.
Rev. 10-2005 SD-3

Figure 2—Typical WQCV Outlet Structure Profile, Including 2- to 10-year and 100-year Detention.
SD-4 Rev. 10-2005

Figure 2-a—Typical WQCV Outlet Structure Profile, Including 2- to 10-year and 100-year Detention.
Rev. 10-2005 SD-5

Figure 4—Orifice Details for Draining WQCV.
SD-6 Rev. 10-2005

Figure 5—WQCV Outlets Orifice Perforation Sizing.
Rev. 10-2005 SD-7

Orifice Plate Perforation Sizing

Circular Perforation Sizing
This table may be used to size perforation in a vertical plate of riser pipe.
Hole Dia. Hole Dia. Min. Sc Area per Row (sq. in.)
(in.) * (in.) (in.) n=1 n=2 n=3
1/4 0.250 1 0.05 0.10 0.15
5/16 0.313 2 0.08 0.16 0.24
3/8 0.375 2 0.11 0.22 0.33
7/16 0.438 2 0.15 0.30 0.45
1/2 0.500 2 0.20 0.40 0.60
9/16 0.563 3 0.25 0.50 0.75
5/8 0.625 3 0.31 0.62 0.93
11/16 0.688 3 0.37 0.74 1.11
3/4 0.750 3 0.44 0.88 1.32
13/16 0.813 3 0.52 1.04 1.56
7/8 0.875 3 0.60 1.20 1.80
15/16 0.938 3 0.69 1.38 2.07
1 1.000 4 0.79 1.58 2.37
1 1/16 1.063 4 0.89 1.78 2.67
1 1/8 1.125 4 0.99 1.98 2.97
1 3/16 1.188 4 1.11 2.22 3.33
1 1/4 1.250 4 1.23 2.46 3.69
1 5/16 1.313 4 1.35 2.70 4.05
1 3/8 1.375 4 1.48 2.96 4.44
1 7/16 1.438 4 1.62 3.24 4.86
1 1/2 1.500 4 1.77 3.54 5.31
1 9/16 1.563 4 1.92 3.84 5.76
1 5/8 1.625 4 2.07 4.14 6.21
1 11/16 1.688 4 2.24 4.48 6.72
1 3/4 1.750 4 2.41 4.82 7.23
1 13/16 1.813 4 2.58 5.16 7.74
1 7/8 1.875 4 2.76 5.52 8.28
1 15/16 1.938 4 2.95 5.90 8.85
2 2.000 4 3.14 6.28 9.42
n = Number of columns of perforations
Minimum steel plate thickness 1/4” 5/16” 3/8”
nd
* Designer may interfere to the nearest 32 inch to better match
the needed area if desired.
Rectangular Perforation sizing

Rectangular Min. Steel
Use only one rectangular column whenever two hole Width Thickness
2;inch diameter circular perforations cannot provide 5” 1/4 "
needed outlet area. 6” 1/4 “
7” 5/32 “
8” 5/16 “
Rectangular Height = 2-inches 9” 11/32 “
10” 3/8 “
Rectangular Width = Required Area per Row / 2” > 10” 1/2 “
Figure 5—WQCV Outlets Orifice Perforation Sizing.
SD-8 Rev. 10-2005

Figure 6—Suggested WQCV Outlets Standardized Trash Rack Design.
Rev. 10-2005 SD-9

Figure 6-a—Suggested Standardized Trash Rack and Outlet Design for

WQCV Outlets With Circular Openings.
SD-10 Rev. 10-2005

Table 6a-1—Trash Rack Mounting Opening Widths per Column of Circular Perforations
(2” diameter maximum)
Minimum Width (Wopening) of Opening for a VEE Wire™ Screen Trash Rack.
Requires a minimum water depth below the lowest perforation of 2’-6”.
See Figure 6-a for Explanation of Terms.
Maximum Width of Trash Rack Opening (Wconc.) Per Column of Holes
Dia. of as a Function of Water Depth H Above Lowest Perforation
Circular Maximum
Opening H=2.0’ H=3.0’ H=4.0’ H=5.0’ H=6.0’ Number of
(inches) Columns
< 0.25 3 in. 3 in. 3 in. 3 in. 3 in. 14
< 0.50 3 in. 3 in. 3 in. 3 in. 3 in. 14
< 0.75 3 in. 6 in. 6 in. 6 in. 6 in. 7
< 1.00 6 in. 9 in. 9 in. 9 in. 9 in. 4
< 1.25 9 in. 12 in. 12 in. 12 in. 15 in. 2
< 1.50 12 in. 15 in. 18 in. 18 in. 18 in. 2
< 1.75 18 in. 21 in. 21 in. 24 in. 24 in. 1
< 2.00 21 in. 24 in. 27 in. 30 in. 30 in. 1
NOTE: Minimum width of opening in the concrete shall not be less than 9 inches whenever above
table indicates otherwise. Always minimize number of columns of perforations used.
Table 6a-2—Standardized WQCV Outlet Design Using Circular Openings

(2” diameter maximum).
Johnson VEE Wire™ Stainless Steel Screen1 (or equal) Trash Rack Design Specifications.
Support
Screen #93 VEE Rod, Total
Max. Width Wire Slot Support Rod On-Center, Screen Carbon Steel
of Opening Opening Type Spacing Thickness Frame Type
3
9” 0.139” #156 VEE ¾” 0.31” /8”x1.0” flat bar
18” 0.139” TE .074”x.50” 1” 0.655” ¾” x 1.0 angle
24” 0.139” TE .074”x.75” 1” 1.03” 1.0” x 1½” angle
27” 0.139” TE .074”x.75” 1” 1.03” 1.0” x 1½” angle
30” 0.139” TE .074”x1.0” 1” 1.155” 1 1/4“x 1½” angle
36” 0.139” TE .074”x1.0” 1” 1.155” 1 1/4“x 1½” angle
42” 0.139” TE .105”x1.0” 1” 1.155” 1 1/4“x 1½” angle
1
Johnson Screens, St. Paul, Minnesota, USA (1-800-833-9473)
Rev. 10-2005 SD-11

DESIGN EXAMPLE:
Given: A WQCV outlet with three columns of 5/8 inch (0.625 in) diameter openings.
Water Depth H = 3.5 feet above the lowest opening and 2’-4” feet below the lowest opening.
Find: The dimensions for a well screen trash rack within the mounting frame.
Solution: From Table 6a-1 with an outlet opening diameter of 0.75 inches (i.e., rounded up from 5/8 inch
actual diameter of the opening) and the Water Depth H = 4 feet (i.e., rounded up from 3.5 feet) above the
lowest perforation. The minimum width for each column of openings is 6 inches. From Fig’s 4 and 5, the
total width of concrete opening is Wconc. = 2x3” + 6” = 12 inches. Total minimum height of the rack
structure (adding 2-feet below the lowest row of openings and adding a total of 2 inches for top and
bottom support channel flanges (i.e., 3’-6” + 2’-0” + 2”) is 68 inches.
Total trash rack dimensions, including the mounting frame, are 14 inches wide x 68 inches high
(net trash tack dimensions within the frame are 12 inches wide x 66 inches high).
From Table 6a-2 select the ordering specifications for an 18”, or less, wide opening trash rack using
Johnson VEE Wire™ (or equal) stainless steel screen with #93 VEE wire, 0.139” openings between
wires, TE .074” x .50” support rods on 1.0” on-center spacing, total rack thickness of 0.655” and ¾” x 1.0”
welded carbon steel frame.
SD-12 Rev. 10-2005

Figure 6-b—Suggested Standardized Trash Rack and Outlet Design for

WQCV Outlets With Rectangular Openings.
Rev. 10-2005 SD-13

Table 6b-1—Standardized WQCV Outlet Design Using 2” High Rectangular Openings.

Minimum Width (Wopening) of Opening for an Aluminum Bar Grate Trash Rack.
Requires a minimum water depth below the lowest perforation of 2’-4”.
See Figure 6-b for Explanation of Terms.
Maximum Width Minimum Width of Trash Rack Opening (Wopening)

W of 2” Height as a Function of Water Depth H Above Lowest Perforation
Rectangular Spacing of
Opening H=2.0 ft. H=3.0 ft. H=4.0 ft. H=5.0 ft. H=6.0 ft. Bearing Bars,
(inches) Cross Rods
2.0 2.0 ft. 2.5 ft. 2.5 ft. 2.5 ft. 3.0 ft. 1-3/16”, 2”
< 2.5 2.5 ft. 3.0 ft. 3.0 ft. 3.5 ft. 3.5 ft. 1-3/16”, 2”
< 3.0 3.0 ft. 3.5 ft. 3.5 ft. 4.0 ft. 4.0 ft. 1-3/16”, 2”
< 3.5 3.5 ft. 4.0 ft. 4.5 ft. 4.5 ft. 5.0 ft. 1-3/16”, 2”
< 4.0 3.5 ft. 4.5 ft. 5.0 ft. 5.0 ft. 5.5 ft. 1-3/16”, 2”
< 4.5 4.0 ft. 4.5 ft. 5.0 ft. 5.5 ft. 5.5 ft. 1-3/16”, 4”
< 5.0 4.0 ft. 5.0 ft. 5.5 ft. 6.0 ft. 6.0 ft. 1-3/16”, 4”
< 5.5 4.5 ft. 5.5 ft. 6.0 ft. 6.5 ft. 7.0 ft. 1-3/16”, 4”
< 6.0 5.0 ft. 6.0 ft. 6.5 ft. 7.0 ft. 7.5 ft. 1-3/16”, 4”
< 6.5 5.5 ft. 6.5 ft. 7.0 ft. 7.5 ft. 8.0 ft. 1-3/16”, 4”
< 7.0 6.0 ft. 7.0 ft. 7.5 ft. 8.5 ft. 8.5 ft. 1-3/16”, 4”
< 7.5 6.0 ft. 7.5 ft. 8.5 ft. 9.0 ft. 9.5 ft. 1-3/16”, 4”
< 8.0 6.5 ft. 8.0 ft. 9.0 ft. 9.5 ft. 10.0 ft. 1-3/16”, 4”
< 8.5 7.0 ft. 8.5 ft. 9.5 ft. 10.0 ft. N/A 1-3/16”, 4”
< 9.0 7.5 ft. 9.0 ft. 10.0 ft. N/A N/A 1-3/16”, 4”
< 9.5 8.0 ft. 9.5 ft. N/A N/A N/A 1-3/16”, 4”
< 10.0 8.5 ft. 10.0 ft. N/A N/A N/A 1-3/16”, 4”
< 10.5 8.5 ft. N/A N/A N/A N/A 1-3/16”, 4”
< 11.0 9.0 ft. N/A N/A N/A N/A 1-3/16”, 4”
< 11.5 9.5 ft. N/A N/A N/A N/A 1-3/16”, 4”
< 12.0 10.0 ft. N/A N/A N/A N/A 1-3/16”, 4”
SD-14 Rev. 10-2005

Table 6b-2—Standardized WQCV Outlet Design Using 2” High Rectangular Openings.

Klemp™ KRP Series Aluminum Bar Grate1 (or equal) Trash Rack Design Specifications.
Water Depth Above Minimum Bearing Bar Size,

Lowest Opening, H Bearing Bars Aligned Vertically
2.0 ft. 1” x 3/16”
3.0 ft. 1-1/4” x 3/16”
4.0 ft. 1-3/4” x 3/16”
5.0 ft. 2” x 3/16”
6.0 ft. 2-1/4” x 3/16”
1
Klemp Corporation, Orem, Utah, USA
DESIGN EXAMPLE:
Given: A WQCV outlet plate with one column of 2 inch high by 6.5 inch wide rectangular openings.
Water Depth H = 4.5 feet above the lowest opening of and 2.5 feet below the lowest perforation.
Find: The dimensions for an aluminum bar grate trash rack.
Solution: Using Table 6b-1for openings having a width of 6.5 inches and Water Depth H = 5 feet (i.e.,
rounded up from 4.5 feet). The minimum width of the concrete opening at the trash rack, Wopening, is 7’-6”.
From Fig’s 4 and 5, the total width of concrete opening at the orifice plate, Wconc., is 6.5” + 12” = 18.5
inches (say 19 inches). Suggest setting the total width of the orifice plate at 26 inches.
Total minimum height of the rack structure (adding the 2-feet below the lowest row of openings to the
water depth of 4.5 feet and adding 3 inches for all support channel flanges around the perimeter of the
grate gives us the following total dimensions for the trash rack:
Width = 8’-0”
Height = 7’-0”
From Tables 6b-1 and 6b-2, select the ordering specifications for W = 6.5” and H = 5.0 feet or less, a 8’-0”
wide by 7’-0” high trash rack using Klemp Corporation aluminum bar grate (or equal) with 2”x3/16”
bearing bars spaced on 1-3/16” centers and cross rods spaced on 4”centers. Bearing bars are to be
aligned vertically.
Rev. 10-2005 SD-15

Figure 7—Minimum Trash Rack Open Area – Extended Range.
SD-16 Rev. 10-2005

SUGGESTED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
This section contains suggested technical specifications for some of the designs contained in this Manual.
These specifications may not contain many of the provisions typically seen in construction specifications
such as pay item definitions and bid items. The intent that these suggested technical specifications is for
the engineer to incorporate the technical portions into specific project specifications after reviewing and, if
the site conditions dictate, modify them to best fit the specific site conditions of the project. When
modifying these suggested specifications the engineer should maintain the general technical
requirements recommended in these technical specifications.
Special Note and Disclaimer:
This information is intended for use by the design professional competent to evaluate its significance and
limitation and who will accept the responsibility for its proper application. The Urban Drainage and Flood
Control District and its employees disclaim any and all responsibility for any use of the information
supplied herein and it is the responsibility of the user to apply and modify these guidelines as needed to
meet specific site and design needs.
December 2004
Rev. 04-2008 SD-17

AGGREGATE TURF PAVEMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Description
1.1 This item shall consist of an aggregate-turf pavement composed of a base course of sandy loam type
of soil-bound crushed stone or bound gravel and a seedbed of sandy loam type soil or combination of
sandy loam type soil and aggregate, constructed on a prepared subgrade in accordance with these
specifications, and shall conform to the dimensions and typical cross section(s) shown on the plans.
This item may include the furnishing and applying of fertilizer, lime, sandy loam topsoil, and other plant
nutrients; the furnishing and planting of seed; and the furnishing and spreading of mulch. When any of
these turf-establishing materials are required, the quality, quantity, and construction methods shall be in
accordance with project specifications. When turf is to be established, the seedbed soil or topsoil shall be
a natural friable soil, possessing characteristics of the best locally obtainable sandy loam type soils, which
can produce a fairly heavy growth of turf grasses.
The prepared composite mixture of aggregates used for the base course shall be Type A or B.
Materials
2.1 STABILIZED MIXES. The designated stabilized base course mixtures shall conform to the following
requirements.
Type A or B - The materials shall be natural or artificial mixtures of gravel, stone and sandy loam type soil
so proportioned as to meet the requirement specified. The aggregate in this mix shall consist of clean,
hard durable particles of crushed gravel, stone or concrete meeting the specifications for CDOT Course
Aggregate for Bases Section 703.02, and shall be free from soft, thin, elongated, or laminated pieces, and
vegetable or other deleterious substances.
The prepared composite mixture used shall meet one of the applicable gradation requirements.
Table 1—Requirements For Gradation Of Mixture

Sieve Designation Percentage by weight passing sieves
(square openings) A B
2 inch (50 mm) 100
1 ½ inch (37 mm) 100 90-100
1 inch (24 mm) 95-100 70-95
3/4 inch (19 mm) 70-95
No. 4 (4.75 mm) 40-70
No. 10 (2 mm) 40-70 32-60
No. 20 (.085 mm)
No. 40 (0.425 mm) 20-45 20-40
No. 200 (0.075 mm) 10-20 10-20
SD-18 Rev. 04-2008

The fraction of the composite mixture passing the No. 200 (0.075 mm) mesh sieve shall be less than two-
thirds of the fraction passing the No. 40 (0.425 mm) mesh sieve.
The fraction passing the No. 40 (0.425 mm) mesh sieve shall have a liquid limit not greater than 30 and a
plasticity index not greater than 8 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318.
CONSTRUCTION METHODS
2.1 EQUIPMENT. All equipment necessary for the proper construction of this work shall be on the
project in first-class working condition and approved by the Engineer before construction is permitted to
start.
2.2 PREPARING SUBGRADE. When the aggregate turf base course is placed on cut, scarify the sub-
base to a depth of 6 inches (150 mm) and compact it to no less than 90 percent Standard Proctor Density
at optimum water content. When the sub-base course is in fill, the fill shall be places in layers of 8 inches
(175 mm) or less. Each layer shall be compacted to no less than 90 percent of ASSHTO 180 (Modified
Proctor Density) at optimum moisture content. The moisture content of compacted materials shall not
deviate more than 2 percent from the optimum moisture content.
When it is necessary to blend new material with material on the existing surface, the existing surface shall
first be scarified lightly and bladed to uniform grade and cross section as shown on the plans.
2.3 PLACING AND COMPACTING OF AGGREGATE TURF BASE COURSE. Lay down the aggregate
turf base course in layers not exceeding 8 (175 mm) in thickness. Immediately after completion of the
spreading operations, the material shall be thoroughly compacted. The number, type, and weight of
rollers shall be sufficient to compact the material to the required density.
The field density of the compacted aggregate turf base course shall be at least 90 percent of the
maximum density as determined in accordance with AASHTO 180 (Modified Proctor Density). The
moisture content of the material at the start of compaction shall not deviate more than 2 percentage
points from the optimum moisture content.
2.4 SURFACE TEST, THICKNESS, AND MAINTENANCE. The surface shall not deviate more than 3/4
inch (18 mm) when tested with a 16-foot (4.8 m) straightedge applied parallel with, and at right angles to,
the centerline. Any deviation in excess of this amount shall be corrected by loosening, adding, or
removing material, reshaping, and recompacting.
The thickness of the base course shall be determined by depth tests or cores taken at intervals in such
manner that each test shall represent not more than 500 square yards (418 square meters). When the
base deficiency exceeds 1/2 inch (12 mm), it shall be corrected. The Contractor shall replace at no cost
to owner the materials removed by test borings.
Rev. 04-2008 SD-19

2.5 TURF-SURFACING. Following the construction of the soil-aggregate base, the Contractor shall
prepare the seedbed for the turf. The top 1 inch (25 mm) of surface of the base course shall be loosened
slightly by discing, harrowing, rotary-tilling, or other approved methods. Topsoil shall be spread to at least
and average depth of 1 inch (25 mm). The seedbed preparation, applying lime, fertilizer and water,
seeding, rolling and mulching, shall be performed in accordance with the specification requirements to
revegetation.
SD-20 Rev. 04-2008

PORTLAND CEMENT PERVIOUS PAVEMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INTRODUCTION
The specifications for Portland Cement Pervious Pavement (Porous Concrete Pavement - PCP) that
follow are based on the ones recommended by Georgia Concrete & Products Association (GCPA) and
can be viewed on their website http://www.gcpa.org/. The specifications have been slightly modified for
use in the Denver area so as to recognize the differences in rainfall, atmospheric dust fallout, deicing,
freeze thaw and humidity. Some of the modifications resulted after discussion with Villanova University
and their experiences with this type of pavement.
The Urban Drainage and Flood Control District is releasing these as “interim technical specifications” until
more field experience is gained and may be modified in the future. The primary differences from the
specifications recommended by GCPA are the prohibition on use of curing accelerants and additives,
restrictions on temperature for pouring of concrete, etc.
The dry, high-altitude, climate along with freeze-thaw cycles that are rarely and issue in Georgia required
that some of the provisions specified by GCPA be modified. There is no experience in Colorado with this
type of pavement and everything done using these specifications and the design sections recommended
under USDM Volume 3 Chapter on Porous Pavement has to be viewed as experimental until field
experience is gained and these installation have undergone the test of time.
GENERAL PROVISION
Scope of Work:
The work to be completed under this contract includes the furnishing of all labor, materials, and
equipment necessary for construction of the proposed Portland Cement Pervious Pavement (hereinafter
sometimes referred to as “PCP”) improvements in conformance with the plans and specifications.
References:
American Society of Testing and Materials
ASTM C 29 Test for Unit Weight and Voids in Aggregate
ASTM C 33 Specifications for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C 42 Test Methods for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of
Concrete
ASTM C 117 Test Method for Material Finer than 75 µm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral
Rev. 04-2008 SD-21

Aggregates by Washing
ASTM C 138 Test Method for Unit Weight, Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete
ASTM C 140 Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units
ASTM C 150 Specifications for Portland Cement (Types I or II only)
ASTM C 172 Practice of Sampling Fresh Concrete
ASTM C 260 Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C 494 Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C 595 Specifications for Blended Hydraulic Cements (Types IP or IS only)
ASTM C 618 Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use
as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete
ASTM C 989 Specification for Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete
and Mortars
ASTM C 1077 Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use
in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation
ASTM D 448 Specification for Standard Sizes of Coarse Aggregates for Highway
Construction
ASTM D 1557 Tests for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate Mixtures
Using 10 Pound Rammer and 18-inch Drop
ASTM E 329 Standard Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for
Concrete, Steel and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction
SD-22 Rev. 04-2008

American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
AASHTO T-180 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 10 Pound (454kg)

Rammer and an 18 inch (457mm) Drop
Colorado Department of Transportation (CDOT)
Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction
Contractor Qualifications:
The use of an ACI Concrete Flatwork Certified Finisher is strongly recommended. Prior to award of the
contract, the placing contractor shall furnish owner/engineer/ architect a statement attesting to
qualifications and experience and the following:
A minimum of two (2) completed projects with addresses or proof of attendance by supervisor and
finishers at Colorado Ready Mix Products Association training seminars.
Unit weight acceptance data
In-situ pavement test results including void content and unit weight
Sample of product (i.e., core or test panel)
If the placing contractor and concrete producer have insufficient experience with PCP, the placing
contractor shall retain an experienced consultant (as qualified above) to monitor production, handling, and
placement operations at the contractor’s expense.
Test Panels:
Regardless of qualification, contractor is to place, joint and cure two PCP test panels, each to be a
minimum of 225 sq. ft. at the required project thickness to demonstrate to the engineer’s and owners
satisfaction that in-place unit weights can be achieved and a satisfactory PCP can be installed at the site
location.
Test panels may be placed at any of the specified contract site location requiring PCP. Test panels shall
be tested for thickness in accordance with ASTM C 42; void structure in accordance with ASTM C 138;
and for core unit weight in accordance with ASTM C 140, Paragraph 6.3.
Satisfactory performance of the test panels will be determined by:
Rev. 04-2008 SD-23

Compacted thickness no less than 1/4" of specified thickness

Void Structure: 15% minimum, 21% maximum
Unit weight ± five (5) pounds per cubic foot (pcf) of the design unit weight
If measured void structure falls below 15% or if measured thickness is exceeds the 1/4" less than the
specified thickness or if measured weight falls less than five (5) pcf below design unit weight, the test
panel shall be removed at the contractor’s expense and disposed of in an approved landfill.
If the test panel meets the above-mentioned requirements, it can be left in-place and included in the
completed work.
Concrete Mix Design:

Contractor shall furnish a proposed mix design with proportions of materials to owner or engineer prior to
commencement of work. The data shall include unit weights determined in accordance with ASTM C 29
Paragraph 11, Jigging Procedure.
MATERIALS:
General:
Locally available material having a record of satisfactory performance shall be used.
Cement:
Portland Cement Type I or II conforming to ASTM C 150 or Portland Cement Type IP or IS conforming to
ASTM C 595.
Flyash and Ground Iron Blast-Furnace Slag:

No Flyash or Ground Iron Blast-Furnace Slag may be used in the PCP mix.
Aggregate:
Use Colorado Department of Transportation (CDOT) No. 67 coarse aggregate (3/4 to No.8) per ASTM C
33. If other gradation of aggregate is to be used, submit data on proposed material to owner for approval.
Air Entraining Agent:

Shall comply with ASTM C 260.
Admixtures:
Type A Water Reducing Admixture - ASTM C 494; however, Phosphorous-based admixtures shall not be
used in Porous Concrete Pavement mixes.
Type B Retarding - ASTM C 494

Type D Water Reducing/Retarding - ASTM C 494
SD-24 Rev. 04-2008

A hydration stabilizer may be utilized and is recommended in the design and production of pervious
concrete. This stabilizer suspends cement hydration by forming a protective barrier around the
cementitious particles, which delays the particles from achieving initial set. The admixture’s primary
function should be as a hydration stabilizer; however, it must also meet the requirements of ASTM C 494
Type B Retarding or Type D Water Reducing/Retarding Admixtures.
Water
Potable or comply with CDOT Standard Specifications for Portland Cement Concrete water.
PROPORTIONS:
Cement Content:
Total cementitious material shall not be less than 600 lbs. per cu. yd.
Aggregate Content:
The volume of aggregate per cu. yd. shall be equal to 27 cu. ft. when calculated as a function of the unit
weight determined in accordance with ASTM C 29 jigging procedure.
Admixtures:
Admixtures to reduce water content and/or to improve workability of concrete shall be used in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.
Fly ash or pot ash shall not be used as an admixture.
Mix Water:
Mix water shall be such that the cement paste displays a wet metallic sheen without causing the paste to
flow from the aggregate. (Mix water yielding a cement paste with a dull-dry appearance has insufficient
water for hydration and shall be rejected.)
Insufficient water results in inconsistency in the mix and poor bond strength.
High water content results in the paste sealing the void system primarily at the bottom and poor surface
bond and defeating the intent of porous pavement.
SUBGRADE PREPARATION AND FORMWORK:
Subgrade Material:
The top 6 inches shall be composed of granular or gravely soil that is predominantly sandy with no more
than a moderate amount of silt or clay.
Subgrade Permeability:
Prior to placement of PCP, the subgrade shall be tested for rate of permeability by double ring
infiltrometer. The saturated infiltration rate shall be no less than 1/4 inch per hour.
Rev. 04-2008 SD-25

As an alternative to the double ring infiltrometer test, a standard septic system percolation test may be
used and if the percolation rate exceeds the minimum allowed (no slower than the maximum drain-down
time) acceptable for a standard leach field installation, the site will be considered acceptable.
A minimum of one test for each 1000 square feet of pavement shall be conducted with no less than a total
of two separate tests performed for sites smaller than 100 square feet.
If the site fails the infiltration/percolation testing, appropriate underdrain system and select materials
layers as shown on the plans shall be installed before the installation of the PCP.
Subgrade Support:
The subgrade shall be compacted by a mechanical vibratory compactor to a minimum density of 92% of a
maximum dry density as established by ASTM D 1557 or AASHTO T 180.
If fill material (embankment) is required to bring the subgrade to final elevation, it shall be clean and free
of deleterious materials. It shall be place in 8 inch maximum layers, and compacted by a mechanical
vibratory compactor to a minimum density of 92% of a maximum dry density as established by ASTM D
1557 or AASHTO T 180.
Subgrade Moisture:
The subgrade shall be in a moist condition (within ± 3% of the optimum moisture content as determined
by the modified compaction test ASTM D 1557 or AASHTO T 180).
GRANULAR BEDDING AND WATER STORAGE MEDIA:
Granular Bedding Water Storage Material:

Install a granular bedding water storage layer as shown on the design plans. This layer will act as the
temporary storage of rainfall runoff and permit it to infiltrate into the ground. Granular bedding shall
consist of Colorado Department of Transportation (CDOT) Section 703 No. 8 or No. 67 coarse aggregate
per ASTM C 33 and shall be laid directly on the granular subgrade or the geotextile or impermeable
membrane as shown on the design drawings.
FORMS:
Forms may be of wood or steel and shall be the depth of the pavement. Forms shall be of sufficient
strength and stability to support mechanical equipment without deformation of plan profiles following
spreading, strike-off and compaction operations.
SD-26 Rev. 04-2008

MIXING, HAULING AND PLACING:
Temperature Restrictions
PCP shall not be pored on site if the ambient temperatures is below freezing or exceeds 95 degrees
Fahrenheit or it is projected that these temperatures will be reached within 24 hour after pour is
completed.
Mix Time:
Truck mixers shall be operated at the speed designated as mixing speed by the manufacturer for 75 to
100 revolutions of the drum.
Transportation:
The Portland cement aggregate mixture may be transported or mixed on site and should be used within
one (1) hour of the introduction of mix water. This time can be increased to 90 minutes when utilizing the
hydration stabilizer specified in Section 205. No additional water will be added to the mixture after the
initial introduction. Any batch that exceeds these time limits shall be rejected and disposed of by
contractor at an approve disposal site at no cost to owner.
Discharge:
Each mixer truck will be inspected for appearance of concrete uniformity according to Section 304. Water
may be added to obtain the required mix consistency. A minimum of 20 revolutions at the manufacturer’s
designated mixing speed shall be required following any addition of water to the mix. Discharge shall be a
continuous operation and shall be completed as quickly as possible. Concrete shall be deposited as close
to its final position as practicable and such that fresh concrete enters the mass of previously placed
concrete The practice of discharging onto subgrade and pulling or shoveling to final placement is not
allowed.
Placing and Finishing Equipment:

Unless otherwise approved by the owner and engineer in writing, the contractor, shall provide mechanical
equipment of either slip-form or form riding with a following compactive unit that will provide a minimum of
10 psi vertical force so as to achieve no less than 15 percent void volume as compared to total volume of
the finished pavement. The pervious concrete pavement will be placed to the required cross-section and
shall not deviate more than ± 3/8 inch in 10 feet from profile grade. If placing equipment does not provide
the minimum specified vertical force, a full width roller or other full width compaction device that provides
sufficient compactive effort shall be used immediately following the strike-off operation. After mechanical
or other approved strike-off and compaction operation, no other finishing operation will be allowed.
If vibration, internal or surface applied is used, it shall be shut off immediately when forward progress is
halted for any reason. The contractor will be restricted to pavement placement widths of a maximum of
fifteen (15) feet unless the contractor can demonstrate competence to provide pavement placement
Rev. 04-2008 SD-27

widths greater than the maximum specified to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Curing:
Curing procedures shall begin within 20 minutes after the final placement operations. The pavement
surface shall be covered with a minimum six (6) mil thick polyethylene sheet or other approved covering
material. Prior to covering, a fog or light mist shall be sprayed above the surface. The cover shall overlap
all exposed edges and shall be secured (without using dirt or stone) to prevent dislocation due to winds or
adjacent traffic conditions.
Cure Time:
Portland Cement Type I, II or IS - 7 days minimum
Portland Cement Type I or II with Class F Flyash (as part of the 600 lbs./cy minimum cementitious) or
Type IP - 10 days minimum
No truck traffic shall be allowed for 10 days (no passenger car/light trucks for seven (7) days)
Jointing:
Transverse control (contraction) joints shall be installed at 20 foot intervals. They shall be installed at a
depth of 1/4 the thickness of the pavement. Longitudinal control joints shall be installed at the midpoint if
the constructed lane width exceeds 15 feet. These joints can be installed in the plastic concrete or saw
cut. If saw cut, the procedure should begin as soon as the pavement has hardened sufficiently to prevent
raveling and uncontrolled cracking (normally after curing). Transverse construction joints shall be installed
whenever placing is suspended a sufficient length of time that concrete may begin to harden. In order to
assure aggregate bond at construction joints, a bonding agent suitable for bonding fresh concrete to
existing concrete shall be brushed, rolled, or sprayed on the existing pavement surface edge. Isolation
(expansion) joints will not be used except when pavement is abutting slabs or other adjoining structures.
TESTING, INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE:
601. Laboratory Testing:

The owner will retain an independent testing laboratory. The testing laboratory shall conform to the
applicable requirements of ASTM E 329, Standard Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing
Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction, and ASTM C 1077,
Standard Practice for Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction, and Criteria for
Laboratory Evaluation, and shall be inspected and accredited by the Concrete Advisory Board of Georgia,
Inc. or by an equivalent recognized national authority.
The agent of the testing laboratory performing field sampling and testing for concrete shall be certified by
the American Concrete Institute as a Concrete Field Testing Technician Grade I, or by a recognized state
or national authority of an equivalent level of competence.
SD-28 Rev. 04-2008

Testing and Acceptance:

A minimum of one gradation test of the subgrade is required every 5000 square feet to determine percent
passing the No. 200 sieve per ASTM C 117.
A minimum of one test for each day’s placement of pervious concrete in accordance with ASTM C 172
and ASTM C 29 to verify unit weight shall be conducted. Delivered unit weights are to be determined in
accordance with ASTM C 29 using a 0.25 cubic foot cylindrical metal measure. The measure is to be filled
and compacted in accordance with ASTM C 29 paragraph 11, jigging procedure. The unit weight of the
delivered concrete shall be ± five (5) pcf of the design unit weight.
Test panels shall have two cores taken from each panel in accordance with ASTM C 42 at a minimum of
seven (7) days after placement of the pervious concrete. The cores shall be measured for thickness, void
structure, and unit weight. Untrimmed, hardened core samples shall be used to determine placement
thickness. The average of all production cores shall not be less than the specified thickness with no
individual core being more than ½ inch less than the specified thickness. After thickness determination,
the cores shall be trimmed and measured for unit weight in the saturated condition as described in
Paragraph 6.3.1 "Saturation" of ASTM C 140, Standard Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete
Masonry Units. The trimmed cores shall be immersed in water for 24 hours, allowed to drain for one (1)
minute, surface water removed with a damp cloth, then weighed immediately. Range of satisfactory unit
weight values are ± five (5) pcf of the design unit weight.
After a minimum of seven (7) days following each placement, three cores shall be taken in accordance
with ASTM C 42. The cores shall be measured for thickness and unit weight determined as described
above for test panels. Core holes shall be filled with concrete meeting the pervious mix design.
Rev. 04-2008 SD-29

MODULAR BLOCK PAVEMENT (MBP) AND COBBLE BLOCK PAVEMENT (CBP)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
This guide specification is intended for use in the within the Urban Drainage and Flood Control
District (District) and should also be applicable for areas within the Colorado High Plains Region
and other areas of U.S. that use the District’s Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual. It is based
on the technical specifications published by the Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute (ICPI)
for the construction of concrete pavers such and MBP and CBP on a permeable, crushed stone,
bedding layer. It has been modified by the This layer is placed over an open graded-base
consisting of a larger crushed stone that filters, stores, and releases the storm water to the soil,
drain pipes or both. While this guide specification does not cover excavation, liners, geotextiles,
drain pipes, and base, notes are provided on base materials.
ICPI recommends that their guide specification be used with theirI manual, Permeable
Interlocking Concrete Pavements. Regardless, the text below must be edited to suit specific
project requirements. It should be reviewed by a qualified civil or geotechnical engineer, or
landscape architect familiar with the site conditions. Edit this specification term as necessary to
identify the design professional in the General Conditions of the Contract.
PART 1. GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
Permeable interlocking concrete pavers.
Bedding material.
Open-graded base materials.
Geotextiles.
B. Related Sections
1. Section [ ]: Curbs.
2. Section [ ]: [Stabilized] aggregate base.
3. Section [ ]: [PVC] Drainage pipes
4. Section [ ]: Impermeable liner.
5. Section [ ]: Edge restraints.
SD-30 Rev. 04-2008

6. Section [ ]: Drainage pipes and appurtenances.
7. Section [ ]: Earthworks/excavation/soil compaction.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM)
1. C 33, Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
2. C 67, Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and
Related Units.
3. C 131, Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse

Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.
4. C 136, Method for Sieve Analysis for Fine and Coarse Aggregate.
5. C 140, Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile, Section
8 – Freezing and Thawing
6. C 936, Standard Specification for Solid Interlocking Concrete Pavers.
7. C 979, Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete.
8. D 698, Test Methods for Moisture Density Relations of Soil and Soil Aggregate
Mixtures Using a 5.5-lb (2.49 kg) Rammer and 12 in. (305 mm) drop.
9. D 1557, Test Methods for Moisture Density Relations of Soil and Soil Aggregate
Mixtures Using a 10-lb (4.54 kg) Rammer and 18 in. (457 mm) drop.
10. D 1883, Test Method for California Bearing Ratio of Laboratory-Compacted Soils.
B. Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute (ICPI)
1. Permeable Interlocking Concrete Pavement manual.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.
B. Manufacturer’s drawing and details: Indicate perimeter conditions, junction with other materials,
expansion and control joints, paver [layout,] [patterns,] [color arrangement,] installation [and
setting] details. Indicate layout, pattern, and relationship of paving joints to fixtures and
project formed details.
Rev. 04-2008 SD-31

C. Sieve analysis of aggregates for base and bedding materials per ASTM C 136.
D. Soils report indicating density test reports, classification, and infiltration rate measured on-
site under compacted conditions, and suitability for the intended project.
E. Erosion and sediment control plan.
F. Stormwater management (quality and quantity) calculations.
G. Permeable concrete pavers:
1. Manufacturer’s product catalog sheets with specifications.
2. [Four] representative full-size samples of each paver type, thickness, color, and finish.
Submit samples indicating the extremes of color expected in the finished installation.
3. Accepted samples become the standard of acceptance for the work of this Section.
4. Laboratory test reports certifying compliance of concrete pavers with ASTM C 936.
5. Manufacturer's material safety data sheets for the safe handling of the specified
materials and products.
H. Paver Installation Subcontractor:
1. A copy of Subcontractor’s current certificate from the Interlocking Concrete

Pavement Institute Concrete Paver Installer Certification program.
2. Job references from projects of a similar size and complexity. Provide

Owner/Client/General Contractor names, postal address, phone, fax, and email
address.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Paving Subcontractor Qualifications:
1. Utilize an installer having successfully completed concrete paver installation

similar in design, material, and extent indicated on this project.
2. Utilize an installer holding a current certificate from the Interlocking Concrete

Pavement Institute Concrete Paver Installer Certification program.
B. Regulatory Requirements and Approvals: [Specify applicable licensing, bonding or other

requirements of regulatory agencies.].
C. Mock-Ups:
SD-32 Rev. 04-2008

1. Install a 7 ft x 7 ft (2 x 2 m) paver area.
2. Use this area to determine surcharge of the bedding sand layer, joint sizes, lines,
laying pattern(s), color(s) and texture of the job.
3. This area will be used as the standard by which the work will be judged.
4. Subject to acceptance by owner, mock-up may be retained as part of finished

work.
5. If mock-up is not retained, remove and properly dispose of mock-up.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirement Section.
B. Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid

construction delays.
C. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopended undamaged container

packaging with identification tags intact.
1. Coordinate delivery and paving schedule to minimize interference with normal use of
buildings adjacent to paving.
2. Deliver concrete pavers to the site in steel banded, plastic banded, or plastic
wrapped cubes capable of transfer by forklift or clamp lift.
3. Unload pavers at job site in such a manner that no damage occurs to the product or
existing construction
D Storage and Protection: Store materials in protected area such that they are kept free
from mud, dirt, and other foreign materials.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install in rain or snow.
B. Do not install frozen bedding materials.
1.07 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra materials: Provide [Specify area] [Specify percentage] additional material

for use by owner for maintenance and repair.
B. Pavers shall be from the same production run as installed materials.
Rev. 04-2008 SD-33

PART 2. PRODUCTS
Note: Concrete pavers may have spacer bars on each unit. Spacer bars are recommended for
mechanically installed pavers. Manually installed pavers may be installed with or without spacer bars.
Verify with manufacturers that overall dimensions do not include spacer bars.
Note: Some projects may include a mix of permeable and solid interlocking concrete pavements. Specify
each product as required.
2.01 PERMEABLE INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS
A. Manufacturer: [Specify ICPI member manufacturer name.].
1. Contact: [Specify ICPI member manufacturer contact information.].
B. MBP or CBP Units (referred to here as Permeable Interlocking Concrete Paver Units):
1. Paver Type: [Specify name of product group, family, series, etc.].
a. Material Standard: Comply with standards set forth in ASTM C 936.
b. Color [and finish]: [Specify color.] [Specify finish].
c. Color Pigment Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 979.
d. Size: [Specify] inches [Specify] x [Specify] inches [Specify] x [Specify.] inches

[Specify] thick.
Note: If 3 1/8 in. thick pavers are specified, their compressive strength test results per ASTM C 140
should be adjusted by multiplying by 1.18 to equate the results to that from 2 3/8 in. thick pavers.
e. Average Compressive Strength (ASTM C 140): 8000 psi with no individual

unit under 7200 psi.
f. Average Water Absorption (ASTM C 140): 5%, no unit greater than 7%.
g. Freeze/Thaw Resistance (ASTM C 67): Resistant to 50 freeze/thaw

cycles with no greater than 1% loss of material.
2.02 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted.
SD-34 Rev. 04-2008

2.03 CRUSHED STONE BEDDING MATERIALS
A. The Base Course materials shall meet the gradation criteria of ASTM No. 67 aggregate
(CDOT Sect 703, #67)
B. The leveling curse and the infill material shall meet the material and gradation criteria set
forth for ASTM C-33 fine concrete aggregate, sand.
C. The Base Course will consist of crushed stone that have 90% fractured faces, LA Abrasion
< 40 per ASTM C 131, minimum CBR of 80% per ASTM D 1883.
Do not use rounded river gravel for base or bedding materials.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide accessory materials as follows:
Note: The elevations and surface tolerance of the aggregate base determine the final surface elevations
of concrete pavers. The paver installation contractor cannot correct deficiencies in the base surface with
additional bedding/leveling materials. Therefore, the surface elevations of the base should be checked
and accepted by the General Contractor or designated party, with written certification to the paving
subcontractor, prior to placing bedding/leveling materials and concrete pavers.
Note: Curbs will typically be cast-in-place concrete or precast set in concrete haunches. Do not use
plastic edging with steel spikes to restrain the paving units.
1. Edge Restraints as recommended by manufacturer or as shown on drawings.
a. Manufacturer: [Specify manufacturer.].
b. Material: [Pre-cast concrete] [Cut stone] [Concrete].
c. Material Standard: [Specify material standard.].
NOTE: SEE ICPI PUBLICATION, PERMEABLE INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVEMENTS FOR

GUIDANCE ON GEOTEXTILE SELECTION.
2. Geotextile Fabric:
a. Material Type and Description: [Specify material type and description as

shown in the Manual.].
b. Material Standard: [Specify material standard as shown in the Manual.].
c. Manufacturer: [Acceptable to interlocking concrete paver manufacturer
Rev. 04-2008 SD-35

PART 3. EXECUTION
3.01 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS
A. [Specify acceptable paving subcontractors.].
3.02 EXAMINATION
Note: Compaction of the soil subgrade should be to a minimum of 95% standard Proctor density per
ASTM C 698 for pedestrian areas and residential driveways, and a minimum of 95% modified
Proctor per ASTM D 1557 for vehicular areas. Density and moisture should be checked in the
field with a nuclear density gauge or other test methods for compliance to specifications.
Stabilization of the soil and/or base material may be necessary with weak or continually saturated
soils, or when subject to high wheel loads. Compaction will reduce the permeability of soils.
These conditions may require the use of drainpipes within open-graded bases.
A. Acceptance of Site Verification of Conditions:
1. General Contractor shall inspect, accept and certify in writing to the paver
installation subcontractor that site conditions meet specifications for the following
items prior to installation of interlocking concrete pavers.
a. Verify that subgrade preparation, compacted density and elevations

conform to specified requirements.
b. Verify that geotextiles have been placed according to drawings and

specifications.
c. Verify that aggregate base materials, thickness, [compacted density],

surface tolerances and elevations conform to specified requirements.
d. Provide written density test results for soil subgrade [aggregate base] to the
Owner, General Contractor and paver installation subcontractor.
e. Verify location, type, and elevations of edge restraints, [concrete collars

around] utility structures, and drainage inlets.
2. Do not proceed with installation of bedding and interlocking concrete pavers until
[subgrade soil and] base conditions are corrected by the General Contractor or
designated subcontractor.
SD-36 Rev. 04-2008

3.03 PREPARATION
A. Verify base certified by General Contractor as meeting material, installation and grade
specifications.
B. Verify that base is free from standing water, uniform, even, free of any organic material or
sediment, debris, ready to accept bedding materials, pavers and imposed loads.
C. Edge Restraint Preparation:
1. Install edge restraints per the drawings [at the indicated elevations].
3.04 INSTALLATION
Note: unless installed as a porous pavement detention, The minimum slope of the soil subgrade should
be 1%. Geotextile is typically placed on the compacted soil subgrade under the No. 67 open-
graded base. The geotextile is applied to the bottom and sides of the excavation and under the
sand leveling-course with overlapped joints of 0.6 m (24 in.). Overlaps should follow down slope
with drainage. All drainpipes, observation wells, overflow pipes, and impermeable liner (if
applicable) should be in place per the drawings either prior to or during placement of the base,
depending on their location. The No. 67 base is typically compacted in 4 to 6 in. thick lifts, using a
10-TON (minimum) static roller. A vibrator roller or plate may be used with the final passes with a
static roller. Care must be taken not to damage drainpipes during compaction and paving. There
should be at least 4 passes with no visible movement in the base material when compaction is
complete. No mud or sediment can be left on the base, bedding or leveling aggregates. If they
are contaminated, they must be removed and replaced with clean materials. The following
provides guidance on installation of the aggregate base COURSE if included in this section:
A. Open-graded aggregate base
1. Keep area where pavement is to be constructed free from sediment during entire job.
Geotextiles, base and bedding materials contaminated with sediment shall be
removed and replaced with clean materials.
2. Place geotextile on the bottom and sides of the excavated area with a minimum
downslope overlap of 0.6 m (24 in.)
3. Place and spread the [No. 67] crushed stone base without wrinkling or folding the
geotextile.
4. Do not damage drainpipes, overflow pipes, observation wells, or any inlets and other
drainage appurtenances during installation.
Rev. 04-2008 SD-37

5. Moisten, spread and compact [No. 67] in 4 to 6 in. lifts with a minimum 10 TON
vibratory roller.
6. For each lift, make at least two passes in the vibratory mode then at least two in the
static mode until there is no visible movement of the [No. 67] stone.
7. The elevation of the final surface of the [No. 67] base should not deviate more than.
(±13 mm) ± ½ in. over a 3 m (10 ft.) straightedge.
B. Bedding/levleing layer
a. Moisten, spread and compact the [ASTM C-33 sand] bedding material. Compact with a
minimum 10-ton static roller. Make at least [4] passes. No visible movement should
occur in the base material when compaction is complete.
b. The elevation of the compacted surface should not deviate more than ±13 mm (±½ in.)
over a 10 ft. straightedge.
c. Lay the pavers [paving slabs] in the pattern(s) and joint widths shown on the drawings.
Maintain straight pattern lines.
d. Fill gaps at the edges of the paved area with cut units. Cut pavers subject to tire traffic
shall be no smaller than 1/3 of a whole unit.
e. Cut pavers to be placed along the edges with a double-bladed splitter or masonry saw.
f. Fill holes in pavers with ASTM C-33 sand to the top.
g. Compact and seat the pavers into the bedding material using a low amplitude, 75-90
Hz plate compactor capable of at least 5,000 lbs. centrifugal compaction force. This will
require at least two or three passes with the compactor.
h. Do not compact within 6 ft of the unrestrained edges of the paving units.
i. Remove excess sand by sweeping pavers clean. Be sure that all of the void spaces
are filled to within 1/4 inch of the top of the pavers and compacted.
j. All pavers within 3 ft of the laying face must be left fully compacted at the completion of
each day.
k. The final surface elevations shall not deviate more than ±3/8 in. under a 10 ft long
straightedge.
l. The surface elevation of pavers shall be 1/8 to ¼ in. above adjacent drainage inlets,
concrete collars or channels.
SD-38 Rev. 04-2008

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. After sweeping the surface clean, check final elevations for conformance to the drawings.
B. Lippage: No greater than 1/8 in. difference in height between adjacent pavers.
Note: The minimum slope of the finished pavement surface should be 1% except when used as Porous
Pavement Detention, then it should be flat (i.e., 0%). Note: For installations on a compacted
aggregate base and soil subgrade, the top surface of the pavers may be 1/8 to 1/4 in. above the
final elevations after compaction. This helps compensate for possible minor settling normal to
pavements.
C. The surface elevation of pavers shall be 1/8 in. to 1/4 in. above adjacent drainage inlets,
concrete collars or channels.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. After work in this section is complete, the General Contractor shall be responsible for
protecting work from damage or contamination with sediment and eroded soils due to
subsequent construction activity on or in close proximity of the site.
Rev. 04-2008 SD-39

DRAINAGE CRITERIA MANUAL (V.3) MAINTENANCE RECOMMENDATIONS
MAINTENANCE RECOMMENDATIONS
CONTENTS
SECTION Page
MR-
1.0 GRASS BUFFER (GB) ............................................................................................................... 1
2.0 GRASS SWALES (GS) ............................................................................................................... 2
3.0 POROUS PAVEMENT (PP) ........................................................................................................ 3
3.1 Modular Block Pavement (MBP)..................................................................................... 3
3.2 Cobblestone Block Pavement (CBP) .............................................................................. 4
3.3 Reinforced Grass Pavement (RGP) ................................................................................ 5
3.4 Poured Porous Concrete Pavement (PCP)..................................................................... 6
3.5 Porous Gravel Pavement (PGP)..................................................................................... 7
4.0 POROUS PAVEMENT DETENTION (PPD) ................................................................................ 8
5.0 POROUS LANDSCAPE DETENTION (PLD)............................................................................... 9
6.0 EXTENDED DETENTION BASINS (EDB)................................................................................. 10
7.0 SAND FILTER EXTENDED DETENTION BASIN (SFB) ............................................................ 12
8.0 CONSTRUCTED WETLANDS BASIN (CWB) ........................................................................... 13
9.0 RETENTION POND (RP).......................................................................................................... 14
10.0 CONSTRUCTED WETLANDS CHANNEL (CWC)..................................................................... 16
TABLES
Table GB-1—Irrigated Grass Buffer Strip Maintenance Considerations.................................................... 1
Table GS-1—Grass-Lined Swale Maintenance Considerations................................................................ 2
Table PP-1—Modular Block Porous Pavement Maintenance Considerations ........................................... 3
Table PP-2—Cobblestone Block Porous Pavement Maintenance Considerations .................................... 4
Table PP-3—Reinforced Grass Pavement Maintenance Considerations .................................................. 5
Table PP-4—Poured Porous Concrete Pavement Maintenance Considerations....................................... 6
Table PP-5—Porous Gravel Pavement Maintenance Considerations ....................................................... 7
Table PPD-1—Porous Pavement Detention Maintenance Considerations................................................ 8
Table PLD-1—Porous Landscape Detention Maintenance Considerations............................................... 9
Table EDB-1—Extended Detention Basin Maintenance Considerations................................................. 10
Table SFB-1—Sand Filter Detention Basin Maintenance Considerations ............................................... 12
Table CWB-1—Constructed Wetlands Basin Maintenance Considerations ............................................ 13
Table RP-1—Retention Pond Basin Maintenance Considerations.......................................................... 14
Table CWC-1—Constructed Wetlands Channel Maintenance Considerations........................................ 16
2007-01 MR-i
Grass buffers require general maintenance of the turf grass cover and repair of any rill or gully
development. Table GB-1 presents a summary of specific maintenance requirements and a suggested
frequency of action.
Table GB-1—Irrigated Grass Buffer Strip Maintenance Considerations

Required Action Maintenance Objective Frequency of Action
Lawn mowing Maintain a dense grass cover at a recommended Routine – As needed or recommended
length of 2 to 4 inches. Collect and dispose of by inspection.
cuttings offsite or use a mulching mower.
Lawn care Use the minimum amount of biodegradable, Routine – As needed.
nontoxic fertilizers and herbicides needed to
maintain dense grass cover, free of weeds. Reseed
and patch damaged areas.
Irrigation Adjust the timing sequence and water cover to As needed.
maintain the required minimum soil moisture for
dense grass growth. Do not overwater.
Litter removal Remove litter and debris to prevent gully Routine – As needed by inspection.
development, enhance aesthetics, and prevent
floatables from being washed offsite.
Inspections Inspect irrigation, turf grass density, flow distribution, Annually and after each major storm
gully development, and traces of pedestrian or (that is, larger than 0.75 inches in
vehicular traffic and request repairs as needed. precipitation).
Turf replacement To lower the turf below the surface of the adjacent As needed when water padding
pavement, use a level flow spreader, so that sheet becomes too high or too frequent a
flow is not blocked and will not cause water to back problem. The need for turf replacement
up onto the upstream pavement. will be higher if the pavement is sanded
in winter to improve tire traction on ice.
Otherwise, expect replacement once
every 5 to 15 years.
2007-01 MR-1
MAINTENANCE RECOMMENDATIONS DRAINAGE CRITERIA MANUAL (V.3)
2.0 GRASS SWALES (GS)
Table GS-1 summarizes maintenance needs and related issues and shows the recommended frequency
of various maintenance activities.
Healthy grass can generally be maintained without using fertilizers because runoff from lawns and other
areas contains the needed nutrients. Occasionally inspecting the grass over the first few years will help to
determine if any problems are developing and to plan for long-term restorative maintenance needs.
Table GS-1—Grass-Lined Swale Maintenance Considerations

Maintain irrigated grass at 2 to 4 inches
Lawn mowing and Lawn tall and nonirrigated native grass at 6 to
Routine – As needed.
care 8 inches tall. Collect cuttings and dispose
of them offsite or use a mulching mower.
Keep the area clean for aesthetic reasons, Routine – As needed by inspection,
Debris and Litter removal which also reduces floatables being but no less than two times per year.
flushed downstream.
Remove accumulated sediment near Routine – As needed by inspection.
culverts and in channels to maintain flow Estimate the need to remove
Sediment removal capacity. Replace the grass areas sediment from 3 to 10 percent of total
damaged in the process. length per year, as determined by
annual inspection.
Grass reseeding and Maintain a healthy dense grass in channel Nonroutine – As needed by annual
mulching and side slope. inspection.
Inspections Check the grass for uniformity of cover, Routine – Annual inspection is
sediment accumulation in the swale, and suggested.
near culverts.
MR-2 2007-01
3.1 Modular Block Pavement (MBP)
Table PP-1—Modular Block Porous Pavement Maintenance Considerations

and Action
Debris and litter removal Accumulated material should be Routine – As needed.
removed as a source control
measure.
Sod maintenance If sandy loam turf is used, provide Routine – As dictated by inspection.
lawn care, irrigation system, and
inlay depth maintenance as needed.
Inspection Inspect representative areas of Routine and during a storm event to
surface filter sand or sandy loam turf ensure that water is not bypassing
for accumulation of sediment or poor these surfaces on frequent basis by
infiltration. not infiltrating into the pavement.
Rehabilitating sand infill surface To remove fine sediment from the Routine – Sweep the surface
top of the sand and restore it’s annually and, if need be, replace lost
infiltrating capacity. sand infill to bring its surface to be ¼
below the adjacent blocks.
Replacement of Surface Filter Layer Remove, dispose, and replace Nonroutine – When it becomes
surface filter media by pulling out turf evident that runoff does not rapidly
plugs or vacuuming out sand media infiltrate into the surface. May be as
from the blocks. Replace with fresh often as every two year or as little as
ASTM C-33 sand or sandy loam turf every 5 to 10 years.
plugs, as appropriate.
Replace modular block pavement Restore the pavement surface. Nonroutine – When it becomes
Remove and replace the modular evident that the modular blocks have
pavement blocks, the sand leveling deteriorated significantly. Expect
course under the blocks and the infill replacement every 10 to 15 years
media when the pavement Surface dependent on use and traffic.
shows significant deterioration.
2007-01 MR-3
3.2 Cobblestone Block Pavement (CBP)
Table PP-2—Cobblestone Block Porous Pavement Maintenance Considerations

and Action
measure.
Inspection Inspect representative areas of Routine and during a storm
surface filter fine gravel infill for events to ensure that stormwater
accumulation of sediment and is infiltrating and not bypassing
poor infiltration. the pavement surface on
frequent basis.
Rehabilitating fine grave infill To remove fine sediment and Routine – Vacuum sweep the as
surface trash accumulations from the top indicated by inspection and if
of the gravel and restore its need be replace lost or clogged
infiltrating capacity. gravel infill to bring its surface to
be ¼ below the adjacent blocks.
Replace cobble block pavement Restore the pavement surface. Nonroutine – When it becomes
Remove and replace the cobble evident that the modular blocks
pavement blocks, the leveling have deteriorated significantly
course under the blocks, the infill and the underlying gravels have
media, gravel base and accumulated much sediment
geotextile materials when the and/or when the geotextile
pavement surface shows fabrics underneath it are clogged.
significant deterioration or when Expect replacement every 10 to
the pavement no longer infiltrates 25 years dependent on use and
stormwater at rates that are traffic.
acceptable.
MR-4 2007-01
3.3 Reinforced Grass Pavement (RGP)
Table PP-3—Reinforced Grass Pavement Maintenance Considerations

and Action
measure.
Inspection Inspect all surface areas for Routine and during a storm
healthy grass growth, areas of events to ensure that water is
dead grass, tire rutting, surface infiltrating and not bypassing the
erosion, accumulation of pavement’s surface on frequent
sediment and slow infiltration. basis.
Repair sod surface To repair worn out or damaged Routine – As needed. Repairs
sod with sod grown in very sandy may be needed as often as every
loam type soils. year.
Repair and replacement of sod Major repair of damaged and Nonroutine – When it becomes
aged sod. Remove and replace, evident that many parts of the
as needed the sod layer to sod has deteriorated or when
maintain a healthy vegetative runoff does not rapidly infiltrate
cover or when sod layer builds into the surface. Major
up significant amount of silt (i.e., replacement of sod may be as
>1.5 inches) above the originally little as every 10 to 25 years.
installed surface layer.
2007-01 MR-5
3.4 Poured Porous Concrete Pavement (PCP)
Table PP-4—Poured Porous Concrete Pavement Maintenance Considerations

and Action
measure.
Inspection Inspect all areas of pavement for Routine and during a storm
accumulation of sediment, events to ensure that water is
pavement deterioration, infiltrating and not bypassing the
unraveling and poor infiltration. pavement surface on frequent
basis. Unraveling pavement may
need structural repairs or
patching.
Vacuuming and high pressure Vacuum using high-energy street Routine – Every year, but may be
wash of pavement vacuuming equipment to remove extended to every two to three
accumulating sediment from years if routine inspections show
pavement pores then follow-up the infiltration rates continue to
with high-pressure wash to scour be high. Very important to
out the accumulated fines in the maintain surface infiltration and
pores of the pavement. good flow through of water
through the full section of the
concrete slab to extend it life
during freeze-thaw cycles in
colder climates.
Replacement of Concrete Remove, dispose, and replace Nonroutine – When it becomes
Pavement, Geotextile Fabric, porous concrete slab when it evident that runoff does not
Sand Layer and Base Course shows excessive deterioration rapidly infiltrate into the surface
and when it no longer infiltrates or into the underdrains
stormwater quickly. Inspect the underneath or into the soils if
full section of the pavement when underdrains are not present.
the concrete layer is removed for May be as often as every 10 to
accumulation of sediments in the year or as little as every 20 to
base course and on top of the 30 years.
sand filter layer or sub-base.
Remove and dispose
accumulated sediments and
replace base course, sand filter
layer and geotextile fabrics.
MR-6 2007-01
3.5 Porous Gravel Pavement (PGP)
Table PP-5—Porous Gravel Pavement Maintenance Considerations

and Action
measure.
Inspection Inspect all areas of surface for Routine and during storm events
accumulation of sediment and to ensure that water is infiltrating
debris and slow infiltration. and not bypassing the pavement
surface on frequent basis.
Replace contaminated surface When inspection show Mostly Routine – May need this
gravels accumulations of sediment and action as often as every year of
debris on top of gravel or top as infrequently as every 5 years.
layers of gravel appear to be
sealing and slow infiltration is
occulting remove the top few
inches of gravel and replace with
clean ASSHTO #4 gravel.
Replacement of surface gravel Remove, dispose, and replace Nonroutine – When it becomes
layer, sand filter layer, geotextile entire gravel layer when it has evident that runoff does not
fabric and base course deteriorated or its voids have rapidly infiltrate into the surface,
filled in with sediment and or drains through the underdrains
removal of top few inches of or into the soils if no underdrains
gravel does not restore rapid are present. May be as often as
infiltration of stormwater. At that every 10 year or as little as every
time also inspect the full section 20 to 30 years.
of the pavement for accumulation
of sediments on top of the sand
filter layer or on the sub-base.
Remove and dispose
accumulated sediments and
replace base course, sand filter
layer and geotextile fabrics.
2007-01 MR-7
Table PPD-1—Porous Pavement Detention Maintenance Considerations

Debris and litter removal Accumulated material should be Nonroutine – As needed.
measure.
Inspection Inspect representative areas of Routine and during a storm event
surface filter sand accumulation to ensure that water is not
of fine sediment. bypassing these surfaces or
taking too long to drain out.
Replacement of surface filter Using a power vacuum remove Nonroutine – When it becomes
layer all sand media within the annular evident that runoff does not
spaces of the concrete blocks. rapidly infiltrate into the surface,
Replace with fresh ASTM C-33 namely, the ponded water does
sand, vibrate into place and not drain within one hour. May be
remove excess. as often as once a year or as
little as once every 5 to 10 years.
MR-8 2007-01
5.0 POROUS LANDSCAPE DETENTION (PLD)
Table PLD-1—Porous Landscape Detention Maintenance Considerations

Required Action Maintenance Objectives Frequency
Lawn mowing and vegetative Occasional mowing of grasses Routine – Depending on
care and weed removal to limit aesthetic requirements.
unwanted vegetation. Maintain
irrigated turf grass as 2 to
4 inches tall and nonirrigated
native turf grasses at 4 to
6 inches.
Inspections Inspect detention area to Routine – Annual inspection of
determine if the sandy growth hydraulic performance.
media is allowing acceptable
infiltration.
Debris and litter removal Remove debris and litter from Routine – Depending on
detention area to minimize aesthetic requirements.
clogging of the sand media.
Landscaping removal and The sandy loam turf and Every 5 to 15 years, depending
replacement landscaping layer will clog with on infiltration rates needed to
time as materials accumulate on drain the WQCV in 24-hours or
it. This layer will need to be less. May need to do it more
removed and replaced to frequently if exfiltration rates are
rehabilitate infiltration rates, too low to achieve this goal.
along with all turf and other
vegetation growing on the
surface,.
2007-01 MR-9
6.0 EXTENDED DETENTION BASINS (EDB)
Extended detention basins have low to moderate maintenance requirements. Routine and nonroutine
maintenance is necessary to assure performance, enhance aesthetics, and protect structural integrity.
The dry basins can result in nuisance complaints if not properly designed or maintained. Bio-degradable
pesticides may be required to limit insect problems. Frequent debris removal and grass-mowing can
reduce aesthetic complaints. If a shallow wetland or marshy area is included, mosquito breeding and
nuisance odors could occur if the water becomes stagnant. Access to critical elements of the pond (inlet,
outlet, spillway, and sediment collection areas) must be provided. The basic elements of the maintenance
requirements are presented in Table EDB-1.
Table EDB-1—Extended Detention Basin Maintenance Considerations

Lawn mowing and lawn Occasional mowing to limit unwanted Routine – Depending on aesthetic
care vegetation. Maintain irrigated turf requirements.
grass as 2 to 4 inches tall and
nonirrigated native turf grasses at 4 to
6 inches.
Debris and litter removal Remove debris and litter from the Routine – Including just before
entire pond to minimize outlet annual storm seasons (that is,
clogging and improve aesthetics. April and May) and following
significant rainfall events.
Sediment removal from Remove accumulated sediment from Routine – The sediment
forebay and micro-pool the forebay and micro-pool. accumulations forebay and the
Dewatering of the micro-pool by micro-pool will need to be cleaned
pumping onto the EDB’s bottom out every one to three years.
grasses and temporary diversion of all Cleaning of micro-pool is
base flows will be needed to remove important for mosquito control.
the accumulated sediment from
micro-pool’s bottom.
MR-10 2007-01

Nuisance control Address odor, insects, and Nonroutine – Handle as
overgrowth issues associated with necessary per inspection or local
stagnant or standing water in the complaints.
bottom zone.
Erosion and sediment Repair and revegetate eroded areas Nonroutine – Periodic and repair
control in the basin and channels. as necessary based on
inspection.
Structural Repair pond inlets, outlets, forebays, Nonroutine – Repair as needed
low flow channel liners, and energy based on regular inspections.
dissipators whenever damage is
discovered.
Inspections Inspect basins to insure that the basin Routine – Annual inspection of
continues to function as initially hydraulic and structural facilities.
intended. Examine the outlet for Also check for obvious problems
clogging, erosion, slumping, during routine maintenance visits,
excessive sedimentation levels, especially for plugging of outlets.
overgrowth, embankment and
spillway integrity, and damage to any
structural element.
Sediment removal Remove accumulated sediment from Nonroutine – Performed when
the bottom of the basin. sediment accumulation occupies
20 percent of the WQCV. This
may vary considerably, but expect
to do this every 15 to 25 years, as
necessary per inspection if no
construction activities take place
in the tributary watershed. More
often if they do.
2007-01 MR-11
Table SFB-1—Sand Filter Detention Basin Maintenance Considerations

Required Action Maintenance Objectives Frequency
Debris and litter removal Remove debris and litter from Routine – Depending on
detention area to minimize aesthetic requirements.
clogging of the sand media.
Inspections Inspect detention area to Routine – Every one to two years
determine if the sand media is inspect for hydraulic
allowing acceptable infiltration. performance. If possible,
Also inspect the underdrain outlet schedule these inspections within
if one is present, including the 24 hours after a significant
orifice plate to make sure it is rainfall.
there and in operating condition.
Scarify filter surface Scarify top 3 inches by raking the Once per year or when needed
filter’s surface. to promote drainage.
Sand filter removal Remove the top 3 inches of sand If no construction activities take
from the sand filter. After a place in the tributary watershed,
second removal, backfill with 6 every 2 to 5 years depending on
inches of new sand to return the observed drain times, namely
sand depth to 18 inches. when it takes more than 40 hours
Minimum sand depth is to empty 3-foot deep pool.
15 inches. Otherwise more often.
MR-12 2007-01
8.0 CONSTRUCTED WETLANDS BASIN (CWB)
To achieve and maintain a healthy wetland for water quality enhancement, the proper depth and the
spatial distribution of growth zones must be maintained. Table CWB-1 summarizes suggested activities
and their frequencies to maintain an operational wetland.
Table CWB-1—Constructed Wetlands Basin Maintenance Considerations

Lawn mowing and lawn Mow occasionally to limit unwanted Routine – Depending on aesthetic
care vegetation. Maintain irrigated turf grass requirements.
at 2 to 4 inches tall and nonirrigated
native turf grasses at 4 to 6 inches.
Debris and litter removal Remove debris and litter from entire Routine – Including just before
pond to minimize outlet clogging and annual storm seasons (that is, in
aesthetics. Include removal of floatable April and May) and following
material from the pond's surface. significant rainfall events.
Sediment removal Remove accumulated sediment and Nonroutine – Every 10 to 20 years
muck along with much of the wetland as needed by inspection if no
growth. Re-establish growth zone construction activities take place in
depths and spatial distribution. the tributary watershed. More often if
Revegetate with original wetland they do. Expect to clean out forebay
species. every 1 to 5 years.
Aquatic plant harvesting Cut and remove plants growing in Nonroutine until further evidence
wetland (such as cattails and reeds) to indicates such action would provide
remove nutrients permanently with significant nutrient removal. In the
manual work or specialized machinery. meantime, perform this task once
every 5 years or less frequently as
needed to clean the wetland zone
out.
Inspections Observe inlet and outlet works for Routine – At least once a year,
operability. Verify the structural integrity preferably once during one rainfall
of all structural elements, slopes, and event resulting in runoff.
embankments.
2007-01 MR-13
9.0 RETENTION POND (RP)
The amount of construction activity within a basin, the erosion control measures implemented, and the
size of the basin will influence the frequency of sediment removal from the pond. With aggressive erosion
control is practiced in the tributary watershed, it is estimated that accumulated sediment will need to be
removed at 5- to 20-year intervals. Table RP-1 summarizes the required maintenance activities and their
frequency for retention ponds.
Table RP-1—Retention Pond Basin Maintenance Considerations

care vegetation. Maintain irrigated turf grass 2 to requirements.
4 inches tall and non-irrigated native turf
grasses at 4 to 6 inches.
Debris and litter removal Remove debris and litter from the entire pond Routine – Including just before
to minimize outlet clogging and aesthetics. annual storm seasons (that is,
Include the removal of floatable material from April and May) and following
the pond's surface. significant rainfall events.
Erosion and sediment Regrade and revegetate eroded and slumped Nonroutine – Periodic and repair
control areas above the pond and along channels. as necessary based on
Repair damaged inlet and outlet energy inspection.
dissipators.
Inspections Inspect the retention pond for functioning as Routine – Annual inspection of
initially intended. Pay attention to outlet hydraulic and structural facilities.
clogging. Also note erosion, slumping, Biannual performance and
sedimentation levels, overgrowth, maintenance inspections.
embankment and spillway integrity, and
damage to structural elements of the facility.
Nuisance control Address odor issues, insects, and overgrowth Nonroutine – As necessary per
with appropriate measures. inspection or local complaints.
MR-14 2007-01

Structural repairs Repair such items as inlet/outlet works and Nonroutine – As necessary per
energy dissipator liners. Stabilize banks and inspection.
berms. Repair damage caused by larger
storm events.
Sediment removal Empty the pond, divert the base flow, and dry Nonroutine – As indicated per
out bottom sediments in fall and winter inspections and sediment
months to allow access with backhoe. accumulation. Expect to do this
Remove accumulated sediment along with every 10 to 20 years if no
aquatic growth overlaying them. Re-establish construction activities take place
original design grades and volumes and in the tributary watershed. More
replant aquatic vegetation. often if they do. Expect to clean
out the forebay every 1 to 5
years.
Aquatic growth Remove aquatic plants such as cattails or Nonroutine – Perform every 5 to
harvesting reeds, which also permanently removes 15 years or as needed to control
nutrients. Use an aquatic harvester and their accumulation.
dispose of the material offsite.
2007-01 MR-15
10.0 CONSTRUCTED WETLANDS CHANNEL (CWC)
To achieve and maintain a healthy wetland for water quality enhancement, the proper depth and the
spatial distribution of growth zones must be maintained. Table CWC-1 summarizes suggested activities
and their frequencies to maintain an operational wetland.
Table CWC-1—Constructed Wetlands Channel Maintenance Considerations

care vegetation. Maintain irrigated turf grass requirements.
at 2 to 4 inches tall and nonirrigated
native turf grasses at 4 to 6 inches.
Debris and litter removal Remove debris and litter from the Routine – Including just before annual
channel. storm seasons (that is, in April and
May) and following significant rainfall
events.
Sediment removal Remove accumulated sediment and Nonroutine – Every 10 to 20 years as
muck along with wetland vegetation needed by inspection if no
growing on top of it. Re-establish construction activities take place in
growth zone depths and revegetate the tributary watershed. More often if
with original wetland species. they do.
Aquatic plant harvesting Cut and remove plants growing in Nonroutine until further evidence
wetland (such as cattails and reeds) to indicates such action would provide
remove nutrients permanently with significant nutrient removal. In the
manual work or specialized machinery. meantime, perform this task once
every 5 years or less frequently as
needed to clean the wetland zone out.
Inspections Observe inlet and outlet works for Routine – At least once a year,
operability. Verify the structural preferably once during one rainfall
integrity of all structural elements, event resulting in runoff.
slopes, and embankments.
MR-16 2007-01
DRAINAGE CRITERIA MANUAL (V. 3) INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL BMPS
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL

BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES
CONTENTS
Section Page
IC-
1.0 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................. 1
1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................. 1
1.2 Applicability......................................................................................................................... 1
2.0 PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS..................................................................................................... 2
3.0 POLLUTANT SOURCES................................................................................................................. 5
3.1 Topography......................................................................................................................... 5
3.2 Activities That Pose a Potential Stormwater Impact........................................................... 5
3.2.1 Fueling Areas......................................................................................................... 5
3.2.2 Vehicle and Equipment Maintenance and Storage ............................................... 5
3.2.3 Painting .................................................................................................................. 6
3.2.4 Washing................................................................................................................. 6
3.2.5 Loading and Unloading.......................................................................................... 7
3.2.6 Above Ground Tanks—Liquid Storage.................................................................. 7
3.2.7 Outside Manufacturing .......................................................................................... 7
3.2.8 Waste Management .............................................................................................. 8
3.2.9 Outside Storage of Materials ................................................................................. 8
3.2.10 Salt Storage ........................................................................................................... 9
3.2.11 Parking................................................................................................................... 9
3.2.12 Bare Soil ................................................................................................................ 9
3.2.13 Landscaping Practices ........................................................................................ 10
4.0 ASSESSMENT AND SELECTION OF BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES............................... 11
4.1 Screening Best Management Practices ........................................................................... 11
4.1.1 Non-Structural BMPs ........................................................................................... 11
5.0 STRUCTURAL CONTROLS ......................................................................................................... 13
6.0 NONSTRUCTURAL CONTROLS ................................................................................................. 14
Tables
Table IC-1—Suggested Structural Controls ............................................................................................... 13
Table IC-2—Summary of Nonstructural BMPs........................................................................................... 14
9-1-99 IC-i
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Overview
This chapter contains guidance for incorporation of BMPs for controlling stormwater discharges at
industrial and commercial facilities. The guidance addresses:
• Planning Considerations for establishment of BMPs for new and existing facilities.
• An evaluation of the possible pollutant sources that are found at industrial and commercial sites.
• Recommendations on structural and nonstructural controls for stormwater discharges from these
facilities.
1.2 Applicability
The BMPs described in this section are applicable to many different circumstances that occur at industrial
and commercial locations. While this section is directed toward application to smaller industries and any
size commercial facility, many of the practices are applicable to any size of facility. It is anticipated that
the majority of industries that may develop BMPs will be manufacturers of different products.
Commercial sites which may find this information of value are those that store materials outside, use or
store large quantities of hazardous or toxic chemicals as part of their business or perform activities that
could result in discharges into the storm sewer such as vehicle maintenance and painting.
The requirement to develop and implement best management plans is usually a result of the regulatory
requirement that industries obtain NPDES stormwater permits. In some cases, specific local
governments may require implementation of BMPs to address water quality. Some local governments
may wish to receive copies of stormwater management plans developed by industries. It is
recommended that local governments be contacted for additional requirements.
9-1-99 IC-1
INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL BMPS DRAINAGE CRITERIA MANUAL (V. 3)
2.0 PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS
There are many different measures that can be taken to minimize the impact on water quality from
commercial and industrial facilities. These measures are called best management practices (BMPs).
They are usually divided into structural practices, which involve the construction of a system to remove
contaminants to nonstructural. The latter includes those measures which are aimed at controlling the
“human factor.” They are procedural in nature.
Incorporation of structural BMPs is most easily done prior to construction of the facility when site layout is
still under design. Many practices, such as providing coverage and containment around potential
pollutant sources can be incorporated during the design of buildings or layout of the site. At the planning
stage, it is possible to incorporate the different elements that can address both stormwater and other
regulatory concerns with out the need for later plant modifications.
For existing facilities, it is necessary for the owner/operator to evaluate the current activities that take
place on site. Based on this evaluation, it may be necessary to retrofit existing structures as part of the
incorporation of best management practices. Other concerns regarding existing facilities include that
there may be significant limitations in trying to find room for structural BMPs that require large amounts of
land (for example, detention basins). Structural BMPs that do not require significant amounts of land
such as infiltration basins are more likely to be incorporated into existing facilities. Nonstructural BMPs
have no problems being implemented into existing facilities and developed areas.
The first step in planning for the inclusion of best management practices at new or existing sites is to
evaluate what activities take place at the site and the possible pollutant sources may be at the site. Once
the sources are identified, best management practices that address them can be determined. The
assessment and evaluation process is:
1) Assess the activities on the site that could be potential sources of storm water pollution from the
facility because of the material that is used in the process or because of the byproducts/products
of the process. Activities to assess include the storage of materials or equipment, waste disposal
practices, formation of products from raw materials, coating of materials, generation of power,
etc.
2) Based on the assessment of activities, conduct a material inventory to determine what materials
are kept on the site that could cause a problem if they were discharged from the site. It is
important also to evaluate the quantities of these materials. Some materials may be of concern
only if stored or used in significant quantities.
IC-2 9-1-99
3) For existing facilities, evaluate past spills and leaks to determine if there are any materials or
activities that create chronic stormwater runoff pollution problems. Inadequate clean up of spills
can result in contamination.
4) Evaluate the data gathered and determine where potential pollutant sources or potentially
polluting activities (i.e., fueling) are located. This could be done by the creation of a map. Based
on the results, a determination on what structural or nonstructural measures are required can be
made. Potential sources can be addressed singularly or in combination.
5) For existing sites, once the sources have been determined, a review of the site and current
practices should occur to determine if present practices/measures are adequate to protect water
quality.
6) Evaluate existing conditions at the site. A determination should be made of storm water drainage
patterns.
7) Determine the BMPs that are best for your site. It is important that each source be addressed by
a BMP or a group of BMPs. Where possible, a single BMP can be used to address multiple
sources. Factors which should be evaluated in choosing BMPs are:
• Pollutants Controlled: BMPs which address sediment may not control oils.
• Effectiveness of BMPs: Each control measure should provide a sufficient pollutant

control to warrant its inclusion.
• Reliability/Sustainability: Measures should be effective over an extended time and be

able to be properly implemented over time.
• Implementation Cost: Control measures with low planning, design, and land acquisition,
construction, and equipment costs should be chosen.
• Maintenance Costs: Control measures with low operation, maintenance, repair, support
service, and replacement costs should be preferred.
• Public Acceptability: BMPs should be assessed on the expected response from the
public.
• Agency Acceptability: BMPs should be evaluated on the expected response of agencies

which will oversee the measures taken and their relationship to regulatory requirements.
• Risk Liability: Control measures should be evaluated in terms of the risks or liabilities
which occur during implementation.
9-1-99 IC-3
1) Once the BMPs are implemented it will be necessary to ensure that structural BMPs are properly
operated and maintained and that employees are carrying out nonstructural type BMPs. This
may involve making checks on BMPs, designation of responsible individuals for BMPs and
education of employees in your pollution prevention efforts.
2) It is important following implementation of BMPs that they be re-evaluated. Changes in the

business may result in the ability to discontinue certain BMPs and implementation others.
IC-4 9-1-99
3.0 POLLUTANT SOURCES
To develop a useful evaluation of the potential risk of stormwater pollutant sources it is necessary to
review the use of the site, pollutant sources, the topography of the site, the locations of activities and
material storage and to understand where spills are likely to occur.
3.1 Topography
As discussed above, a review of the site drainage patterns should be made to determine where runoff
from potential sources of pollutants drains. This is important for several reasons. Drainage patterns are
useful in determining where structural controls can be established, where different run-on sources
commingle, and it may also show where it is possible to grade a site to prevent run-on from offsite
drainage areas that have a high potential for polluting stormwater.
3.2 Activities That Pose a Potential Stormwater Impact
The following activities have the potential to cause an impact on stormwater runoff quality from an
industrial or commercial sites:
3.2.1 Fueling Areas

When stormwater mixes with fuel spilled or leaked onto the ground, it becomes polluted by petroleum
based materials that are harmful to humans, fish, and wildlife. Fuel overflows during storage tank filling
can be a major source of contamination. This could occur at large industrial sites or at small commercial
sites such as gas stations, convenience stores, strip malls or garages. Sources of contaminates typically
are:
• Spills and leaks during fueling or oil delivery,
• Spills caused by “topping off” fuel tanks,
• Allowing rainfall to run onto the fuel area,
• Hosing or washing down of the fuel area, or
• Mobile fueling operations.
3.2.2 Vehicle and Equipment Maintenance and Storage

Vehicle and equipment maintenance operations use materials and create wastes that can be harmful to
humans and the environment if not property handled. Stormwater runoff from these areas can become
polluted with a variety of contaminates including solvents and degreasing products, waste automotive
fluids, oils and greases, acids and caustic wastes. Sources of contaminates typically are:
• Parts cleaning,
9-1-99 IC-5
• Shop cleanup,
• Spilled fuel, oil, or other materials such as battery acid,
• Replacement of fluids, such as oil, oil filters, hydraulic fluids, transmission fluid and radiator fluids,
• Dripping fluids from vehicles and equipment, and
• Disposal of greasy rags, oil filters, air filters, batteries, battery fluids, spent coolant, degreasers,
oils, etc.
3.2.3 Painting
Many painting operations use materials or create wastes that are harmful to humans and the
environment. Paint solvents used to remove or thin paint and dusts from sanding and grinding operations
contain toxic metals like cadmium and mercury. These can pollute stormwater and create significant
water quality impacts. Sources of contamination typically are:
• Painting and chemical paint removal,
• Sanding or paint stripping
• Spills of paint or paint thinner,
• Sand blasting residue, or
• Equipment painting.
3.2.4 Washing
Washing vehicles and equipment outdoors or in areas where wash water flows onto the ground can
pollute stormwater. Vehicle wash water is considered process water not stormwater. Operators must
have a NPDES/CDPS permit to discharge vehicle wash water. Wash waters can contain high
concentrations of oil and grease, solvents, phosphates, and high-suspended solids loads. Sources of
washing contamination typically include:
• Outside equipment or vehicle cleaning (washing, degreasing, or steam cleaning),
• Wash water discharge to the ground or directly to storm drain,
• Mobile fleet washing, or
• Pressure washing of buildings.
Other types of washing include spraying down concrete and asphalt surfaces such as those outside of
commercial sites where sales of products may have occurred, areas where dirt and mud have
IC-6 9-1-99
accumulated, loading dock areas, or parking and sidewalk areas that have accumulated wastes. These
activities must have an NPDES or ICDPS permit. In some cases, these types of discharges are
incorporated into the municipality stormwater permit. These areas also need to be taken into
consideration with the possibility of potentially polluting stormwater.
3.2.5 Loading and Unloading

Loading and unloading operations usually take place outside on docks, truck, terminals or outside
storage or staging areas at both industrial and commercial sites. Materials spilled, leaked or lost during
loading and unloading may collect in the soil or other surfaces and be carried away by runoff, or when the
area is cleaned. Rainfall may wash pollutants off machinery used to unload and load materials. Typically
sources of contamination include:
• Pumping of liquids or gases to or from a truck or rail car into a storage facility,
• Pneumatic transfer of dry chemicals to or from the vehicles,
• Transfer by mechanical conveyor systems, or
• Transfer of bags, boxes, drums, or other containers by forklift, trucks, or other material handling
equipment.
3.2.6 Above Ground Tanks—Liquid Storage

Accidental releases of chemicals from above ground liquid storage tanks can contaminate storm water
with many different pollutants. Materials spilled, leaked, or lost from storage tanks may accumulate in
soils or on other surfaces and be carried away by runoff. Typical causes of contamination from
accidental releases include:
• External corrosion and structural failure,
• Installation problems,
• Spills and overfills due to operator error,
• Failure of piping systems including pipes, pumps, flanges, couplings, hoses, and valves, or
• Leaks or spills during pumping of liquids or gases from trucks or rail cars to a storage facility or
vice versa.
3.2.7 Outside Manufacturing

Outside manufacturing activities can also contaminate stormwater runoff. Activities such as parts
assembly, rock grinding or crushing, metals painting or coating, grinding or sanding, degreasing, parts
cleaning or operations that use hazardous materials are of concern. Metal and wood shavings, excess
lubricants, and other residuals resulting from outside manufacturing that are left on the ground can also
9-1-99 IC-7
be washed into the drainage system. Typical contaminate sources include:
• Processes or equipment that generate dust, vapors or other emissions,
• Outside storage of hazardous materials and raw materials,
• Dripping or leaking fluids from equipment or processes,
• Liquid wastes discharged directly onto the ground or into the storm sewer, or
• Concrete manufacturing (pipes, inlets, etc.).
3.2.8 Waste Management

Areas where industrial or chemical waste is stored, treated or disposed of can cause stormwater
pollution. Wastes spilled, leached, or lost from management areas or outside manufacturing activities
may build-up in soils or on other surfaces and be carried away by rainfall runoff. There is also the
potential for liquid wastes from lagoons or surface impoundments to overflow to surface waters or soak
the soil where they can be picked up by runoff. Possible stormwater contaminants include toxic
compounds, oil and grease, oxygen-demanding organics, paints and solvents, heavy metals and high
levels of suspended solids.
In addition to the management of wastes from industrial facilities, the management of solid wastes at
commercial sites is also of concern. Improper disposal of liquid wastes in a solid waste dumpster can
result in the liquids draining out of the container and into the stormwater system. Lack of coverage of
waste receptacles can result in rainwater seeping through the material and collecting contaminants or the
material being blow around the site and into the stormwater collection system.
Typical contaminate sources include:
• Landfills,
• Waste Piles,
• Wastewater and solid waste treatment and disposal,
• Land application sites,
• Dumpsters, or
• Unlabeled 55-gallon drums.
3.2.9 Outside Storage of Materials

Raw materials, by-products, finished products, containers, and materials storage areas exposed to rain
and/or runoff can pollute storm water. Stormwater can become contaminated by a wide range of
IC-8 9-1-99
contaminates (e.g. metals, oils and grease, sediment) when solid materials wash off or dissolve into
water, or by spills or leaks. Typical contaminate sources include:
• Fuels,
• Raw materials,
• By-products,
• Intermediates,
• Final products,
• Process residuals, or
• Wind-blown debris.
3.2.10 Salt Storage

Salt left exposed to rain or snow may migrate to the stormsewer or contaminate soils. Salt spilled or
blown onto the ground during loading or unloading will dissolve in stormwater runoff. Stormwater
contaminated with salt in high concentrations can be harmful to vegetation and aquatic life. Salty
stormwater runoff soaking into the ground may contaminate ground water, thus making the groundwater
unsuitable as a drinking water supply. Typical contaminate sources include:
• Salt stored outside in piles or bags that are exposed to rain or snow,
• Salt loading and unloading areas located outside or in areas where spilled salt can contaminate
stormwater, or
• Salt/sand storage piles used for deicing operations.
3.2.11 Parking
Areas where customers park can also be a source of contamination. Typical sources of contamination
can include:
• Improper disposal of trash
• Leaky vehicles can result in oils and other contaminants being deposited in the parking lot and
then washed to the stream during a storm event.
3.2.12 Bare Soil

Bare soil areas occur at industrial and commercial sites where no pavement has been laid or adjacent to
areas where pavement has been laid. They occur most often in areas that are under development. Bare
soil areas can be caused by individuals that repeatedly park on these areas, use the areas as exits or a
9-1-99 IC-9
different route to another area, or even from repeated pedestrian walking. The sediment in the area that
will be contaminated by the activities that occur on the area, therefore, the following can be practiced to
remedy the problems. Typical sources of contamination include:
• Sediment from stormwater runoff, or
• Improper disposal of trash.
3.2.13 Landscaping Practices

Chemicals used to maintain landscaping areas can have a significant impact on the water quality of
stormwater runoff. Herbicides, pesticides, and fertilizers can be washed into create impacts if they are
not applied correctly. Contaminant sources include:
• Improper storage of chemicals,
• Improper storage cleaning equipment used to apply these chemicals, or
• Improper application.
IC-10 9-1-99
4.0 ASSESSMENT AND SELECTION OF BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES
Once information has been gathered on the sources of potential pollutants, it is necessary to determine
the suitable BMPs to be used. To do this, it is necessary to first screen the BMPs, then rank them.
4.1 Screening Best Management Practices
Once the potential sources have been identified, one of the next steps is to determine what BMPs would
be appropriate for the types of pollutants. A list of the various structural and non-structural BMPs that are
effective for addressing the pollutants should be developed. As part of this process, obviously
inappropriate practices are eliminated. Criteria to be used includes primary pollutants removed, drainage
area served, soil conditions, land requirements, and institutional structure. It is important to understand
BMP effectiveness.
4.1.1 Non-Structural BMPs

Since the number of possible BMPs is large, initial screening will reduce the number of prior to final
screening. Practices can be divided into subpractices. For example, a solid waste practice could be
divided into management of leaves, litter, and yard waste.
To screen BMPs, one could develop a matrix. For example, one axis would list the BMPs while the other,
the criteria. The BMP would be rated on a range of 1 to 5 for each criteria. Criteria which may be
appropriate for non-structural BMPs include:
• Pollutant Removal: Different source control practices are designed to address different
pollutants. BMPs which address the pollutants of primary concern should receive the highest
ranking.
• Existing Business Structure: Some practices implemented require a specific structure to work
effectively. For example, delaying on inspections may not be practical if there are insufficient
resources or knowledge to perform the inspection.
• Acceptance: Employees need to understand and accept the requirements to modify their
behavior. Practices which meet with resistance will not be implemented and should be
eliminated.
• Authority: Employees implementing the practices need the authority to require that certain
actions occur, and to take appropriate follow-up when problems occur. Practices which require
levels of authority to be implemented which do not exist should be eliminate.
• Technical Feasibility: BMPs which require large expenditures or extensive efforts might not be
suitable for small industries which lack resources.
9-1-99 IC-11
• Pollutants Controlled: BMPs which address sediment may not control oils.
• Effectiveness of BMPs: Each control measure should provide a sufficient pollutant control to
warrant its inclusion.
• Reliability/Sustainability: Measures should be effective over an extended time and be able to be

properly implemented over time.
• Implementation Cost: Control measures with low planning, design, and land acquisition,
construction, and equipment costs should be chosen.
• Maintenance Costs: Control measures with low operation, maintenance, repair, support service,
and replacement costs should be preferred.
• Public Acceptability: BMP should be assessed on the expected response from the public.
• Agency Acceptability: BMPs should be evaluated on the expected response of agencies which
will oversee the measures taken and their relationship to regulatory requirements.
• Risk Liability: Control measures should be evaluated in terms of the risks or liabilities which
occur during implementation.
Based on the results of this screening, a list of potential BMPs would be determined.
An additional review would be done of those BMPs which were found to be the most desirable. An option
for selection of the BMPs is to divide them into source controls, hydraulic controls, and treatment options.
The development of alternatives which mix the various BMPs would be the next step. These alternatives
could be ranked based on cost and implementability. The best alternative would then be implemented.
IC-12 9-1-99
5.0 STRUCTURAL CONTROLS
Table IC-1 provides a listing of structural controls that could be applied to the various sources to address
stormwater runoff from industrial and commercial sites. A detailed description of the control can be found
in the chapter on STRUCTURAL BMPs.
Table IC-1—Suggested Structural Controls

Control Sources Applicability
Grass Buffer Parking Areas Applicable to Industrial and
Commercial Operations
Grass Swale Parking Areas Applicable to Industrial and
Modular Block Parsons Parking Areas Applicable to Industrial and
Pavement Commercial Operations
Pavement Micro-Detention Parking Areas Applicable to Industrial and
Landscape Micro-Detention Parking Areas Applicable to Industrial and
Extended Detention Basin Parking Areas Applicable to Industrial and
Constructed Wetlands Parking Areas Applicable to Industrial and
Retention Pond All Sources Associated with Industrial or
commercial operations with storage of
large quantities of toxic pollutants.
Constructed Wetlands Parking Areas Applicable to Industrial and
Channel Commercial operations
Spill Containment and Liquid Storage, Washing, Applicability to all Industrial and
Control (Containment Manufacture, Outside Storage, Commercial operations
Diking, Curbing, Installation Waste Management, Fueling
of spill and overflow Areas, Loading and Unloading
protection)
Covering of Storage/ Fueling Areas, Loading and Applicability to all Industrial and
Handling Facilities Unloading, Liquid Storage, Commercial operations
Material Storage, Outside
Manufacturing, Waste
Management
9-1-99 IC-13
6.0 NONSTRUCTURAL CONTROLS
Table IC-2 provides a listing of nonstructural controls that could be applied to potential pollutant sources
to address stormwater runoff from industrial and commercial sites. A detailed description of the control
can be found in the chapter on NONSTRUCTURAL BMPs.
Table IC-2—Summary of Nonstructural BMPs

BMP Source Applicability
Household Wastes and Toxics Litter Most likely associated with Commercial operations
such as fast food restaurants.
Used Oil and Automotive Associated with Commercial operations that
Fluids perform vehicle maintenance such as gasoline
stations, quick lube shops, etc.
Toxic Wastes Associated with Commercial and Industrial
facilities. Toxic wastes are used everywhere.
Pesticides, Herbicides, and Application to Landscaping Associated with Commercial and Industrial
Fertilizer facilities which must maintain open areas.
Pesticides may also be used at sites to control
insects such as office buildings and restaurants.
Illicit Discharge Controls Accidental Spill Response Associated with Commercial or Industrial sites
which transport, store, or dispose of toxic
substances.
Illicit Connections Associated most closely with old industrial sites
where the plumbing system is not well known.
Good Housekeeping Mitigation Operation and Maintenance Associated with Commercial and Industrial sites
which store materials or equipment outside.
Material Storage Practices Associated with Industries which keep a large
amount of materials onsite.
Preventative Maintenance Vehicles and Equipment Associated with medium to large Industrial
facilities. Also associated with commercial
operations which perform vehicle maintenance
such as fleet operations.
Building and Grounds Associated with large Commercial or Industrial
facilities.
Spill Prevention and Spill Prevention Measures, Associated with Commercial operations which are
Response, Minimization of Identification of Spill Areas, automotive related, and industries.
Exposure Spill Response Procedures
Painting Operations Painting, Sand Blasting, and Associated with Commercial operations which
Cleanup perform painting or stripping of painted objects,
specifically operations which finish metal such as
auto painting.
Above Ground Storage Tanks Tanks Associated with Industrial facilities or large
commercial operations with above ground tanks
for the storage of oils or other liquids used in bulk.
BMP Loading and Unloading Docks Associated with Industrial sites and large or
medium Commercial operations which receive
materials in bulk. Examples include stores which
receive landscaping chemicals, paints, solvents.
IC-14 9-1-99
BMP Source Applicability

Tanker Trucks to Tanks Associated with Industries and medium or large
commercial operations and gasoline stations of
any size.
Fuel Operations Fuel Dispensing Area, General Associated with Industrial and Commercial
Facility operations which have fueling operations such s
transportation fleets or gasoline stations.
Outside Material Storage Outside Materials Associated with Industrial or Commercial
operations which store materials outside.
Vehicle and Equipment Vehicle and Equipment Applies to Industrial and Commercial operations
Washing Washing which wash vehicles or equipment outside.
Dead-end Sumps Liquid storage, Loading and Associated with Industrial operations.
unloading
Oil/Water Separators Fueling, Maintenance, Associated with Industrial operations and
Washing commercial operations which deal with large
quantities of oils.
Impervious Liners Liquid Storage, Salt Storage
Drip Pans Maintenance areas, Fueling Applicable to Commercial operations such as
areas, Loading and Unloading vehicle maintenance operations
(liquids)
9-1-99 IC-15
DRAINAGE CRITERIA MANUAL (V. 3) NONSTRUCTURAL BMPs
NONSTRUCTURAL BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES
CONTENTS
Section Page
NS-
1.0 INTRODUCTION TO NONSTRUCTURAL BMPS .......................................................................... 1

1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................. 1
1.2 Advantages of Nonstructural BMPs.................................................................................... 2
1.3 Disadvantages of Nonstructural BMPs............................................................................... 2
2.0 USE OF NONSTRUCTURAL BMPS............................................................................................... 4
2.1 Objectives in the Use of Nonstructural BMPs .................................................................... 4
2.2 Nonstructural BMP Effectiveness ....................................................................................... 4
2.3 Pollutant Removal Mechanisms ......................................................................................... 5
2.4 Nonstructural BMP Selection and Use Guidelines ............................................................. 6
3.0 DISPOSAL OF HOUSEHOLD WASTE AND TOXICS.................................................................... 8
3.1 Primary Users ..................................................................................................................... 8
3.2 Description.......................................................................................................................... 8
3.3 Application .......................................................................................................................... 8
3.3.1 Public Education .................................................................................................... 8
3.4 Implementation ................................................................................................................. 11
3.5 Advantages and Disadvantages....................................................................................... 12
3.5.1 Advantages 12
3.5.2 Disadvantages 12
4.0 USE OF PESTICIDES, HERBICIDES AND FERTILIZER ............................................................ 14
4.1 Primary Users ................................................................................................................... 14
4.2 Description........................................................................................................................ 14
4.3 Application ........................................................................................................................ 14
4.4 Implementation ................................................................................................................. 14
4.5.1 Advantages 16
4.5.2 Disadvantages 16
5.0 ILLICIT DISCHARGE CONTROLS ............................................................................................... 17
5.1 Primary Users ................................................................................................................... 17
5.2 Description........................................................................................................................ 17
5.2.1 Illegal Dumping 17
5.2.2 Accidental Spill Response ................................................................................... 17
5.2.3 Illicit Connections................................................................................................. 18
5.3 Implementation ................................................................................................................. 19
6.0 GOOD HOUSEKEEPING .............................................................................................................. 21
6.1 Primary Users ................................................................................................................... 21
6.2 Descriptions ...................................................................................................................... 21
6.3 Application ........................................................................................................................ 21
6.4 Implementation ................................................................................................................. 21
6.4.1 Operation and Maintenance ................................................................................ 21
6.4.2 Material Storage Practices .................................................................................. 22
9-1-99 NS-i
6.4.3 Material Inventory Practices.................................................................................22

6.4.4 Training and Participation ....................................................................................23
6.5 Advantages and Disadvantages .......................................................................................23
7.0 PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE.................................................................................................24
7.1 Primary Users....................................................................................................................24
7.2 Description ........................................................................................................................24
7.3 Application .........................................................................................................................24
7.4 Implementation..................................................................................................................25
8.0 SPILL PREVENTION AND RESPONSE .......................................................................................28
8.1 Primary Users....................................................................................................................28
8.2 Description ........................................................................................................................28
8.3 Application .........................................................................................................................28
8.4 Implementation..................................................................................................................28
8.4.1 Spill Prevention Measures ...................................................................................28
8.4.2 dentification of Spill Areas....................................................................................29
8.4.3 Material Handling Procedures..............................................................................29
8.4.4 Spill Response Procedures and Equipment ........................................................30
8.4.5 Spill Plan Development ........................................................................................30
Table
Table NS-1—Advantages and Disadvantages of BMPs for Spill Prevention and Response BMPs ..........32
NS-ii 9-1-99
1.0 INTRODUCTION TO NONSTRUCTURAL BMPS
1.1 Overview
This section contains guidance on the evaluation, selection and use of nonstructural Best Management
Practices (BMPs). Each BMP is described and discussed as to its general application in an urban area.
The following is a list of major areas of nonstructural BMPs that are considered to be appropriate and
effective in stormwater quality improvement and are described in following sections of this chapter.
• Disposal of Household Waste and Toxics.
• Use of Pesticides, Herbicides and Fertilizer.
• Illicit Discharge Controls.
• Spill Prevention and Response.
• Preventative Maintenance.
• Painting Operations.
• Outside Material Storage.
• Stormwater Prevention Education.
• Mitigation.
• Vehicle Washing.
• Above Ground Storage Tanks.
• Good Housekeeping.
• Loading and Unloading.
• Fueling.
• Exposure Minimization.
• Outside Manufacturing.
Nonstructural BMPs are intended to prevent or reduce the contamination of stormwater runoff. They are
applicable to a variety of different sources or activities. By reducing pollutant generation, adverse water
quality impacts are reduced from potential pollutant sources. Preventing and controlling the sources of
these pollutants requires a change in behavior. Some municipalities or industrial facilities will have
already implemented many of the nonstructural practices as a means to address other concerns such as
9-1-99 NS-1
to control product loss, minimize waste production, accident and fire prevention, worker health and safety,
site security, or to comply with other environmental regulations rather than for stormwater quality
purposes.
1.2 Advantages of Nonstructural BMPs
Pollution of stormwater originates from many sources in urban areas. Structural controls reduce the
amounts of pollutants that migrate off the urban landscape by reducing runoff and by providing facilities to
remove pollutants from stormwater. Nonstructural BMPs prevent or limit the entry of pollutants into
stormwater at their source. Prevention is desirable and can be cost effective because it minimizes
pollution in the first place and thereby reduces the amounts that need to be removed by subsequent
treatment. In urbanized portions of the municipality or existing facilities, it may be one of the few
affordable methods for stormwater quality enhancement.
The advantages of nonstructural BMPs, among others, are:
• The quality of stormwater runoff is improved.
• The volume of sediment, debris, oils, chemicals and other pollutants deposited in receiving
waterbodies is reduced.
• Frequency of needed maintenance of structural controls is reduced.
• Additional benefits to air quality, ground water quality, and solid waste control are realized.
• The public awareness of water-quality problems and involvement in solutions is heightened.
• Increased public awareness of stormwater quality issues.
• Most require only a modification of existing practices, are simple to understand, and make good
sense.
• Implementation can occur rapidly.
• Does not require major capital construction financing.
1.3 Disadvantages of Nonstructural BMPs
Because nonstructural BMPs are tied closely to peoples’ activities and behavior, their effectiveness
depends on the people’s attitude, their willingness to accept information, and their willingness to put
BMPs into practice. Low participation will result in little or no benefit. A high percentage of participation
has the potential for noticeable improvements in water quality.
Disadvantages to the use of nonstructural BMPs include:
NS-2 9-1-99
• Public information is expensive to develop and distribute, and must be updated and redistributed
on an ongoing basis.
• Effectiveness of good housekeeping measures is determined primarily by voluntary participation

and consistency of activities.
• Initial public/private funding partnerships are needed to ensure participation and to encourage
development of information and infrastructure improvements such as recycling centers and
household toxics, and hazardous waste collection programs.
• Requires a dedicated workforce and funding to maintain viable programs and to continue citizen
participation.
• Effects on stormwater quality from nonstructural BMPs are virtually impossible to quantify and to
measure accurately without long-term data. On the other hand, the amounts of materials
collected and recycled are quantifiable and could serve as an indirect measure of overall
success.
9-1-99 NS-3
2.0 USE OF NONSTRUCTURAL BMPS
2.1 Objectives in the Use of Nonstructural BMPs
Nonstructural BMPs are used to complement structural BMPs or as the only available control method in
existing developed areas where retrofit construction of structural BMPs is not cost effective.
Implementation of only nonstructural efforts, however, may or may not achieve measurable water quality
benefits.
As part of the development of the Manual, a number of nonstructural BMPs were identified for potential
use by municipalities and industrial /commercial areas. A group of local government representatives
recommended the following as the nonstructural BMPs for inclusion in the Manual after evaluating these
for effectiveness, feasibility of implementation, cost, and maintenance. Additional nonstructural measures
will be examined in the future, and if they prove to be promising in reducing the amount of pollutants
being delivered by stormwater to the receiving water system, they will be included in the future editions of
the Manual.
This list includes nonstructural BMPs which are applied to various different types of sites. Nonstructural
BMPs are implemented by various entities. Because they rely on actions and not structures, nonstructural
BMPs must be implemented constantly and repetitively over time.
Other nonstructural BMPs were considered for inclusion in the Manual, but were deemed at this time to
be inappropriate to use, for local governments to require their use by others, or were judged to be not
effective enough in controlling sources of pollution. There are two main objectives of using nonstructural
BMPs. These are:
1) Reduce or eliminate the pollutants that impact water quality at their source, thus reducing the
need for structural control requirements. For example, nonstructural BMPs implemented at an
industrial site may result in elimination or reduction of the introduction of oils and greases into the
stormwater. This could result in the better efficiency of a infiltration basin or the elimination of the
need for additional treatment for oils.
2) Address water quality concerns that are not cost effectively handled by structural controls. An
example is an effective system for determining illicit discharges or connections into a stormwater
system. It would not be practical for all stormwater to be collected and treated to address water
quality impacts from such discharges. It is more effective to develop and implement a program for
finding these sources and addressing them.
2.2 Nonstructural BMP Effectiveness
To be effective, nonstructural BMPs need to prevent or reduce the sources of stormwater pollution. They
NS-4 9-1-99
fall into the general categories of prevention and source controls. Preventing and controlling the source of
pollutants that come in contact with stormwater requires a change in the behavior of the urban population
and in the waste disposal practices they employ.
The objectives for promoting the use of nonstructural BMPs are as follows:
• Improve the quality of receiving waters.
• Increase consistency with stormwater quality objectives.
• Increase consistency with structural BMPs.
• Improve cost effectiveness.
• Widespread applicability in all urban areas.
• Widespread public acceptance.
The effectiveness of nonstructural BMPs is difficult, if not impossible, to quantitatively assess. For
example, to determine the effectiveness of a public education program on chemical usage, it would be
necessary to have data on the residential and commercial chemical usage in the area, the amounts of
chemicals which enter the storm sewer system that is attributable to improper usage and/or disposal, and
the amount washed off by stormwater before and after the implementation of the program.
The recommendations for the use of nonstructural practices included in the Manual are based more on
an intuitive presumption that some level of improvement will be realized if the practices are implemented.
Preventing or reducing the amount of pollutants at the source is usually more cost effective than
structural controls that remove pollutants after they have entered stormwater.
It can also be argued that aggressive use of nonstructural measures will reduce concentrations and loads
of various pollutants in stormwater being conveyed to downstream structural BMPs or to the receiving
waters. This is especially the case in existing urban areas where structural controls cannot be easily built,
or are extremely expensive to retrofit into the fully-developed urban landscape.
2.3 Pollutant Removal Mechanisms
Nonstructural BMPs can, to some degree, prevent the deposition of pollutants on the urban landscape or
remove pollutants at their source. The source of pollutants for assimilation into stormwater is the land
surface itself, especially the impervious surfaces in the urban area. Thus, it is expected that when
nonstructural measures are effectively implemented, they will reduce the amount of pollutants being
deposited on land surfaces for eventual contact with stormwater and transported to the receiving water
system.
9-1-99 NS-5
2.4 Nonstructural BMP Selection and Use Guidelines
Most nonstructural BMPs are applicable for use in residential, commercial, and industrial areas. This can
be said for newly developing areas, recently developed areas, and old neighborhoods as well.
For newly developing and redeveloping areas, nonstructural BMPs include municipal programs to ensure
that new urban development and redevelopment incorporates appropriate temporary erosion and
sediment control during construction and also permanent structural BMPs as a part of the development.
Such municipal programs include institutional mechanisms that require the proponents of a new
development to prepare and submit stormwater quality control management plans in accordance with the
municipality’s stormwater BMP design criteria and standards, including the erosion control and
stormwater management during construction. These programs need adequate staff and fiscal resources
to review and approve development plans and to ensure that the approved stormwater quality provisions
of these plans are properly implemented.
The remaining nonstructural BMPs described in the Manual, are targeted at developed areas and
industrial/commercial sites. Most rely primarily on public education, and procedural changes and possible
enforcement programs. In selecting the appropriate nonstructural pollutant reduction programs to adopt,
each manager facility needs to evaluate its current land-use condition and the potential for removal of
pollutants offered by each of these practices. The specifics for selection and use of each nonstructural
BMP effort are described for each management practice.
Nonstructural BMPs fall into several categories which include:
• Waste Minimization–Source Control
• Good Housekeeping
• Preventative Maintenance
• Minimization of Exposure
• Spill Minimization and Prevention
• Public Education
• Mitigation
Within these categories, some BMPs are more appropriate for industrial/commercial sites while others
apply to construction sites. In some cases the BMP may be applicable to residents and thus are best
addressed by local or state government.
In determining which nonstructural BMPs should be implemented, it is recommended that as part of the
NS-6 9-1-99
overall planning process an evaluation be made of the potential sources of pollutants and the best means
of addressing them. For example, if the concern is bacteria loadings, then a program on pet litter may be
appropriate. If the problem is oil and grease in the runoff from a gasoline station or autoshop, then
nonstructural controls dealing with spill prevention may be appropriate. Thus, once the source or activities
are determined the list of BMPs should be consulted to determine the most applicable practices.
9-1-99 NS-7
3.0 DISPOSAL OF HOUSEHOLD WASTE AND TOXICS
3.1 Primary Users
These best management practices apply to municipalities, civic groups, commercial businesses, and
industry.
3.2 Description
Improperly disposed waste materials are a source of stormwater pollution. These wastes can include
household chemicals, pet waste, yard waste, litter, automotive maintenance waste and others. This is
especially true when wastes are placed on impervious surfaces or directly into the storm drainage
system, such as streets, alleys, parking lots and sidewalks, and pervious structures such as ditches,
drainageways, gulches, etc.
The development of education programs and dissemination of information that promotes proper disposal
of household (solid) waste, litter, pet waste, yard waste, used oil, and toxic waste is a nonstructural Best
Management Practice (BMP). The passage of laws, rules, or ordinances prohibiting improper disposal of
these materials, and their enforcement, is another step in this management practice. An on-going
education program, along with facilities for such disposal, has been judged to be most effective at this
time.
3.3 Application
Waste materials deposited on the urban landscape, especially the impervious surfaces, can be washed
off by stormwater runoff and delivered to the receiving water system. Thus, all measures that help to
minimize the presence of these materials on the urban landscape can improve water quality. Proper
disposal of household waste and toxics can reduce the deposition of solids, organics, nutrients, oxygen-
demanding substances, solvents, caustics, paints, automotive fluids, toxic substances and fecal matter
on the land and reduce their presence in stormwater reaching the receiving waters.
3.3.1 Public Education

Public education can be used to explain to the general public how improper disposal of wastes can
degrade stormwater quality, and how proper disposal can help to protect the quality of receiving waters.
Public education is also a means to show how water quality personally affects each of us (e.g., higher
treatment costs, health, etc.) Several categories of waste materials were identified where public
education can be effective in reducing the amounts of pollutants entering municipal stormwater runoff.
Each of these are discussed below.
3.3.1.1 Household Waste

Household waste includes materials discarded on the land surface or into the stormwater system from
NS-8 9-1-99
residential and commercial areas. Wastes from commercial businesses are generated by stores,
restaurants, hotels, offices, and other non-manufacturing activities. Commercial waste is considered to be
similar to residential waste and is addressed collectively under this definition. Toxic wastes from
residential and commercial areas are considered a subcategory of household waste.
Refuse is solid waste that is contained, whereas litter is uncontained. Refuse is controlled through
existing programs of solid waste collection and disposal. The goal of household waste disposal is to
contain all refuse, reduce litter, and encourage proper waste disposal through public education.
Examples are:
3.3.1.2 Litter
Most litter is biodegradable and can create an oxygen demand in water as it decomposes. Examples of
litter are paper products, used diapers, etc. Research by Keep America Beautiful, Inc. (1990) has shown
that people litter where litter has already accumulated. Also according to Keep America Beautiful, Inc.
(1987), pedestrians and motorists account for less than 25% of litter, the other sources being household
waste, commercial and industrial waste, haulage vehicles, loading docks, and construction sites.
Reduction of litter through proper disposal can reduce its accumulation on the urban landscape and its
eventual entry into the stormwater system.
3.3.1.3 Pet Waste

Pet waste deposited on impervious surfaces can be transported by the stormwater drainage system to
receiving waters. Fecal matter potentially contains pathogenic viruses and bacteria, and also creates an
oxygen demand in water.
The majority of improperly disposed pet waste occurs in public areas, such as streets and parks. Pet
waste ordinances are common in municipalities, however, these are difficult to enforce especially with
limited municipal resources. Public education can help bring this problem to the public's attention, and
can thereby reduce deposition of pet waste on urban surfaces.
3.3.1.4 Yard Waste

Yard waste is also a category of household waste. Examples of yard waste include leaves and grass
clippings. It is distinguished from other categories of household waste in that it can be disposed of by
composting. Composting is the aerobic decomposition of plant and other organic materials.
Yard waste accounts for 18% of the municipal waste stream on a weight basis (Keep America Beautiful,
1987). Fallen tree leaves, grass clippings and garden debris can become water pollutants when they are
disposed of in alleys, driveways, parking lots, streets, street gutters, irrigation ditches, and drainage
channels. Public education efforts on the benefits of composting and on proper disposal of yard waste
can help to reduce the volume of yard waste entering the stormwater system and receiving waters.
9-1-99 NS-9
3.3.1.5 Used Oil and Automotive Fluids

Used oil and automotive fluids including antifreeze, brake fluid, transmission fluid, grease, other
lubricants, and petroleum-based cleaning solvents are wastes generated during automobile maintenance
by residential households and commercial businesses. These can enter the storm drainage system if
poured directly into storm inlets or from residual on concrete or asphalt exposed to precipitation.
Improper disposal of used oil and automotive fluids cause receiving waters to become contaminated with
hydrocarbons and residual metals that can be toxic to stream organisms. Used oil and other petroleum
products can be recycled. A number of different recycling centers presently exist in the metropolitan area.
Public education on the location of these centers, the benefits of recycling, prevention of fluid leaks, and
the importance of proper disposal for improving stormwater quality, can reduce the amounts of oil and
used automotive fluids reaching receiving waters.
3.3.1.6 Toxic Wastes

Toxic wastes are generated by residential households and commercial businesses. These primarily
consist of certain types of used and unused consumer products. Included among these are paint,
solvents, putties, cleaners, waxes, polishes, oil products, aerosols, acids, caustics, pesticides, herbicides,
and certain medicines or cosmetics. These products and their containers should always be disposed of
properly. Some of these unused toxic materials can also be recycled.
Improper disposal of toxic substances cause stormwater to become contaminated by these wastes. This
occurs when toxic substances are dumped into street gutters or storm inlets. This also happens when
stormwater comes in contact with toxic substances or where they have been improperly disposed on land
surfaces.
There is no need for improper disposal of toxic substances since, according to legislation passed by the
U.S Congress (1976), small amounts of toxic materials can legally be disposed of in landfills. Educational
efforts to heighten public awareness of the environmental damage due to improper disposal, and to
encourage proper disposal and recycling can reduce the amounts of these pollutants entering
stormwater, provided the public as a whole actively participates.
3.3.1.7 Cost Considerations

Collection and disposal of household wastes can be expensive. Where hazardous/toxic wastes are
involved there is a need for operators to be adequately trained, analysis to be done of unknown materials,
safe transport and containers, and extensive recordkeeping.
There are also regulatory requirements on how wastes can be disposed. Disposal or hazardous wastes
must follow the requirements outlined in the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act and associated
regulations.
NS-10 9-1-99
3.4 Implementation
The implementation of a public education and information program can include one or more of the
following general approaches:
• Development, publication and distribution of brochures
• Utility bill inserts, flyers and handbills
• Newspaper articles and/or advertisements
• Development and distribution of educational videos
• Public workshops, including field demonstrations
• Developing school curricula, and
• Developing and installing posters and signs
• The following are specific examples that may be considered for use:
• Signs, including graphics, on dumpsters and other locations encouraging proper waste disposal
• Brochures and utility bill inserts on separation of wastes and recycling
• Advertising the locations of existing toxic disposal sites and waste recycling centers
• Advertising the locations of existing automobile fluids and used oil disposal sites
• Establishing and maintaining household toxics disposal sites
• Annual or curbside collection of household toxics
• Signs in parks and along streets on pet waste control and ordinances
• Pet waste disposal bags in public parks
• Voluntary neighborhood clean-up efforts
• Waste containers in problem litter areas
• Requiring waste-haulage truck covers
• Seasonal collection programs for tree branches and leaves
• On-going collection program, or disposal sites, for grass clippings and other yard waste
• Distribution programs to recycle compost as mulch
9-1-99 NS-11
• Advertisements or notices of private locations accepting yard waste for composting
• Information on backyard or neighborhood composting and proper disposal of yard waste
All of these examples are not likely to be used by a municipality at any given time. Local conditions, public
attitudes, and fiscal constraints will determine what combination is most appropriate and effective for use
in each municipality.
3.5 Advantages and Disadvantages
It is unknown at present the extent of runoff contamination due to improper disposal of various household
waste materials. The amount of water quality improvement that can result from public education on
proper disposal methods and opportunities for recycling have yet to be quantified. Intuitively, there should
be some benefit if the amount of these wastes is reduced.
3.5.1 Advantages
Major advantages of public education on proper disposal of household waste and toxics can include:
• Reduction in the quantities of solids, metals, floatable materials, oxygen-consuming materials,

nutrients, fecal matter, oil and toxic substances transported by stormwater to receiving waters
• Improved aesthetics of parks and public areas.
• Appropriate disposal of more wastes at landfills.
• Reduced littering on the urban landscape.
• Increased recycling and resource recovery.
• Heightened awareness and public understanding of how each person can pollute receiving
waters and how each person can help to prevent their pollution.
3.5.2 Disadvantages
Some disadvantages associated with the use of this BMP include:
• Its success and effectiveness depends on voluntary efforts.
• Places an increased demand on recycling facilities and products.
• Extremely difficult to quantify pollutant load reduction.
• Requires an on-going effort to continuously provide public education through distribution of

educational materials and a means to respond to questions the public may have relative to
disposal.
NS-12 9-1-99
• May require ordinances and enforcement actions in some cases to address the more difficult and
persistent activities generating pollutants.
9-1-99 NS-13
4.0 USE OF PESTICIDES, HERBICIDES AND FERTILIZER
4.1 Primary Users
This BMP applies to commercial applicators and municipalities and industries who apply their own
pesticides, herbicides and fertilizers.
4.2 Description
Pesticides, herbicides, and fertilizers are used to maintain landscaping in residential, commercial and
industrial areas. These substances are usually toxic and can contaminate surface runoff if not properly
used. This nonstructural BMP consists of the development and dissemination of information to the public
that encourages proper use and application of pesticides, herbicides, and fertilizers.
4.3 Application
Pesticides, herbicides, and fertilizers are chemicals used in landscape maintenance. Pesticides are used
for insect control, herbicides are used for weed control, and fertilizers are used to promote growth of
grasses, flowers, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation. While pesticides and herbicides are toxic to aquatic
life at low concentrations, fertilizers are usually only toxic at high concentrations. Fertilizers, however, are
more commonly a problem because of their nutrient-enrichment effect on receiving waterbodies. An
oversupply of phosphorus and nitrogen will promote alga growth that can lead to a depletion of dissolved
oxygen needed for fish and other aquatic organisms. These chemicals are applied on urban landscape
areas and, when improperly applied or used, can be transported to receiving waters in surface runoff.
The rate and timing of application of pesticides, herbicides, and fertilizer are important to minimize
transport by surface runoff, as well as to optimize their intended purpose in landscape maintenance.
Overapplication and overspraying of pesticides, herbicides, and fertilizers onto impervious areas, such as
streets and sidewalks, need to be avoided as well as excessive or too frequent use of these chemicals.
Use of these chemicals in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations can prevent most of the
surface water contamination being attributed to their use.
Public education can be an effective method of ensuring proper use of these chemicals. Raising the
general level of understanding of how individual action in the use of these chemicals can contaminate
surface runoff and the receiving waterbodies can make each person aware of the problem. Whether this
awareness will translate into an improved use of these products will then depend on individual attitudes.
Thus, dissemination of information to the public on the impacts of improper use and how to use
landscape maintenance chemicals is the basis for this nonstructural BMP.
4.4 Implementation
The development of an ongoing educational program is the basis of this nonstructural BMP. The
NS-14 9-1-99
audience to be targeted is residential homeowners and small businesses.
As a first step, technical information on pesticides, herbicides and fertilizers and their proper use must be
developed. The following sources can be consulted:
• Existing state regulations on pesticide application, certification, and weed control,
• Federal legislation, regulations and technical reports,
• Chemical manufacturer's technical manuals, product labels and use directions, storage and
proper disposal guidelines, and material safety data sheets,
• Sprayer manufacturer's calibration guides,
• Sorbent manufacturer's spill management guides,
• University and County Agricultural Extension Service horticultural guides,
• Rocky Mountain Poison Center safety guidelines, and
• Other studies and available information.
One method being used by some is Integrated Pest Management (IPM). This is best applicable to
commercial, agricultural and other large scale users of pesticides. IPM is a decision-making process for
pest management whose goal is an intelligent, environmentally sound control of pests. It uses biological,
chemical, and genetic information to determine the best type of control, the timing and extent of chemical
applications and whether non-chemical means can attain an acceptable level of pest control.
IPM is a preventive measure aimed at knowing the exact pest(s) being targeted for control, the locations
and times when pests will pose problems, the level of pest-induced damage that can be tolerated without
taking action, the most vulnerable life stage, and control actions that are least damaging to the
environment. The major components of IPM are as follows: monitoring and inventory of pest populations,
determination of pest-induced injury and action levels, identification of priority pest problems, selection
and timing of least toxic management tools, site-specific treatment with minimized chemical use, and
evaluation and adjustment of pesticide applications. Monitoring of pest populations is a key to successful
IPM implementation. Pest problems are universally easier to control if the problem can be discovered
early. With IPM pesticides are used only as a last resort; maximization of natural controls, including
biological controls and removal of pests by hand, is a guiding rule.
Methods available for public education on the use of pesticides, herbicides and fertilizers are very similar
to those described in Section 4.4 of this chapter and the reader is referred to that section for details.
9-1-99 NS-15
Although it is possible to quantify the amounts of pesticides, herbicides, and fertilizers used by residential,
commercial, and industrial areas within a geographic location, it is not known what part of that quantity is
improperly used. There should be some amount of overall benefit, however, if educational efforts result in
a general increase in the number of people properly using and applying these chemicals in urban areas.
4.5.1 Advantages
Major advantages of the use of this BMP include:
• Can reduce the source of pesticides, herbicides and fertilizers eventually entering receiving
waters.
• Can help reduce the level of phosphorus and nitrogen in receiving waters, thereby positively
affecting the problem of nuisance growth of algae, and eutrophication of small lakes and tributary
streams.
• Encourage the use of less toxic or substitute methods of pest and weed control that, if followed,
further reduce the supply of pesticides and herbicides for contact with surface runoff.
• Heighten the awareness and public understanding of how individual actions can add to or reduce
stormwater pollution.
4.5.2 Disadvantages
Some disadvantages associated with the use of this BMP include:
• Difficult to reach and influence all commercial and residential users of these chemicals.
• Difficult to present technical information in simplified form to all users.
• Extremely difficult to quantify extent of how implementation of this BMP translates into water
quality effects in receiving waters.
• Requires on-going educational activities and the distribution of information.
NS-16 9-1-99
5.0 ILLICIT DISCHARGE CONTROLS
5.1 Primary Users
This BMP applies primarily to municipalities. It could also be applicable to large commercial enterprises or
industry, such as office parks, which have multiple activities occurring at its site.
5.2 Description
Activities that reduce the entry of pollutants into the municipal storm sewer system from physical
connections to the storm drain system of sanitary sewers and floor drains, or from illicit discharges,
accomplished through regulation, inspection, testing, and education can enhance the quality of receiving
waters. These include controls on illegal dumping of toxic substances and petroleum products, responses
to contain accidental spills, measures to locate and disconnect illicit connections of sanitary sewers to
storm sewers, and measures to prevent additional illicit sanitary sewer connections in the future. To their
credit, many municipalities already have programs in place to address all of these concerns. Measures
that limit these types of illicit discharges to the storm drainage system are considered nonstructural best
management practices (BMPs).
5.2.1 Illegal Dumping

Illegal dumping occurs whenever toxic substances or other pollutants are dumped into or disposed of
directly into storm inlets, other storm drainage facilities, or onto the urban landscape. Prohibitions against
such activity have been enacted by many municipalities, however, enforcement is difficult because of the
often clandestine nature of illegal dumping and the large areas over which such activities can take place.
Nonstructural BMPs that can be considered for implementation by local municipalities are based on
efforts to increase surveillance of illegal dumping. These include developing educational materials for the
public about these illegal practices and the hazards they create to the public health and the environment,
encouraging increased public reporting, possibly establishing a "hotline" telephone number for citizens to
call to report dumping incidents, or making illegal dumping a part of the 911 reporting network. Strong
enforcement action against violations, accompanied by publicity, could discourage such activities by
others.
5.2.2 Accidental Spill Response

The storage, transport and disposal of hazardous and toxic substances is a regulated activity under state
and federal laws. Response procedures for management of accidental spills of pollutants are practiced
presently by many municipalities. As a result, many local police, fire, or other departments are equipped
to respond to such spills. Nevertheless, most spills have the potential to contaminate receiving waters via
transport by the storm sewer system.
9-1-99 NS-17
Additional measures that might be considered by local governments include mapping of storm sewer
systems and detention ponds to identify the locations of stormwater inlets for drainage system. Such
maps can then be used by the emergency response crews to help identify which inlets, areas, or sewers
to protect or block off in the event of a spill. Once a spill occurs, it should be monitored to determine when
the area of the spill has been adequately cleaned up. All of these measures, as well as on-going
practices, need periodic updating and refresher training to be current. Training, updating of procedures,
field exercises and proper equipment are all part of a spill response program.
5.2.3 Illicit Connections

Illicit connections of sanitary sewers to the stormwater runoff system in new developments can be
prevented by an aggressive and competent inspection program by municipal or utility personnel. Illicit
connections can exist, however, in older developments. Some municipalities have taken steps in the past
to identify these and have disconnected those that were found. A well-organized program to find illicit
sanitary connections also requires accurate mapping of the sanitary and storm sewer systems and a
thorough understanding of these systems. Program elements may include:
• Ensure that existing building and plumbing codes prohibit physical connections of nonstormwater
discharges to the storm drain system.
• Require visual inspection of new developments or redevelopments during the construction phase.
• Develop documentation and recordkeeping protocols to track inspections and catalog the storm
drain system.
• Use techniques such as zinc chloride smoke testing, fluorometric dye testing, and television
camera inspection to verify physical connections.
To isolate likely sources, personnel first need to look for visual signs of illicit connections at storm sewer
outfalls, relying on sight and smell. If the initial screening indicates a possible illicit connection, random
dry-weather sampling and testing for indicator constituents can help to further identify if there may be illicit
connections in the system. These then need to be investigated further with a well-planned "seek and
destroy" effort that is designed to address the specific nature of the storm drainage and wastewater
systems. Occasional random dry-weather screening can also be conducted, especially in areas where
the greatest potential exists for illicit connections, however, these are of limited usefulness for detecting
illicit discharges. These tests may identify illicit connections that discharge occasionally and in a random
manner, a typical scenario for individual wastewater discharges. Excavation of sewer lines at the point of
connection, and reconnection of the sanitary sewer line to the appropriate system is the final step to
correct the problem.
NS-18 9-1-99
5.3 Implementation
Public awareness is the key to implementation of this BMP. Awareness that discharges enter the
stormwater system, that separate systems exist for stormwater and sanitary wastewater, and that illicit
discharges to the stormwater system are not treated may be sufficient to limit these discharges in the
future.
The following actions, if not already in place, can be considered for use by local jurisdictions:
• Enactment of ordinances prohibiting illegal dumping and illicit connections.
• Developing a public education program advising the residents of potential problems that can
result from illegal dumping, illicit connections and accidental spills. Educate the public about an
existing or new anti-dumping ordinance.
• Install a "hotline" telephone number, or make 911 a part of this program to handle calls from
citizens reporting illegal dumping or accidental spills.
• Review and update training procedures, equipment and material inventories, and administrative
procedures for spill containment and management.
• Conduct random field screening of stormwater outfalls to find illicit wastewater connections to
storm drainage systems. Illicit connections that are discovered should be plugged or tapped into
the sanitary sewer or other acceptable or legal disposal systems. This may include obtaining an
NPDES permit.
• Train field inspectors and develop field inspection procedures that prevent new illicit connections
of sanitary sewer lines to storm sewers.
• Have a program in place to review and approve any proposed connection into a storm sewer.
The question of whether actions to reduce illegal dumping, contamination from accidental spills and illicit
discharges have advantages or disadvantages is immaterial. This is evidenced by the fact that many
municipalities have one or more programs currently in place. Pollutants entering the storm sewer systems
by illegal dumping, spills, and illicit connections can contribute to public health problems that deserve on-
going attention. Thus, mitigation efforts can provide benefits to water quality in the receiving system while
protecting public health and welfare. However, there are costs associated with these activities. Possible
limitations for this BMP include the fact that proper connections can be altered after initial connection, the
cost of equipment for monitoring and inspection can be expensive, and improper physical connections to
9-1-99 NS-19
the storm drain system can occur in many different ways such as overflow of cross connection and floor
drains from businesses such as autoshops and restaurants.
NS-20 9-1-99
6.0 GOOD HOUSEKEEPING
6.1 Primary Users
These BMPs involve three key audiences: municipal employees, the general public, and small
businesses.
6.2 Descriptions
Good housekeeping requires keeping potential areas where pollutants exist clean and orderly.
6.3 Application
Good housekeeping practices are designed to maintain a clean and orderly work environment. The most
effective first steps towards preventing pollution in stormwater from work sites simply involves using good
common sense to improve the facility’s basic housekeeping methods. Poor housekeeping practices result
in more waste being generated than necessary and an increased potential for stormwater contamination.
A clean and orderly work site reduces the possibility of accidental spills caused by mishandling of
chemicals and equipment and should reduce safety hazards to personnel. A well-maintained material and
chemical storage area will reduce the possibility of stormwater mixing with pollutants.
Some simple procedures a facility can use to promote good housekeeping are: improved operation and
maintenance of machinery and processes, material storage practices, material inventory controls, routine
and regular clean-up schedules, maintaining well organized work areas, signage, and educational
programs for employees and the general public about all of these practices.
6.4 Implementation
These BMPs are applicable to the following areas: operation and maintenance, material storage, material
inventory, and training and participation.
6.4.1 Operation and Maintenance

To ensure that equipment and work related processes are working well the following practices can be
implemented:
• Maintain dry and clean floors and ground surfaces by using brooms, shovels, vacuum cleaners or
cleaning machines rather than wet clean-up methods.
• Regularly pickup and dispose of garbage and waste material.
• Make sure all equipment and related processes are working properly and preventative
maintenance is kept up with on both.
9-1-99 NS-21
• Routinely inspect equipment and processes for leaks or conditions that could lead to discharges
of chemicals or contact of stormwater with raw materials, intermediate materials, waste materials,
or products used on site.
• Ensure all spill clean up procedures are understood by employees. Training of employees on
proper clean up procedures should be implemented.
• Designate separate areas of the site for auto parking, vehicle refueling and routine maintenance.
• Clean up leaks, drips and other spills immediately.
• Cover and maintain dumpsters and waste receptacles.
6.4.2 Material Storage Practices

Improperly storing of material on site can lead to the release of materials and chemicals that can cause
stormwater runoff pollution. Proper storage techniques include the following:
• Provide adequate aisle space to facilitate material transfer and ease of access for inspection.
• Store containers, drums, and bags away from direct traffic routes to prevent accidental spills.
• Stack containers according to manufacturer’s instructions to avoid damaging the containers from
improper weight distribution.
• Store containers on pallets or similar devices to prevent corrosion of containers that results from
containers coming in contact with moisture on the ground.
• Store toxic or hazardous liquids within curbed areas or secondary containers.
• Assign responsibility of hazardous material inventory to a limited number of people that are
trained to handle such materials.
6.4.3 Material Inventory Practices

An up-to-date inventory kept on all materials (both hazardous and non-hazardous) present on site will
help keep material costs down caused by overstocking, track how materials are stored and handled
onsite, and identify which materials and activities pose the most risk to the environment. The following
description provides the basic steps in completing a material inventory:
• Identify all chemical substances present at work site. Perform a walk through of the site, review
purchase orders, list all chemical substances used and obtain Material Safety Data Sheets
(MSDS) for all chemicals.
• Label all containers. Labels should provide name and type of substance, stock number,
NS-22 9-1-99
expiration date, health hazards, handling suggestions, and first aid information. This information
can also be found on a MSDS.
• Clearly mark on the hazardous materials inventory which chemicals require special handling,
storage, use and disposal considerations.
Institute a shelf-life program to improve material tracking and inventory that can reduce the amount of
materials that are overstocked and ensure disposal of out-dated materials. Careful tracking of materials
ordered can result in more efficient materials use. Decisions on the amounts of hazardous materials that
are stored on site should include an evaluation of any emergency control systems that are in place. All
storage areas should be designed to contain any spills.
6.4.4 Training and Participation

Frequent and proper training in good housekeeping techniques reduces the possibility of chemicals or
equipment that will be mishandled. Reducing waste generation is another important pollution prevention
technique. The following are ways to get people involved in good housekeeping practices:
• Provide information sessions on good housekeeping practices in training programs.
• Discuss good housekeeping at meetings.
• Publicize pollution prevention concepts through posters or signs.
• Post bulletin boards with updated good housekeeping procedures, tips and reminders.
An advantage of Good Housekeeping BMPs is that they are inexpensive to implement. The primary cost
is staff time. Benefits of a clean and orderly site can go beyond stormwater quality improvement. This
could include a more accurate inventory of materials on site or reduction in worker injuries, for example,
slips on wet surfaces.
A disadvantage of this BMP is that, like many nonstructural BMPs, employee awareness and education is
key. Continued awareness training is necessary to ensure that positive behaviors are maintained.
9-1-99 NS-23
7.0 PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE
7.1 Primary Users
This BMP is applicable to industrial and commercial sites.
7.2 Description
Preventative maintenance involves the regular inspection and testing of plant equipment and operational
systems. These inspections should uncover conditions such as cracks or slow leaks which could cause
breakdowns or failures that result in discharges of chemicals to surface waters either by direct overland
flow or through storm drainage systems. The purpose of the preventative maintenance program should
be to prevent breakdowns and failures by adjustment, repair, or replacement of equipment before a major
breakdown or failure can occur.
Preventative maintenance has been practiced predominantly where excessive down time is extremely
costly. As a stormwater best management practice (BMP), preventative maintenance should be used
selectively to eliminate or minimize the spill of contaminants to receiving waters. For many facilities, this
would simply be an extension of the current plant preventative maintenance program to include items to
prevent stormwater runoff contamination.
For sites that have storm drainage facilities, proper maintenance is necessary to ensure that the drainage
facilities serve their intended function. Without adequate maintenance, sediment and other debris can
quickly clog facilities and render them useless. Typically, a preventative maintenance program should
include inspections of conveyance channels, storm sewers, inlets, catch basins, stormwater detention
areas, and other water quality treatment systems.
Most plans already have preventative maintenance programs that provide some degree of environmental
protection. This program could be expanded to include stormwater considerations, especially the upkeep
and maintenance of storage tanks, valves, pumps, pipes, and other process-water or chemical feed
devices.
7.3 Application
Preventative maintenance procedures and activities are applicable to almost every facility. Preventative
maintenance should be part of a general good housekeeping program designed to maintain a clean and
orderly work environment. Often the most effective first step towards preventing stormwater pollution from
sites simply involves good common sense to improve the facility preventative maintenance and general
good housekeeping methods.
NS-24 9-1-99
7.4 Implementation
Elements of good preventative maintenance program should include:
• Identification of equipment or systems which may malfunction and cause spills, leaks, or other
situations that could lead to contamination of stormwater runoff. Typical equipment to inspect
include pipes, pumps, storage tanks and bins, pressure vessels, pressure release valves,
process and material handling equipment, and stormwater management devices.
• Once equipment and areas to be inspected have been identified at the facility, establish
schedules and procedures for routine inspections.
• Periodic testing of plant equipment for structural soundness is a key element in a preventative
maintenance program.
• Promptly repair or replace defective equipment found during inspection and testing.
• Keep spare parts for equipment that needs frequent repair.
• Replace parts that are severely worn prior to failure.
• It is important to include a record keeping system for scheduling tests and documenting
inspections in the preventative maintenance program.
• Record test results and follow-up with corrective action taken. Make sure records are complete
and detailed. These records should be kept with other visual inspection records.
The key to properly tracking a preventative maintenance program is through the continual updating of
maintenance records. Records should be updated immediately after preventative maintenance, or when
any repair has been performed on any item in the plant. An annual review of these records should be
conducted to evaluate the overall effectiveness of the preventative maintenance program. Refinements to
the preventative maintenance procedures and tasking should be implemented as necessary.
Maintenance activities associated with vehicle and equipment include the following:
• Maintain clean equipment, no excessive amounts of oil and grease buildup.
• Use drip pans or absorbents where repairs are performed outside and in potential problem areas.
• Use appropriate facilities to perform repairs involving exchange of fluids and lubricants and lot
painting.
• Drain and crush oil filters before recycling or disposal.
• Clean any catch basins that receive runoff from a maintenance area.
9-1-99 NS-25
• Do not hose down work areas or use concrete cleaning products; use mops or dry sweeping
compound. Store mechanical parts and equipment under cover.
• Drain all fluids and remove batteries from salvage vehicles and equipment.
• Recycle or dispose of the following in the correct manner: greases, oils, antifreeze, brake fluid, all
cleaning solutions, hydraulic fluid, batteries, transmission fluid, worn parts, filters and rags.
• Use recycled products and substitute materials with less hazardous properties where feasible.
• Provide employee awareness training.
• Store solvents, greases, oils, hydraulic fluids, paints, thinners and hazardous materials indoors.
• Store used oil for recycling in self-contained labeled tanks.
• Keep spill response information and spill cleanup materials on the site and readily available.
• Located used oil tanks and drums away from the nearest inlet to the storm drainage system,
flowing streams and preferably indoors if possible.
Maintenance activities associated with building and grounds include:
• Chemical applicators should be required to adhere to all regulations regarding handling, storage
and application of herbicides, insecticides, fungicides and rodenticides.
• All chemicals should be handled and stored in compliance with their Material Safety Data Sheets
(MSDS).
• All chemicals should have their associated MSDS information sheets logged on the inevntory
maintained by the site administrator responsible for stormwater management.
• All materials should be stored as described in the Outdoor Materials Storage BMPs.
• Where possible, leave native vegetation undisturbed, and plant native vegetation in disturbed soil
areas, to reduce irrigation, fertilizer and pesticide needs.
• Sweeping of paved surfaces.
• Cleaning of stormwater drainage systems should occur at appropriate intervals.
• Proper disposal of wash water, sweepings and sediments should occur.
There are several advantages associated with preventative maintenance. These include:
NS-26 9-1-99
• Reduction in the amount of down time due to unanticipated equipment breakage.
• Planned equipment down time.
Disadvantages associated with preventative maintenance include:
• Additional costs.
• Availability of trained preventative maintenance staff.
9-1-99 NS-27
8.0 SPILL PREVENTION AND RESPONSE
8.1 Primary Users
Owners and operators of commercial and industrial facilities that store, process or refine liquid products.
8.2 Description
This BMP includes measures to be taken to ensure that spills do not result in water quality impacts.
Spills and leaks together are one of the largest sources of stormwater pollutants, and in most cases are
avoidable.
8.3 Application
The primary objective of the following BMPs is the prevention and reduction of discharges of pollutants to
stormwater as a result of spilled products and materials.
8.4 Implementation
8.4.1 Spill Prevention Measures

For industrial facilities and automotive related industries the following preventative strategies are:
• Identify all equipment that may be exposed to stormwater, pollutants that may be generated, and
possible sources of leaks or discharges.
• Perform regular maintenance of each piece of equipment to check for: proper operation, leaks,
malfunctions, and evidence of leaks or discharge (stains). Develop a procedure for spill reporting,
clean up, and repair.
• Drain or replace motor oil or other automotive fluids in an area away from streams or storm or
sanitary sewer inlets. Collect spent fluids and recycle or dispose of properly.
• In fueling areas, clean up spills with dry clean up methods (absorbents), and use damp cloths on
gas pumps and damp mops on floors instead of a hose.
An important part of spill prevention is employee training. Make sure employees are trained in spill
prevention practices and adhere to them.
The best way to prevent pollutants from entering the storm drains is to prevent stormwater from
contacting equipment or surfaces that may have oil, grease, or other pollutants. Some good activities to
help prevent negative impacts on stormwater quality include:
• Dispose of stormwater that has collected in containment areas properly (may need permit if
contaminated).
NS-28 9-1-99
• Adopt effective housekeeping practices.
• Ensure adequate security.
8.4.2 dentification of Spill Areas

It is important to identify potential spill areas and their drainage points to determine preventative
measures and spill response actions. Areas and activities that are most vulnerable to spills include
transportation facilities where vehicle spills could be a problem:
• Loading and Unloading areas
• Storage Areas
• Process Activities
• Dust or Particulate Generating Processes
• Waste Disposal Activities
In addition to these areas, evaluate spill potential in other areas (access roads, parking lots, power
generating facilities, etc.). It is also important to estimate the possible spill volume and drainage paths.
8.4.3 Material Handling Procedures

For industrial facilities recommended outdoor materials handling procedures include:
• Keep bulk solid materials (including raw materials, sand, gravel, topsoil, compost, concrete,
packing materials, metal products) covered and protected from stormwater.
• When possible, store materials on a paved surface.
• Hazardous materials must be stored according to federal, state, and local HazMat requirements.
• Leaks and spills from liquid containers must be contained so it is not exposed to stormwater. This
includes placement on an impermeable surface, within a curb wall, and/or under a cover.
• Try to recycle, reuse or reclaim process materials to reduce the volume brought into the facility.
Adopt a materials flow/plant layout (i.e. do not store bags that are easily punctured in high traffic
areas). Add a waste-capture circuit (e.g., collection pans for lubricating fluids).
• Adopt procedures that reduce the chance of spills or leaks during filling or transfer of materials.
• Substitute less or non-toxic materials for toxic materials.
9-1-99 NS-29
8.4.4 Spill Response Procedures and Equipment

For industrial facilities and automotive-related industries the recommended immediate response actions
are:
• Wipe up small spills with a shop rag, store shop rags in covered rag container, and dispose of
properly (or take to professional cleaning service and inform them of the materials on the rag).
• Contain medium-sized spills with absorbents (kitty litter, sawdust, etc.) and use inflatable berms
or absorbent “snakes” as temporary booms for the spill. Store and dispose of absorbents
properly. Wet/dry vacuums may also be used, but not for volatile fluids.
• For large spills, first contain the spill and plug storm drain inlets where the liquid may migrate off-
site, then clean up the spill.
8.4.5 Spill Plan Development

A spill prevention and control plan may need to be developed and implemented for certain products that
are stored, processed and refined. A Spill Prevention Plan identifies areas where spills can occur onsite,
specifies materials handling procedures, storage requirements, and identifies spill cleanup procedures.
The purpose of this plan is to establish standard operating procedures, and the necessary employee
training to minimize the likelihood of accidental releases of pollutants that can contaminate stormwater
runoff. Spill prevention is prudent from both an economic as well as environmental standpoint because
spills increase operating costs and lower productivity.
Stormwater contamination assessment, flow diversion, record keeping, internal reporting, employee
training, and preventative maintenance are associated BMPs that should be incorporated into a
comprehensive Spill Prevention Plan.
A Spill Prevention Plan is applicable to facilities that transport, transfer, and store hazardous materials,
petroleum products, and fertilizers that can contaminate stormwater runoff. An important factor of an
effective spill prevention plan is quick notification of the appropriate emergency response teams. In some
plants, each area or process may have a separate team leader and team experts.
Emergency spill cleanup plans should include the following information:
• A description of the facility including the nature of the facility activity, and general types and
quantities of chemicals stored at the facility.
• A site plan showing the location of storage areas of chemicals, the location of storm drains, site
drainage patterns, fire-fighting equipment and water source locations, and the location and
description of any devices used to contain spills such as positive control valves.
NS-30 9-1-99
• Notification procedures to be implemented in the event of a spill such as phone numbers of key
personnel and appropriate regulatory agencies.
• Instructions regarding cleanup procedures.
• Designated personnel with overall spill response cleanup responsibility.
A summary of the plan should be written and posted at appropriate points in the building (i.e., lunch
rooms, cafeteria, and areas with a high spill potential), identifying the spill cleanup coordinators, location
of cleanup kits, and phone numbers of regulatory agencies to be contacted in the event of a spill.
Cleanup of spills should begin immediately. No emulsifier or dispersant should be used.
In fueling areas, absorbent should be packaged in small bags for easy use and small drums should be
available for storage of absorbent and/or used absorbent. Absorbent materials shall not be washed down
the floor drain or into the storm sewer.
Emergency spill containment and cleanup kits should be located at the facility site. The contents of the kit
should be appropriate to the type and quantities of chemicals or goods stored at the facility.
The following procedures should be followed when implementing an emergency spill cleanup plan:
• Key personnel should receive formal training in plan execution with additional training to the
people who are likely to be the first on the site. All employees should have a basic knowledge of
spill control procedures.
• A plan summary should be posted at appropriate site locations. The summary should include the
identification of the spill cleanup coordinators, location of cleanup equipment, and phone
numbers of site personnel and regulatory agencies to be contacted in the event of a spill.
• Perform the following notifications in the event of a spill:
- Fire Department
- Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment
- State Office of Emergency Services
- National Response Center (only if spill exceeds the reportable quantity)
- Designated Stormwater Coordinator
• Containment and cleanup of any spills should begin immediately.
• Absorbents should be readily used in fueling areas.
9-1-99 NS-31
• An inventory of cleanup materials should be maintained onsite and strategically deployed based
on the type and quantities of chemicals present.
Table NS-1 lists the advantages and disadvantages of different BMPs for spills.
Limitations
Spill prevention planning can be limited by the following:
• Lack of employee motivation to implement plan.
• Lack of commitment from senior management.
• Key individuals identified in the Spill Prevention Plan may not be properly trained in the areas of
spill prevention, response, and cleanup.
Table NS-1—Advantages and Disadvantages of BMPs for Spill Prevention and Response BMPs
Best Management Practice Advantages Disadvantages

Drip pans – pans used to contain Inexpensive; simple installation and Small volumes; inspected and
small volumes of leaks operation; possible reuse/recycle of cleaned frequently; must be secured
material; empty/ discarded containers during poor weather conditions,
can be used as drip pans personnel must be trained in proper
disposal methods
Covering –enclosure of outdoor Simple and effective; usually Frequent inspection, possible health/
materials, equipment, containers, inexpensive safety problems if built over certain
or processes activities, large structures can be
expensive
Vehicle positioning – locating Inexpensive, easy, effective May require redesign of loading and
trucks or rail cars to prevent spills unloading areas, requires signage to
during transfer of materials designated areas
Loading/Unloading by Air Quick and simple; economical if Costly to install and maintain; may be
Pressure or Vacuum – for materials can be recovered; minimize inappropriate for denser materials,
transfer of dry chemicals or solids exposure of pollutants to stormwater site-specific design; dust collectors
may need permit under Clean Air Act
Sweeping – with brooms to Inexpensive, no special training; Labor-intensive; limited to small
remove small quantities of dry recycling opportunities releases of dry materials, requires
chemicals/ solids exposed to disposal to solid waste container
precipitation
Shoveling – for removal of large Inexpensive; recycling opportunities, Labor-intensive; not appropriate for
quantities of dry materials, wet remediate larger releases; wet and large spills, requires backfill of
solids and sludge dry releases excavated areas to maintain grade
Excavation – by plow or backhoe Cost effective for cleaning up dry Less precise, less recycling and
for large releases of dry material materials release; common and reuse opportunities, may require
and contaminated areas simple imported material for backfill
Dust Control (Industrial) – water May reduce respiratory problems in More expensive than manual
spraying, negative pressure employees around the site; may systems; difficult to maintain by plant
systems, collector systems, filter cause less loss of material and save personnel; labor and equipment
systems, street sweeping money; efficient collection of larger intensive; street sweepers may not be
dust particles effective for all pollutants
NS-32 9-1-99
Best Management Practice Advantages Disadvantages

Signs and Labels Inexpensive and easily used Must be updated/maintained so they
are legible, subject to vandalism and
loss
Security – to prevent accidental Preventative safeguard; easier May not be feasible for smaller
or intentional release of materials detection of vandals, thieves, spills, facilities; may be costly; may increase
leaks, releases; prevents spills with energy costs due to increased
better lighting, no unauthorized lighting; dispersed locations require
access to facility individuals enclosures, requires
maintenance
Area Control Measures – good Easy to implement; results in cleaner May be seen as tedious by
housekeeping measures, brushing facility and improved work employees and may not be followed
off clothing before leaving area, environment
etc.
Preservation of Natural Can handle more stormwater runoff Planning required to preserve and
Vegetation than newly seeded areas; effective maintain existing vegetation; may not
immediately; increases filter capacity; be cost effective with high land costs;
enhances aesthetics; provides areas may constrict area available for
for infiltration; wildlife can remain construction activities, may require
undisturbed; provides noise buffers; signage or fencing, subject to
less maintenance than new disturbance
vegetation
Temporary seeding – short-term Inexpensive and easy to do; Requires soil preparation, may
vegetative cover on disturbed establishes plant cover quickly in require mulching or reseeding of
areas good conditions; stabilizes soils well; failed areas, seasonally limited, may
aesthetic; sedimentation controls for require signage or fencing, subject to
other site areas; helps reduce disturbance
maintenance costs of other controls
9-1-99 NS-33
DRAINAGE CRITERIA MANUAL (V. 3) CONSTRUCTION BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES
CONSTRUCTION BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES

CONTENTS
Section Page
C-
1.0 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................. 1
1.1 General ............................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 Performance Objectives ..................................................................................................... 3
1.3 Erosion and Sediment Control Plan ................................................................................... 3
1.3.1 Narrative Report .................................................................................................... 4
1.3.2 Site Plan ................................................................................................................ 5
1.3.3 Approval of Construction Storm Water Management Plan ................................... 7
1.3.4 Exemptions and Variances.................................................................................... 7
1.4 Summary of Construction Site Management Permit Compliance Phases......................... 9
1.4.1 Permit Application Phase ...................................................................................... 9
1.4.2 Construction Phase ............................................................................................... 9
1.4.3 Revegetation Phase ............................................................................................ 10
2.0 FUNDAMENTALS FOR THE MANAGEMENT OF CONSTRUCTION SITES.............................. 14
2.1 Erosion and Sedimentation .............................................................................................. 14
2.1.1 Erosion................................................................................................................. 14
2.1.2 Sedimentation...................................................................................................... 15
2.1.3 Factors Influencing Erosion ................................................................................. 15
2.1.4 Principles of Erosion and Sediment Control........................................................ 15
2.2 Summary of Construction Site Management Criteria ....................................................... 16
2.3 Planning Process.............................................................................................................. 19
2.3.1 Site Assessment .................................................................................................. 19
2.3.2 Selection of Controls ........................................................................................... 20
2.4 Consistency with Other Plans........................................................................................... 21
2.4.1 Drainage Plans .................................................................................................... 21
2.4.2 Stormwater Quality Management Plan (SWMP) ................................................. 21
2.4.3 Air Quality Plans .................................................................................................. 22
3.0 CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES MANAGEMENT – PLANNING AND IMPLEMENTATION.......... 26
3.1 Chemical and Petroleum Products Storage ..................................................................... 26
3.2 Waste Area and Storage .................................................................................................. 26
3.3 Staging and Equipment Maintenance Areas .................................................................... 27
3.4 Concrete Truck Washout and Equipment Cleaning ......................................................... 27
3.5 Dewatering........................................................................................................................ 27
4.0 EROSION CONTROL MEASURES - PLANNING AND IMPLEMENTING ................................... 31
4.1 Surface Roughening ......................................................................................................... 31
4.2 Mulching ........................................................................................................................... 32
4.3 Revegetation..................................................................................................................... 34
4.3.1 Seedbed Preparation........................................................................................... 34
4.3.2 Temporary Revegetation ..................................................................................... 35
4.3.3 Permanent Revegetation..................................................................................... 35
4.4 Roads and Soil Stockpiles................................................................................................ 39
5.0 SEDIMENT CONTROL MEASURES - PLANNING AND IMPLEMENTING ................................. 44
5.1 Vehicle Tracking ............................................................................................................... 44
5.2 Slope-Length and Runoff Considerations ........................................................................ 45
5.2.1 Slope Diversions and Diversion Dikes ................................................................ 46
5.2.2 Roads and Roadside Swales .............................................................................. 46
2007-10 C-i
5.2.3 Terracing ..............................................................................................................47

5.2.4 Slope Drains.........................................................................................................47
5.3 Sediment Entrapment Facilities ........................................................................................47
5.3.1 Sediment Control Log ..........................................................................................48
5.3.2 Silt Fence .............................................................................................................48
5.3.3 Sediment Basins ..................................................................................................49
5.3.4 Design Procedure: Sediment Basin ....................................................................49
5.4 Outlet Protection................................................................................................................51
5.5 Inlet Protection ..................................................................................................................52
5.5.1 Inlets Located in a Sump......................................................................................53
5.5.2 Inlets Located Along a Slope ...............................................................................53
6.0 WATERWAY PROTECTION..........................................................................................................78
6.1 Working Within or Crossing a Waterway ..........................................................................78
6.2 Temporary Channel Diversions.........................................................................................80
6.2.1 Temporary Diversion Sizing .................................................................................80
6.2.2 Stability Considerations........................................................................................81
6.2.3 Example: Temporary Diversion Design ..............................................................82
7.0 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION – PLANNING AND IMPLEMENTATION .............91
8.0 DISPOSITION OF TEMPORARY MEASURES .............................................................................92
9.0 MAINTENANCE .............................................................................................................................93
Tables
Table C-1—Maximum Time Limits of Land Exposure for Selection of Temporary Erosion Controls.........31
Table C-2—Minimum Drill Seeding Rates for Annual Grasses ..................................................................36
Table C-3—Minimum Drill Seeding Rates for Perennial Grasses ..............................................................37
Table C-4—Seeding Dates for Annual and Perennial Grasses..................................................................39
Table C-5—Sediment Entrapment Facility Limitations ...............................................................................47
Table C-6—Lining Materials for Temporary Channels................................................................................82
Table C-7—Temporary Channel Design Criteria ........................................................................................83
Figures
Figure C1-1—Map Symbols ........................................................................................................................11

Figure C2-1—Example Subdivision Construction Site – Initial Rough Grading Phase ..............................23
Figure C2-2—Example Subdivision Construction Site – Main Construction Phase ...................................24
Figure C2-3—Example Subdivision Construction Site – Final Completion Phase .....................................25
Figure C3-1—Guidance for Locating a Construction Staging and Equipment Storage Area.....................28
Figure C3-2—Concrete Washout Area .......................................................................................................29
Figure C3-3—Dewatering Details ...............................................................................................................30
Figure C4-1—Surface Roughening.............................................................................................................40
Figure C4-2—Mulching ...............................................................................................................................41
Figure C4-3—Orientation of Erosion Control Blankets, Netting and Matting..............................................42
Figure C5-1—Temporary Vehicle Tracking Control....................................................................................54
Figure C5-2—Temporary Vehicle Tracking Control With Wash Rack ........................................................55
C-ii 2007-10
Figure C5-3—Temporary Diversion Dike & Ditch....................................................................................... 56

Figure C5-4—Rough-Cut Street Control .................................................................................................... 57
Figure C5-5—Terracing .............................................................................................................................. 58
Figure C5-6—Temporary Slope Drain........................................................................................................ 59
Figure C5-7—Illustration of a Temporary Slope Drain Installation............................................................. 60
Figure C5-8—Sediment Control Log .......................................................................................................... 61
Figure C5-9—Sediment Control Log Application Examples ...................................................................... 62
Figure C5-10—Silt Fence Erosion Barrier .................................................................................................. 63
Figure C5-11—Locating Erosion Silt Fence Residential on Residential Lot .............................................. 64
Figure C5-12—Standardized Temporary Sediment Basin ......................................................................... 65
Figure C5-13—Standardized Temporary Sediment Trap .......................................................................... 67
Figure C5-14—Faircloth Skimmer Floating Outlet ..................................................................................... 68
Figure C5-15—Use of Baffles in a Sediment Basin to Prevent Short-circuiting by Inflow ......................... 69
Figure C5-16—Outlet Protection for a Culvert in a Channel ...................................................................... 70
Figure C5-17—Check Dam ........................................................................................................................ 71
Figure C5-18—Gabion Reinforced Check Dam ......................................................................................... 72
Figure C5-19—Area Inlet Protection using Silt Fencing............................................................................. 73
Figure C5-20—Curb Opening Inlet Gravel Filter in a Sump....................................................................... 74
Figure C5-21—Area Inlet Protection in a Sump Using Reinforced Gravel Filter ....................................... 75
Figure C5-22—Drop Inlet Protection–Excavated Drop Inlet Sediment Trap.............................................. 76
Figure C5-23—Inlet Protection on Slope–Curb Sock................................................................................. 77
Figure C6-1—Temporary Culvert Stream Crossing ................................................................................... 84
Figure C6-2—Graphical Illustration of a Temporary Bridge Stream Crossing ........................................... 85
Figure C6-3—Typical Ford-Type Stream Crossing .................................................................................... 86
Figure C6-4—Graphical Illustration of a Ford-Type Stream Crossing ....................................................... 87
Figure C6-5—Detail of a Temporary Diversion Channel............................................................................ 88
Figure C6-6—Illustration of a Temporary Diversion Channel .................................................................... 89
Figure C6-7—Temporary Diversion Facility Sizing Nomograph Based on 2-year Peak Flows - Denver
Metropolitan and Adjacent Areas ............................................................................................ 90
Photographs
Photograph 1. Erosion is a common occurrence during construction activities, which results
in sediment movement off site and deposition in waterways. ............................................ 14
Photograph 2. Example of a project staging and material (behind fence) storage area.. ......................... 27
Photograph 3. Example of surface roughening with a light layer of straw mulch...................................... 32
Photograph 4. Example of a mulched bank on a newly graded waterway with a tackifier
applied to hold the hay mulch in place.. ............................................................................. 33
Photograph 5. Example of soil being carried off construction site by vehicle tires... ................................ 45
Photograph 6. Example of very poor use and installation of a silt fence................................................... 48
Photograph 7. Example of an inlet protection installation in a sump......................................................... 52
2007-10 C-iii
THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
C-iv 2007-10
1.0 INTRODUCTION
Surface runoff controls from construction sites and activities in Colorado are mandated by the Clean
Water Act of the Federal Government and enabling legislation of the State. All construction sites that
disturb at least one (1.0) acre of land in total for all phases of work must have a stormwater discharge
permit under the Colorado Discharge Permit System (CDPS). Regardless if the permit is issued as an
individual permit or under a general permit, an application along with a fee must be filed with the
Colorado Water Quality Control Division. If the work is done within the Municipal Separate Storm System
(MS4) permitted municipalities under Phase 1 or Phase 2 program, it is up to the local governing
jurisdictions have a municipal separate stormwater discharge permit to also enforce the provisions of
each discharge permit for construction activities. The State also retains the right to enforce on its own the
provisions of the permits it issues, bypassing the local jurisdiction if it so chooses.
This section of the Manual provides a set of criteria and technical guidance for erosion and sediment
control at construction sites. In addition, it describes best management practices (BMPs) for waterway
protection, utility construction and non-sediment material storage. A waterway in this chapter is a term
that may be used to refer to a drainageway, gulch, creek, stream, river, lake, reservoir or wetland. Also,
provided are suggested minimum plan submittal requirements, planning considerations, general
exemptions, and variances that cities, counties, stormwater utilities and authorities and other Municipal
Separate Stormwater Sewer System discharge permit holders (hereafter called “municipality(ies)”) may
wish to follow. The practices contained in this document should be viewed as suggested minimum
requirements. A model erosion control ordinance is included in APPENDIX A. An example erosion and
sediment control plan is included in APPENDIX B. A glossary of terms is also provided in APPENDIX C.
It is incumbent on the owner and/or the contractor to develop a Storm Water Management Plan (SWMP)
that includes plans for construction activities management and plans and specifications for all phases of
construction activities and facilities to control erosion and sediment movement from the construction
activities. It is also incumbent on the owner to obtain a permit for said construction activities from the
State and the local jurisdiction. The issuance of these permits does not relieve the owner/contractor from
addressing and obtaining, as needed, other local, State and Federal permits (e.g., setting up and
operation of a batch plant permit, permit for work in a floodplain, Corps of Engineers 404 Permit, building
permit, etc.).
Most local jurisdictions require that the SWMP be prepared and signed by a professional engineer. The
SWMP then is used as the basis for obtaining the construction permit. However, if it is observed by the
owner, contractor, or inspector that the implementation of the SWMP is not adequately controlling
sediment movement or other pollutants off the site, measures must be taken immediately, but in on case
exceeding one week, to correct the observed deficiencies and/or problem and the SWMP modified
accordingly. The initially developed SWMP has to be viewed as a starting point that may be modified as
2007-10 C-1
the work progresses and its effectiveness is tested in the field. However, it is incumbent on the
owner/contractor to implement the SWMP fully and to adhere to it until such time it is modified by
conditions observed in the field or as required by the local or State inspector based on observed
deficiencies in the field.
Under the State Law, the primary responsibility for inspections of the construction activities is with the
permit holder, namely the owner/contractor of the site. The purpose for these inspections and owner’s
oversight is to insure that the SWMP is fully implemented and followed to cure any deficiencies that are
discovered during the project.
The local jurisdiction must also conduct inspections on either a regular schedule or random basis in order
to meet its MS4 permit conditions. If these inspections discover deficiencies in how the SWMP is being
implemented and is performing under dry or wet weather conditions and these deficiencies are not
addressed, the inspector has few options other than to issue a notice of non-compliance or violation and
require immediate action be taken to address the deficiencies. Failure to do so, or a record of continued
non-compliance, can result in enforcement action and fines. In addition, the State and EPA may conduct
inspections at any time they choose to do so.
Issuance of a notice of violation (NOV) by the State sets the stage for enforcement action and fines. A
finding of violation by the State or EPA can lead to very serious and costly enforcement action. This is a
regulatory program with many potential consequences and has to be taken seriously by the local
jurisdiction and the permit holders. Conducting construction activities without a permit when one is
needed has the potential of criminal action enforcement being taken against the violating party, which not
only can carry much higher fines, but has a potential for jail sentences.
1.1 General
These criteria were developed to help mitigate the increased soil erosion and subsequent deposition of
sediment off-site during the period of construction from start of earth disturbance until final landscaping
and stormwater quality measures are effectively in place, accepted by the local jurisdiction and the permit
issued by the State is closed out.
A SWMP must be developed that has a detailed plan for each phase of the project that will minimize
erosion and sediment movement and provide for construction activities management, namely:
• Overlot grading phase
• Road and utility construction phase
• Major site revegetation phase
• Home building phase
C-2 2007-10
• Final acceptance phase
The SWMP shall be submitted to the municipality having local jurisdiction for land development to obtain
a construction and/or site grading permit. Site planning and drainage planning should, whenever
possible, occur concurrently with site grading and erosion control planning. The SWMP may have to be
modified at the time a final site development plan is prepared to better address the site conditions as it is
developed. This modified plan must be approved by local jurisdiction.
Implementation and maintenance of erosion control measures are ultimately the responsibility of the
permit holder and the project/property owner. Because site conditions will affect the suitability and
effectiveness of erosion control measures, a plan specific to each site is required. The municipality has
the responsibility under State of Colorado laws, rules and regulations to insure that the site-specific
construction SWMP, that includes erosion and sedimentation controls, is implemented.
Nothing in these criteria limits the right of individual municipalities to impose additional or more stringent
standards.
1.2 Performance Objectives
The objectives for erosion control during construction include the following:
1. Conduct all land disturbing activities in a manner that effectively reduces accelerated soil
erosion and reduces sediment movement and deposition off site.
2. Schedule construction activities to minimize the total amount of soil exposed at any given time
to reduce the period of accelerated soil erosion.
3. Establish temporary or permanent cover on areas that have been disturbed as soon as
possible after grading is completed.
4. Design and construct all temporary or permanent facilities for the conveyance of water around,
through, or from the disturbed area to limit the flow of water to non-erosive velocities.
5. Remove sediment caused by accelerated soil erosion from surface runoff water before it
leaves the site.
6. Stabilize the areas of land disturbance with permanent vegetative cover and stormwater quality
control measures.
1.3 Erosion and Sediment Control Plan
An SWMP consisting of a written narrative report and a site plan map must be submitted to the
appropriate local government for review and approval. At a minimum, the SWMP must contain the
requirements listed in the CDPHE document "General Permit Application and Stormwater Management
2007-10 C-3
Plan Preparation Guidance" available at www.cdphe.state.co.us/wq/PermitsUnit/stormwater under the

Stormwater Construction category. Figure C1-1 provides standard symbols that can be used on such
plans.
1.3.1 Narrative Report

The narrative report must contain, or refer to, the drainage report for the SWMP and should contain, at
the minimum, the following:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of the applicant. The name, address, and telephone
number of the professional engineer preparing the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan should
also be included if different from the applicant.
2. Project description - A brief description of the nature and purpose of the land disturbing activity,
the total area of the site, the area of disturbance involved, and project location including
township, range, section, and quarter-section, or the latitude and longitude, of the approximate
center of the project.
3. Existing site conditions - A description of the existing topography, vegetation, and drainage; and a
description of any wetlands on the site.
4. Adjacent areas - A description of neighboring areas such as streams, lakes, residential areas,
roads, etc., which might be affected by the land disturbance.
5. Soils - A brief description of the soils on the site including information on soil type and character.
(This information may be obtained from the soil report for the site, or, if available, from soils
reports from adjacent sites if acceptable to the municipality).
6. Areas and Volumes - An estimate of the quantity (in cubic yards) of excavation and fill involved,
and the surface area (in acres) of the proposed disturbance.
7. Erosion and sediment control measures - A description of the methods described in this chapter
of the Manual which will be used to control erosion and sediment on the site.
8. Timing schedule indicating the anticipated starting and completion time periods of the site
grading and/or construction sequence, including the installation and removal time periods of
erosion and sediment control measures, and the time of exposure of each area prior to the
completion of temporary erosion and sediment control measures.
9. Permanent stabilization - A brief description, including specifications, of how the site will be
stabilized after construction is completed.
10. Stormwater management considerations - Explain how stormwater runoff from and through the
site will be handled during construction. Provide a brief description of the post-construction
C-4 2007-10
stormwater quality control measures to be included as a part of the site development.
11. Maintenance - A schedule of regular inspections during construction and repair of erosion and
sediment control structures should be described. A description of routine sediment basin
maintenance should also be included.
12. The estimated total cost (installation and maintenance) of the SWMP to assist the municipality in
determining surety or bonding requirements for the proposed plan.
13. Calculations - Any calculations made for the design of such items as sediment basins, diversions,
waterways; and calculations for runoff and stormwater detention basin design (if applicable).
14. Other information or data as may be reasonably required by the municipality.
15. A surety, bond, letter-of-credit, escrow account or other financial arrangement acceptable to the
municipality and submitted in an amount sufficient to implement the SWMP and maintain for a
period of one year the temporary and permanent erosion and sediment control measures
described in the plan.
16. The following note - "This Storm Water Management Plan has been placed in the (insert name of
municipality) file for this project, and appears to fulfill the (name of municipality) technical criteria
for the management of construction activities and associated erosion and sedimentation controls.
I understand that additional control measures may be needed if unforeseen pollutant transport
problems are determined by (insert name of municipality) to occur during this project or if the
submitted plan does not function as intended. The requirements of this plan shall run with the
land and be the obligation of the owner until such time as the project covered by this plan is
properly completed, modified or voided."
17. Signature page for owner/developer acknowledging the review and acceptance of responsibility,
and a statement by the Professional Engineer acknowledging responsibility for the preparation of
the SWMP.
1.3.2 Site Plan

The site plan must show:
1. A general location map at a scale of 1-inch to 1,000-feet to 1-inch to 8,000-feet indicating the
general vicinity of the site location.
2. The property lines for the site on which the work will be performed.
3. The construction SWMP at a scale of 1-inch to 20-feet (up to 1-inch to 200-feet as accepted by
municipality) with a separate sheets for each phase of site development construction (see
Section 1.1, above, for list of possible phases). The plan must include:
2007-10 C-5
a. Existing topography at one- or two-foot contour intervals. The map should extend a minimum
of 50-feet beyond the property line or beyond the project’s soil disturbance limits, whichever
is larger.
b. Proposed topography at one- or two-foot contour intervals. The map should show elevations,
dimensions, location, extent and the slope of all proposed grading, including building site and
driveway grades, if known.
c. Location of any existing structures or hydrologic features on the site.
d. Location of all structures or natural features on the land adjacent to the site and within a
minimum of 100 feet of the site boundary line. The map must show the location of the street
gutter, storm sewer, channel or other waters receiving storm runoff from the site.
e. Location of all proposed structures and development on the site, if known.
f. Limits of clearing and grading - Areas which are to be cleared and graded.
g. Location of soil stockpiles - Areas designated for topsoil and subsoil storage.
h. Location of storage equipment maintenance and temporary disposal areas - Areas

designated for equipment, fuel, lubricants, chemical, concrete truck washout and all
temporary construction waste storage. All these areas shall be cleaned out and reclaimed at
end of project and waste disposed at legal disposal sites.
i. Location of temporary roads designated for use during the construction period.
j. Plans of all drainage features, paved areas, retaining walls, cribbing, planting, temporary or
permanent soil erosion control measures or other features to be constructed in connection
with, or as a part of, the proposed work together with a map showing the drainage area of
land tributary to the site and estimated 2-year runoff of the area served by all drains. Depict
all erosion control measures using the standard map symbols given in Figure C1-1.
k. Detail drawings and specifications - Design drawings and specifications for erosion and
sediment controls, temporary diversions and all other practices used for each phase of site
development that may or may not be referenced to in these criteria.
l. Other information or data as may be reasonably required by the municipality.
m. The following note: "This Storm Water Management Plan has been placed in the (insert
name of municipality) file for this project and appears to fulfill applicable erosion control and
construction management criteria. I understand that additional erosion control measures
may be required of the owner due to unforeseen erosion, sediment or other pollutant
transport off the site or if the submitted plan does not function as intended. The requirements
C-6 2007-10
of this plan shall run with the land and be the obligation of the owner until such time as the
project covered by this plan is properly completed, modified or voided".
n. Signature block for owner (or agent) acknowledging the review and acceptance of
responsibility, and a signed and stamped statement by the Professional Engineer
acknowledging responsibility for the preparation of the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan.
1.3.3 Approval of Construction Storm Water Management Plan

The SWMP must be approved prior to issuance of an Overlot Grading or Site Disturbance Permit by the
municipality. The final SWMP must be consistent with a Drainage Report accepted by the municipality of
jurisdiction. However, approval of the SWMP does not imply acceptance or approval of Drainage Plans,
Utility Plans, Street or Road Plans, Design of Retaining Walls or any other aspect of site development.
1.3.4 Exemptions and Variances

A provision for exemptions and variances may be provided by a municipality. These are generally
processed according to the applicable municipal regulations and reviewed on a case-by-case basis.
1. Exemptions from the erosion control planning process may be considered for any of the following
by the local jurisdiction if their MS4 permit so allows; however, exempting the owner from the
preparation and submittal of a SWMP and/or from applying for a grading permit does not exempt
the owner from controlling erosion and sediment movement off the construction site:
a. Agricultural use of land.
b. Grading or an excavation below finished grade for basements, footings, retaining walls, or
other structures on single family lots not a part of a larger development or redevelopment
project and disturbing a total land surface of less than one (1) acre in size unless required
otherwise by local jurisdiction.
c. A sidewalk or driveway authorized by a valid permit.
d. Land-disturbing activities involving less than a total of one (1) acre of disturbed area.
Individual lots involving less than one (1) acre of disturbed area in a larger land use change
project shall not be considered separate development projects, but rather as a part of the
subdivision development as a whole and are not eligible for an exemption. It will be the
responsibility of the homeowner or homebuilder to conform to all requirements of the locally-
approved SWMP for the development or redevelopment. As part of any Building Permit
within a larger development for which an individual erosion control plan is not required, it is
recommended the following statement be included: "We have reviewed the Construction
Storm Water Management Plan for (subdivision name) and agree to conform to all
requirements contained therein and all erosion control requirements of the (insert name of
municipality) and the State of Colorado. We further agree to construct and maintain all
2007-10 C-7
erosion and sediment control measures required on the individual lot(s) subject to this
Building Permit and/or in accordance with the provisions of the Construction Best
Management Practices chapter of the Manual published by the Urban Drainage and Flood
Control District."
e. Underground utility construction including the installation, maintenance and repair of all
utilities under hard-surfaced roads, streets or sidewalks provided such land-disturbing activity
is confined to the area which is hard-surfaced and provided that runoff and erosion from soil
stockpiles are confined and will not enter the drainage system.
f. Gravel, sand, dirt or topsoil removal as authorized pursuant to approval of the Colorado
Mined Land Reclamation Board, provided said approval includes a construction activities
management, erosion and sediment control plan that meets the minimums specified.
g. Projects having a period of exposure (from time of land disturbance until permanent erosion
control measures are installed) of less than 14 days.
h. Where the owner certifies in writing to municipality and the municipality agrees in writing
that the planned work and the final structures or topographical changes will not result in, or
contribute to, soil erosion or sediment discharges to any waterway or irrigation ditch and will
not interfere with any existing drainage course or waterway in such a manner as to cause
damage to any adjacent property, or result in the deposition of debris or sediment on any
public right-of-way, will not present any hazard to any persons or property, and will have no
detrimental influence upon the public welfare, or upon other properties in the watershed.
2. Variances - Municipalities may consider waiving or modifying any of the criteria which are
deemed inappropriate or too restrictive for site conditions by granting a variance, provided such
variance does not violate the laws of the State of Colorado or the Federal government.
Variances may be granted at the time of plan submission or request for plan revision. Variances
must be requested in accordance with the subdivision regulations and must define:
a. The criteria from which the applicant seeks a variance.
b. The justification for not complying with the criteria.
c. Alternate criteria or standard measures to be used in lieu of these criteria. The criteria and
practices specified within this section of the Manual relate to the application of specific
erosion and sediment control practices. Other practices or modifications to specified
practices may be used if approved by the municipality prior to installation. Such practices
must be thoroughly described and detailed to the satisfaction of the local municipality
reviewing and approving the erosion control plan.
C-8 2007-10
To expedite the review and decisions on variance requests, it is suggested that a variance request be
included with, or submitted prior to, the initial SWMP submittal.
1.4 Summary of Construction Site Management Permit Compliance Phases
This section summarizes the sequence of phases and requirements in general terms of the construction
activities permit program. Specifics may vary among local jurisdiction and anyone applying for a permit
should first check with the local jurisdiction what are its expectations and requirements.
1.4.1 Permit Application Phase

During this phase, it is recommended the owner or the contractor secure the services of a professional
engineer knowledgeable in construction management practices to develop the SWMP. The engineer
needs to check with the local jurisdiction regarding the specific requirements and expectations for its
preparation, review and submittal.
The SWMP needs to be submitted, along with the permit application and fee, to the local jurisdiction. The
SWMP will be reviewed by the local jurisdiction and its comments will need to be addressed.
After the SWMP has been approved or accepted by the local jurisdiction, the owner or contractor needs
to apply for a construction activities permit from the Colorado Water Quality Division, or from the locally
qualified jurisdiction that can issue stormwater discharge permits for 1-5 acre construction sites instead of
the CDPHE. For the latest requirements go to www.cdphe.state.co.us/wq/PermitsUnit/stormwater/.
1.4.2 Construction Phase

During the construction phase, the following sequence is recommended for the implementation of the
project and the SWMP:
1. The owner and/or the contractor designate a manager for the implementation of the SWMP. This
person will be responsible for implementing all permit conditions and will communicate with local
jurisdiction inspectors and the inspectors from other agencies.
2. Install all BMPs shown on the SWMP that need to be installed in advance of proceeding with
construction, such as roadway entrance pads, silt fences, construction access control fences, etc.
3. Identify construction equipment and materials storage and maintenance areas and install BMPs
to prevent pollutant migration from them.
4. Notify the local jurisdiction that the site is ready for inspection.
5. Install any additional BMPs that are called for in the SWMP or the inspector before overlot
grading begins.
6. Strip off and stockpile topsoil for reuse. Mulch areas that will remain undisturbed for more than
two weeks during the April through September rainstorm season (e.g., stockpiles and overlot
2007-10 C-9
graded areas that will remain dormant for extended period of time), or for more than a month
during the October through March period.
7. Insure that BMPs that need to be installed at different times during the project are installed when
called for in the SWMP or by the inspector and are in full operation before construction activities
begin in areas served by them.
8. After all work has been completed, including revegetations, clean out and restore any post
construction BMPs that may have been used for construction sediment controls.
9. Prepare the site for inspection by local jurisdiction and arrange for this inspection. Correct all
deficiencies and call for follow-up inspection.
1.4.3 Revegetation Phase

Revegetate the site as called for in the SWMP.
The owner or contractor needs to arrange for inspection by the local jurisdiction when the vegetation has
reached acceptable level of coverage and maturity. This could take months. In the meantime, the owner
or contractor need to inspect the site on a regular basis to determine if there are deficiencies or damage
that need to be addressed. The owner is responsible for the performance of all erosion and
sedimentation control installations until such time the site’s revegetation is deemed acceptable and a
written notice is provided to the owner by the local jurisdiction.
Once revegetation has been accepted, request release of any surety, letters of credit or other financial
guarantees the local jurisdiction may have required the permit holder provide at the time the permit is
issued. A closure of the construction activities permit from the State should also be pursued at this time.
C-10 2007-10
Figure C1-1—Map Symbols
2007-10 C-11
Figure C-1-1—Map Symbols (Continued)
C-12 2007-10
Figure C-1-1—Map Symbols (Continued)
2007-10 C-13
2.0 FUNDAMENTALS FOR THE MANAGEMENT OF CONSTRUCTION SITES
2.1 Erosion and Sedimentation
2.1.1 Erosion
Soil erosion is the process by which the land surface is worn away by the action of wind, water, ice and
gravity. This section of the Manual addresses erosion caused by water and wind. The rate of soil erosion
is increased greatly by many urban activities--especially construction activities. Any activity that disturbs
the natural soil and vegetation increases the erosion potential because bare and loose soil is easily
moved by wind or water.
Photograph 1. Erosion is a common occurrence during construction activities, which

results in sediment movement off site and deposition in waterways (Photo provided by
Douglas County).
Wind erosion is caused when winds of sufficient velocity create movement of soil particles. The potential
for wind erosion is dependent upon soil cover, soil particle size, wind velocity, duration of wind and
unsheltered distance. Within the Denver metropolitan area winds can exceed 60 miles per hour (mph),
and occasionally exceed 100 mph. Wind erosion can begin at a wind velocity as low as 10 mph, and can
even result from turbulence created by passing vehicles.
Water erosion has five primary mechanisms: raindrop erosion, sheet erosion, rill erosion, gully erosion,
and channel erosion. Raindrops detach soil particles and splash them into the air. These detached
particles are then vulnerable to be carried off by stormwater runoff or snowmelt. Shallow surface flows
rarely move as a uniform sheet for more than several feet before concentrating in surface irregularities,
known as rills. As the flow changes from a shallow sheet to a deeper rill flow, the flow velocity and shear
stresses increase, which detach and transport soil particles. This action begins to cut into the soil mantle
and form small channels. Rills are small, well-defined channels which are only a few inches deep.
Gullies occur as the flows in rills come together into larger and larger channels. The major difference
C-14 2007-10
between rill and gully erosion is size. Rills caused by erosion can be smoothed out by standard surface
treatments such as harrowing. Gully erosion on the other hand cannot be repaired with standard farming
equipment and requires heavy equipment to regrade and stabilize the gullies.
2.1.2 Sedimentation
During a typical rainstorm in Colorado, runoff normally builds up rapidly to a peak and then diminishes.
Because the amount of sediment a watercourse can carry is dependent upon the velocity and volume of
runoff, sediment is deposited as runoff decreases. The deposited sediments may be resuspended when
future runoff events occur. In this way, sediments are moved progressively downstream in the waterway
system.
Windblown silt and sand particles are deposited whenever the force of the wind lessens. Much of the
wind-eroded material is deposited behind fences, in landscaped areas or downwind of buildings or other
obstructions to the wind. (Dust will form "drifts" just like snow.) Materials transported by bouncing or
creeping along the surface are often trapped in surface irregularities near the point of initial movement.
2.1.3 Factors Influencing Erosion

Physical properties of soils such as particle size, cohesiveness, and density affect its erodibility. Loose
silt and sand-sized particles are more susceptible to erosion than "sticky" clay soils. Rocky soils are also
less susceptible to wind erosion, but are often found on steep slopes that are subject to water erosion.
Most of the soils in Colorado are susceptible to either wind or water erosion, or both.
When surface vegetative cover and soil structure are disturbed, the soil's erodibility potential increases.
Construction activities disrupt the soil structure and its vegetative cover. Examples are excavation and
grading for construction of homes, roads, utilities and commercial and industrial areas.
Vegetation plays an extremely important role in controlling erosion. Roots bind particles together and the
leaves or blades of grass reduce raindrop impact forces on the soil. Grass, forest floor litter and other
ground cover not only traps rain to promote infiltration but also reduces runoff velocity and shear stress at
the surface. Vegetation reduces wind velocity at the ground surface, and provides a rougher surface
which will trap particles moving along the ground. Once vegetation is removed, soils are no longer
protected and erosion proceeds unchecked.
2.1.4 Principles of Erosion and Sediment Control

Erosion controls limit the amount and rate of erosion occurring on disturbed areas. Sediment controls
attempt to capture the soil that has been eroded before it leaves the construction site. Despite the use of
both erosion control and sediment control measures (at times referred to as Construction Best
Management Practices (CBMPs)), it is recognized that some amount of sediment will remain in runoff
leaving a construction site.
Construction activities management, including erosion and sediment control, has to address four major
2007-10 C-15
elements:
1. The erosion control measures that will be used to limit erosion of soil from disturbed areas at a
construction site;
2. The sediment control measures to limit transport of sediment off-site to downstream properties
and receiving waters,
3. The waterway protection measures to protect waterways located on or downstream of the

construction site from erosion and sediment damages; and
4. The construction practices management to limit pollutant movement off site resulting from
construction equipment maintenance and storage and from materials storage and handling.
Erosion controls are surface treatments that stabilize soil exposed by excavation or grading. Erosion
control measures are source controls.
Sediment controls capture soil that has been eroded. Soil particles suspended in runoff can be filtered
through a porous media or deposited by slowing the flow and allowing the natural process of
sedimentation to occur. Sediment controls are facilities built to perform this function. They are often
referred to as structural controls.
Waterway control measures protect channels or storm sewers during construction. These can be
accomplished by limiting equipment travel across a waterway, constructing temporary channel crossings,
or diverting a waterway into a temporary channel while work is done on the waterway. Where storm
sewers are used, sediment can be filtered prior to entry of runoff into the storm sewer.
The impacts to water quality resulting from construction management facilities can be managed by
controls on equipment, material storage including temporary disposal sites, vehicle wash off and concrete
truck washout facilities, use of chemicals and other practices by the contractor at the construction site.
2.2 Summary of Construction Site Management Criteria
The list below is a summary of construction site best management practices, namely CBMPs, as
described in the Manual:
• Chemicals, Oils and Material Storage. Areas used for staging of construction activities and the
storage of chemicals, petroleum-based products and waste materials, including solid and liquid
waste, shall be designed to prevent discharge of pollutants in the runoff from a construction site.
(Section 3.1).
• Minimize Disturbed Area. Minimize the amount of land stripped of vegetation and graded to
reduce erosion. Undisturbed lands have their own natural soil erosion retardance that disturbed
soils do not. Staging of construction areas is one of the more effective ways of keeping erosion
C-16 2007-10
from occurring, or at least reducing it significantly. (Section 4.0)
• Erosion Control. Permanent or temporary soil surface stabilization must be applied to disturbed
areas and soil stockpiles as soon as possible but no later than 14 days after final grade is
reached on any portion of the site. Soil surface stabilization should also be applied as soon as
possible, but no later than 14 days, to disturbed areas that may not be at final grade but will
remain dormant (undisturbed) for a period that does not exceed 60 days. (Section 4.0).
• Surface Roughening. Surface roughening should be performed after final grading to create
depressions two (2) to four (4) inches deep and four (4) to six (6) inches apart. (Section 4.1).
• Mulching. All disturbed areas must be properly mulched, or seeded and mulched, within 14 days
after final grade is reached on any portion of the site not otherwise permanently stabilized.
Proper mulching should include a tackifier to bind the mulch. (Section 4.2).
• Revegetation. A vegetative cover should be established within one (1) year on all disturbed
areas and soil stockpiles not otherwise permanently stabilized. Vegetation is not considered
established until a ground cover is achieved which is equivalent of at least 70 percent of the pre-
existing vegetation and is sufficiently mature to control soil erosion and can survive severe
weather conditions. (Section 4.3).
• Temporary Revegetation. Temporary revegetation is required on all disturbed areas having a

prior period of exposure of one (1) to two (2) years before final stabilization takes place. All
temporary seeding shall be properly mulched. (Section 4.3.2).
• Permanent Revegetation. Establish permanent revegetation on all disturbed areas that will have
a period of exposure for an indeterminate length of time exceeding one (1) year. A perennial
grass mix should be planted and mulched. (Section 4.3.3)
• Roads and Soil Stockpiles. Road cuts, road fills and parking lot areas should be covered as early
as possible with the appropriate aggregate base course where this is specified as part of the
pavement. This practice is not needed when final construction of roads will take place within 30
days of reaching final subgrade level (Section 4.4)
o Seed and mulch or otherwise stabilize using soil binders all non-paved portions of roads as
soon as possible after final grading has occurred, but in no case later than 14 days after
grading has been completed.
o Seed and mulch soil stockpiles expected to be in place longer than 60 days within 14 days
after completion of stockpile establishment. Mulch only is acceptable if expected to be in
place less than 60 days but more than 30 days.
2007-10 C-17
o If stockpiles are located within 100 feet of a waterway, additional sediment controls, such as
a diversion dikes or silt fences, should be provided.
• Sediment Control. Properties and roadways adjacent to a construction site should be protected
from eroded sediment from the site through the use of sediment controls. (Section 5.0).
• Vehicle Tracking. Whenever construction vehicles enter onto paved roads, provisions must be
made to prevent the transport of sediment (mud and dirt) by vehicles tracking onto the paved
surface. Whenever sediment is transported onto a public road, regardless of the size of the site,
at a minimum the roads shall be cleaned at the end of each day. (Section 5.1).
• Slope Diversion Dikes. Temporary diversion dikes shall be provided as required by the
provisions of Section 5.2. Diversion dikes located above disturbed areas may be discharged to a
permanent or temporary channel. Diversion dikes located midslope on a disturbed area must
discharge to temporary slope drain. Diversion dikes located at the base of a disturbed area must
discharge to a sediment trap or basin. (Sections 5.2.1 and 5.3).
• Roads and Roadside Swales. For road areas that are not paved within 30 days of final grading,
and have not received early application of roadbase, rough-cut street controls should be
provided. (Section 5.2.2).
• Sediment Entrapment Facilities. Sediment entrapment facilities include silt fences, straw wattles,
curb socks, sediment basins/traps. The criteria for selection and use of sediment entrapment
facilities are given in Table C-5 and design criteria are described in Section 5.3.
• All runoff leaving a disturbed area shall pass through at least one sediment entrapment facility
before it exits the site. (Section 5.3).
• Working Within or Crossing a Waterway. Construction vehicles shall be kept out of waterways to
the maximum extent practicable. Where an actively-flowing watercourse must be crossed
regularly by construction vehicles, a temporary stream crossing and/or channel diversion must be
provided. (Section 5.0).
• Outlet Protection. The outlets of temporary slope drains, culverts, sediment traps and sediment
basins must be protected from erosion and scour. (Section 5.4).
• Inlet Protection. All storm sewer inlets made operable during construction must have sediment
entrapment facilities installed to prevent sediment-laden runoff from entering the inlet.
(Section 5.5).
• Underground Utility Construction. Construction of underground utility lines that are not exempted
is subject to the provisions of Section 7. (Section 7 and Section 1.3.4 for exemptions).
C-18 2007-10
• Disposition of Temporary Measures. All temporary erosion and sediment control measures shall
be removed within 30 days after final stabilization is achieved, or after the temporary measures
are no longer needed, whichever occurs earliest, or as authorized by the municipality or other
local jurisdiction. (Section 8).
• Maintenance. All temporary and permanent erosion and sediment control practices shall be
maintained and repaired by the owner during the construction phase as needed to assure
continued performance of their intended function. All facilities must be inspected and replaced if
necessary, following each precipitation or snowmelt event that results in runoff. (Section 9).
2.3 Planning Process
Erosion control planning should occur early in the site development process. The planning process can
be divided into five separate steps:
1. Gather information on topography, soils, drainage, vegetation and other predominant site
features.
2. Analyze the information in order to anticipate erosion and sedimentation problems.
3. Devise a plan which schedules construction activities and minimizes the amount of erosion
created by development.
4. Develop an Erosion and Sediment Control Plan which specifies effective erosion and sediment
control measures.
5. Follow the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan and revise it when necessary.
2.3.1 Site Assessment

Topography is the primary factor to be considered in developing an Erosion and Sediment Control Plan.
Soils, vegetation, and hydrologic features must also be considered.
Final grading will determine slope gradient and slope length of the disturbed area. Small areas, or sub-
catchments, will be created that have relatively uniform characteristics of slope and slope length. After
grading is completed, areas that remain exposed to precipitation and runoff will require erosion control,
and the overall size of sub-catchment areas will determine what sediment controls are appropriate for
each area.
A detailed analysis of soil-erosion potential is not necessary. All soils are subject to erosion and can be
generalized as equivalent for the design of control measures recommended in the Manual.
Most vegetation will be removed from a construction site during clearing and grading operations. An
assessment of existing vegetation on the site is of limited value when post-development landscaping and
irrigation are planned, but can be useful in selecting grasses when non-irrigated revegetation is planned.
2007-10 C-19
Analysis of soil is useful to determine fertilizer requirements for vegetation establishment.
Understanding of receiving waterways and the hydrologic features of a site are important in the design of
sediment controls. The drainage catchment upslope of the construction site and drainage patterns within
the site should be thoroughly assessed. The configuration of hill slope areas and waterways, in the
context of planned roads and buildings, will determine what erosion and sediment controls will be needed
at each phase of construction. The location of permanent drainage channels and other elements of the
drainage system should also be recognized and/or defined as a part of the plan.
2.3.2 Selection of Controls

The following guidelines are recommended in developing the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan:
1. Determine the limits of clearing and grading. If the entire site will not undergo excavation and
grading, or excavation and grading will occur in stages, the boundaries of each cut-and-fill
operation should be defined. Buffer strips of natural vegetation may be utilized as a control
measure.
2. Define the layout of buildings and roads. This will have been decided previously as a part of the
general development plan. If building layout is not final, the road areas stabilized with pavement
and the drainage features related to roads should be defined as they relate to the plan.
3. Determine permanent drainage features. The location of permanent channels, storm sewers,
roadside swales and stormwater quality controls such as ponds, wetlands, grassed-lined swales,
buffer strips and areas of porous pavement, if known, should be defined.
4. Determine extent of temporary channel diversions. If permanent channel improvements are a

part of the plan, the route, sizing and lining needed for temporary channel diversions should be
determined. Location and type of temporary channel crossings can be assessed.
5. Determine the boundaries of watersheds. The size of drainage catchments will determine the
types of sediment controls to be used. Areas located off the site that contribute overland flow
runoff must be assessed. Measures to limit the size of upland overland flow areas, such as
diversion dikes, may be initially considered at this stage.
6. Select Erosion Controls. All areas of exposed soil will require a control measure be defined
dependent on the duration of exposure. These can be selected based on the schedule of
construction.
7. Select sediment controls. Select the controls needed for each phase of the construction project.
Each phase will have different demands for the control of erosion and sedimentation. For
example, overlot grading will require controls that may be of little use when individual homes are
being built and each lot is being disturbed after the streets and drainage systems are in place.
C-20 2007-10
The use of sediment basins becomes an essential part of the total plan when the tributary areas
start exceeding one (1) acre.
8. Determine staging of construction. The schedule of construction will determine what areas must
be disturbed at various stages throughout the development plan. The opportunity for staging cut-
and-fill operations to minimize the period of exposure of soils needs to be assessed and then
incorporated into the final SWMP, at which time the initial sequence for installing sediment
controls and erosion controls is defined.
9. Identify locations of topsoil stockpiles. Areas for storing topsoil should be determined and then
proper measures to control their erosion and sediment movement off these sites specified.
10. Identify location of temporary construction roads, vehicle tracking controls, and material storage
areas. These three elements can be determined in the context of previously defined parts of the
site construction management plan.
Figures C-2-1 through C2-3 illustrate how the implementation of a SWMP may be done in phases.
Each phase needs to address erosion and sediment controls and the construction activities
management for that phase of the construction activities. Each needs to take into account the
specific physical layout and site conditions that will exist during that phase. Some projects may need
more than three phases shown to have an effective overall SWMP.
2.4 Consistency with Other Plans
2.4.1 Drainage Plans

The Erosion and Sediment Control Plan should be prepared consistent with the final drainage plan for a
development. All of the hydrologic features of the drainage plan must be acknowledged in the Erosion
and Sediment Control Plan. As permanent drainage features are built during the construction phase,
temporary sediment controls can be located and designed to take advantage of these final drainage
features. All temporary controls should be staged and removed at the appropriate time relative to the
completion of permanent drainage features.
2.4.2 Stormwater Quality Management Plan (SWMP)

New developments have to incorporate facilities and elements for stormwater quality management. The
Erosion and Sediment Control Plan must be consistent with these structural and nonstructural controls.
Many of the temporary controls used for sediment control can be modified into permanent structural
controls. In addition, permanent stormwater quality controls can often be constructed at the initial stages
of the project and modified to control sediment during construction phases. When that occurs, they will
need to be modified and restored to the post-construction BMP configuration at the end of construction.
Where local regulations have not been developed, post construction stormwater quality plans should be
developed consistent with the CDPHE requirements and the guidelines in the STORMWATER QUALITY
2007-10 C-21
MANAGEMENT and BMP PLANNING FOR NEW DEVELOPMENT AND REDEVELOPMENT chapters of
Volume 3 of the Manual.
2.4.3 Air Quality Plans

All of the erosion and sediment control measures specified in this section will also be effective in
controlling wind erosion. The surface stabilization measures identified for control of precipitation-induced
erosion act also to prevent soils from becoming windborne. Although these guidelines were developed to
control erosion by rainfall and snowmelt, they are consistent with design principles for wind erosion and
will be effective for this purpose.
The Air Pollution Control Division, Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment, has passed
air quality regulations consistent with federal legislation. Regulation No. 3 requires submittal of an Air
Pollutant Emission Notice (APEN) for sources of fugitive dust from construction sites, as well as other
sources. Regulation No. 1 defines particulate emission control regulations for haul roads and roadways.
Additional controls, such as road watering and or soil binders may be necessary to fully comply with
these regulations at a construction site. In certain counties in Colorado, the local health department
administers these regulations. This agency, or CDPHE, should be contacted about APENs and other air
quality requirements.
C-22 2007-10
Adapted from GESC Manual (Douglas County, 2004)
Figure C2-1—Example Subdivision Construction Site – Initial Rough Grading Phase
2007-10 C-23
Figure C2-2—Example Subdivision Construction Site – Main Construction Phase
C-24 2007-10
Figure C2-3—Example Subdivision Construction Site – Final Completion Phase
2007-10 C-25
3.0 CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES MANAGEMENT – PLANNING AND IMPLEMENTATION
Before work begins and erosion and sediment control measures are planned for and installed, the
contractor working with the owner needs to prepare a plan for construction activities, staging and storage
and handling of materials so as to prevent pollutants being released from the site to the receiving waters.
Often materials are used at a construction site that present a potential for contamination of stormwater
runoff. These include fuel, oil, lubricants, paints, solvents, concrete-curing compounds and other liquid
chemicals as well as solid and/or liquid fertilizers, herbicides and pesticides. In addition, staging and
storage areas will have equipment in need of maintenance with the potential of releases of liquids and
solids associated with those activities as well as stockpiling of construction materials that can erode or
wash off during and after precipitation events. Practices that can be used to prevent or minimize toxic
materials in runoff from a construction site are described in this section.
3.1 Chemical and Petroleum Products Storage
Areas at the construction site that are used for storage of toxic materials and petroleum products should
be designed with an enclosure, container, or dike located around the perimeter of the storage area to
prevent discharge of these materials in runoff from the construction site. These barriers will also function
to contain spilled materials from contact with surface runoff.
Measures to prevent spills or leaks of fuel, gear oil, lubricants, antifreeze, and other fluids from
construction vehicles and heavy equipment should be considered to protect groundwater and runoff
quality. All equipment maintenance should be performed in a designated area and measures, such as
drip pans, used to contain petroleum products. Spills of construction-related materials, such as paints,
solvents, or other fluids and chemicals, should be cleaned up immediately and disposed of properly. For
additional guidance on spill prevention and response, and material storage practices, see the appropriate
sections in the NONSTRUCTURAL BMPs chapter of the Manual.
3.2 Waste Area and Storage
Designate areas for construction material waste deposit and storage. This should include designated
areas for temporary disposal of and washing off concrete from concrete delivery trucks, asphalt, etc.
Also designate areas for collection and temporary storage of solid and liquid waste to prevent discharge
or movement of these materials off the construction site. Locate these sites away from all storm drainage
facilities and waterways. Consider covering waste storage areas and fencing them, if necessary, to
contain windblown materials. Also consider constructing a perimeter dike to exclude or to contain runoff.
These measures may not be necessary if all waste is placed immediately in covered waste containers at
the site and is otherwise controlled in an effective manner. All waste should be disposed only at
approved landfill sites. For additional guidance on waste storage and disposal practices, see the
appropriate sections in the NONSTRUCTURAL BMPs chapter of the Manual.
C-26 2007-10
3.3 Staging and Equipment Maintenance Areas
Set aside a fenced-in contractor staging area. This area should be used to store the contractor office
trailer, all of the construction equipment and vehicles. It also may be used to stockpile materials
delivered on site for later use. Figure C3-1 illustrates a possible layout for such an area.
Photograph 2. Example of a project staging and material (behind fence) storage area.
Note the gravel lined surface to prevent mud tracking and reduce runoff. (Photo provided
by Douglas County).
3.4 Concrete Truck Washout and Equipment Cleaning
An area needs to be set aside to wash out concrete truck mixers. The site needs to contain a basin for
disposing of concrete residue, which should have sufficient storage volume to accept the wash water and
allow the suspended particles to settle out, similar to one shown in Figure C3-2. Such a facility can also
be modified for use of receiving equipment cleaning water. Remember that all pollutants associated with
equipment cleaning typically are not allowed to be discharged into State waters without appropriate
discharge permit and are best handled by sending such waters to wastewater treatment plant.
3.5 Dewatering
Dewatering that discharges water in a manner that may enter any waters of the State require a permit
from the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment. This permit will need to be obtained by
the owner/contractor and all conditions stipulated in that permit strictly adhered to. It is the responsibility
of the owner/contractor and his or her SWMP manager to insure that this occurs. Figure C3-3 shows
details for typical dewatering installations intended to minimize the amount of sediment and suspended
solids in the water being discharged by the dewatering pumps.
2007-10 C-27
Figure C3-1—Guidance for Locating a Construction Staging and Equipment Storage Area
C-28 2007-10
Figure C3-2—Concrete Washout Area
2007-10 C-29
Figure C3-3—Dewatering Details
C-30 2007-10
4.0 EROSION CONTROL MEASURES - PLANNING AND IMPLEMENTING
The planning for the installation of permanent or temporary soil erosion controls needs to begin in
advance of all major soil disturbance activities on the construction site. Minimizing the area being
disturbed at any given time is one of the most effective erosion control measures. This principle needs to
be kept in mind whenever developing a SWMP. Whenever the soil surface is disturbed, stabilization
measures, in a form of well anchored mulch or other stabilizing measures, have to be applied within 14
days to all areas that may or may not be at final grade but will remain dormant (undisturbed) for periods
longer than 60 calendar days.
Soil surface stabilization protects soil from the erosive forces of raindrop impact, flowing water, and wind.
Erosion control practices include surface roughening, mulching, establishment of vegetative cover, soil
treatments, and the early application of gravel base on areas to be paved. Stabilization measures to be
used should be appropriate for the time of year, site conditions and estimated duration of use. The
maximum time limits of land exposure for the selection of erosion controls before the site is fully
completed, stabilized and accepted are summarized in Table C-1.
Table C-1—Maximum Time Limits of Land Exposure

for Selection of Temporary Erosion Controls
Maximum Allowable Period of

Erosion Control Method Exposure (Months)
Surface Roughening 1
Mulching 12
Temporary Revegetation 12-24
Permanent Revegetation 24 or more
Soil Stockpile Revegetation 2
Early Application of Road Base 1
Plastic Membrane (16 mil minimum) 12
Geotextile Fabric 12
4.1 Surface Roughening
Surface roughening (scarification) provides temporary stabilization of disturbed areas from wind and
water erosion. It is particularly useful where temporary revegetation cannot be immediately established
due to seasonal planting limitations.
2007-10 C-31
The soil surface is considered roughened if depressions are created two (2) to four (4) inches deep and
are spaced approximately four (4) to six (6) inches apart. If slopes are sufficiently rough after final
grading, no further treatment is required. The surface of exposed soil can be roughened by a number of
techniques and equipment. A chisel or ripping implement can be used in most soil conditions.
Roughening is not acceptable in very sandy soils and cannot be effectively performed in rocky soil.
Photograph 3. Example of surface roughening with a light layer of straw mulch. Note
how the roughening pattern parallels the contours to intercept and retain water. (Photo
provided by Douglas County).
Surface roughening should be performed after final grading. Fill slopes can be constructed with a
roughened surface. Cut slopes that have been smooth graded can be roughened as a subsequent
operation. Roughening ridges and depressions should follow along the contours of the slope. On slopes
steeper than 2:1, the tracks left by a dozer working perpendicular to the contour can leave acceptable
horizontal depressions. A diagram illustrating surface roughening is shown on Figure C4-1.
Care should be taken not to drive vehicles or equipment over areas that have been scarified. Tire tracks
will smooth the roughened surface and encourage runoff to collect into rills and gullies. As surface
roughening is only a temporary control, additional treatments may be necessary to maintain the soil
surface in a roughened condition.
4.2 Mulching
All disturbed areas must be mulched and tacked, or seeded, mulched and tacked, within 14 days after
final grade is reached on any portion of the site not otherwise permanently stabilized. Areas that will
remain in an interim condition for more than one year should also be seeded (See Section 4.3.2). An
example of mulching is shown on Figure C4-2 and in Photograph 4.
C-32 2007-10
Photograph 4. Example of a mulched bank on a newly graded waterway with a tackifier

applied to hold the hay mulch in place. Also note the straw blanket on the left side.
(Photo provided by Douglas County).
To protect newly seeded areas and to provide temporary cover on other disturbed areas which will not
require temporary revegetation, or which cannot be seeded due to seeding date limitations, a mulch
should be applied consisting of:
1. Clean, weed- and seed-free, long-stemmed grass hay (preferred) or cereal grain straw. Hay is
preferred as it is less susceptible to removal by wind. Mulch should be applied evenly at a rate of
two (2) tons per acre. At least 50 percent of the grass hay mulch, by weight, should be ten (10)
inches or more in length.
Grass hay mulch must be anchored and not merely placed on the surface. This can be
accomplished mechanically by crimping or with the aid of tackifiers or nets. Anchoring with a
crimping implement is preferred, and is the recommended method for all areas equal to or flatter
than 3:1. Mechanical crimpers must be capable of tucking the long mulch fibers into the soil four
(4) inches deep without cutting them. An agricultural disk, while not an ideal substitute, may work
if the disk blades are dull or blunted and set vertically. However, the frame may have to be
weighted to afford proper soil penetration.
On small areas sheltered from the wind and from heavy runoff, spraying a tackifier on the mulch
is satisfactory for holding it in place. For steep slopes and special situations where greater
control is needed, blankets anchored with stakes should be required instead of mulch.
2. Hydraulic mulching consisting of wood cellulose fibers must be mixed with water and a tackifying
2007-10 C-33
agent and applied at a rate of no less than 2,000 pounds per acre with a hydraulic mulcher.
3. Mats, blankets, and nets are required to help stabilize steep slopes (3:1 and steeper) and
waterways. Depending on the product, these may be used alone or in conjunction with grass or
straw mulch. Normally, use of these products will be restricted to relatively small areas. Mats
made of straw and jute, straw-coconut, coconut fiber, or excelsior can be used instead of mulch.
Whichever material is used, blankets need to be bio-degradable. Two diagrams showing
installation and orientation of these materials are provided as Figures C-4-3 and C4-3a.
4. Some synthetic tackifiers or binders may be used to anchor mulch in order to limit erosion and, if
approved by review agency, provide soil stabilization. Caution should be used to prevent the
introduction of any potentially harmful and non-biodegradable materials into the environment.
Manufacturer's recommendations should be followed at all times.
5. Rock can also be used as a mulch. It provides protection of exposed soils to wind and water
erosion and allows infiltration of precipitation. Rock of aggregate base-coarse size can be spread
on disturbed areas for temporary or permanent stabilization. Rock must be removed from those
areas to be planned for vegetation establishment.
4.3 Revegetation
A viable vegetative cover should be established within one (1) year on all disturbed areas and soil
stockpiles not otherwise permanently stabilized. Vegetation is not considered established until a ground
cover is achieved which is equivalent to at least 70 percent of the previously existing vegetation and is
sufficiently mature to control soil erosion and can survive severe weather conditions.
4.3.1 Seedbed Preparation

Areas to be revegetated should have soils capable of supporting vegetation. Overlot grading will
oftentimes bring to the surface subsoils that have low nutrient value, little organic matter content, few soil
microorganisms, rooting restrictions, and conditions less conducive to infiltration of precipitation. As a
result, rototilling and adding topsoil, compost and/or other soil amendments can be essential to achieve
successful revegetation.
Topsoil should be salvaged during grading operations for use and spreading on areas to be revegetated
later. Topsoil should be viewed as an important resource to be utilized for vegetation establishment,
primarily due to its water-holding capacity. Native topsoil located on a construction site also has good soil
structure, organic matter content, biological activity, and nutrient supply that supports vegetation.
The rooting depth of most semi-arid grasslands evident in the Denver metropolitan area is six (6) to
eighteen (18) inches. At a minimum, the upper six (6) inches of topsoil can be stripped and stockpiled,
and respread to a thicker depth on surfaces not planned for buildings or impervious areas. If the surface
is compacted, rip or rototill of subsoils prior to placing topsoil is recommended. Scarification will assist in
C-34 2007-10
placement of a stable topsoil layer on steeper slopes, and allow percolation and root penetration to
greater depth.
Where topsoil is not available or utilized, subsoils can be treated to provide a plant-growth medium.
Organic matter, such as well digested compost, can be added to improve nutrient levels necessary for
plant growth. Other treatments, such as liming, can be used to adjust soil pH conditions when needed.
Soil testing needs to be done to determine appropriate amendments required.
A suitable seedbed will enhance the success of revegetation efforts. The surface should be rough and
the seedbed should be firm, but neither too loose nor compacted. The upper layer of soil should be in a
condition suitable for seeding at the proper depth and conducive to plant growth.
4.3.2 Temporary Revegetation

Temporary revegetation is required on all disturbed areas that are projected to have or have already
experienced a period of exposure prior to final stabilization of one (1) year or longer. All temporary
seeding shall be protected with mulch.
To provide temporary vegetative cover on disturbed areas which will not be paved, built upon, or fully
landscaped within 12 months but will be completed within 24 months, plant an annual grass appropriate
for the time of planting and mulch the planted areas. The annual grasses generally suitable for the
Denver metropolitan area are listed in Table C-2. These are to be considered only as general
recommendations whenever specific design guidance for a particular site is not available.
4.3.3 Permanent Revegetation

To provide vegetative cover on disturbed areas that will not be not paved or built upon for a period of two
(2) years or longer, or for an indeterminate length of time, a perennial grass or grass mix should be
established. Each site will have different characteristics, and a landscape professional should be
contacted to determine the most suitable species or seed mix for a specific site. In lieu of a specific
recommendation and for planning purposes, one of the perennial grass mixes appropriate for site
conditions listed in Table C-3 can be used. The pure live seed (PLS) rates of application recommended
in these tables are considered to be absolute minimum rates for seed applied using proper drill-seeding
equipment. All permanent seeding shall be protected with mulch. See Table C-4 for appropriate seeding
dates.
If desired for wildlife habitat or landscape diversity, shrubs such as rubber rabbitbrush (Chrysothamnus
nauseosus), fourwing saltbush (Atriplex canescens) and skunkbrush sumac (Rhus trilobata) could be
added to the upland seedmixes at .25, .5 and 1 pound per acre, respectively. In riparian zones, planting
root stock of such species as American plum (Prunus americana), woods rose (Rosa woodsii), plains
cottonwood (Populus sargentii), and willow (Populus spp.) may be considered. On non-topsoiled upland
sites, a legume such as Ladak alfalfa at 1 lb. PLS per acre can be included as a source of nitrogen for
2007-10 C-35
perennial grasses.
Table C-2—Minimum Drill Seeding Rates for Annual Grasses

Pounds of Planting
Species a Growth Pure Live Seed Depth
b c
(Common name) Season (PLS)/acre (inches)
1. Oats Cool 35 - 50 1-2
2. Spring wheat Cool 25 - 35 1-2
3. Spring barley Cool 25 - 35 1-2
4. Annual ryegrass Cool 10 - 15 ½
5. Millet Warm 3 - 15 ½-¾
6. Sudangrass Warm 5–10 ½-¾
7. Sorghum Warm 5–10 ½-¾
8. Winter wheat Cool 20–35 1-2
9. Winter barley Cool 20–35 1-2
10. Winter rye Cool 20–35 1-2
11. Triticale Cool 25–40 1-2
a
Successful seeding of annual grass resulting in adequate plant growth will
usually produce enough dead-plant material residue to provide protection
from wind and water erosion for an additional year. This assumes that the
cover is not disturbed or mowed closer than 8 inches.
Hydraulic seeding may be substituted for drilling only where slopes are
steeper than 3:1 or where access limitations exist. When hydraulic
seeding is used, hydraulic mulching should be done as a separate
operation to prevent the seeds from being encapsulated in the mulch.
b
See Table C-4 for seeding dates. Irrigation, if consistently applied, may
extend the use of cool season species during the summer months.
c
Seeding rates should be doubled if seed is broadcast; or increased by 50
percent if done using a Brillion Drill or by hydraulic seeding.
C-36 2007-10
Table C-3—Minimum Drill Seeding Rates for Perennial Grasses
a
Common Botanical Growth Growth Seeds/ Pounds of
b
Name Name Season Form Pound PLS/acre
Alakali Soil Seed Mix
Alkali sacaton Sporobolus airoides Cool Bunch 1,750,000 0.25
Basin wildrye Elymus cinereus Cool Bunch 165,000 2.5
Sodar streambank wheatgrass Agropyron riparium Cool Sod 170,000 2.5
'Sodar'
Jose tall wheatgrass Agropyron elongatum Cool Bunch 79,000 7.0
'Jose'
Arriba western wheatgrass Agropyron smithii 'Arriba' Cool Sod 110,000 5.5
Total 17.75
Fertile Loamy Soil Seed Mix
Ephriam crested wheatgrass Agropyron cristatum Cool Sod 175,000 2.0
'Ephriam'
Dural hard fescue Festuca ovina Cool Bunch 565,000 1.0
'duriuscula'
Lincoln smooth brome Bromus inermis leyss Cool Sod 130,000 3.0
'Lincoln'
Sodar streambank wheatgrass Agropyron riparium Cool Sod 170,000 2.5
'Sodar'
Total 15.5
High Water Table Soil Seed Mix
Meadow foxtail Alopecurus pratensis Cool Sod 900,000 0.5
Redtop Agrostis alba Warm Open sod 5,000,000 0.25
Reed canarygrass Phalaris arundinacea Cool Sod 68,000 0.5
'Lincoln'
Pathfinder switchgrass Panicum virgatum Warm Sod 389,000 1.0
'Pathfinder'
Alkar tall wheatgrass Agropyron elongatum Cool Bunch 79,000 5.5
'Alkar'
Total 10.75
c
Transition Turf Seed Mix
Ruebens Canadian bluegrass Poa compressa Cool Sod 2,500,000 0.5
'Ruebens'
Dural hard fescue Festuca ovina Cool Bunch 565,000 1.0
'duriuscula'
Citation perennial ryegrass Lolium perenne 'Citation' Cool Sod 247,000 3.0
'Lincoln'
Total 7.5
2007-10 C-37
Common Botanical Growth Growth Seeds/ Pounds of

b
Name Name Season Form Pound PLS/acre
Sandy Soil Seed Mix
Blue grama Bouteloua gracilis Warm Sod- 825,000 0.5
forming
bunchgrass
Camper little bluestem Schizachyrium scoparium Warm Bunch 240,000 1.0
'Camper'
Prairie sandreed Calamovilfa longifolia Warm Open sod 274,000 1.0
Sand dropseed Sporobolus cryptandrus Cool Bunch 5,298,000 0.25
Vaughn sideoats grama Bouteloua curtipendula Warm Sod 191,000 2.0
'Vaughn'
Total 10.25
Heavy Clay, Rocky Foothill Seed Mix
Ephriam crested wheatgrassd Agropyron cristatum Cool Sod 175,000 1.5
'Ephriam'
Oahe Intermediate wheatgrass Agropyron intermedium Cool Sod 115,000 5.5
'Oahe'
Vaughn sideoats gramae Bouteloua curtipendula Warm Sod 191,000 2.0
'Vaughn'
'Lincoln'
Total 17.5
a
All of the above seeding mixes and rates are based on drill seeding followed by crimped hay or straw mulch.
These rates should be doubled if seed is broadcast and should be increased by 50 percent if the seeding is done
using a Brillion Drill or is applied through hydraulic seeding. Hydraulic seeding may be substituted for drilling only
where slopes are steeper than 3:1. If hydraulic seeding is used, hydraulic mulching should be done as a separate
operation.
b
See Table C-4 for seeding dates.
c
If site is to be irrigated, the transition turf seed rates should be doubled.
d
Crested wheatgrass should not be used on slopes steeper than 6H to 1V.
e
Could substitute 0.5 lbs PLS of Blue grama for the 2.0 lbs PLS of Vaughn sideoats grama.
C-38 2007-10
Table C-4—Seeding Dates for Annual and Perennial Grasses

As Listed by Number in Table C-2.
Annual Grasses Perennial Grasses

Seeding Dates Warm Cool Warm Cool
January 1–March 15
March 16–April 30 4 1,2,3
May 1–May 15 4
May 16–June 30 4,5,6,7
July 1–July 15 5,6,7
July 16–August 31
September 1–September 30 8,9,10,11
October 1–December 31
4.4 Roads and Soil Stockpiles
Road cuts, road fills, and parking lot areas should be covered with the appropriate aggregate base
course on the surfaces to be paved in lieu of mulching. Early application of road base is suitable where a
layer of course aggregate is specified for final road or parking lot construction. This practice may not be
desirable in all instances, and is not needed when final pavement construction will take place within 30
days of grading to final grades. All non-paved portions of road cut, fill and parking lot areas should be
seeded and mulched as soon as possible after final grading has occurred, but in no case later than 14
days after grading has been completed.
Soils stockpiled for more than 60 days should be seeded with a temporary or permanent grass cover
within 14 days after completion of stockpile construction. Mulching is recommended to ensure vegetation
establishment. If stockpiles are located within close proximity to a waterway (i.e., 100 feet), additional
sediment control measures, such as a temporary diversion dike or silt fence, should be provided (see
Section 5).
2007-10 C-39
Figure C4-1—Surface Roughening
C-40 2007-10
From: Environmental Protection Agency, 1976
Figure C4-2—Mulching
2007-10 C-41
Figure C4-3—Orientation of Erosion Control Blankets, Netting and Matting
C-42 2007-10
Figure C4-3a—Orientation of Erosion Control Blankets, Netting and Matting (con’t)
2007-10 C-43
5.0 SEDIMENT CONTROL MEASURES - PLANNING AND IMPLEMENTING
As with erosion control, planning for the control of sediment that is picked up by stormwater has to begin
before the construction project begins or even permits for it are pursued. Once the plan is approved and
the permits are issued, install needed sediment entrapment and control facilities before land
disturbance activities begin at a construction site.
Sediment control will be site specific and can include vehicle tracking controls; sod buffer strips around
the lower perimeter of the land disturbance; sediment barriers, filters, dikes and sediment basins; or a
combination of any or all of these measures.
To reduce erosion of sedimentation control facilities such as earthen dams, dikes and diversions, they
should be mulched or covered with erosion blankets within 14 days of installation.
Sediment control basins with pools of water must address water rights considerations. Consult with the
State Engineer's Office on these requirements prior to constructing any dam or basin with permanent
standing water (i.e., pool does not empty out in 72 hours). In addition, all embankments built to retain or
detain water must be protected from failure by water overtopping them during large storms.
5.1 Vehicle Tracking
Wherever construction vehicles enter onto paved public roads, provisions must be made to prevent the
transport of sediment (mud and dirt) by runoff or by vehicles tracking onto the paved surface. It is
recommended that coarse-aggregate rock surfacing be provided to keep most construction traffic from
coming into contact with mud and dirt. In other words, stabilized access, parking, staging, and
loading/unloading areas will reduce the likelihood that vehicles will come in contact with mud.
A stabilized vehicle tracking control (see Figure C5-1) must be constructed at all construction sites
governed by Colorado stormwater regulations. Whenever deemed necessary by the municipality of
jurisdiction, wash racks (see Figure C5-2) shall be installed to remove mud and dirt from vehicles and
their tires before they enter onto public roads.
Whenever sediment is transported onto a public road, regardless of the size of the site, the road shall be
cleaned at the end of each day or before any predicted or anticipated rainstorm. Sediment shall be
removed from roads by shoveling and sweeping and be transported to a controlled sediment disposal
area. Washing of the street with a water hose and flushing the water downstream shall not be allowed.
C-44 2007-10
Photograph 5. Example of soil being carried off construction site by vehicle tires. A well
designed, constructed and maintained tracking pad prevents this. (Photo provided by
Douglas County).
5.2 Slope-Length and Runoff Considerations
Cut-and-fill slopes must be designed and constructed to minimize erosion. This requires consideration of
the length and steepness of the slope, the soil type, upslope drainage area, groundwater conditions and
other applicable factors. Slopes which are found to be eroding excessively will require additional slope
stabilization until the problem is corrected. The following guidelines should assist site planners and plan
reviewers in developing an adequate design:
1. Rough soil surfaces are preferred over smooth surfaces on slopes (Section 4.1).
2. Temporary diversion dikes (Section 5.2.1) need to be constructed at the top of long or steep
slopes. Diversion dikes or terraces (Section 5.2.3) should be considered to reduce slope
length within the disturbed area.
Temporary diversion dikes shall be provided whenever:
2
S L > 2.5 for undisturbed tributary areas:
2
S L > 1.0 for disturbed tributary areas:
2
S L > 0.25 for paved tributary areas:
where: S = slope of the upstream tributary area (in feet/foot); and,

L = length of the upstream slope (in feet).
2007-10 C-45
3. Concentrated stormwater (pipe outflow, channel, swale) should not be allowed to flow down
cut or fill slopes unless contained within an adequately-sized temporary channel diversion, a
permanent channel, or temporary slope drain (Section 5.2.4).
4. Wherever a slope face crosses a water seepage plane which endangers the stability of the
slope, adequate drainage should be provided.
5. Provide sediment basins or barriers (silt fences) at or near the toe of slopes to reduce offsite
sediment transport or to reduce slope lengths (Section 5.3).
5.2.1 Slope Diversions and Diversion Dikes

A temporary diversion and a diversion dike consist of a horizontal ridge of soil placed perpendicular to the
slope and angled slightly to provide drainage along the contour along with a swale or a small channel
upslope of it to convey the diverted water. Temporary diversion dikes can be constructed by excavation
of a V-shaped trench or ditch and placement of the fill on the downslope side of the cut. A design of a
temporary diversion with a diversion dike is shown on Figure C5-3.
There are two types of temporary slope diversion dikes:
1. A dike located at the top of a slope to divert upland runoff away from the disturbed area. The
runoff from undisturbed or previously-developed upland areas dikes may be directed by such
dykes to a permanent channel or temporary diversion channel (Section 5.2).
2. A diversion dike located at the base or mid-slope of a disturbed area to divert sediment-laden
water to a sediment basin. The discharge intercepted by these diversion dikes may be directed
to a temporary slope drain and/or sediment basin.
5.2.2 Roads and Roadside Swales

Runoff and sediment control along roadway construction sites has to be looked at as a series of individual
slope segments within the disturbed area. These areas will require erosion control and sediment controls
dependent on the size of tributary area.
For roadways that are not paved within 30 days of final grading, and have not received an application of
roadbase, rough-cut street controls should be used. These are runoff barriers that are constructed at
intervals down the road. These barriers are installed perpendicular to the longitudinal slope from the
outer edge of the roadside swale to the crown of the road. The barriers are positioned alternately from
the right and left side of the road to allow construction traffic to pass in the lane not barred. If construction
traffic is expected to be congested and a vehicle tracking control has been constructed, rough-cut street
controls may be omitted for 400 feet from the entrance. The design and spacing of temporary rough-cut
road controls are shown on Figure C5-4.
C-46 2007-10
5.2.3 Terracing
Sediment can be controlled on slopes that are particularly steep by the use of terracing, similar to what is
illustrated in Figure C5-5. During grading, relatively flat sections, or terraces, are created and separated
at intervals by steep slope segments. The steep slope segments are prone to erosion, however, and
must be stabilized by mulching or other techniques. Retaining walls, gabions, cribbing, deadman
anchors, rock-filled slope mattresses and other types of soil retention systems are available for use.
These should be specified in the plan and installed according to manufacturer's instructions.
5.2.4 Slope Drains

There are instances when runoff must be directed using diversion dikes and ditches to a facility that
conveys it down a steep slope within the disturbed area. A temporary slope drain is used for that
purpose, which protects the hill slope areas from erosion. A number of designs and materials can be
used for a slope drain. These are illustrated in Figures C-5-6 and C5-7.
The sizing of temporary slope drains must be defined. Recommendations for the sizing of temporary
slope drains are given in these criteria. The discharge from all slope drains must be directed to a
stabilized outlet, temporary or permanent channel and/or sedimentation basin.
5.3 Sediment Entrapment Facilities
Sediment entrapment facilities are necessary to reduce sediment discharges to downstream properties
and receiving waters. Sediment entrapment facilities include straw bale barriers, silt fences, rock berms
and sediment basins. The type of sediment entrapment facility to be used depends on the tributary area,
basin slope and slope length of the upstream area. Table C-5 summarizes the recommended maximum
tributary areas, slope lengths and slopes for three (3) types of sediment entrapment facilities.
All runoff leaving a disturbed area shall pass through a sediment entrapment facility before it exits the site
and flows downstream.
Table C-5—Sediment Entrapment Facility Limitations

(Exceeding any one limit will trigger a need for a sediment basin)
Allowable Maximum Limit
Tributary Drainage Disturbed

Sediment Area Tributary Slope Tributary
Control Facility per 100 lineal feet Length Slope
(ac) (ft) Gradient
Straw Wattles, Curb Socks or Silt 0.5-1.0 150 3:1 (33%)

Fence per 100 lineal ft
Sediment Basin n/a n/a n/a
2007-10 C-47
Straw bale barriers or silt fences may be used for small sites. When the tributary area is greater than that
allowed for straw bale barriers or silt fences, runoff shall be collected in diversion dikes and routed
through temporary sediment basins.
5.3.1 Sediment Control Log

Sediment control logs consisting of manufactured logs (wattles) made of straw, excelsior, or coconut fiber
can be placed parallel to the contour at the base of a hill slope as a sediment barrier. They are temporary
in nature and may only perform for a period of weeks or months before they degrade. Proper installation
and maintenance is essential to ensure their performance. There are many examples of poor
installations that included failure to imbed them into the ground, anchor them and pack them closely to
each other and fully fill in the joints, and to extend them up the slopes to prevent flow bypassing around
their ends. Installation shall be done as shown in Figures C-5-8 and C5-9.
5.3.2 Silt Fence

A silt fence is made of a woven synthetic material. Its function is to trap sediment through sedimentation
and filtering of runoff. Silt fence can be placed as a temporary barrier along the contour at the base of a
slope of a disturbed area. They are of little if any use if placed at the top of the disturbed slope and are
not intended for use as diversion barriers or as perimeter fencing. In addition, they are not to be used as
checks within a swale or channel. The material is durable and can last for more than one season if
properly installed and maintained. Proper installation and maintenance is essential to ensure their
performance. If concentrated flow conditions are expected, do not use silt fencing; the use of rock check
dams is recommended. Silt fence design guidance and installation details are shown on Figures C-5-10
and C5-11.
Photograph 6. Example of very poor use and installation of a silt fence. The silt fencing
is not anchored and is installed at top and sides of the slope instead of its bottom where
sediment needs to be captured. A diversion at top of slope would be more effective.
(Photo provided by Douglas County).
C-48 2007-10
5.3.3 Sediment Basins

Areas draining more than two (2) acres of construction site must be routed through a sediment basin
similar to the shown in Figures C-5-12 and C5-13. In the eastern high plains region near the foothills,
such as the Denver region, hydrology can vary significantly with the season. However, the lack of
predictability or consistency makes it very difficult to design for such variations. Nevertheless, whenever
possible, it best to initiate and complete all construction activities outside the period when large
rainstorms are most likely to occur, namely October through March.
The outlet from a sediment basin should be designed to empty its volume over an extended period of
time. This is needed to permit the smaller sediment particles to settle to the bottom of the basin.
The use of a floating skimmer outlet, such as the Faircloth Skimmer™ (see Figure C5-14), can increase
by a factor of ten or more the sediment capture efficiency of a basin. A floating outlet continually decants
cleanest water off the surface of the pond and releases clearer water than a riser pipe or plate. In areas
tributary to very sensitive waterways, the use of coagulants can further improve the clarity of the water
leaving the sediment pond.
Whenever possible, the owner, designer and contractor should take advantage of any detention basin
being built on a waterway for temporary sediment basin. Whenever the waterway is temporarily diverted
around the construction activities for such a facility in a waterway, the detention basin can provide and
ideal and a cost effective sediment entrapment facility. During construction it will need to be maintained
as any other sediment basin. Once the construction site is stabilized and before the temporary diversion
is removed, all the accumulated sediment needs to be removed and the basin configured to meet the
requirements of the final deign for the detention facility.
The inflow structures at the entrance of the basin should be designed to dissipate inflow energy through
the use of baffles to spread the flow and achieve uniform flow throughout the basin towards its outlet.
5.3.4 Design Procedure: Sediment Basin

The following steps outline the temporary sediment basin design procedure and criteria:
• Basin Storage Volume: Provide a storage volume of at least 2,700 cubic feet per acre of
drainage area.
• Dam Embankment: Embankment slopes should be no steeper than 3:1, preferably 4:1 or flatter.
• Emergency Spillway: Protect the embankments of a sedimentation basin from erosion and from
overtopping. Unless the basin is a planned permanent detention facility to be reclaimed at end of
construction, use of heavy polyvinyl membrane or properly bedded rock cover may be
appropriate and chosen by the engineer on the basis of how high, how massive and how steep
2007-10 C-49
the embankments are. If the sediment basin is part of a permanent detention basin, design and
construct the emergency spillway(s) as required for the permanent facility.
• Outlet Works: Design the outlet works in accordance with guidance provided in the Structural
BMPs chapter of this Manual for outlets serving Extended Detention Basins (EDB) and Retention
Ponds (RP) and in the Storage chapter of Volume 2 of this Manual for outlets serving Full
Spectrum Detention.
o If a perforated riser/plate is (8-inch or larger) similar to one illustrated in Figure C5-13 is used,
the perforations may be sized and designed using guidance provided in the STORAGE
chapter of Volume 2 of the Manual on Full Spectrum Detention FSD outlets to release the
design storage volume in approximately 72 hours. One difference between a standard outlet
used for water quality control as a post construction BMP and one used during construction
period is that the well-screen trash rack shown for an EDB or a FSD is not used in front of the
perforated plate, instead a 1½” to 3” gravel is piled against the plate or riser to screen out
floating trash. This gravel needs to be removed, cleaned and replaced on a regular basis to
remove the accumulated sediment within it and keeps the outlet functioning.
o If a floating skimmer is used, one similar to what is shown in Figure C5-14, design it using
manufacturer’s recommendations. When it is used, design it to release the design volume in
no less than 48 hours. Floating skimmer outlets offer the advantage of recovering the
sediment storage volume quicker and making it available for the next storm.
o Provide a stabilized emergency overflow spillway for rainstorms that exceed the capacity of
the sediment basin volume and its outlet.
• When a post-development basin with a permanent perforated plate as an outlet is used as a

sedimentation basin during the construction, do not install the trash rack called for in front of the
perforated plate during the construction period. Instead, pack uniformly sized 1½ - to 2-inch
gravel in front of the plate.
o This gravel will need to be cleaned out during the construction period as sediment
accumulates within it.
o The gravel pack will need to be removed and disposed of at the end of the project to reclaim
the basin as the permanent detention facility for the development project.
o The permanent trash rack will need to be installed after the basin has been reclaimed to its
final design dimensions and configuration and is stabilized with permanent seeding and
mulching.
C-50 2007-10
• The outlet pipe shall extend through the embankment at a minimum slope of 0.5 percent. A
riprap energy dissipating basin shall be provided at the outfall.
• Flow baffles may be needed within the sedimentation basin to extend the flow path between the
inflow point(s) and the outlet in order to improve sedimentation in the basin if the length-to-width
ratio of the basin is less than 2:1. (See Figure C5-15.)
• Maintenance: The basin shall be dredged out whenever the design storage volume becomes 1/3
filled with sediment.
5.4 Outlet Protection
To protect adjacent downstream properties from erosion due to concentrated flows, a stable outlet or
channel is necessary. If there is no stable outlet, one may have to be constructed. In lieu of constructing
a temporary or permanent outlet for a storm drainage system, temporary total retention of the runoff from
1½ times the 24-hour, 100-year storm runoff volume may be provided. Written approval by the local
municipality must be obtained for total retention of stormwater.
The outlets of slope drains, culverts, sediment traps and sediment basins must be protected from erosion
and scour. Outlet protection should be provided where the velocity of flow will exceed the maximum
permissible velocity of the material of the waterway into which discharge occurs. This may require the
use of a riprap apron at the outlet location and/or other measures to keep the waterway from eroding.
Design guidance for outlet protection is provided on Figure C5-16.
Check dams can be used along channels, ditches or swales and downstream of the outlets of temporary
slope drains, culverts, sediment traps and sediment basins. Check dams reduce the velocity of
concentrated flows and trap sediment. Although they do trap some sediment, they are not primary
sediment trapping facilities and serve as temporary flow velocity reduction structures to reduce erosion.
Check dams may be used under the following conditions:
• As temporary grade control facilities along waterways until final stabilization is established
• Along permanent swales that need protection prior to installation of a non-erodible lining
• Along temporary channels, ditches or swales that need protection where construction of a non-
erodible lining is not practicable.
Check dams should be constructed of four- (4-) to six- (6-) inch angular rock mixed with sand to a
maximum height of two- (2-) feet. The center of the top of the dam should be six- (6-) inches lower than
the sides to reduce the chances of the flows eroding around the structure. Where multiple check dams
are used, the top of the lower dam should be at the same topographical elevation as the toe of the upper
2007-10 C-51
dam. Cross-sections of a loose-rock check dam and the spacing between a series of check dams are
illustrated on Figure C5-17.
Sediment that collects behind a check dam shall be removed when the sediment reaches 50 percent of
the depth to the spillway crest. Check dams constructed in permanent swales should be removed when
perennial grasses have become established, or immediately prior to installation of a non-erodible lining.
All of the rock and accumulated sediment should be removed, and the area seeded and mulched, or
otherwise stabilized.
5.5 Inlet Protection
All storm sewer inlets which are made operable during construction and that are not connected to a storm
sewer discharging to a sedimentation basin must be protected to minimize the amount of sediment that
may enter them. The goal is to prevent sediment-laden runoff from entering the conveyance system
without first being filtered or otherwise treated to remove sediment. A number of alternate inlet protection
designs are available for use as shown on Figures C-5-18 through C5-23. However, if the flow entering
the inlet is being directed to a sedimentation basin, no such protection is needed, or even desired. In
those cases it is much more effective to drop out sediment at the sedimentation basin rather than creating
a condition where the stormwater cannot enter the inlet and continues to move downstream, eventually
overflowing into the waterway in an uncontrolled fashion.
Sediment accumulated upstream of all inlet protection devices has to be removed after every storm
event. In addition, all of these devices have to be removed after construction activities have been
completed, the roadways cleaned up and re-construction if needed.
Photograph 7. Example of an inlet protection installation in a sump. Note the wrapped

gravel and concrete blocks are somewhat lower than the top of curb. Also note the lack
of erosion protection on the left site, voiding any benefit the inlet protection may be
providing, letting the eroded sediment flow directly into the inlet. (Photo provided by
C-52 2007-10
Douglas County).
5.5.1 Inlets Located in a Sump

An important consideration when protecting an inlet is to have it continue functioning while reducing the
amount of sediment entering it. This can be accomplished for a curb opening or combination inlet in a
sump by setting the maximum height of the protective barrier lower than the top of the curb opening (see
Photograph 7 and Figure C5-19). This allows overflows to occur during larger rainfall events even though
sediment-laden runoff will enter the storm drainage system. If the inlet protection height is greater than
the curb elevation, particularly if the filter is clogged from previous sediment deposits, runoff will not enter
the inlet and can bypass it, possibly causing more downstream erosion and damage than would occur
without inlet protection. Area inlets located in a sump setting can be protected through the use of silt
fence (see Figure C5-19), concrete block and gravel filter (Figure C5-20), excavated sediment trap
(Figure C5-22), or “rock socks” imbedded in the adjacent soil and stacked around the area inlet.
5.5.2 Inlets Located Along a Slope

Along a sloping street it is best not to use details described above, since the flows in the gutter will merely
bypass the inlet. A more effective approach is to control sediment along a sloping street by trapping it
before it enters the inlet, which can be done fairly effectively, but not completely, through the use of gravel
“socks” (shown in Figure C5-23) placed upstream of the inlet.
2007-10 C-53
Figure C5-1—Temporary Vehicle Tracking Control
C-54 2007-10
From: Virginia soil and Water Conservation Commission, 1985
Figure C5-2—Temporary Vehicle Tracking Control With Wash Rack

(May Substitute Steel Cattle Guard for Concrete Rack)
2007-10 C-55
Figure C5-3—Temporary Diversion Dike & Ditch
C-56 2007-10
Figure C5-4—Rough-Cut Street Control
2007-10 C-57
Figure C5-5—Terracing
C-58 2007-10
Figure C5-6—Temporary Slope Drain
2007-10 C-59
Figure C5-7—Illustration of a Temporary Slope Drain Installation
C-60 2007-10
Figure C5-8—Sediment Control Log
2007-10 C-61
POINT TO TIE IN ADDITIONAL

INLET PROTECTION
B B
FLOW EROSION LOG

SEE ADDITIONAL DETAILS
FOR INLET PROTECTION
IN THIS LOCATION
POINT TO TIE IN ADDITIONAL FLOW
INLET PROTECTION
EROSION LOG STAKED
INTO FILL SLOPE
SECTION B-B
PLAN VIEW
CULVERT EROSION LOG INLET PROTECTION
EROSION LOGS SHALL

BE TIGHTLY ABUTTED
WITH NO GAPS (TYP.)
FLOW
FLOW
C
POINT A POINT A
FLOW FLOW REMOVE
SEDIMENT
WHEN
POINT B
1/2 FULL
FLOW
EROSION LOG
PLAN VIEW
PLAN VIEW
POINT A POINT A
FLOW FLOW
POINT B
INLET NOTE: LOCATE EROSION LOGS

AT THE OUTSIDE EDGE POINTS A SHALL BE HIGHER THAN POINT B.
OF THE CONCRETE APRON.
ELEVATION
SECTION C-C EROSION LOG DETAIL DITCH INSTALLATION
DROP INLET EROSION LOG FILTER
NOTE: EROSION LOGS SHALL BE TIGHTLY ABUTTED WITH NO GAPS.
Adapted From Colorado Department of Transportation (2007)
Figure C5-9—Sediment Control Log Application Examples
C-62 2007-10
Figure C5-10—Silt Fence Erosion Barrier
2007-10 C-63
Figure C5-11—Locating Erosion Silt Fence Residential on Residential Lot
C-64 2007-10
Figure C5-12—Standardized Temporary Sediment Basin

(Sheet 1 of 2)
2007-10 C-65
Figure C5-12—Standardized Temporary Sediment Basin

(Sheet 2 of 2)
C-66 2007-10
Figure C5-13—Standardized Temporary Sediment Trap
2007-10 C-67
Figure C5-14—Faircloth Skimmer Floating Outlet

(Figure courtesy of J. W. Faircloth & Sons, Inc., FairclothSkimmer.com)
C-68 2007-10
From: Environmental Protection Agency, 1976
Figure C5-15—Use of Baffles in a Sediment Basin to Prevent Short-circuiting by Inflow
2007-10 C-69
From: Major Drainage, Volume 2, Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual
Figure C5-16—Outlet Protection for a Culvert in a Channel
C-70 2007-10
Figure C5-17—Check Dam
2007-10 C-71
Figure C5-18—Gabion Reinforced Check Dam
C-72 2007-10
From: Washington State Department of Ecology, 1991
Figure C5-19—Area Inlet Protection using Silt Fencing
Note: The inlet protection illustrated above (Figure C5-19) has experienced significant problems in
maintaining its functions and tends to deteriorate prematurely. A much more successful area inlet
protection in a sump is illustrated in Figure C5-21 and is recommended over the one above.
2007-10 C-73
Figure C5-20—Curb Opening Inlet Gravel Filter in a Sump
C-74 2007-10
Figure C5-21—Area Inlet Protection in a Sump Using Reinforced Gravel Filter
Note: Wrap all the rock shown in above illustration (Figure C5-21) in chicken wire. Do not use loose rock
as it will migrate and enter the storm sewer inlet and sewer.
2007-10 C-75
From: Virginia Soil and Water Conservation Commission, 1985
Figure C5-22—Drop Inlet Protection–Excavated Drop Inlet Sediment Trap
C-76 2007-10
Figure C5-23—Inlet Protection on Slope–Curb Sock
2007-10 C-77
6.0 WATERWAY PROTECTION
At times construction activities must occur within or immediately adjacent to a drainageway, gulch,
stream, creek or river (jointly or separately referred to in this Manual as a “waterway”). Whenever this
occurs, bottom sediments and the soils adjacent to or/and within the waterway will be disturbed and
sediment movement will occur. The goal of these criteria is to minimize the movement of sediments
resulting from construction activities that take place immediately adjacent to and within any waterway.
When the work is immediately adjacent to a waterway, use of the erosion and sediment control practices
described earlier in this chapter should accomplish this goal. As a result, activities such as minimizing
disturbed areas adjacent to the waterways, use of surface roughening, properly mulching disturbed areas
as quickly as possible, silt fencing, temporary slope diversions to direct runoff to sediment basins before
runoff enters the waterway, and the use of sediment traps or basins are needed to accomplish the stated
goal. One item that may differ from ordinary construction is that the inspection and maintenance of the
erosion and sedimentation controls for work adjacent to waterways needs to be more aggressive.
When working within a waterway and when possible, temporary facilities should be installed to divert
flowing water around the construction activities taking place within a waterway. However, there are times
when practical and physical limits exist in the size of temporary diversions that can be installed within the
limited confines of urban waterway corridors, especially in retrofit construction activities and restorative
and rehabilitative maintenance. The other limitation is in the size of the runoff events and flows that can
be controlled during construction within waterway. It is important to also recognize that the installation of
erosion controls, such as temporary diversions, will cause some channel disturbance that cannot be
avoided, only minimized when the controls are actually being installed.
Some construction activities within a waterway are short lived, namely a few hours or days in duration,
and are minor in nature. These are typically associated with maintenance of utilities and stream
crossings and minor repairs to outfalls and eroded banks. In these cases, construction of temporary
diversion facilities can often cause more soil disturbance and sediment movement than the maintenance
activity itself. If it can be reasonably determined on the basis of areas and durations of disturbance that
any channel work is maintenance related, is of short duration, and will result in no more disturbance and
movement of sediment than would be done through installation of temporary diversions, it is reasonable
to exempt these from the requirement to construct temporary diversion facilities.
6.1 Working Within or Crossing a Waterway
Whenever work occurs within a waterway, the following should be considered, as appropriate:
1. Construction vehicles should be kept out of a waterway to the maximum extent practicable.
Where in-channel work is necessary, steps such as temporary channel diversions must be taken
to stabilize the work area during construction to control erosion. The channel banks and its bed,
C-78 2007-10
if it does not have perennial flowing water, must be restabilized by seeding and mulching
(including use of erosion control matting if required by the SWMP) as quickly as possible after in-
channel work is completed. If it is not practical to do final seeding due to site conditions at
completion of the final grading activities (e.g., frozen ground, prolonged wet weather, etc.), apply
mulch to the surface and then seed and final mulch when conditions permit.
2. Where an actively-flowing watercourse must be crossed regularly by construction vehicles, a

temporary crossing should be provided. Two primary methods are available: (1) a culvert
crossing and (2) a stream ford.
A permit is required for placement of fill in a waterway under Section 404 of the Clean Water Act.
The U.S. Army Corps of Engineers has issued nationwide general permit Number 14 for Minor
Road Crossing Fills. This is defined as placement of less than 200 cubic yards of fill material
below the plane of ordinary high water. The local office of the Corps should be contacted
concerning the requirements for obtaining a 404 permit. In addition, a permit from the U.S. Fish
and Wildlife Service may be needed if endangered species are of concern in the work area.
Typically the USFWS issues are addressed by a 404 permit if one is required. The municipality
of jurisdiction should also be consulted and can provide assistance. A further discussion on the
need for 404 permits is included in Section 2.1, MAJOR DRAINAGE, of the Manual. Other
permits to be obtained may include a Floodplain Development permit from the local jurisdiction.
A culvert crossing should be designed to pass at least the 2-year design flow (see Figure C6-1
for minimum recommended flow), accounting for the headwater and tailwater controls to meet its
design capacity. A typical temporary stream crossing is shown on Figure C6-2. For additional
discussion on design of box culverts and pipes, see Sections 3 and 4, MAJOR DRAINAGE, of
the Manual.
When a ford needs to and can be used, namely a culver is not practical or the best solution, it
should be lined with at least a 12-inch thick layer of Type VL (D50 = 6 inches) or Type L (D50 = 9
inches) riprap with void spaces filed with 1-1/2 inch diameter rock. A typical stream ford is shown
in Figures C6-3 and C6-4.
3. Use a temporary water diversion (Section 6.2) to bypass the work areas when work takes place
within a channel whenever possible. When a diversion is not possible due to site limitations (e.g.,
area confined by existing infrastructure such as streets, utilities, building, etc.), design other site-
specific methods to minimize erosion that may need to also consider the time of year construction
in the channel will actually take place.
4. Whenever possible, construction in a waterway should be sequenced to begin at the most

downstream point and work progressively upstream installing required channel and grade control
facilities.
2007-10 C-79
5. Complete work in small segments, exposing as little of the channel at a time as possible.
6. Where possible and feasible, it is best to perform all in-channel work between October 1 and
March 31. This is the period when the chances of flash floods and flows higher than the 2-year
flood peak flows are least likely.
6.2 Temporary Channel Diversions
Limiting construction activities within a waterway will significantly reduce erosion and sediment movement
downstream. Use of construction berms on large streams, such as the South Platte River, Sand Creek,
etc., to carry water around construction activities in a portion of the channel can be sufficient to
accomplish this. The berms should be tall enough to contain at least the 2-year flood peak without being
overtopped. Use of temporary diversion channels as illustrated in Figures C6-5 and C6-6 that divert the
entire waterway is appropriate for work in smaller waterways and for the construction of detention basins
and dams located on waterways. If, on the other hand, the work involves a very short duration project
(less than 4 week in total) during the Fall and Winter month, on waterways where only low base flows
need to be diverted, a sump pump with approximately 6” pipe to bypass the work area should be
sufficient for accomplishing this task.
Permanent drainage channels and any improvements within them have to be constructed as quickly as
possible to reduce the risk of exceeding capacities of temporary facilities during the flood-prone periods.
Whenever the temporary diversion is around the construction site of a detention basins or a dam and
whenever possible, the detention basin or the storage basin behind a dam should be considered for use
as a temporary sediment basin. During construction such basins will need to be maintained as any other
sediment basins and once the construction site is stabilized and before the temporary diversion is
removed, all the accumulated sediment will need to be removed and the basin and its outlet facilities will
need to be configured to meet the requirements of final deign plans and specifications.
6.2.1 Temporary Diversion Sizing

Figure C6-7 may be used to estimate the minimum design discharge for the sizing of temporary diversion
facilities such as pipes, ditches, lined channels, etc. The curves in this figure were developed using
annual peak flow data collected at 17 watersheds within the Urban Drainage and Flood Control District
(i.e., Denver, Colorado region). These data were collected over periods that ranged from six years to
eleven years and, as a result, provide sound statistical basis for it. Figure C6-7 provides a reasonable
estimate for the 2-year peak flow the construction site may experience along smaller waterways and for
judging the risk of the diversion’s capacity being exceeded. Its utility is limited to the maximum tributary
catchments of 16 square miles. Keep in mind the recommended design flows represent the minimums,
and it is the responsibility of the designer and the contractor to assess their risk of having the temporary
diversion being exceeded and to evaluate the damages such an event may cause to the project, adjacent
C-80 2007-10
properties and others. Consider larger capacities to protect a project if it will require a temporary
diversion for more than one year.
The data supporting Figure C6-7 were taken during the high flood potential period of April through
September. The values from Figure C6-7 represent approximately the 95th percentile event that can
occur, on the average, any given year, which means that it is likely that about 95 percent of runoff peaks
during an average year will be less than values from this chart. This is probably not the case in wetter
than average seasons. Each owner and engineer needs to assess the risks of having the temporary
diversion system capacity exceeded at the specific construction site. If its capacity is exceeded,
significant costs and damages can be incurred and sediment movement off the site will occur.
For larger waterways (e.g., South Platte River, Sand Creek, Bear Creek, etc.), including ones controlled
by flood control reservoirs (e.g. Chatfield Dam, Cherry Creek Dam, etc.), specific risk assessment may be
appropriate to insure that the work and the waterways are protected. It is also important to recognize that
larger floods can and do occur and the use of Figure C6-7 or other risk assessment does not insure that
the construction work will be 100 percent safe from high flows in the waterway. It merely provides a
reasonable minimum level of flow for the design of temporary diversion channels.
6.2.2 Stability Considerations

Temporary channels are not likely to be in service long enough to establish adequate vegetative lining.
Temporary channel diversions must be designed to be stable for the design flow with the channel shear
stress less than the critical tractive shear stress for the channel lining material. Unlined channels should
not be used unless it can be demonstrated that an unlined channel will not erode during the design flow.
Table C-6 gives allowable channel lining materials for a range of slope and flow depth. Table C-7 gives
Manning’s 'n' values for lining materials. Design procedures for temporary channels are described in
detail in the Hydraulic Engineering Circular No. 15 published by the Federal Highway Administration. The
methods presented in this section are greatly simplified and are based on information developed using
the most commonly used erosion control materials.
2007-10 C-81
Table C-6—Lining Materials for Temporary Channels
Maximum Flow Depth
Slope Range 1 ft 3 ft
0% - 0.005% Jute Netting Straw or Wood Fiber

Erosion Control Netting or Plastic
Membrane
0.005% - 1.0% Straw or Wood Fiber Straw or Wood Fiber

Erosion Control Netting or Plastic Erosion Control Netting
Membrane
1.0% - 2.0% Geotextile with Overlay of D50 = 4” Rock to Type VL Riprap

Erosion Control Mat
2.0% - 3.0% D50 = 3” Rock to Type VL Riprap Type L Riprap
3.0% - 4.0% Type VL Riprap Type M Riprap
See Table C-7 for channel design parameters.
6.2.3 Example: Temporary Diversion Design
A simplified method for designing a non-erosive channel is given as follows:
Step One: Using the tributary area A (in acres) determine peak flow according to Figure C6-7.
Step Two: Determine depth of flow, one (1) foot maximum for flows less than 20 cfs and three (3)
feet maximum for flows less than 100 cfs. (Flows in excess of 100 cfs should be designed in
accordance with the MAJOR DRAINAGE chapter of the Manual.)
Step Three: Determine channel slope based on existing and proposed site conditions.
Step Four: Pre-size the channel, determine maximum velocities and select lining material from
Table C-6.
Step Five: Determine the channel geometry and check the capacity using Manning's Equation and
the "n" value given in Table C-7. The steepest side slope allowable for a temporary channel is two
horizontal to one vertical (i.e., 2:1), unless vertical walls are installed using sheet piling, concrete or
stacked stone. It is suggested that the design for temporary bypass channels include an additional
0.5 foot of freeboard.
C-82 2007-10
Table C-7—Temporary Channel Design Criteria
Manning’s n for Manning’s n for Manning’s n for

Lining Material Flow Depth Flow Depth Flow Depth
0 ft to 1.0 ft 1.0 ft to 3.0 ft 3.0 ft to 5.0 ft
Plastic Membrane 0.011 0.010 0.009
Jute Netting 0.028 n/a n/a
Straw or Curled Wood 0.035 0.025 0.020

Mats
Riprap, Type VL 0.070 0.045 0.035
Riprap, Type L 0.100 0.070 0.040
Riprap, Type M 0.125 0.075 0.045
Notes: Maximum depth is 1 foot for flows less than 20 cfs.
For flows greater than 20 cfs, design temporary diversion channels in accordance with the MAJOR
DRAINAGE chapter of the Manual except the maximum side-slope steepness shall not exceed 2H:1V
unless structurally reinforced.
Determine the channel bottom width required using Manning’s Equation and its n value given above.
See Table MD-7 in the MAJOR DRAINAGE chapter of the Manual for riprap gradation.
Erosion protection should extend a minimum of 0.5 feet above the design water depth.
2007-10 C-83
Figure C6-1—Temporary Culvert Stream Crossing
C-84 2007-10
Figure C6-2—Graphical Illustration of a Temporary Bridge Stream Crossing
2007-10 C-85
Figure C6-3—Typical Ford-Type Stream Crossing
C-86 2007-10
From: North Carolina Sediment Control Commission, 1988
Figure C6-4—Graphical Illustration of a Ford-Type Stream Crossing
2007-10 C-87
Figure C6-5—Detail of a Temporary Diversion Channel
C-88 2007-10
Figure C6-6—Illustration of a Temporary Diversion Channel
2007-10 C-89
1000
900 Imp. = 60%
800
700 Imp. = 40%

FLOW (C FS )
600
43.3%
46.5%
500 Imp. = 30%
400
55.4% 33.3% Imp. = 20%
300
39.1%
40.2% 18.0%
46.1%
200 52.4%
10.1% 15.5%
100 60.9% 29.8%

26.8%
24.3%
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
TRIBUTARY AREA (SQUARE MILES)

Figure C6-7—Temporary Diversion Facility Sizing Nomograph Based on 2-year Peak Flows -
Denver Metropolitan and Adjacent Areas
NOTE: Figure C6-7 is based on statistical analysis of data taken over six years during April through
September period in the Denver metropolitan area. The values from this chart may by used for
catchments of up to 16 square miles through linear extrapolation.
This chart is not recommended for use in the sizing of temporary diversions on major perennial streams
(e.g., Clear Creek, Cherry Creek, Boulder Creek, etc.) and S. Platte River, for which a separate analysis
may be more appropriate to assess risks and evaluate the potential effects of water resources diversions,
reservoir releases and controls, upstream regional detention facilities, etc.
C-90 2007-10
7.0 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION – PLANNING AND IMPLEMENTATION
The construction of underground utility lines that are not exempted (see Section 1.3.4) will be subject to
the following criteria:
1. No more than 200 feet of trench are to be opened at one time (local criteria may be more
restrictive).
2. Where consistent with safety and space considerations, excavated material is to be placed on the
uphill side of trenches.
3. Trench dewatering devices must discharge in a manner that will not adversely affect flowing
streams, wetlands, drainage systems, or off-site property. Site dewatering permit requirements
should be discussed with the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment.
4. Provide storm sewer inlet protection (Section 5.5) whenever soil erosion from the excavated
material has the potential for entering the storm drainage system.
2007-10 C-91
8.0 DISPOSITION OF TEMPORARY MEASURES
All temporary erosion and sediment control measures shall be removed and disposed within 30 days after
final site stabilization is achieved, or after the temporary measures are no longer needed, whichever
occurs earliest, or as authorized by the municipality. For example, a site containing only one building will
have temporary erosion control measures removed after building construction is complete and final
landscaping is in place. Temporary erosion control measures may be removed from a commercial
construction site or residential subdivision only after streets are paved and all areas tributary to the
temporary controls have achieved final stabilization. It may be necessary to maintain some of the control
measures for an extended period of time, until the upstream areas have been fully stabilized and
vegetating has sufficiently matured to provide specified cover. Trapped sediment and disturbed soil
areas resulting from the disposal of temporary measures must be returned to final plan grades and
permanently stabilized to prevent further soil erosion.
The Professional Engineer preparing the SWMP shall submit, as part of the narrative report, a schedule
of removal dates for temporary control measures. The schedule should be consistent with key
construction phases such as street paving, final stabilization of disturbed areas, or installation of
structural stormwater controls.
Whenever permanent post-construction BMPs are used for sediment controls during construction, the
plan shall include the steps and actions needed to refurbish these facilities to a fully operational form as
post-construction BMPs. The final site work will not be accepted by the local jurisdiction until these BMPs
are in final and acceptable form as the original design calls for, which includes lines and grades, volumes,
outlet structures, trash racks, landscaping and anything else called for in the site development plans
prepared by the design engineer.
C-92 2007-10
9.0 MAINTENANCE
All temporary and permanent erosion and sediment control practices shall be maintained and repaired by
the owner during the construction phase as needed to assure continued performance of their intended
function. Straw bale barriers, silt fences, and inlet protection devices may require periodic replacement
and all sediment accumulated behind them must be removed and disposed of properly. Sediment basins
will require periodic sediment removal when the design storage level is no more than 1/3 filled with
sediment. All facilities must be inspected by the owner or owner's representative following each heavy
precipitation or snowmelt event that results in runoff.
The Professional Engineer preparing the erosion and sediment control plan shall submit, as part of the
narrative report, a schedule of planned maintenance activities for temporary and permanent erosion and
sediment control measures. The schedule should be consistent with the level of maintenance required
for the control measures proposed in the plan.
2007-10 C-93
DRAINAGE CRITERIA MANUAL (V. 3) BIBLIOGRAPHY
BIBLIOGRAPHY
ASCE and EPA. International Stormwater Best Management Practices (BMP) Database.
www.bmpdatabase.org. Sponsors of the Database include ASCE, EPA, Water Environment
Research Foundation (WERF), ASCE Environmental and Water Resources Institute (EWRI),
EPA, Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) and the American Public Works Association
(APWA). 2005.
Arapahoe County. Erosion and Sediment Control from Construction Activities. Prepared by Kiowa
Engineering Corporation for Arapahoe County, CO. January 1988.
Arendt, Randall G. Conservation Design for Subdivisions: A Practical Guide to Creating Open Space
Networks. Island Press. 1996.
Athayde, D. "Nationwide Urban Runoff Program." APWA Reporter. Chicago, IL. 1984.
Aurora Utilities Department. Rules and Regulations for Water Quality of Surface Drainage Best
Management Practices. Prepared by WRC Engineers, Inc. City of Aurora, Colorado. 1987.
Aurora, City of. Landscaping for Water Conservation in a Semi-Arid Environment. Prepared by Joanne
Rondon for the City of Aurora Utilities Department. Aurora, CO. 1980.
Aurora. Surface Drainage Water Quality Control Criteria. City of Aurora. July 1987.
Austin. Environmental Criteria Manual. City of Austin, Texas. Supplement. June 1999.
Austin. Environmental Criteria Manual. City of Austin, Texas. Supplement. February 1999.
Austin. Environmental Criteria Manual. City of Austin, Texas. 1988.
Barfield, B. J., R. C. Warner, and C. T. Haan. Applied Hydrology and Sedimentology for Disturbed Areas.
Oklahoma Technical Press. Stillwater, OK. 1981.
Beasley, R. P. Erosion and Sediment Pollution Control. The Iowa State University Press. Ames, IA.
1972.
Camp, Dresser and McKee Inc. An Assessment of Stormwater Management Programs. Florida
Department of Environmental Regulations. December 1985.
Chow, Ven Te. Open Channel Flow. McGraw-Hill. New York. 1959.
Colorado Department of Highways. Erosion Control Manual. State of Colorado. October 1978.
Colorado Stormwater Task Force-Technical Committee, Urbonas, B. R., Chairman. BMP Practices
10-2005 B-1
Assessment for the Development of Colorado's Stormwater Management Program. Final report
to Colorado Water Quality Control Division. Denver, CO. 1990.
Colt, Jon L. Erosion and Sediment Control Planning Manual. Adams County Planning Department.
Adams County, CO. December 1982.
Conservation Design for Stormwater Management: A Design Approach to Reduce Stormwater Impacts
from Land Development and Achieve Multiple Objectives Related to Land Use. Delaware
Department of Natural Resources and Environmental Control and the Environmental
Management Center of the Brandywine Conservancy. September 1997.
Controlling Urban Runoff: A Practical Manual for Planning and Designing Urban BMPs. Department of
Environmental Programs. Metropolitan Washington Council of Governments. July 1987.
Davies, P. E. "Toxicology and Chemistry in Urban Runoff." Urban Runoff Quality-Impacts and Quality
Enhancement Technology. Proceedings of an Engineering Foundation Conference. American
Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE). New York, NY. 1986.
Day, G. E., D. R. Smith, and J. Bowers. Runoff and Pollution Abatement Characteristics of Concrete Grid
Pavements. Bulletin 135. Virginia Water Resources Research Center. Blacksburg, VA. 1981.
Debo, T. N. "Detention Ordinances-Solving or Causing Problems." Stormwater Detention Facilities.

Proceedings of an Engineering Foundation Conference. ASCE. New York, NY. 1982.
Delaware, State of. Sediment and Stormwater Management Regulations. Department of Natural
Resources and Environmental Control. State of Delaware. Dover, DE. 1991.
Design of Roadside Drainage Channels. U.S. Department of Commerce. Bureau of Public Roads.
Washington, D.C. 1967.
Design of Stormwater Wetland Systems: Guidelines for Creating Diverse and Effective Stormwater
Wetland Systems in the Mid-Atlantic Region. Anacostia Restoration Team Department of
Environmental Programs. Metropolitan Washington Council of Governments. October 1992.
Douglas County. Douglas County Storm Drainage Design and Technical Criteria. Prepared by WRC
Engineering, Inc. for Douglas County, CO. January 1986.
DRCOG, Urban Runoff Quality in the Denver Region, Denver Regional Council of Governments, Denver,
CO. 1983.
DRCOG. Cost of Erosion Control Measures. Prepared by Wright-McLaughlin Engineers for the Denver
Regional Council of Governments. Denver, CO. May 1982.
DRCOG. Costs to Local Governments for Implementation of Erosion Control Programs. Prepared by
B-2 10-2005
Wright-McLaughlin Engineers for the Denver Regional Council of Governments. Denver, CO.
July 1982.
DRCOG. Factors Affecting the Cost of Erosion Control Planning. Prepared by Wright-McLaughlin
Engineers for the Denver Regional Council of Governments. Denver, CO. June 1982.
DRCOG. Managing Erosion and Sedimentation from Construction Activities. Denver Regional Council
of Governments. Denver, CO. April 1980.
Driscoll, E. D. "Performance of Detention Basins for Control of Urban Runoff." Proceedings, 1983
International Symposium on Urban Hydrology, Hydraulics and Sediment Control. University of
Kentucky. Lexington, KY. 1983.
Driver, N. and G. D. Tasker. Techniques for Estimation of Storm-Runoff Loads, Volumes, and Selected
Constituent Concentrations. United States Geological Survey (USGS) Open File Report 88-191.
U.S.G.S. Denver, CO. 1988.
Edwards, Cheri L. Sedimentation Basin Removal Efficiencies for Nitrogen and Phosphorus from
Simulated Agricultural Runoff. M.S. Thesis in Agricultural and Biological Engineering. The
Pennsylvania State University. December 1997.
Ellis, S. R. and M. H. Mustard. A Summary of Urban Runoff Studies in the Denver Metropolitan Area,
Colorado. USGS Water-Resource Investigation Report: 84-4072. 1985.
EPA. Erosion and Sediment Control for Surface Mining in the Eastern U.S., Volume 1-Planning. U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency. Washington D.C. October 1976.
EPA. Erosion and Sediment Control for Surface Mining in the Eastern U.S., Volume 2-Design. U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency. Washington, D.C. October 1976.
EPA. Handbook: Urban Runoff Pollution Prevention and Control Planning. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency. 625/R-93-004. September 1993.
EPA. Lake and Reservoir Restoration Guidance Manual. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
440/5-88-002. February 1988.
EPA. Methodology for Analysis of Detention Basins for Control of Urban Runoff Quality. U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency. EPAá440/5-87-001. Washington, D.C. September 1986.
EPA. Nonpoint Source Control Guidance: Construction Activities. Technical Guidance Memorandum No.
TECH-27. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Washington D.C. December 1976.
EPA. Processes, Procedures, and Methods to Control Pollution Resulting from All Construction Activity.
10-2005 B-3
EPA 430/9-73-007. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Washington, D.C. 1973.
EPA. Proposed Guidance Specifying Management Measures for Sources of Nonpoint Pollution in
Coastal Waters. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Water (WH-553). May 1991.
EPA. Results of the Nationwide Urban Runoff Program, Final Report. U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency. National Technical Information Service (NTIS) Access No.áPB84-18552. Washington,
D.C. 1983.
EPA. Storm Water Management For Industrial Activities: Developing Pollution Prevention Plans and
Best Management Practices, Summary Guidance. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office
of Water (EN-336). October 1992.
EPA. Storm Water Management For Industrial Activities: Developing Pollution Prevention Plans and
Best Management Practices. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Water (WH-547).
September 1992.
EPA. Urban Runoff and Stormwater Management Handbook. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
Chicago, Illinois. 1990.
EPA. Urban Targeting and BMP Selection. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Chicago, Illinois.
1990.
EPA. Wetland Identification and Delineation Manual. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Volumes I
and II. April 1988.
EPA and ASCE. Urban Stormwater BMP Performance Monitoring, A Guidance Manual for Meeting the
National Stormwater BMP Database Requirements. Prepared by GeoSyntec Consultants and
Urban Drainage and Flood Control District. Washington, DC: EPA. 2002.
Ewing, Reid. Best Development Practices: Doing the Right Thing and Making Money at the Same Time.
State of Florida. American Planning Association. 1996.
Fairfax County. Preliminary Design Manual for BMP Facilities. Department of Environmental
Management. Fairfax County, VA. 1980.
FHWA. Constituents of Highway Runoff Volume 1-5, State-of-the-Art Report, Final Report. Federal
Highway Administration. February 1981. (FHWA/RD-81/042).
FHWA. Design of Roadside Channels with Flexible Linings. Hydraulic Engineering Circular No. 15.
Prepared by Simons, Li & Associates, Inc. Fort Collins, CO. 1985.
B-4 10-2005
Fifield, J. S. Field Manual for Effective Sediment and Erosion Control Methods. HydroDynamics
Incorporated. June 1997.
Florida Concrete Products Association. Pervious Pavements Manual. Orlando, FL. 1988.
Fort Collins, City of. Erosion Control Reference Manual for Construction Sites. Prepared by
Hydrodynamics, Inc. for the City of Fort Collins, CO. January 1991.
Godi, Donald H. Guidelines for Development and Maintenance of Natural Vegetation. Prepared for the
Urban Drainage and Flood Control District. Denver, CO. July 1984.
Goforth, G. F., E. V. Diniz, and J. B. Rauhut. Stormwater Hydrological Characteristics of Porous and
Conventional Paving Systems. Report PB84-123 728. Municipal Environmental Research
Laboratory. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Cincinnati, OH. 1984.
Goldman, S. J., K. Jackson, and T. A. Bursztynsky. Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook.
McGraw-Hill Book Co. 1986.
Goldstein, A. L. "Utilization of Wetlands as BMPs for the Reduction of Nitrogen and Phosphorous in
Agricultural Runoff from South Florida Watershed." Annual Interchange Symposium on Lake and
Watershed Management. St. Louis, MO. 1988.
Grizzard, T. J., C. W. Randall, B. L. Weand, and K. L. Ellis. "Effectiveness of Extended Detention

Ponds." Urban Runoff Quality-Impact and Quality Enhancement Technology. Proceedings
Engineering Foundation Conference. ASCE. New York, NY. 1986.
Hamlin, H. and J. Bautista. On-the-spot Tests Check Gutter Capacity. The American City. April 1965.
Harper, H. H., M. P. Wanielista, D. M. Baker, B. M. Fries, and E. H. Livingston. "Treatment Efficiencies

for Residential Stormwater Runoff in a Hardwood Wetland." Proceedings, Annual International
Symposium on Lake and Watershed Management. St. Louis, MO. 1988.
Hartigan, J. P. "Basis for Design of Wet Detention Basin BMPs." Design of Urban Runoff Quality
Controls. Proceedings Engineering Foundation Conference. ASCE. New York, NY. 1989.
Heise, P. "Infiltration Systems." Processings, Seminar in Surface Water Technology. Fagernes. 1977.
(In Danish)
Higgins, M. J. The Use of Constructed Wetlands Systems for Treating Agricultural Runoff in a Northern
Maine Watershed. M.S. Thesis, Department of Civil Engineering, University of Maine. 1992.
Hoagland, W., J. Niemczynowicz, and T. Wahlman. "The Unit Superstructure During the Construction
Period." Science and Total Environment. 1987.
10-2005 B-5
Hubbard, T. P. and T. E. Sample. "Source Tracing of Toxicants in Storm Drains." Design of Urban
Runoff Quality Controls. Proceedings of an Engineering Foundation Conference. ASCE. New
York, NY. 1989.
IECA. IECA Soil Stabilization Series: Erosion Control Product Performance and Evaluation.
International Erosion Control Association. Volume 4. 1998.
IECA. IECA Soil Stabilization Series: Methods and Techniques for Stabilizing Channels and
Streambanks. International Erosion Control Association. Volume 1. 1998.
IECA. IECA Soil Stabilization Series: Methods and Techniques for Stabilizing Steep Slopes.
International Erosion Control Association. Volume 2. 1998.
IECA. IECA Soil Stabilization Series: Methods and Techniques for Stabilizing Gullies and Using Check
Dams. International Erosion Control Association. Volume 3. 1998.
IECA. IECA Soil Stabilization Series: Methods and Techniques for Using Bioengineering to Control
Erosion. International Erosion Control Association. Volume 5. 1998.
IECA. IECA Soil Stabilization Series: Strategies and Practices for Making Best Management Practices
Work. International Erosion Control Association. Volume 6. 1998.
Jarrett, A. R. Effectiveness of Undersized Sedimentation Basins: An Evaluation and Demonstration.

Final Completion Report for Research Project funded by Great Lakes Commission. Great Lakes
Basin Program for Soil Erosion and Sediment Control. September 1997.
Kedlec, R. H. and D. E. Hammer. "Wetland Utilization for Management of Community Wastewater."

Operations Summary, Houghton Lake Wetland Treatment Project. 1979. NTIS
No.áPB80-170061. February 1980.
Keep America Beautiful, Inc. Focus: Facts on Municipal Solid Waste. Stamford, CT. March 1990.
Keep America Beautiful, Inc. Overview: Solid Waste Disposal Alternatives. Stamford, CT. 1989.
Keep America Beautiful, Inc. Tips for Preventing Litter in Your Town. Stamford, CT. 1987.
Lakatos, D. F. and L. J. McNemer. "Wetlands and Stormwater Pollution Management." Wetland

Hydrology. Proceedings of the National Wetland Symposium. Chicago, IL. 1987.
Landry, M. S. and T. L. Thurow. Function and Design of Vegetation Filter Strips: An Annotated
Bibliography. Rangeland Ecology and Management Department Texas A&M University. Texas
State Soil and Water Conservation Board Bulletin No. 97-1. February 1997.
B-6 10-2005
Larimer County Department of Public Works. Garbage Cans and Garbage Can'ts. Fort Collins, CO.
1990.
Larimer County Department of Public Works. Using Household Chemicals Safely. Fort Collins, CO.
1990.
Lawrence, A. I. and A. G. Goyen. "Improving Urban Stormwater Quality-An Australian Strategy."

Proceedings, 4th International Conference on Urban Storm Drainage. Lusanne, Switzerland.
1987.
Livingston, E. H., et al. The Florida Development Manual: A Guide to Sound Land and Water
Management. Department of Environmental Regulation. Tallahassee, FL. June 1988.
Livingston, R. The Florida Development Manual: Storm Water Management Practices. Florida
Department of Environmental Regulation. June 1989.
Livingston. E. H. "Use of Wetlands for Urban Stormwater Management." Design of Urban Runoff
Quality Controls. Proceedings of an Engineering Foundation Conference. ASCE. New York,
NY. 1989.
Local Disposal of Storm Water-Design Manual. Swedish Association of Water and Sewage Works.
Publication VAV. 1983. (In Swedish)
Low-Impact Development: Design Manual. Department of Environmental Resources. Prince George’s

County, Maryland. November 1997.
Maryland State Highway Administration. Erosion and Sediment Control. Maryland Department of
Transportation. January 1989.
Maryland, State of. Guidelines for Construction of Wetland Stormwater Basins. Department of Natural
Resources. March 1987.
Meyer, L. D., C. B. Johnson, and G. R. Foster. "Stone and Woodchip Mulches for Erosion Control on
Construction Sites." Journal of Soil and Water Conservation. 27(6): 264-273. 1972.
Murray, J., S. D. Schmidt, and D. R. Spencer. "Nonpoint Pollution First Step in Control." Design of Urban
Runoff Quality Controls. Proceedings of an Engineering Foundation Conference. ASCE. New
York, NY. 1989.
Mustard, M. H., S. R. Ellis, and J. W. Gibbs. Runoff Characteristics and Washoff Loads from Rainfall:
Simulation Experiments on a Street Surface and a Native Pasture in the Denver Metropolitan
Area, Colorado. USGS open-file report: 84-820. 1985.
10-2005 B-7
Nichols, D. S. "Capacity of Natural Wetlands to Remove Nutrients from Wastewater." Journal, Water
Pollution Control Federation. 1983.
North Carolina Sedimentation Control Commission. Erosion and Sediment Control Planning and Design
Manual. State of North Carolina. November 1988.
NIPC. Reducing the Impacts of Urban Runoff: The Advantages of Alternative Site Design Approaches.
Northeastern Illinois Planning Commission. April 1997.
NVDPC. Washington Metropolitan Area Urban Runoff Demonstration Project. Northern Virginia District
Planning Commissions. Annapolis, MD. April 1983.
Orange County. Orange County Grading Manual. Department of Environmental Quality. Orange
County, CA. 1981.
Oscayan, P. "Design of Sediment Basins for Control of Construction Sites." Proceedings, National
Symposium on Urban Hydrology and Sediment Control. University of Kentucky. 1975.
Petit, Jack, Bassert, D. L., and Kollin, C. Building Greener Neighborhoods: Trees as Part of the Plan.
American Forests. National Association of Home Builders. 1995.
Pitt, Robert and Field, R. An Evaluation of Storm Drainage Inlet Devices for Stormwater Quality
Treatment. WEFTEC. Orlando. 1998.
Pratt, C. J. "Permeable Pavement for Stormwater Quality Enhancement." Urban Stormwater Quality
Enhancement. Proceedings of an Engineering Foundation Conference. ASCE. New York, NY.
1990.
Randall, C. W., K. Ellis, T. J. Grizzard, and W. R. Knocke. "Urban Runoff Pollutant Removal by
Sedimentation." Stormwater Detention Facilities. Proceedings of an Engineering Foundation
Conference. ASCE. New York, NY. 1982.
Roesner, L. A., B. R. Urbonas, and M. B. Sonnen. Editors. Design of Urban Runoff Quality Controls.
Proceedings of an Engineering Foundation Conference. ASCE. New York, NY. 1989.
Roesner, L. A., E. H. Burgess, and J. A. Aldrich. "The Hydrology of Urban Runoff Quality Management."
Proceedings Water Resources Planning and Management Conference. ASCE. New York, NY.
May 1991.
Santa Clara Valley Water District. Santa Clara Valley Nonpoint Source Study, Volume II: NPS Control
Program, Final Report. Prepared by Woodward-Clyde Consultants. Oakland, CA. December
1989.
B-8 10-2005
Schueler, T. R. and J. Galli. "The Environmental Impact of Stormwater Ponds." Proceedings of an 1991
Engineering Foundation Conference on Affects of Urban Runoff on Receiving Systems. ASCE.
New York, NY. 1992.
Schueler, Thomas R. Controlling Urban Runoff: A Practical Manual For Planning and Designing Urban
BMPs. Metropolitan Washington Council of Governments (MWCOG). July 1987.
Seattle. Water Quality Best Management Practices Manual for Commercial and Industrial Business.
Prepared for the City of Seattle. June 1989.
SEWRPC. Costs of Urban Non-Point Water Pollution Control Measures. Southeastern Wisconsin
Regional Planning Commission. June 1991.
Shaver, E. "Sand Filter Design for Water Quality Treatment." Proceedings of an 1991 Engineering
Foundation Conference on Affects of Urban Runoff Impacts in Receiving Systems, ASCE, New
York, NY. 1992.
Sheaffer, J. R., K. R. Wright, W. C. Taggart, and R. M. Wright. Urban Storm Drainage Management.
Marcel Dekker, Inc. 1982.
Smith, D. R. "Evaluation of Concrete Grid Pavements in United States." Proceedings of the Second
Conference on Concrete Block Paving. Delft, Australia. 1984.
Soil Conservation Service. A Guide for Erosion and Sediment Control in Urbanizing Areas of Colorado.
Interim Guide. U.S. Department of Agriculture. 1978.
Soil Conservation Service. Critical Area Planting. Standards and Specifications No. 342. U.S.
Department of Agriculture. 1981.
Soil Conservation Service. Erosion Factors and Hydrologic Groups for Soils of Colorado. U.S.
Department of Agriculture. 1983.
Soil Conservation Service. Erosion Handbook -- Wind and Water. U.S. Dept. of Agriculture. 1988.
Soil Conservation Service. Handbook of Channel Design for Soil and Water Conservation. U.S.
Department of Agriculture. Washington, D.C. March 1947. Revised June 1954.
Soil Conservation Service. Mulches for Critical Areas. Colorado Agronomy Note 47. U.S. Department of
Agriculture. 1973.
Soil Conservation Service. National Engineering Handbook - Hydraulics. U.S. Department of Agriculture.
10-2005 B-9
Soil Conservation Service. Plant Materials for Use on Surface-Mined Lands in Arid and Semiarid
Regions. U.S. Department of Agriculture. 1982.
Soil Conservation Service. Seeding Rates. Colorado Agronomy Note 61. U.S. Department of
Agriculture. 1981.
Stahre, P. and B. Urbonas. Stormwater Detention for Drainage, Water Quality, and CSO Management.
Prentice Hall. 1990.
Strecker, E. W., G. E. Palhegyi, and E. D. Driscoll. "The Use of Wetlands for Control of Urban Runoff
Pollution in the U.S.A." Proceedings, Fifth International Conference on Urban Storm Drainage.
Osaka, Japan. July 1990.
Torno, H. C., Editor. Urban Stormwater Quality Enhancement. Proceedings of an Engineering

Foundation Conference. ASCE. New York, NY. 1990.
Torno, H. C., J. Marsalek, and M. Desbores, Editors. Urban Runoff Pollution. Proceedings of NATO
Advanced Research Workshop. Springer-Verlag, Berlin, Germany. 1986.
Toubier, J. T. and R. Westmacott. Water Resources Protection Technology: A Handbook of Measures to

Protect Water Resources in Land Development. Prepared for the Urban Land Institute.
U. S. Congress. Resource Conservation and Recovery Act of 1976. Public Law 89-272. Codified as 40
CFR Parts 260-299. 1976.
UDFCD. Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual Volumes 1 & 2. Denver, CO. 2001. Subsequently
updated and maintained by the Urban Drainage and Flood Control District.
Urban Runoff Quality Management. WEF Manual of Practice No. 23. ASCE Manual and Report on
Engineering Practice No. 87. 1998.
Urbonas B. R. and P. Stahre. Stormwater: Best Management Practices and Detention for Drainage,
Water Quality and CSO Management. 2nd Edition of 1990 book by Stahre and Urbonas.
Prentice Hall. 1993.
Urbonas B., J. C. Y. Guo, and L. S. Tucker. "Sizing Capture Volume for Stormwater Quality
Enhancement." Flood Hazard News. Urban Drainage and Flood Control District. December
1989. Update to this article, December 1990.
Urbonas, B. R. and W. Ruzzo. Standardization of Detention Pond Design for Phosphorous Removal.
Urban Runoff Pollution. NATO ASI Series. Volume G10. Springer-Verlag, Berlin Heidelberg,
Germany. 1986.
B-10 10-2005
Urbonas, B. R. and L. A. Roesner, Editors. Urban Runoff Quality-Impact and Quality Enhancement
Technology. Proceedings of an Engineering Foundation Conference. ASCE. June 1986.
Urbonas, B. R. and L. A. Roesner. "Chapter 28-Hydrologic Design for Urban Drainage and Flood
Control." Handbook of Hydrology. D. R. Maidment, editor in chief McGraw Hill, New York, NY.
1992. (In press.)
Urbonas, B. R., C. Y. Guo, and L. S. Tucker. "Optimization of Stormwater Quality Capture Volume."
Urban Stormwater Quality Enhancement. Proceedings of an Engineering Foundation
USGS. Constituent-Load Changes in Urban Stormwater Runoff Routed Through a Detention Pond-
Wetland System in Central Florida. Water Resources Investigations 85-4310. U.S. Geological
Survey. Tallahassee, FL. 1986.
Veenhuis, J. E., J. H. Parish, and M. E. Jennings. "Monitoring and Design of Stormwater Control Basins."
Design of Urban Runoff Quality Controls. Proceedings of an Engineering Foundation
Virginia Division of Soil and Water Conservation. Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook.
State of Virginia. 1980.
Wanielista, M. P. "Best Management Practices Overview." Urban Runoff Quality-Impact and Quality
Enhancement Technology. Proceedings of an Engineering Foundation Conference. ASCE.
New York, NY. 1986.
Wanielista, M. P., Y. A. Yousef, H. H. Harper, and C. L. Cassagnol. "Detention with Effluent Filtration for
Stormwater Management." Proceedings of the 2nd International Conference on Urban Storm
Drainage. Urbana, IL. 1981.
Ward, A., T. Haan, and J. Tapp. The Deposits Sedimentation Pond Design Manual. Institute for Mining
and Mineral Resources. University of Kentucky. Lexington, KY. 1979.
Washington State Department of Ecology. Biofiltration Swale Performance, Recommendations, and

Design Considerations. Publication No. 657. Municipality of Metropolitan Seattle, Water
Pollution Control Department. October 1992.
Washington State Department of Ecology. Stormwater Management Manual for the Puget Sound Basin
⎯Public Review Draft. Publication No.á90-73. State of Washington. June 1991.
Water Resources Administration. Guidelines for Constructing Wetland Stormwater Basins. Maryland
Department of Natural Resources. Annapolis, MD. March 1987.
10-2005 B-11
Watson, T. J., S. C. Reed, R. C. Kadlec, R. L. Knight, and A. E. Whitehouse. "Performance Expectations

and Loading Rates for Constructed Wetlands." Constructed Wetlands for Wastewater Treatment:
Municipal, Industrial, and Agricultural. Lewis Publishers. Chelsea, Michigan. 1989.
Whalen, P. J. and M. G. Callum. An Assessment of Urban Land Use/Stormwater Runoff Quality

Relationships and Treatment Efficiencies of Selected Stormwater Management Systems. South
Florida Water Management District. Technical Publication 88-9. 1988.
Whipple, W. and J. V. Hunter. "Settleability of Urban Runoff Pollution." Journal Water Pollution Control
Federation. Volume 53. 1981.
Wiegand, C., T. Schueler, W. Chittenden, and D. Jellick. "Cost of Urban Quality Controls." Design of
Urban Runoff Quality Controls. Proceedings of an Engineering Foundation Conference. ASCE.
New York, NY. 1989.
Wulliman, J. T., M. Maxwell, W. E. Wenk, and B. Urbonas. "Multiple Treatment Systems for Phosphorous
Removal." Design of Urban Runoff Quality Controls. Proceedings of Engineering Foundation
Conference. Potosi, Missouri. July 1988.
B-12 10-2005
DRAINAGE CRITERIA MANUAL (V. 3) DESIGN FORMS
DESIGN FORMS
CONTENTS
Design Procedure Form Page
Grass Buffers (GB) ............................................................................................................. 2
Grass Swale (GS) ............................................................................................................... 3
Modular Block Porous Pavement (MBP) ............................................................................ 4
Cobble Block Porous Pavement (CBP) .............................................................................. 5
Reinforced Grass Porous Pavement (RGP) ....................................................................... 6
Porous Concrete Pavement (PCP) ..................................................................................... 7
Porous Gravel Pavement (PGP)......................................................................................... 7
Porous Gravel Pavement (PGP)......................................................................................... 8
Porous Pavement Detention (PPD) .................................................................................... 9
Porous Landscape Detention (PLD) ................................................................................. 10
Sand Filter Basin (SFB) .................................................................................................... 11
Extended Detention Basin (EDB)...................................................................................... 11
Extended Detention Basin (EDB)...................................................................................... 12
Constructed Wetland Basin (CWB) .................................................................................. 15
Retention Pond (RP) ......................................................................................................... 17
Retention Pond (RP) ......................................................................................................... 18
Constructed Wetland Channel (CWC).............................................................................. 21
10-2005 DF-1
DRAINAGE CRITERIA MANUAL (V. 3) NONSTRUCTURAL BMPS
Grass Buffers (GB)
Design Procedure Form: Grass Buffer (GB)
Designer:
Company:
Date:
Project:
Location:
1. 2-Year Design Discharge (Total) Q2 = cfs
2. Tributary Catchment Flow
A) Minimum Width (Normal to runoff flow path): LG = Q2 / 0.05 LG = feet
B) Tributary Area in Square Feet (At) At= square feet
3. Design Width Along Direction of Flow (Use A or B)
A) Sheet Flow Control Upstream

i) Length of Flow Path Over Upstream Impervious Surface LI = feet
ii) Design Width of Buffer: W G = 0.2 * LI (10' minimum) WG = feet
B) Concentrated (Non-Sheet) Flow Control Upstream

(requires a level spreader in step 5 below)
i) Length of Flow Level Spreader Lt = feet
ii) Design Width of Buffer: W G = 0.15 * At / Lt (10' minimum) WG = feet
4. Design Slope (not to exceed 4%) S= %
5. Flow Distribution (Check the type used or describe "Other") Slotted Curbing
Modular Block Porous Pavement
Note: If Method B was Used In Step 3, Level Spreader
Level Spreader Must Be Checked Here Other:
6. Vegetation (Check the type used or describe "Other") Irrigated Turf Grass
Non-Irrigated Turf Grass
Note: Irrigated Turf Grass Is Required in Semi-Arid Climates Other:
7. Outflow Collection (Check the type used or describe "Other") Grass Lined Swale
Street Gutter
Storm Sewer Inlet
Underdrain Used
Other:
Notes:
NS-2 10-2005
Grass Swale (GS)
Design Procedure Form: Grass Swale (GS) Sedimentation Facility
Designer:
Company:
Date:
Project:
Location:
1. 2-Year Design Discharge (Total) Q2 = cfs
2-Year Design Flow Velocity (V2, 1.0 fps Maximum) V2 = fps
2. Swale Geometry
A) Channel Side Slopes (Z, horizontal distance per unit vertical) Z= (horizontal/vertical)
B) 2-Year Design Flow Depth (D2, 1 foot maximum) D2 = feet
C) Bottom Width of Channel (B) B= feet
3. Longitudinal Slope
A) Froude Number (F, 0.50 maximum, reduce V2 until F < 0.50) F=
B) Design Slope (S, Based on Manning's n = , 0.01 Max, 0.002 Min.) S= feet/feet
C) Number of grade control structures required (number)
4. Vegetation (Check the type used or describe "Other") Dryland Grass

(Must use irrigated turf grass if S >0.005 in semi-arid areas of Colorado) Irrigated Turf Grass
Other:
5. Underdrain (Check the type used or describe "Other") Infiltration Trench w/ HDPE Perf. Underdrain
(3" - 4" dia. perforated HDPE underdrain in infiltration trench with Infiltration Trench with No Underdrain
non-woven geotextile fabric covering per USDCM Figure GS-1 is required Other:
for NRCS hydrologic soil groups C & D)
6. Outlet (Check the type used or describe "Other") Grated Inlet

Other:
Notes:
1) Aggregate for infiltration trench shall be CDOT Sect. 703, AASHTO #67.
2) Infiltration trench shall be minimum 9" wide by 9" deep.
3) Infiltration trench shall be covered with non-woven geotextile fabric meeting ASTM D4751 - AOS U.S. Std. Seive #40 to #60.
4) Geotextile shall extend 12" beyond trench top width on each side. See USDCM Figure GS-1.
10-2005 DF-3
Modular Block Porous Pavement (MBP)
Design Procedure Form: Modular Block Porous Pavement (MBP)
Designer:
Company:
Date:
Project:
Location:
1. Modular Block Properties: Block Name:
Manufacturer:
Note: Min. Open Surface Area = %

Blocks shall have no less than 20% open area - 40% preferred;
and shall be no less than 4" thick Minimum Thickness = inches
2. Porous Pavement Infill (Check the type or describe "Other"). ASTM C-33 Sand
Sandy Loam Sod
Other:
A) Sand (ASTM C-33) Leveling Course. 1" Layer ASTM C-33 Sand Leveling Course
Other:
B) Non-Woven Geotextile Fabric Between Sand & Gravel - Non-Woven Geotextile Fabric Per USDCM
Min. grab strength of 100 lbs., min. permitivity of 1.8 / sec
C) Gravel (AASHTO #3 Coarse Aggregate - CDOT Section 703).

8" minimum thickness required. Inches
Other:
6. Contained Cells:

Concrete Wall
B) Slope of the base course : SO = ft/ft
C) Distance between cutoffs (normal to flow, L): L= N/A feet, (LMAX =
7. Draining of modular block pavement (Check A, or B, or C, answer D) Infiltration to Subgrade with AOS U.S. Std. Seive #50 to #70
hardware store, restaurant, etc.?
Notes:
NS-4 10-2005
Cobble Block Porous Pavement (CBP)

Design Procedure Form: Cobble Block Porous Pavement (CBP)
Designer:
Company:
Date:
Project:
Location:
1. Cobble Block Properties: Block Name: 654
Manufacturer: 654
Note: Min. Open Surface Area = 20 %

Blocks shall have no less than 8% open area;
2. Porous Pavement Infill: AASHTO #8 Fractured Aggregate. AASHTO #8 Fractured Aggregate

Other:
3. Base Course: The following items are all required.
A) AASHTO #8 Fractured Aggregate Leveling Course. 1" to 2" Layer AASHTO #8 Fractured Aggregate Leveling Course
Other:
B) Non-Woven Geotextile Fabric Between Gravel & Bottom Sand Layer;

meeting ASTM D4751 - AOS U.S. Std. Seive #50 to #70. Non-Woven Geotextile Fabric Per USDCM
Min. grab strength of 100 lbs., min. permitivity of 1.8 / sec. Other:
C) Depth of Gravel Base Course (7" Minimum). Inches

(AASHTO #67 Coarse Aggregate - CDOT Section 703)
D) Depth of Bottom Sand (ASTM C-33) Layer (7" Minimum). Inches
Other
6. Contained Cells:

Concrete Wall
7. Draining of cobble block pavement (Check A, or B, or C, answer D) Infiltration to Subgrade with AOS U.S. Std. Seive #50 to #70
Notes:
10-2005 DF-5
Reinforced Grass Porous Pavement (RGP)
Design Procedure Form: Reinforced Grass Porous Pavement (RGP)
Designer:
Company:
Date:
Project:
Location:
1. Land Use Potential for Contamination Petroleum Products, Greases, or Chemicals May Be Present
Petroleum Products, Greases, or Chemicals Will Not Be Present
2. Reinforced Grass Pavement: Reinforced Grass Pavement.
A) Base Course: AASHTO #67 Coarse Aggregate - CDOT Section 703. Inches (10" Min.)
B) Non-Woven Geotextile Fabric Between Leveling Course & Gravel Non-Woven Geotextile Fabric Per USDCM
and Between Gravel & Bottom Sand Layer;
Min. grab strength of 100 lbs., min. permitivity of 1.8 / sec.
3. Aggregate Turf Pavement: Aggregate Turf Pavement.
A) AASHTO #67 Coarse Aggregate Mixed with Topsoil Inches (12" Min.)
Other:
Notes:
NS-6 10-2005
Porous Concrete Pavement (PCP)
Design Procedure Form: Porous Concrete Pavement (PCP)
Designer:
Company:
Date:
Project:
Location:
1. Porous Concrete Slab (5" Minimum Thickness): Inch Thickness Porous Concrete Slab (5" minimum.)
Mix of AASHTO #67 or #8 coarse aggregate and Portland cement #67 Coarse Aggregate
with no less than 6.5 sacks Portland cement per cubic yard. #8 Coarse Aggregate
2. Base Course:
A) Gravel (AASHTO #3 Coarse Aggregate - CDOT Section 703). Inches

8" minimum thickness required.
B) Bottom sand (ASTM C-33) layer. 7 Inches Minimum Thickness Inches

(Only required for installations with underdrains.) Other:
C) Non-woven geotextile fabric between #3 fractured aggregate Non-Woven Geotextile Fabric Per USDCM
course & bottom sand layer (if sand layer required); Other:
meeting ASTM D4751 - AOS U.S. Std. Seive #50 to #70.
4. Contained Cells: 16-mil. (min.) Impermeable Liner

Concrete Wall
A) Type: Other
5. Draining of porous concrete pavement (Check A, or B, or C, answer D) Infiltration to Subgrade with AOS U.S. Std. Seive #50 to #70
Non-Woven Geotextile Fabric: 5(C) checked and 5(D) = no
Based on answers to 56A through 5D, check the appropriate method:
Notes:
10-2005 DF-7
Porous Gravel Pavement (PGP)
Design Procedure Form: Porous Gravel Pavement (PGP)
Designer:
Company:
Date:
Project:
Location:
1. Porous Gravel Course: Inch

AASHTO #3 (CDOT Sect. 703) coarse aggregate (12" Minimum)
2. Bottom sand (ASTM C-33) layer (not required for sandy subgrade): Inch 7 Inches Min.
3. Non-woven geotextile fabric between Gravel Course and Bottom Sand Non-Woven Geotextile Fabric Per USDCM
Layer (if sand layer required), meeting ASTM D4751 - AOS U.S. Std. Other:
Seive #50 to #70. Min. grab strength 100 lbs., min. permitivity 1.8 / sec.
Other
6. Contained Cells:
16-mil. (min.) Impermeable Liner
A) Type: Concrete Wall
7. Draining of porous gravel pavement (Check A, or B, or C, answer D) Infiltration to Subgrade with AOS U.S. Std. Seive #50 to #70
Notes:
NS-8 10-2005
Porous Pavement Detention (PPD)
Design Procedure Form: Porous Pavement Detention (PPD)
Designer:
Company:
Date:
Project:
Location:

Ia = %
A) Tributary Area's Imperviousness Ratio (i = Ia / 100 ) i=
(Ia = 100% if all paved and roofed areas)
B) Contributing Watershed Area, Including PPD Area Area = square feet
C) Water Quality Capture Volume (WQCV) WQCV = watershed inches

3 2
(WQCV = 0.8 * (0.91 * I - 1.19 * I + 0.78 * I))
D) Design Volume: Vol = (WQCV / 12) * Area Vol = cubic feet
E) Porous Pavement Suface Elevation Elev. = feet
2. Required Minimum MBP Surface Area: A = Vol / 0.17 A= square feet
Overflow Inlet Elevation: Porous Pavement Elev. + 0.17 feet Elev. = feet
3. Modular Block Properties Block Name:
Note: Manufacturer:
Blocks shall have no less than 40% open area
and shall be no less than 4" thick Min. Open Surface Area = 50 %
Minimum Thickness = 4.00 inches
4. Porous Pavement Infill (Check the type used or describe "Other") ASTM C-33 Sand
Other:

1" Layer ASTM C-33 Sand
A) Sand (ASTM C-33) Other:
B) Non-Woven Geotextile Fabric Between Sand & Gravel - Non-Woven Geotextile Fabric Per USDCM
C) Gravel (AASHTO #4 Coarse Aggregate - CDOT Section 703), Inch Layer AASHTO #4 Coarse Aggregate (8" Min.)
8" Min. Base Course To Have All Fractured Faces. Other:
6. Perimeter Wall (required) Concrete inches thick
Other:
7. Draining of porous pavement (Check A, or B, or C, answer D) Infiltration to Subgrade with Non-Woven Geotextile
Based on answers to 7A through 7D, check the appropriate method Fabric: 7(C) checked and 7(D) = no
B) Check box if subgrade is silty or clayey sands Liner: 7(A) checked or 7(D) = yes
C) Check box if subgrade is well-draining soils
9. Overflow For Larger Storms Yes / No
Notes:
10-2005 DF-9
Porous Landscape Detention (PLD)
Design Procedure Form: Porous Landscape Detention (PLD)
Designer:
Company:
Date:
Project:
Location:

( Ia = 100% if all paved and roofed areas u/s of PLD) Ia = %
B) Contributing Watershed Area Including the PLD (Area) Area = square feet

3 2
(WQCV = 0.8 * (0.91 * I - 1.19 * I + 0.78 * I))
D) Design Volume: VolPLD = (WQCV / 12) * Area Vol = cubic feet
2. PLD Surface Area (APLD) and Average Depth (dav) APLD = square feet
(dav: = (Vol / APLD), Min=0.5', Max=1.0') dav = feet
3. Draining of PLD (Check A, or B, or C, answer D) Infiltration to Subgrade with Permeable

Based on answers to 3A through 3D, check the appropriate method Membrane: 3(C) checked and 3(E) = no

B) Check box if subgrade is silty or clayey sand Liner: 3(A) checked or 3(E) = yes
D) Check box if underdrains are not desirable or 3(B) checked and 3(E) = no
if underdrains are not feasible at this site.
16-Mil. Impermeable Membrane with No Underdrain:
E) Does tributary catchment contain land uses that may have 3(D) checked - Evapotranspiration only
4. Sand/Peat Mix and Gravel Subbase (See Figure PLD-1)
A) Heavy or Expansive Clay (NRCS Group D Soils) Present; 18" Minimum Depth Sand-Peat Mix with 8" Gravel Layer. 16-Mil.
Perforated HDPE Underdrain Used. Impermeable Liner and a 3" to 4" Perforated HDPE Underdrain.
B) Silty or Clayey Sand (NRCS Group C Soils) Present;

Perforated HDPE Underdrain Used. 18" Minimum Depth Sand-Peat Mix with 8" Gravel Layer and a
3" to 4" Perforated HDPE Underdrain w/ Non-Woven Pemeable Membrane.
C) No Potential For Contamination And Well-Draining 18" Minimum Depth Sand-Peat Mix with Non-Woven
(NRCS Group A or B Soils) Are Present; Underdrains Elliminated. Pemeable Membrane and No Underdrain (Direct Infiltration).
D) Underdrains Are Not Desirable Or Are Not Feasible At This Site. 18" Minimum Depth Sand-Peat Mix with An Additional 18"
Minimum Layer Sand-Peat Mix or Sand-Class 'A' Compost Bottom
Layer (Total Sand-Peat Depth of 36"). 16-Mil. Impermeable Liner Used.
E) Other: Other:
Notes:
NS-10 10-2005
Sand Filter Basin (SFB)
Design Procedure Form: Sand Filter Basin (SFB)
Designer:
Company:
Date:
Project:
Location:

Ia = 98.00 %

3 2
(WQCV =1.0 * (0.91 * I - 1.19 * I + 0.78 * I))
2. Minimum Filter Surface Area: As = (Vol / 3) * 43,560 As = 174 square feet, Minimum
Actual Filter Surface Area Used (Should not be less than minimum): As = 175 square feet,
Filter Surface Elevation 1100.00 feet
Average Side Slope of the Filter Basin (4:1 or flatter, zero for vertical walls) Z= 0.0 Using Vertical Walls
3. Estimate of Basin Depth (D), based on filter area As D= 3.0 feet
4. Outlet Works
A) Sand (ASTM C-33) Layer Thickness (18" min.) inches
B) Non-Woven Geotextile Fabric Between Sand & Gravel - meeting ASTM Non-Woven Geotextile Per USDCM Figure SFB-1
D4751 - AOS U.S. Std. Seive #50 to #70. Other:
Min. Grab Strength of 100 lbs., min. permitivity of 1.8 / sec.
C) Gravel (AASHTO or CDOT Section 703; #4, #57, or #67)

Thickness (8" min.) inches, No.
D) Overflow Elevation At Top of Design Volume 1103.00 feet

(Filter Surface Elev. + Estimate of Basin Depth (D))
4. Basin Inlet
A) Inlet Pipe with Impact Basin; OR Inlet Pipe with Impact Basin; OR
Inlet Channel with Grouted Sloping Boulder Drop; OR Inlet Channel with GSB Drop; OR
Inlet Channel with Concrete Baffle Chute Drop Inlet Channel with Baffle Chute Drop
B) Riprap Outlet Protection For Pipe or Channel Over Non-Woven Riprap Outlet Protection
Geotextile Fabric Wrapped to the Top of the Sand Layer Other:
5. Draining of Sand Filter Basin (Check A, or B, or C, answer D) Infiltration to Subgrade with Permeable
Based on answers to 5A through 5D, check the appropriate method Membrane: 5(C) checked and 5(D) = no

B) Check box if subgrade is silty or clayey sands Membrane: 5(A) checked or 5(D) = yes
C) Check box if subgrade is well-draining soils
6. Describe Provisions for Maintenance
Notes:
10-2005 DF-11
Extended Detention Basin (EDB)

Sheet 1 of 3
Designer:
Company:
Date:
Project:
Location:

Ia = %
B) Contributing Watershed Area (Area) Area = acres

3 2
(WQCV =1.0 * (0.91 * I - 1.19 * I + 0.78 * I))
D) Design Volume: Vol = (WQCV / 12) * Area * 1.2 Vol = acre-feet
2. Outlet Works
A) Outlet Type (Check One) Orifice Plate

Other:
B) Depth at Outlet Above Lowest Perforation (H) H= feet
C) Recommended Maximum Outlet Area per Row, (Ao) Ao = square inches
E) Number of Columns (nc, See Table 6a-1 For Maximum) nc = number
F) Actual Design Outlet Area per Row (Ao) Ao = square inches
G) Number of Rows (nr) nr = number
H) Total Outlet Area (Aot) Aot = square inches
3. Trash Rack
A) Needed Open Area: At = 0.5 * (Figure 7 Value) * Aot At = square inches

2" High Rectangular
Other:
i) Width of Trash Rack and Concrete Opening (W conc)

from Table 6a-1 W conc = inches
NS-12 10-2005

Sheet 2 of 3
Designer:
Company:
Date:
Project:
Location:
iii) Type of Screen (Based on Depth H), Describe if "Other" S.S. #93 VEE Wire (US Filter)
Other:
Other:

TM
Other:
TM
TM
vii) Minimum Bearing Bar Size (Klemp Series, Table 6b-2)
4. Detention Basin length to width ratio (L/W)
5 Pre-sedimentation Forebay Basin - Enter design values
A) Volume (3% to 5% of Design Volume from 1D) acre-feet
B) Surface Area acres
C) Connector Pipe Diameter inches

(Size to drain this volume in 5-minutes under inlet control)
D) Paved/Hard Bottom and Sides yes/no
10-2005 DF-13

Sheet 3 of 3
Designer:
Company:
Date:
Project:
Location:
6. Two-Stage Design - See Figure EDB-1
A) Top Stage (Depth DWQ = 2' Minimum) DWQ = feet

Top Stage Storage (no less than 94% of Design Volume) Storage= acre-feet
B) Bottom Stage Depth (DBS = 0.33' Minimum Below Trickle Channel Invert) DBS = feet
Bottom Stage Storage (no less than 0.5% of Design Volume from 1D) Storage= acre-feet
Storage = A * Depth Above WS To Bottom Of Top Stage Surf. Area= acres
C) Micro Pool (Minimum Depth = the Larger of Depth= feet

0.50 * Top Stage Depth or 2.5 Feet)
D) Total Volume: Voltot = Storage from 5A + 6A + 6B Voltot = acre-feet

(Must be greater than the Design Volume in 1D.)
7. Basin Side Slopes (Z, horizontal distance per unit vertical) Z= (horizontal/vertical)
Minimum Z = 4, Flatter Preferred
8. Dam Embankment Side Slopes (Z, horizontal distance) Z= (horizontal/vertical)

per unit vertical) Minimum Z = 3, Flatter Preferred
9. Vegetation (Check the method or describe "Other") Native Grass

Other:
Notes:
NS-14 10-2005
Constructed Wetland Basin (CWB)

Sheet 1 of 3
Designer:
Company:
Date:
Project:
Location:

Ia = %

3 2
(WQCV =0.9 * (0.91 * I - 1.19 * I + 0.78 * I))
D) Design Volume: Vol = (WQCV / 12) * Area Vol = acre-feet
2. Wetland Pond Volume, Depth, and Water Surface Area

Calculated Required Minimums:
A) Minimum Calculated Permanent Pool: VolPool > 0.75 * Vol VolPool > acre-feet
WS Area = acres, estimated
Enter the Actual Design Values:

VolPool > acre-feet, final design
WS Area = acres, final design
B) Forebay (Volume > 5% of Vol in 1D) Volume= acre-feet

Depth minimum = 2.5', maximum = 4.0' Depth= feet
Area= acres, % = %
C) Outlet Pool (minimum depth = 2.5', maximum = 4.0') Depth= feet

Outlet Pool Area, 6% of Design WS Area, minimum Area= acres, % = %
D) Wetland Zones with Emergent Vegetation ( 0.50' to 1.0' deep) Depth= feet
(Area = 50% to 70% of Design WS Area) Area= acres, % = %
E) Free Water Surface Areas ( 2' to 4' deep) Depth= feet

(Area = 30% to 50% of Design WS Area) Area= acres, % = %
%
3 Average Side Slope Above Water Surface (4:1 or flatter) Z=
Depth of WQCV Surcharge (above permanent pool, 2' max.) feet
4. Outlet Works

Other:
B) Depth at Outlet Above Lowest Perforation (H, 2' max.) H= feet
C) Required Maximum Outlet Area per Row, (Ao) Ao = square inches
D) Perforation Dimensions (Refer to Figure 5 in W.Q. Str. Det.):

10-2005 DF-15

Sheet 2 of 3
Designer:
Company:
Date:
Project:
Location:
E) Number of Columns (nc) nc = Number
G) Number of Rows (nr) nr = Number
5. Trash Rack

2" High Rectangular
Other:
i) Width of Trash Rack and Concrete Opening W conc = inches

Other:
Other:

TM
Other:
TM
NS-16 10-2005

Sheet 3 of 3
Designer:
Company:
Date:
Project:
Location:
TM
vii) Minimum Bearing Bar Size (Klemp Series, Table 6a-2)
6. Basin Use for Quantity Controls (Check one or describe if "Other") Detention within the facility
Detention upstream of the facility
Other:
8. Annual/Seasonal Water Balance (Qnet has to be positive) Qinflow acre-feet/year

Qevap acre-feet/year
Qseepage acre-feet/year
QE.T. acre-feet/year
Qnet acre-feet/year
9. Vegetation (Check the method being applied or describe) Native Grass

Irrigated Turf Grass Side Slopes
Wetland Species in Pool*
Other:
*Describe Species Density and Mixl.
Notes:
10-2005 DF-17
Retention Pond (RP)

(Sheet 1 of 3)
Designer:
Company:
Date:
Project:
Location:

Ia = %

3 2
(WQCV =0.8 * (0.91 * I - 1.19 * I + 0.78 * I))
D) Design Volume: Vol = (WQCV / 12) * Area Vol = acre-feet
2. Permanent Pool
A) Volume: Vol-Pool = (1.2 to 2.0) * Vol in 1D Vol-Pool = acre-feet
B) Average Depth Zone 1 = Littoral Zone - 0.5' to 1.0' deep Zone 1 = feet
Zone 2 = Deeper Zone - 4 feet to 8 feet deep Zone 2 = feet
C) Maximum Zone 2 Pool Depth (should not exceed 12 feet) Depth = feet
D) Permanent Pool Water Surface Area (Estimated Minimum)

(Zone 1 - Littoral Zone = 25% to 40% of the total surface area) %= acres =
(Zone 2 - Deeper Zone = 60% to 75% of the total surface area) %= acres =
Total Estimated Minimum Surface Area (ATotal) %= acres =
3. Annual/Seasonal Water Balance (Qnet has to be positive) Qinflow = acre-feet/year

Qevap = acre-feet/year
Qseepage = acre-feet/year
QE.T. = acre-feet/year
Qnet = acre-feet/year
4. Outlet Works

Other:
B) Depth of WQCV at Outlet Above Lowest Perforation (H) H= feet
C) Required Maximum Outlet Area per Row, (Ao) Ao = square inches
E) Number of Columns (nc) nc = Number
NS-18 10-2005

(Sheet 2 of 3)
Designer:
Company:
Date:
Project:
Location:
G) Number of Rows (nr) nr = Number
5. Trash Rack

2" High Rectangular
Other:
I) Width of Trash Rack and Concrete Opening W conc = inches

Other:
Other:

I) Width of Rectangular Opening form 4.D.ii. (W) W= inches
iii) Width of Trash Rack Opening (W opening) from Table 6b-1 W opening = inches
TM
Other:
TM
10-2005 DF-19

(Sheet 3 of 3)
Designer:
Company:
Date:
Project:
Location:
vii) Minimum Bearing Bar Size (KlempTM Series, Table 6a-2)

(Base on depth of WQCV surcharge)
7. Basin Side Slopes (Z:1)
A) Above the Permanent Pool: Z= (horizontal/vertical)
B) Below the Permanent Pool Z= Zone 1= (horizontal/vertical)

Z= Zone 2= (horizontal/vertical)
8. Dam Embankment Side Slopes Z= (horizontal/vertical)
9. Vegetation (Check the type used or describe if "Other")

Native Grass
Emergent Aquatic Species*
Other:
*Specify types and densities:
10. Forebay Storage (5% to 10% of Design Volume in 1D) Storage = acre-feet
11. Underdrains yes/no

Perforated underdrain pipe in 12" wide trench near edge of pond. Trench filled
around pipe with ASTM C-33 sand to within 2' of the permanent pool water surface.
Notes:
NS-20 10-2005
Constructed Wetland Channel (CWC)

Design Procedure Form: Constructed Wetlands Channel (CWC) - Sedimentation Facility
Designer:
Company:
Date:
Project:
Location:
1. Design Discharge (total) Q2 = cfs
Q100 = cfs
2. Channel Geometry (New Channel - No Wetland Veg. in Bottom)
A) Channel Side Slopes (Z:1, i.e., H/V) (Z > 2.5) Z= (horizontal/vertical)
B) 2-Year Design Flow Depth (D2) D2 = feet

Maximum D2 = 4', Minimum D2 = 2'
C) Idealized Depth of the channel (D2i) - 2-foot to 4-foot D2i = feet
C) Idealized Bottom width of the channel (B2i) - 8-foot minimum B2i = feet
D) Idealized Top width of the 2-Year Design Water Surface (W 2i) W 2i = feet
3. Longitudinal Slope (Based on a Manning's n = 0.035 S= feet/feet

for the idealized channel, velocity set to 2 fps, minimum slope = 0.001)
4. Final Channel Goemetry - Wetland Vegetation in Bottom)

(Based on a Manning's n = 0.08)
New 2-Yr. Mature 2-Yr.
A) Calculated channel geometry required to maintain Channel Channel
design discharge during a 2-year event with newly established and D2 = feet feet
mature vegetation. Calculated resulting flow velocities. B2 = feet feet
Maximum velocities should be kept to 2 fps or less for the 2-year flow. W2 = feet feet
Q2 = cfs cfs
B) Geometry and velocity to use for the 100-year discharge: V2 = fps fps
Suggest the design for a 100-year capacity channel follow the
guidance contained in the Major Drainage chapter of Volume 1
of the USDCM, or through the use of the UD-CHANNELS workbook.
5. Number of grade control structures required number
6. Vegetation (Check the type or describe "Other") Native Grass

Wetland Species
Other:
Notes:
10-2005 DF-21
DRAINAGE CRITERIA MANUAL (V. 3) APPENDIX B
APPENDIX
CONTENTS
Section Page
Appendix A - MODEL ORDINANCE FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL .................. AA-1
Appendix C - GLOSSARY OF TERMS .................................................................................................. AC-1
9-1-99 A-i
Appendix A - MODEL ORDINANCE FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
(Revised August 28, 1991)
AN ORDINANCE TO AMEND THE CODE OF THE CITY (COUNTY) OF _____________________ BY

ADDING A NEW CHAPTER RELATING TO EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL, AND ADOPTING
BY REFERENCE THE PUBLISHED CRITERIA FOR "EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL FOR
CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES" OF THE URBAN DRAINAGE AND FLOOD CONTROL DISTRICT, BY
ADDING A NEW CHAPTER, WHICH NEW CHAPTER SHALL BE DESIGNATED AS CHAPTER _____
OF TITLE _________ OF SAID CODE.
THE CITY (COUNTY) OF __________________________________, ORDAINS;
Title ________ of the Code of the City (County) of _________________________, is amended by

adding a new Chapter _______ - Grading and Soil Erosion Control, which shall read as follows:
CHAPTER NO.
GRADING AND SOIL EROSION CONTROL
Section 1. Legislative Findings. The City Council (Board of County Commissioners) hereby finds
that excessive quantities of soil are eroding from certain areas that are undergoing development for non-
agricultural uses such as housing and commercial developments, industrial areas, recreational facilities,
and roads. This erosion makes necessary costly repairs to gullies, washed out fills, roads and
embankments. The resulting sediment clogs storm sewers and road ditches, and leaves deposits of silt
in streams, lakes and reservoirs and is considered a significant water pollutant.
Section 2. Purposes. The purpose of this Ordinance (Resolution) is to prevent soil erosion and
sedimentation from leaving construction sites that occur from non-agricultural development and
construction activities within the City (County) by requiring proper provisions for water disposal and the
protection of soil surfaces during and after construction, in order to promote the safety, public health,
convenience and general welfare of the community (County).
9-1-99 AA-1
Any person who undertakes or is responsible for an undertaking which involves earth disturbance is
ultimately responsible to see that soil erosion and sedimentation as well as changed water flow
characteristics resulting therefrom are controlled to the extent necessary to avoid damage to property and
to avoid pollution of receiving waters. Nothing in this Ordinance (Resolution) shall be taken or construed
as lessening or modifying the ultimate responsibility of such persons. Nor do the permit requirements of
this Ordinance (Resolution) imply the assumption of any liability therefor on the part of the City (County).
The standards, criteria and requirements of this Ordinance (Resolution) are to be seen as minimum
standards which are not necessarily adequate to meet the highly variable conditions which must be
covered by effective control measures. Compliance with the requirements of this Ordinance (Resolution)
may not, therefore, of itself discharge such person's responsibility to provide effective control measures.
Section 3. Definitions. The following definitions shall apply in the interpretation and enforcement of
this Chapter.
(1) "Accelerated soil erosion" - The increased migration and movement of soils on all land
surfaces that occur as a result of man's activities.
(2) "Inspector" - The chief of the Department (insert department title) of the City
(County) or his duly authorized representative.
(3) "Certificate of completion" - A signed written statement by a licensed professional engineer

working for the applicant stating that all construction, all earth disturbance work, and all
permanent soil erosion control measures were inspected by the engineer and were installed
in strict compliance with the approved plans and specifications.
(4) "City (County) Engineer" - The City (County) Engineer of the City (County) or his duly
authorized representative.
(5) "Earth disturbance" - A man-made change in the natural cover or topography of land,
including all grading, cut and fill, building, paving and other activities, which may result in or
contribute to soil erosion or sedimentation of the waters of the State.
(6) "Erosion" - The process by which the ground surface is worn away by action of wind, water,
gravity, or a combination thereof.
(7) "Excavation" - Any act by which soil or rock is cut into, dug, quarried, uncovered, removed,
displaced, relocated, or stockpiled, and also included shall be the conditions resulting
therefrom.
AA-2 9-1-99
(8) "Filling" - Any act by which soil, rock or other construction materials are placed, stockpiled,
dumped, or a combination thereof onto the surface of the earth that may exposed to rain or
wind.
(9) "Flood plain" - An area adjacent to a watercourse, which area is subject to flooding as the
result of the occurrence of the 100-year flood and which area thus is so adverse to past,
current, or foreseeable construction or land use as to constitute a significant hazard to public
health and safety or property.
(10) "Grading" - Any stripping, excavating, filling, stockpiling, or any combination thereof, and
also included shall be the land in its excavated or filled condition.
(11) "Grading permit" - A permit issued to authorize work to be performed under this Ordinance.
(12) "Land use" - A use of land which may result in an earth disturbance, including, but not
limited to, subdivision, residential, commercial, industrial, recreational, or other development,
private and public highway, road and street construction, drainage construction, logging
operations, agricultural practices, and mining.
(13) "Limits of allowable erosion" - The natural or historic rate of soil loss.
(14) "Permanent soil erosion control measures" - Those control measures which are installed or
constructed to control soil erosion and which are maintained after completion of all grading
and earth disturbance activities.
(15) "Person" - A natural person, firm, corporation, partnership, or association.
(16) "Slope" - Slope of land measured in horizontal distance necessary for the land to fall or rise
one foot, expressed by horizontal distance in feet to one vertical foot.
(17) "Stripping" - Any activity which removes or significantly disturbs the vegetative surface cover
including clearing and grubbing operations.
(18) "Temporary soil erosion control measures" - Interim control measures which are installed or
constructed and maintained whenever grading or other earth disturbance is to occur for the
purpose of control soil erosion until permanent soil erosion control is effected.
Section 4. Compliance with Chapter Required for Site Plan or Plat Approval. No site plan, plot
plan, or plat shall be approved under Chapters ______ and ______ of this Code unless said site plan,
9-1-99 AA-3
plot plan, or plat shall include soil erosion and sediment control measures consistent with the
requirements of this Chapter and related land development regulations.
Section 5. Compliance with Chapter Required for Occupancy. No certificate of occupancy for
any building shall be issued under Chapter ______ of this Code unless the applicant for said Certificate of
Occupancy submits a Certificate of Completion to the City (County) and said Certificate of Completion is
approved by the City (County) Engineer.
Section 6. Adoption by reference of Erosion and Sediment Control Criteria. There is hereby
adopted by reference, as a part of this ordinance (resolution), as if fully set forth herein, that certain code
consisting of the published criteria of The Urban Drainage and Flood Control District, adopted by said
District on _______________ 1991, effective on the _______ day of _______________, 1991, known as
"Erosion and Sediment Control for Construction Activities," published on __________________, 1991,
which shall be known and referred to in this ordinance (resolution) by that name. The Inspector and the
City (County) Engineer shall be guided by and shall apply the criteria contained in said code in the
administration of this ordinance (resolution).
Section 7. Permits and Fees.
(1) Permit requirement. Except as exempted by sections of this ordinance (resolution), no

person shall do any grading, stripping, excavating, or filling, or undertake any earth
disturbance, unless a valid grading permit is issued by the City (County). Issuance by City
(County) does not exempt the parties from obtaining any permits required by State of
Colorado or the Federal Government.
(2) Permit application. A separate application shall be required for each grading permit, along
with plans, specifications, and timing schedules for all earth disturbance. The plans shall be
prepared under the supervision of a professional engineer licensed in the State of Colorado
experienced in soil erosion and sedimentation control methods and techniques.
(3) Application data required. The plans and specifications shall include an Erosion and
Sedimentation Control Plan and a Site Plan, which shall include and contain all of the
requirements of Section 1.4 of the "Erosion and Sediment Control for Construction
Activities".
(4) Fees. At the time of filing an application for a grading permit, a non-refundable filing fee of
____________________________________ Dollars $__________________ shall be paid
AA-4 9-1-99
to the City (County) Treasurer. An additional non-refundable fee of

____________________________ Dollars per acre of site area involved will be charged for
plan review and site inspections (with a minimum fee of _____________________________
Dollars $___________________ for such review and inspection).
Section 8. Bond Requirement. A grading permit shall not be issued unless the permittee shall first
post with the City (County) Engineer a bond executed by the landowner and a corporate surety with
authority to do business in this State as a surety, or at the option of the City (County) Engineer, secured
by a letter of credit drawn upon a bank doing business in Colorado, or having a Colorado correspondent
bank at which such letter of credit may be collected.
The bond and letter of credit, whichever is used, shall be in a form approved by the City (County)
Attorney, payable to the City (County), and in the amount of the estimated total cost of all temporary or
permanent soil erosion control measures. The total cost shall be estimated by the City (County) Engineer
or Building Inspector. The bond, and letter of credit, whichever is used, shall include penalty provisions
for failure to complete the work on schedule as specified on the grading permit. In lieu of a surety bond
or letter of credit, the applicant may file with the City (County) a cash bond or other instrument of credit
which gives the City (County) at least equal security protection, approved by the City (County) Attorney in
the amount equal to that which would be provided for in the surety bond or letter of credit.
Every bond and letter of credit or other instrument of credit shall include and every cash deposit shall
be made on the conditions that the permittee shall comply with all of the provisions of this ordinance
(resolution) and all of the terms and conditions of the grading permit, and shall complete all of the work
contemplated under the grading permit within the time limit specified in the grading permit, or if no time
limit is specified, within 180 days after the date of issuance of the grading permit.
A bond and surety thereon, or letter of credit, whichever is used, will be released to applicant four
hundred ten (410) days after the Certificate of Completion has been approved by the City (County)
Engineer, provided the City (County) Engineer, after field inspection, is satisfied the work completed
under the grading permit is functioning as represented by applicant, or in the event defects are identified
by the City (County) Engineer the applicant satisfactorily corrects all the defects identified in writing by the
City (County) Engineer and said corrections are accepted in writing by the City (County) Engineer.
Section 9. Extension of Time. If the permittee is unable to complete the work within the specified
time, at least ten (10) days prior to the expiration of the permit, a written request to the City (County)
Engineer for an extension of time shall be submitted setting forth the reasons for the requested extension.
In the event such an extension is warranted, the City (County) Engineer may grant additional time for the
9-1-99 AA-5
completion of the work, but no such extension shall release the owner or surety on the bond or the issuer
of the letter of credit, or the person furnishing the instrument of credit or cash bond.
Section 10. Failure to Complete the Work. In the event of failure to complete the work or failure to
comply with all the requirements, conditions, and terms of permit, the City (County) Engineer may order
such work as is necessary to eliminate any danger to persons or property and to leave the site in a safe
condition and he may authorize completion of all necessary temporary or permanent soil erosion control
measures. The permittee and the surety executing the bond or the issuer of the letter of credit, or person
issuing the instrument of credit or making the cash deposit shall continue to be firmly bound under a
continuing obligation for the payment of all necessary costs and expenses that may be incurred or
expended by the City (County) in causing any and all such work to be done. In the case of a cash
deposit, any unused portion thereof shall be refunded to the permittee.
Section 11. Denial of Permit. Grading permits shall not be issued where:
(1) The proposed work would cause hazards to the public safety and welfare; or
(2) The work as proposed by the applicant will damage any public or private property or
interfere with any existing drainage course in such a manner as to cause damage to any
adjacent property or result in the deposition of debris or sediment on any public way or into
any waterway or create an unreasonable hazard to persons or property; or
(3) The land area for which grading is proposed is subject to geological hazard to the extent that
no reasonable amount of corrective work can eliminate or sufficiently reduce settlement,
slope instability, or any other such hazard to persons or property; or
(4) The land area on which the grading is proposed may lie within the designated flood plain of
any stream or watercourse (not specifically designated by the City (County) as an area
subject to flood hazard), unless a hydrologic report, prepared by a professional engineer, is
submitted to certify that the proposed grading will have, in his professional opinion, no
detrimental influence on the public welfare or upon the total development of the watershed
and is also consistent with flood plain ordinances and Federal Emergency Management
Agency regulations.
Section 12. Modifications of Approved Plans. All proposed modifications of the approved grading
plan must be submitted along with all supporting materials, to the City (County) Engineer. No work in
connection with the proposed modifications shall be permitted without prior approval of the City (County)
AA-6 9-1-99
Engineer, approval for which may be issued if the applicant can demonstrate that the modifications will
provide soil erosion controls equivalent to, or better that the originally approved soil disturbance plans.
Section 13. Responsibility of Permittee. During grading operations the permittee shall be
responsible for:
(1) The prevention of damage to any public utilities or services within the limits or grading and
along any routes of travel of the equipment;
(2) The prevention of damage to adjacent property (No person shall grade on land so close to
the property line as to endanger any adjoining public street, sidewalk, alley, or any public or
private property without supporting and protecting such property from settling, cracking, or
other damage which might result).
(3) Carrying out the proposed work in accordance with the approved plans and in compliance
with all the requirements of the permit and this ordinance (resolution);
(4) The prompt removal of all soil, miscellaneous debris, materials applied, dumped, or
otherwise deposited on public streets, highways, sidewalks, or other public thoroughfares or
any other non-authorized offsite location, during transit to and from the construction site, or
otherwise, where such spillage constitutes a public nuisance, trespass or hazard in the
determination of the City (County) Engineer or a Court of competent jurisdiction.
Section 14. General Requirements.
(1) All temporary erosion control facilities and all permanent facilities intended to control erosion
of any earth disturbance operation shall be installed before any earth disturbance operations
take place.
(2) Any earth disturbances shall be conducted in such a manner so as to effectively reduce
accelerated soil erosion and resulting sedimentation, and should not exceed the erosion
expected to occur for the site in is totally undeveloped state.
(3) All persons engaged in earth disturbances shall design, implement, and maintain acceptable
soil erosion and sedimentation control measures, in conformance with the erosion control
technical standards adopted by the City.
9-1-99 AA-7
(4) All earth disturbances shall be designed, constructed and completed in such a manner so
that the exposed area of any disturbed land shall be limited to the shortest possible period of
time.
(5) Sediment cause by accelerated soil erosion shall be removed from runoff water before it
leaves the site of the earth disturbance.
(6) Any temporary or permanent facility designed and constructed for the conveyance of water
around, through, or from the earth disturbance area shall be designed to limit the water flow
to a non-erosive velocity.
(7) Temporary soil erosion control facilities shall be removed and earth disturbance areas
graded and stabilized with permanent soil erosion control measures pursuant to standards
and specifications prescribed in accordance with the provisions of the "Erosion and
Sediment Control for Construction Activities" and in accordance with the permanent erosion
control features shown on the soil stabilization plan approved by the City (County).
(8) Permanent soil erosion control measures for all slopes, channels, ditches, or any disturbed
land area shall be completed within fourteen (14) calendar days after final grading or the
final earth disturbance has been completed. When it is not possible to permanently stabilize
a disturbed area after an earth disturbance has been completed or where significant earth
disturbance activity ceases, temporary soil erosion control measures shall be implemented
within fourteen (14) calendar days. All temporary soil erosion control measures shall be
maintained until permanent soil erosion measures are implemented.
Section 15. Maintenance Requirements. Persons carrying out soil erosion and sediment control
measures under this Chapter, and all subsequent owners of property concerning which such measures
have been taken, shall maintain all permanent erosion control measures, retaining wall, structures,
plantings, and other protective devices. Should the applicant or any of the subsequent property owners
fail to adequately maintain the permanent erosion control facilities, retaining walls, structures, plantings,
and other protective devices, the City (County) reserves the authority, after properly notifying the owner of
needed maintenance and the owner failing to respond to the City's (County's) demand for such
maintenance to enter affected property, provide needed maintenance and to charge the owner for the
work performed by the City (County) or its contractors.
Section 16. Minimum Design Standards for Erosion and Sediment Control. All erosion control
plans and specifications including extensions of previously approved plans shall include provisions for
AA-8 9-1-99
erosion and sediment control in accordance with the "Erosion and Sediment Control for Construction
Activities". Erosion control plans are required on sites which are:
(1) Five (5) acres in size or larger, and all sites smaller than five (5) acres if they are a part of a
total development or subdivision that is larger than five (5) acres in size; or
(2) Any development containing 15 dwelling units; or
(3) Where physical features have a cumulative effect and will create erosion problems such as:
a. Steep slopes - 8-feet (horizontal) to 1-foot (vertical) or steeper, and
b. Significantly erodible soils - "K" in the universal soil loss equation is greater than or
equal to 0.25;
Section 17. Variances and Exceptions.
(1) No permits shall be required for the following:
(a) Agricultural use of land zoned agricultural.
(b) Grading or an excavation below finished grade for basements, footings, retaining
walls, or other structures on plots zoned R1 - R3 of less than five (5) acres in size
unless required otherwise under Section 16 above.
(c) A sidewalk or driveway authorized by a valid permit under Chapters ________ of

________.
(d) Gravel, sand, dirt or topsoil removal as authorized pursuant to approval of the
Colorado Mined Land Reclamation Board, provided said approval includes an erosion
plan that meets the minimums specified by this ordinance.
(e) Sites smaller than five (5) acres which are not a part of a larger development and
which constitute an infill of an established older development within the City.
(f) Where the City (County) Engineer certifies in writing that the planned work and the
final structures or topographical changes will not result in or contribute to soil erosion
or sedimentation and will not interfere with any existing drainage course in such a
manner as to cause damage to any adjacent property or result in the deposition of
9-1-99 AA-9
debris or sediment on any public way, will not present any hazard to any persons or
property and will have no detrimental influence upon the public welfare or upon the
total development of the watershed.
(g) Even though no permits are required under subsections (1)(a), (b), (c), (d), and (e) of
this section, those operations and construction activities which are exempted from
obtaining permits must comply with the rules and regulations concerning grading and
erosion specified in this Chapter, and shall provide appropriate controls to retain soil
erosion on the construction site.
(2) Where it is alleged that there is error or misinterpretation in any order, requirements,
decisions, grant or refusal made by the City (County) Engineer, the (chose as appropriate:
Deputy City Manager, Manager of Public Works, Public Works Director, County Manager,
Chairman of the Board of County Commissioners) may appoint a technical hearing board
that shall have the power to hear specific applications and all complaints regarding the
decisions of the City (County) Engineer and to determine if the decisions of the City (County)
Engineer were based on a misinterpretation of the requirements of this Chapter and
referenced criteria. Whenever it is determined that an interpretation error was made, the
case will be returned to City (County) Engineer, along with the board's recommendations on
how the Engineer's decision could be modified to made consistent with the provisions of this
Chapter.
* In absence of this, or another similar appeals process, resort directly to court would be the only
remedy, which may not be desired as a matter of policy. If such policy is desired, however, it is
suggested it be spelled out by substituting for (2) above, the following, or a similar subsection:
(2) Review of any order, requirement, decision, grant or refusal made by the City (County)
Engineer, and claimed to be illegal, shall be by the District Court pursuant to the Colorado
Rules of Civil Procedure.
Section 18. Inspection. The requirements of this Chapter shall be enforced by the City (County)
Engineer. The City (County) Engineer shall inspect the work and shall require the owner to obtain
services to provide adequate on-site inspection and/or compaction testing by a soil engineer, approved
by the City (County) Engineer, unless he determines that such inspection requirements may be waived
due to the non-hazardous nature of the grading.
AA-10 9-1-99
Upon satisfactory execution of all approved grading plans and other requirements, the City (County)
Engineer shall issue a certification of completion. If the City (County) Engineer finds any existing
conditions not as stated in any application, grading permit or approved plan, he may refuse to approve
further work until a revised grading plan which will conform to the existing condition has been prepared
and approved.
If the City (County) Engineer finds that eroded soils are leaving the construction site, the City
(County) Engineer may direct the owner(s) or his agents or his contractor on the site by written order to
install any and all erosion controls that are deemed necessary to prevent said soil erosion from migrating
off site. It shall be the duty of the owner(s) and his agent(s) and contractor(s) immediately to take all
necessary steps to comply with such order and otherwise to take all necessary steps to prevent such
migration off premises or entering receiving waters. Delivery of such a written order by the City (County)
Engineer to the owner's agent or contractor shall be deemed to be notice thereof to and binding upon the
owner.
Section 19. Enforcement. Notwithstanding the existence or pursuit of any other remedy, the City
(County) may maintain an action in its own name in any court of competent jurisdiction for an injunction or
other process against any person to restrain or prevent violations of this ordinance (resolution).
The City (County) Engineer, or his duly authorized agents, may enter at all reasonable times in, or upon,
any private or public property for the purpose of inspecting and investigating conditions and practices
which may be a violation of this ordinance (resolution).
9-1-99 AA-11
Appendix C - GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Erodibility - The susceptibility of a particular soil type to erosion by water or wind.
Erosion - The wearing away of the land surface by water, wind, ice or other geological agents, including
the detachment and movement of soil or rock fragments by water, wind, ice, or gravity.
Erosion Control Measures - Practices that slow or stop erosion.
Final Stabilization - Completion of all land disturbing activities, removal of all temporary sediment
controls, establishment of vegetative cover on exposed soil areas, and installation of permanent roads
and structural stormwater quality best management practices.
Land Disturbing Activity - Grading, cut, fill, stockpiling of dirt, removal of vegetation, or any other
alteration or disturbance of the ambient land surface.
Mapping Unit - Soil name and symbol given in the Soil Conservation Service Soil Survey for each soil
type. Most areas of the Denver metropolitan area are included in a soil survey. In older urban portions of
the City and County of Denver, soils analysis will be needed to determine soil types.
Permanent - Installation of land-surface cover, or erosion and sediment control measures, that will
remain in place for a long period of time.
Sedimentation - The process of solid materials, both inorganic (mineral) and organic, coming to rest on
the earth's surface either above or below sea level.
Sediment - Particulate solid material, either inorganic or organic, that will settle or be deposited in a
liquid under the force of gravity.
Sediment Barrier - Straw bale barrier (dike) or a silt fence.
Sediment Basin - A depression, either excavated or formed by a dam, that holds water and debris and
facilitates sedimentation of soil particles. Normally used for drainage areas equal to and greater than
1.0 acre.
Temporary - Installation of erosion or sediment control measures, either structural or nonstructural, that
are planned to be removed or inactivated after a period of time.
Viable Vegetative Cover - A measure of performance for establishment of appropriate vegetative cover
(or density) on sites planned for revegetation for the period of duration of successful growth as approved
by the city and county of jurisdiction.
9-1-99 AC-1

Storm Drainage Networks Design Vol

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Storm Drainage Networks Design Vol

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Storm Drainage Networks Design Vol

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Drainage Criteria Manual

Updated September 1, 1999

Urban Drainage and Flood Control District

Urban Drainage and Flood Control District

2002-06 Update to 1999 Edition

2004-12 Update to 1999 Edition

2005-10 Update to 1999 Edition

2007-01 Update to 1999 Edition

2008-04 Summary of Changes to Volume 3 and DISCLAIMER

June 2007 Corrections of the 1999 Edition’s 2007-01 Update

October 2007 Corrections of the 1999 Edition’s 2007-01 Update

November 2007 Corrections of the 1999 Edition’s 2007-01 Update

April 2008 Corrections of the 1999 Edition’s 2007-01 Update

Summary of Changes to Volume 3 and DISCLAIMER 2008-04

NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

2008-04 Summary of Changes to Volume 3 and DISCLAIMER

Summary of Changes to Volume 3 and DISCLAIMER 2008-04

Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual

POROUS PAVEMENT UPDATE AND DISCLAIMER

STORMWATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT

BMP PLANNING FOR NEW DEVELOPMENT AND

STRUCTURAL BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES

C-1 Rev. 10-2005

12.0 SPILL CONTAINMENT AND CONTROL

TYPICAL STRUCTURAL BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES

INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL BEST MANAGEMENT

NONSTRUCTURAL BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES

5.0 ILLICIT DISCHARGE CONTROLS

CONSTRUCTION BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES

C-3 Rev. 10-2005

Urban Drainage and Flood Control District

Others that Provided Review and Technical Input

Richard E. Brandt Town of Parker

Wright Water Engineers, Inc.

Stormwater Management Advisory Committee for Development of the Manual

Arapahoe County Cindy Thrush

City of Aurora Kevin Wegener

CH2M HILL James T. Wulliman

Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment Nathan Moore

Colorado Department of Transportation Garth Englund

City of Colorado Springs Bruce Thorson

Denver Wastewater Management Terry Baus

Home Builders Association of Metropolitan Denver Robert Koran

City of Lakewood Gerald Goldman

City of Littleton Bob Deeds

2.0 PURPOSE OF MANUAL

 An introduction to stormwater runoff quality management that includes an overview of water

 A collection of typical details for structural BMPs

3.0 OVERVIEW OF MANUAL

Table P-1—Relevant Chapters

Developers/Owners Construction, New Stormwater Quality Management, BMP Planning for

Figure P-1—User Flow Diagram of Municipal Stormwater Quality Management

BMP Planning for

Vehicle Slope Roads and Straw Bale

Figure P-2— Volume 3 BMP Planning Flow Diagram

4.0 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

> greater than

SCS Soil Conservation Service

Abbreviations of Structural BMPs in the Manual